Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards; Lamps, Reflective Devices, and Associated Equipment, 68234-68439 [07-5644]
Download as PDF
68234
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration
49 CFR Parts 564 and 571
Docket No. NHTSA–2007–28322
RIN 2127–AJ75
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards; Lamps, Reflective Devices,
and Associated Equipment
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA),
Department of Transportation.
ACTION: Final Rule.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
AGENCY:
SUMMARY: This document amends the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) No. 108 on lamps, reflective
devices, and associated equipment by
reorganizing the regulatory text so that
it provides a more straightforward and
logical presentation of the applicable
regulatory requirements, which includes
the agency’s interpretation of the
existing requirements. It also greatly
reduces the need to consult relevant
third-party standards by including
applicable requirements directly into
the main body of Standard No. 108,
rather than incorporating such
provisions by reference. This final rule
does not impose any new substantive
requirements on manufacturers.
In addition, this document amends 49
CFR Part 564, Replaceable Light Source
Information, by adding a newly created
Appendix C, which relocates figures
addressing sealed beam headlamps that
currently reside in FMVSS No. 108 and
a relevant Society of Automotive
Engineers (SAE) standard there. We
believe few lighting manufacturers still
produce sealed beam headlamps, and
their diminishing use is unlikely to
draw new manufacturers of this type of
lamp. Accordingly, we see no
drawbacks to consolidating the
information regarding sealed beam light
sources with other light source
information currently located in 49 CFR
Part 564.
DATES: Effective date: The final rule is
effective September 1, 2008 with
voluntary early compliance permitted
immediately. The incorporation by
reference of certain publications listed
in the rule is approved by the Director
of the Federal Register as of September
1, 2008. Petitions for reconsideration:
Petitions for reconsideration of this final
rule must be received not later than
January 18, 2008.
ADDRESSES: Any petitions for
reconsideration should refer to the
docket number of this document and be
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
submitted to: Administrator, National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Ground Floor, Docket Room
W12–140, Washington, DC 20590.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: For
technical issues: David Hines, Office of
Crash Avoidance Standards (NVS–121),
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, DC 20590
(Telephone: (202) 493–0245) (Fax: (202)
366–7002).
For legal issues: Ari Scott, Office of
the Chief Counsel (NCC–112), NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, DC 20590
(Telephone: (202) 366–2992) (Fax: (202)
366–3820).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Table of Contents
I. Executive Summary
II. Background
A. Historical Overview of the Standard
B. The Need for an Administrative Rewrite
of the Standard
III. December 2005 Notice of Proposed
Rulemaking (NPRM) and Public
Comments
A. The NPRM
B. Discussion of Public Comments
Received in Response to the NPRM and
Their Impact on the Final Rule
(a) 49 CFR Part 564
(b) 49 CFR Part 571.108
1. Administrative Considerations
2. Omissions, Typographical Errors, and
Inconsistent Language
3. Organization of the Standard
4. Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the
Rewrite
5. Suggestions Within the Scope of the
Rewrite
IV. The Final Rule
A. 49 CFR Part 564
B. 49 CFR Part 571.108
V. Benefits and Costs
VI. Rulemaking Analyses and Notices
Appendix A: FMVSS No. 108 Rewrite Cross
Reference
Appendix B: FMVSS No. 108 Rewrite Cross
Reference
Appendix C: List of figures
I. Executive Summary
After carefully considering the public
comments on its December 2005
proposal, the agency has decided to
adopt a final rule amending Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 108, Lamps, Reflective Devices, and
Associated Equipment, by reorganizing
the regulatory text and directly
importing requirements from applicable
SAE standards currently incorporated
by reference into the regulatory text. In
doing so, the agency has decided to
make some changes from the NPRM,
including modifying the organizational
structure of the standard, relocating test
procedures and performance
requirements from attached tables to the
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
regulatory text, and incorporating the
substance of several additional
interpretations into the standard. In
addition, three SAE documents that the
agency had proposed to continue to be
incorporated by reference in the NPRM
have now been integrated into the
regulatory text, and the location of
marking requirements within the
standard has been further consolidated.
Consistent with the NPRM, the final
rule also establishes an Appendix C in
49 CFR Part 564, Replaceable Light
Source Information, as a repository for
dimensional and electrical information
associated with standardized sealed
beam headlamps that currently resides
in figures in FMVSS No. 108.
These modifications have furthered
the objective of this rewrite by
increasing clarity as follows: (1) Making
requirements easier to find and
comprehend; (2) presenting
performance requirements and test
procedures together through the
inclusion of relevant provisions of thirdparty documents (previously
incorporated by reference) directly into
the regulatory text of the standard; and
(3) updating Standard No. 108 to reflect
significant letters of interpretation. The
rewrite of FMVSS No. 108 is considered
administrative in nature because the
standard’s existing requirements and
obligations are not being increased,
decreased, or substantively modified.
Accordingly, costs associated with
manufacturer compliance with Standard
No. 108 are not expected to change as
a result of this regulatory action.
II. Background
A. Historical Overview of the Standard
On December 30, 2005, NHTSA
published a notice of proposed
rulemaking 1 (NPRM) to amend FMVSS
No. 108, Lamps, Reflective Devices, and
Associated Equipment, by reorganizing
the regulatory text so that it provides a
more straight-forward and logical
presentation of the applicable regulatory
requirements. The initial version of
FMVSS No. 108 was adopted almost 40
years ago to increase motor vehicle
safety by establishing minimum
requirements for vehicle lighting,
reflective devices, and associated
equipment. In developing the standard,
NHTSA incorporated requirements from
a number of industry consensus
standards, in particular SAE standards.
At that time, motor vehicle technologies
were relatively simple, as compared to
today’s designs. For example, motor
vehicle headlighting systems were
limited to ones consisting of either two
1 70 Fr 77454, (Dec. 30, 2005) (Docket No.
NHTSA–2006–23634–3).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
7-inch or four 53⁄4-inch round sealed
beam units. During the ensuing years, a
number of rectangular sealed beam
units, replaceable bulb headlamps, and
integral beam headlamps were
developed, and FMVSS No. 108 was
amended to permit the use of these new
technologies. Later, the standard was
further amended to add requirements
for high-mounted stop lamps, side
marker lamps, and side reflex reflectors,
to allow for daytime running lamps, and
to address the conspicuity needs of large
vehicles.
However, such amendments were
made on an ad hoc basis, which, over
time, resulted in a patchwork
organization for FMVSS No. 108.
Furthermore, when regulated parties
had questions regarding how FMVSS
No. 108 should be interpreted (in many
instances due to rapid advances in
lighting technology not fully anticipated
or addressed by the existing regulatory
text), they submitted requests for
interpretation to the agency on specific
issues. Since its promulgation, a large
number of interpretation letters have
been issued pertaining to Standard No.
108. Thus, in its current state, FMVSS
No. 108 has requirements that are
located directly in its regulatory text,
located in referenced and subreferenced SAE standards, and
elaborated upon in various agency
interpretations. Since its inception,
NHTSA has never completed a thorough
reorganization of the entire standard.
FMVSS No. 108 are no longer readily
available from SAE International.
Throughout the past few decades,
SAE has published revised, successor
versions, with differing requirements,
for many of their standards incorporated
by reference into FMVSS No. 108. This
appears to sometimes cause confusion
on the part of regulated parties who,
mistakenly, may believe that the most
recent version of a SAE standard
represents the regulatory requirement.
The agency believes that interested
parties should have easy access to the
requirements of the standard, and,
therefore, we believe there is value in
publishing, without substantive change,
applicable requirements that are
currently contained in third-party
documents directly within FMVSS No.
108 itself. The same logic applies to our
decision to include the results of
relevant legal interpretations in the
standard. Furthermore, several
provisions currently in Standard No.
108 refer to regulatory inception dates
that are several years in the past, so the
agency is eliminating text citing such
past dates.
For these reasons, we believe that the
benefits of an administrative rewrite of
FMVSS No. 108 (e.g., making the
standard more navigable and thereby
facilitating compliance with existing
requirements) justify the necessary
commitment of agency resources to
accomplish this reorganization of the
standard.
B. The Need for an Administrative
Rewrite of the Standard
Due to concerns about being able to
locate requirements efficiently and the
apparent lack of clarity associated with
the standard (as demonstrated by an
abundance of letters of interpretation),
we decided to undertake an
administrative rewrite of FMVSS No.
108. The agency has also received
complaints that the current text of
FMVSS No. 108 sometimes results in
confusion, in part due to the way it is
organized. Regulated parties have stated
that the current organization of FMVSS
No. 108 makes it difficult for them, at
times, to be fully confident that all
applicable requirements have been
identified and satisfied prior to
certification to the standard. Also,
numerous interested parties have stated
that the large number of interpretations
that have been issued by the agency
regarding Standard No. 108 make it
difficult to locate and identify the
agency’s position on relevant issues. In
addition, regulated parties have
conveyed to the agency in recent years
that some of the older versions of SAE
standards incorporated by reference into
III. December 2005 Notice of Proposed
Rulemaking (NPRM) and Public
Comments
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
A. The NPRM
As noted above, NHTSA published a
NPRM on December 30, 2005 that
proposed to reorganize FMVSS No. 108
to improve the clarity of the standard’s
requirements, thereby increasing its
utility for interested parties. This
administrative rewrite attempted to
make the standard more understandable
by adopting a simplified numbering
scheme, to improve organization by
grouping related materials in a more
logical and consistent sequence, and to
reduce reliance on references to thirdparty documents. As proposed, the
reorganized standard progressed from
vehicle-level requirements to devicelevel requirements, beginning with the
most common requirements and then
proceeding to exceptions.
The NPRM also proposed to move
figures addressing sealed beam
headlamps that are currently included
in FMVSS No. 108 and SAE J1383
APR85, Performance Requirements for
Motor Vehicle Headlamps, into 49 CFR
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68235
Part 564, Replaceable Light Source
Information, as a newly created
Appendix C. This modification would
be consistent with the current practice
of placing replaceable light source
information in Part 564. The title of Part
564 would also be changed to
‘‘Replaceable Light Source and Sealed
Beam Headlamp Information’’ to reflect
the addition of the sealed beam
headlamp content.
Whereas Standard No. 108 currently
references approximately 35 different
SAE documents in nearly 100 separate
instances, the NPRM proposed reducing
that number to eight documents, which
were ones believed not to be routinely
used by regulated parties. Accordingly,
the NPRM proposed to incorporate the
content of these frequently used SAE
documents directly into the regulatory
text and/or attached tables of Standard
No. 108.
The proposed tables included Table I,
which listed the required lamps and
reflective devices for the various
vehicles regulated by FMVSS No. 108.
The number of required lamps and
reflective devices, their color, their
mounting locations and height above
the road surface, and their manner of
activation were included in Table I,
which resembles an expanded version
of Tables I through IV of the current
FMVSS No. 108. Table II detailed the
requirements for the four different kinds
of headlighting systems permitted by
the standard. Table III contained the
conspicuity system requirements for
large trucks and trailers, while Tables IV
and V provided, respectively, effective
projected luminous lens area
requirements and visibility
requirements. Tables VI through XII and
XIV through XX listed photometric
requirements for individual lamp types.
Table XIII detailed the target locations
for license plate lamp photometry. Table
XXI contained test procedures and
performance requirements for all
associated devices. Finally Tables XXII
and XXIII contained non-photometry
test procedures and performance
requirements for all lamps, reflective
devices, replaceable light sources, and
vehicle headlamp aiming devices
(VHAD). In addition, several new
figures were included to clarify some of
the application requirements for
conspicuity systems.
From a regulatory perspective, it was
the agency’s intention, as expressed in
the NPRM, that the administrative
rewrite of Standard No. 108 would
neither result in any current obligation
being diminished, nor any new
obligation being imposed. In other
words, the substantive requirements are
identical to those of the current version
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68236
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
of FMVSS No. 108, including
incorporated documents. Therefore, we
do not believe that vehicle
manufacturers and lighting
manufacturers would have to make any
changes to their respective products or
production processes if the NPRM were
made final.
B. Public Comments Received in
Response to the NPRM
The agency received comments from
twenty seven entities in response to the
December 2005 NPRM, which were
submitted by 11 lamp or lamp
component manufacturers, 11
manufacturer or user associations, three
vehicle manufacturers, and two test
organizations. Commenters included:
Truck Manufacturers Association
(TMA), Motorcycle Industry Council
(MIC), Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd.,
(Koito), Truck Trailer Manufacturers
Association (TTMA), General Electric
Automotive Plastics (GE-Plastics),
General Motors North America (GM),
Specialty Equipment Market
Association (SEMA), Grote Industries,
L.L.C., (Grote), Innovative Lighting, Inc.,
Calcoast Industrial Testing Laboratory
(Calcoast), General Electric Automotive
Lighting (GE), Valeo Sylvania, L.L.C.
(VS), Guide Corporation (Guide),
Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers
(AAM), 3M Traffic Safety Systems (3M),
Valeo Lighting Systems (Valeo),
Association of International Automobile
Manufacturers (AIAM), Owner-Operator
Independent Drivers Association, Inc.
(OOIDA), Atlas Material Testing
Solutions (Atlas), American Trucking
Associations, Inc. (ATA), Honda Motor
Co., LTD. (Honda), Nissan North
America, Inc., (Nissan), and Bayer
Material Science, L.L.C., (Bayer). A joint
response was submitted by Motor and
Equipment Manufacturers Association
(MEMA), Transportation Safety
Equipment Institute (TSEI), and Motor
Vehicle Lighting Council (MVLC),
collectively the Associations (ASSN).
Several months after the comment
closing date the Associations submitted
a supplementary response which was
shortly followed by another
supplementary response in conjunction
with the Alliance (AAM/ASSN). All
comments are available in Docket No.
NHTSA–2006–23634 and were
considered in the promulgation of this
final rule.
The comments about the NPRM that
we received can be divided into five
general categories: (1) Administrative
Considerations; (2) Omissions,
Typographical Errors, and Inconsistent
Language; (3) Organizational Structure;
(4) Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the
Rewrite; and (5) Suggestions Within the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Scope of the Rewrite. A summary and
analysis of each issue identified is
provided below.
(a) 49 CFR Part 564
We received only one substantive
comment concerning the relocation of
the sealed beam headlamp figures into
a new Appendix C of Part 564 of this
chapter. GE requested a separate NPRM
for this purpose and that the drawings
that would be filed in Appendix C be
made available for review.
We stated in Summary of the Proposal
in the NPRM that the final rule adopting
the rewrite of Standard No. 108 would
occur concurrently with the relocation
of the sealed beam figures to Appendix
C of Part 564. We also provided, at the
end of that notice, a complete listing of
all the figures and where they currently
reside in FMVSS No. 108 or SAE J1383
APR85, which is incorporated by
reference in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108, but we did not provide
specific regulatory text for Appendix C
in the NPRM. Ample opportunity was
provided for public comment on this
issue, so we are making the
establishment of Appendix C of Part 564
of this chapter and the transfer of the
identified figures to it part of the final
rule. We believe that it would be
beneficial for the sealed beam drawings
to be relocated as part of this
reorganization so that applicable
requirements are transferred in an
accurate manner, thereby satisfying our
commitment not to change the existing
requirements of the standard.
(b) 49 CFR 571.108
1. Administrative Considerations
Some of the comments submitted in
response to the NPRM were not focused
upon the substance of the rewrite but
rather addressed administrative
concerns. Several commenters requested
statements of reassurance that ‘‘* * *
no substantive changes from existing
requirements are intended,’’ and ‘‘* * *
state that the existing body of
interpretations is still valid.’’ On these
points, we clarify as follows. First we
reiterate that the administrative rewrite,
as expressed in this final rule, does not
make any substantive changes to the
requirements of Standard No. 108.
Furthermore, as stated in the NPRM, not
all letters of interpretation were
appropriate for inclusion into the
regulatory language of FMVSS No. 108.
Generally, we excluded those that we
concluded did not add value to the
regulatory text (i.e., one without broad
applicability). However, all existing
letters of interpretation, whether or not
they are specifically integrated into the
FMVSS No. 108 final rule, continue to
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
reflect the legal opinion of the agency
unless they contradict the explicit
regulatory text of the standard or were
overturned by subsequent
interpretations.
AAM suggested that the final rule
should not be mandatory until
September 1st, one year after
publication of the final rule. We have
established September 1, 2008 as the
mandatory compliance date, with
voluntary early compliance permitted
immediately.
ATA, OOIDA, and TMA all expressed
concern about conflicts between FMVSS
No. 108 and the regulations of the
Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Administration (FMCSA). They
requested that the rewrite of Standard
No. 108 reconcile the differences that
they perceive between it and the
regulations of the FMCSA.
The FMCSA has established
regulations for lamps, reflective devices,
and associated equipment for
commercial vehicles in use and a few
specialized types of commercial
vehicles at time of manufacture. The
FMCSA made significant revisions to its
lighting regulations in 2005 2 and some
substantive differences do exist between
the lighting regulations of FMCSA and
FMVSS No. 108. These differences may
have the potential to cause
manufacturers of lamps and reflective
devices that fall under the jurisdiction
of both NHTSA and FMCSA to pursue
different design, manufacturing, and
compliance processes to satisfy the
regulations of both agencies. However,
any attempt at reconciliation here
would be outside the scope of the
rewrite process. Recently, FMCSA
issued a final rule 3 in response to a
petition for reconsideration to its
August 15, 2005 final rule, which
resolved the differences between its
regulations and FMVSS No. 108, as
interpreted in NHTSA’s July 28, 2005
interpretation to Mr. Clarke,4
concerning auxiliary lamps mounted
near identification lamps. Regulated
parties may want to consider other
approaches to address the remaining
differences between FMVSS No. 108
and 49 CFR Part 393. One such
approach could be to submit rulemaking
petitions to NHTSA and FMSCA
requesting reconciliation of the
differences between FMVSS No. 108
and 49 CFR Part 393.
2 See 49 CFR Part 393, as last revised by 70 FR
48008 August 15, 2005 (Docket No. FMCSA–1997–
2364–44).
3 72 CFR 32011 (June 11, 2007) (Docket No.
FMCSA 1997–2364).
4 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/GF002551.3.html.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
2. Omissions, Typographical Errors, and
Inconsistent Language
Given the complexity of the proposed
administrative rewrite of FMVSS No.
108, including the integration of the
content of numerous SAE standards
incorporated by reference into the
regulatory text, some omissions and
typographical errors occurred.
Numerous comments were received
identifying such occurrences.
Accordingly, we have amended the
regulatory text of the final rule to correct
these errors.
Some respondents have noted
instances where they believe that the
language of the regulatory text used in
the NPRM was not faithful to the
language and intent of the current
FMVSS No. 108. In many instances
where a claim of unfaithful language
was made in the comments, the agency
adopted a conservative approach,
choosing to revise the language of the
NPRM back to that of the original
document in the final rule. Where such
a revision was not made, we have stated
our reasons for that decision.
Two rather significant instances
where contradictory regulatory language
was found to exist in the current version
of FMVSS No. 108 and its incorporated
documents are discussed here. One has
to do with the appropriate photometric
requirement for a specific type of
replaceable bulb headlamp and is
discussed in detail in the section
devoted to Table II. The other concerns
the ratio between the stop lamp function
and the taillamp function in a lamp
where those functions are optically
combined. The discussion related to
Table IX contains an explanation of this
issue. Both instances bolster our
opinion that regulatory requirements
should be stated once and only once in
a document. Neither instance has ever
generated an interpretation request nor
did many respondents raise either issue
in their comments to the docket. This
reinforces our belief that,
notwithstanding the existence of
ambiguous regulatory language, the
intent of the specific requirements was
clear.
Because correction of either situation
would require a substantive change to
FMVSS No. 108, we have decided to
refrain from addressing these examples
now. However, we may issue a notice of
correction in the near future to address
what we believe are mistakes and
inconsistencies that have existed for
some time in Standard No. 108.
3. Organization of the Standard
The organizational structure of the
reorganized standard, as presented in
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
the NPRM, progressed from vehiclelevel requirements to device-level
requirements, beginning with the most
common requirements and then
proceeding to exceptions. Requirements
in the rewrite of FMVSS No. 108 are
consolidated into dedicated paragraphs.
Paragraphs S1 through S4 were
organized in the same manner as the
present standard. S4, Definitions, was
expanded to incorporate relevant
definitions from the applicable SAE
standards previously incorporated as
part of Standard No. 108. Paragraph S5
addressed the remaining references to
SAE standards. Vehicle-level
requirements were located in paragraph
S6, including requirements by vehicle
type. Following that, requirements were
organized with dedicated sections for
each type of lamp and reflective device,
beginning with signal lamps, reflective
devices and associated equipment under
paragraph S7, and headlamp and
headlighting requirements under
paragraphs S8 through S13, and S16
through S18. Paragraph S14 addressed
aimability performance requirements,
while paragraph S15 contained
requirements for replaceable light
sources (including references to Part
564). In order to make requirements
easier to find, a Table of Contents was
added as an appendix to the standard.
The most detailed comments about
the organizational structure of the
standard were those in the
supplementary response from the
ASSN/AAM, which recommended a
significantly different organizational
structure that would divide the content
of FMVSS No. 108 into four sections.
Under the ASSN/AAM structure, the
first section would contain general and
specific lamp requirements, and the
second section would consist of Tables
I, II, III, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI, XII, XIV,
XV, XVI (split into three separate
tables), XVII, XVIII, XIX, and XX.
However, there would be some format
changes to lamp photometry tables and
the addition of graphical illustrations of
photometric test points. These
commenters similarly suggested three
new tables that would graphically
illustrate the required photometric test
points, lines, and areas associated with
upper beam headlamps, lower beam
mechanically aimed headlamps, and
lower beam visually/optically aimed
headlamps. The third section would
contain all the figures of the NPRM as
well as Table XIII, License Plate Lamp
Target Locations, redesigned as Figure
19. The fourth section would be
subdivided into five annexes which
would contain photometric test
procedures and the physical test
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68237
procedures of Tables XXI, XXII, and
XXIII.
ASSN/AAM also suggested dividing
Table I into five separate tables: one for
vehicles less than 80 in (2032 mm) in
overall width, another for vehicles 80 in
(2032 mm) or more in overall width, one
for trailers, one for motorcycles, and one
for school buses. The activation
requirements would be removed from
these tables and located in a new
paragraph titled ‘‘Electrical.’’ Tables IV
and V covering projected luminous lens
area and visibility would be eliminated
and their requirements dispersed to the
applicable individual lamp sections.
These individual lamp sections would
have a common format divided into 14
subsections representing specific
requirements. An additional table
would be created that would contain all
marking requirements.
In consideration of the comments
submitted by ASSN/AAM, we have
decided to make significant changes to
the structure of the standard presented
in the NPRM. These structural changes
include: (1) Relocating test procedures
and performance requirements that were
primarily contained in paragraph S6.8
and Tables XXI, XXII, and XXIII of the
proposal, to paragraph S14 of the final
rule; (2) expanding and standardizing
the presentation of requirements in
individual lamp and reflective device
sections of the final rule beyond that of
the proposal; (3) including the
provisions from additional SAE
documents, incorporated by reference in
the proposal, in the regulatory text of
the final rule; and (4) further
consolidating the location of marking
requirements in the final rule beyond
that of the proposal.
We believe there is value in adopting
a structure in the final rule that is easy
for regulated parties to navigate. There
were some aspects of the ASSN/AAM
recommended structure that we did not
adopt due to our effort to avoid
redundancies, streamline the standard,
and avoid adding new material not
currently contained in Standard No.
108, including graphs, which could
cause confusion. We believe that our
approach in modifying the structure of
the NPRM will collectively provide the
most value to all end-users.
We have decided to adopt the ASSN/
AAM recommendation regarding
reorganization of the layout of several
photometry requirement tables for
reasons that follow. Standard No. 108
provides two alternative methods for
demonstrating the photometric
compliance of turn signal lamps,
taillamps, stop lamps, backup lamps,
parking lamps, and high-mounted stop
lamps. For these lamps compliance can
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68238
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
be demonstrated by achieving a
minimum photometric intensity at each
of 18 to 22 discrete test points
distributed within a pattern about 20°
high and 40° wide centered about the
H–V axis.5 Alternatively, FMVSS No.
108 also permits these specific lamps to
demonstrate compliance by meeting a
minimum photometric intensity for
groups of these test points. Individual
test points in proximity to each other
are organized into groups consisting of
from two to six points. The minimum
photometric intensity requirement of
each group is approximately (but not
always exactly) the arithmetic sum of
the minimum photometric intensities of
all included points. This allows a lamp
where one or more test point(s) in a
group do not meet their individual
minimum values to be compliant
provided the remaining test points in
the group exceed their minimum values
by enough to allow the group total to
exceed the group requirement.6 Turn
signal lamps, taillamps, stop lamps, and
parking lamps have five groups of test
points; while backup lamps have six
groups, and high-mounted stop lamps
have four groups.
Tables VI, VII, VIII, IX, XII, XV, which
detail photometry requirements for
those lamps permitted to use both the
individual test point and the grouped
test point compliance methods, are
formatted such that test points are
organized in group order. Progressing
from left to right horizontally, each test
point group is identified by number,
and then the individual test points
included within that group are
identified by their vertical and
horizontal positions. Next, the
minimum photometric intensity for
each individual test point is shown, and
finally, at the right end, the group
minimum photometric intensity is
shown.
In contrast, the photometry
requirements tables suggested by the
ASSN/AAM, and endorsed by Calcoast,
organize the lamp test points in a
vertical, then horizontal, manner that
requires the user to search for each
point to include in a group and then
consult a sub-table to find out the
minimum photometric requirement for
that group. We find this suggested
approach unnecessarily complex and
prone to increasing, not decreasing, the
possibility of error in determining
photometric requirements. Therefore,
5 The pattern is wider for backup lamps and
tighter for high mounted stop lamps.
6 No individual test point photometric intensity
can fall below 60% of the point requirement when
the group photometric method is used. In addition,
photometric values between adjacent test points are
regulated.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
we have decided to retain the format of
the photometric tables as presented in
the NPRM with one simplification,
which was to locate the horizontal and
vertical test point positions in the same
relative positions in each table.
Calcoast suggested, and we agree, that
the horizontal test point positions and
the vertical test point positions should
always appear in the same columns. In
our earlier proposal, this was not the
case, and we have made modifications
consistent with Calcoast’s suggestion.
The final rule designates the horizontal
test point positions in a column to the
left of a column that designates the
corresponding vertical test point
positions.
Nissan suggested that those lamps
that are permitted to demonstrate
photometric compliance by either the
individual test point method or the
grouped test point method have the
required photometric intensity values
for each individual test point reduced to
60 percent of the current requirement
and only allow use of the grouped test
point method. We did not adopt this
suggestion because it would have
reduced the number of compliance
methods available to manufacturers, a
substantive change beyond the scope of
this administrative rewrite.
The original response from the ASSN,
as well as the comments from Guide,
suggested abandoning Tables XVIII and
XIX and incorporating headlamp
photometry requirements in a series of
tables similar to the current FMVSS No.
108. We were not persuaded that more
headlamp photometric tables would add
value to the standard. Upper beam
headlamp requirements are not related
to whether a headlamp is mechanically
or visually/optically aimed and six
beam patterns adequately cover all
headlamps. Many photometric test
points are common to all lower beam
headlamps. Tables XVIII and XIX
present all required beam patterns
(except for certain motorcycle
headlamps) in a clear and concise
format. Table II directs the user to the
appropriate beam pattern in Tables
XVIII and XIX. We retained this format
for headlamp photometry requirements
in the final rule.
Several commenters mentioned
inconsistent use of a ‘‘no requirement’’
indicator where a test point appears in
a photometry requirements table but
there is no value required at that point.
Our proposal used both a blank space
and a N.R. notation. In the final rule, we
have adopted a consistent indicator that
there is no requirement for a test point.
A dashed line (-) is used exclusively for
this purpose in photometry
requirements tables.
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Commenters generally favored the use
of tables in the NPRM for presenting
performance requirements. However,
Nissan, Grote, and TTMA all
commented that Table I was too lengthy
and should be separated into several
sections based on common content. The
Alliance suggested splitting Table XXIII
into three separate tables because it
contains tests for three distinctive items:
(1) Headlamps, (2) vehicle headlamp
aiming devices (VHAD), and (3)
replaceable light sources. The
differentiation of content in Table II of
the NPRM was mentioned as being a
particularly appropriate method of
providing distinction.
Several commenters, including
ASSN/AAM and Grote, noted that tables
containing significant amounts of text,
such as the test requirements in Tables
XXI, XXII, and XXIII, would be difficult
to use because of lengthy passages that
contain several sentences and express
several unique test conditions or
requirements. We agree with these
comments. The tabular format is best
suited to displaying quantitative values
or short textual requirements. In the
final rule, we moved virtually all test
procedures and performance
requirements to S14, the last section of
the standard. Specifically, the content of
Table XXI of the NPRM has been moved
to S14.9, Associated Equipment
Physical Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements, the content
of Table XXII of the NPRM has been
moved to S14.3, Motorcycle Headlamp
Out of Focus Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements, S14.4,
General Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements (consisting
of the color test and plastic optical
materials test), and S14.5, Signal Lamp
and Reflective Device Test Procedures
and Performance Requirements. In
addition, the content of Table XXIII of
the NPRM has been moved to S14.6,
Headlamp Physical Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements, S14.7,
Replaceable Light Source Physical Test
Procedures and Performance
Requirements, and S14.8, Vehicle
Headlamp Aiming Devices (VHAD)
Physical Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements.
General test procedures and
performance requirements that were
located in S6.8 of the NPRM have been
placed in S14.1 of the final rule.
Similarly, the photometric test
procedures of S6.8 of the NPRM are now
in S14.2 of the final rule.
In the final rule, we decided to split
several of the tables into shorter, more
distinctive, sections and we completely
revised the content of Table III and
Table XIII. Table I, Required Lamps and
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Reflective Devices, is divided into three
parts: (1) Table I-a for passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, and buses of all widths; (2) Table
I-b for trailers, and (3) Table I-c for
motorcycles. We decided upon
sectioning Table I in this manner for
several reasons. One is user diversity.
Organizations that manufacture vehicles
such as passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses
typically do not also manufacture
trailers or motorcycles. Likewise,
organizations that manufacture trailers
typically do not manufacture self
propelled vehicles, and those that
manufacture motorcycles do not
produce cars, trucks, or trailers. Some
commenters suggested separate sections
for narrow vehicles (less than 2032 mm
in width) and wide vehicles (those 2032
mm or wider). However, several
manufacturers produce both narrow and
wide vehicles, sometimes as different
optional versions of the same vehicle,
such as pickup trucks.
Another consideration was
commonality. Both narrow and wide
vehicles are required to be equipped
with a headlighting system, turn signal
lamps, taillamps, stop lamps, side
marker lamps, side and rear reflex
reflectors, backup lamps and license
plate lamps. Narrow vehicles are
required to have parking lamps and
high-mounted stop lamps while wide
vehicles are not. Similarly, wide
vehicles must have clearance and
identification lamps which are not
required on narrow vehicles. This same
distinction occurs between narrow and
wide trailers, for which common
content significantly surpasses
differentiated content. Therefore, we
have concluded that it is unnecessary to
section Table I by vehicle width.
We are retaining the title of the three
sections of Table I as Required Lamps
and Reflective Devices, even though one
of the lamps listed in Table I–a, Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL), is not a required
lamp. The heading above the DRL
listing clearly describes it as being
permitted but not required. However,
because the DRL, when installed, is
regulated in all attributes listed in Table
I, Number and Color, Mounting
Location, Mounting Height, and Device
Activation (unlike other non-required
lamps), the agency decided that Table I
is the appropriate location for it.
The three sections of Table IV,
Effective Projected Luminous Lens Area
Requirements, are now identified as: (1)
Table IV–a covering turn signal and stop
lamps; (2) Table IV–b for high-mounted
stop lamps; and (3) Table IV–c for
school bus signal lamps. The four
sections of Table V, Visibility
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Requirements of Installed Lighting
Devices, now include: (1) Table V–a for
backup lamps, high-mounted stop
lamps, and school bus signal lamps; (2)
Table V–b which contains the lens area
option for turn signal lamps, stop lamps,
taillamps, and parking lamps; (3) Table
V–c which has the luminous intensity
option for turn signal lamps, stop lamps,
taillamps, and parking lamps; and (4)
Table V–d that has older alternative
requirements for turn signal lamps, stop
lamps, and taillamps.
Table VI, Front Turn Signal Lamp
Photometry Requirements, was split into
two sections in the final rule. Table VI–
a contains the base front turn signal
lamp photometry requirements and also
the values for 21⁄2 times the base
photometry requirements while Table
IV–b contains values for 2 times the
base photometry requirements and 1 the
base photometry requirements
New Table XIII consisting of: (1) Table
XIII–a, Motorcycle Turn Signal Lamp
Alternative Photometry Requirements,
and (2) Table XIII–b, Motor Driven Cycle
Alternative Photometry Requirements,
includes the stop lamp requirements for
certain motor driven cycles previously
part of Table IX in the NPRM, as well
as alternative turn signal requirements
for motorcycles noted in paragraph
S7.1.1.1 and S7.1.2.1 of the NPRM but
not previously tabularized. The three
sections of Table XVI are now: (1) Table
XVI–a, Reflex Reflector Photometry
Requirements, (2) Table XVI–b,
Additional Photometry Requirements
for Conspicuity Reflex Reflectors, and
(3) Table XVI–c, Retroreflective Sheeting
Photometry Requirements.
Table XIX has been split into Tables
XIX–a, containing photometric
requirements for lower beam patterns
LB1M, LB1V, LB2M, and LB2V. Table
XIX–b contains requirements for lower
beam patterns LB3M, LB3V, LB4M, and
LB5M while Table XIX–c contains
requirements for lower beam pattern
LB4V.
As mentioned previously, the ASSN/
AAM response proposed a common,
templated organizational format for the
individual lamp sections and expansion
of their content to include 14
subsections representing specific
requirements. The requirements that
they suggested be included in each
section include: (1) Number, (2) color of
light, (3) arrangement, (4) position, (5)
geometric visibility, (6) orientation, (7)
effective projected luminous lens area,
(8) electrical, (9) tell tale, (10) marking
requirements, (11) other provisions, (12)
plastic materials, (13) photometry, and
(14) physical tests. Implementing this
request presents a dilemma for several
reasons. First, most of the requirements
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68239
suggested to be listed in individual
lamp sections are already stated in parts
of Table I, Table IV, and Table V. Table
I of the NPRM is an expansion of Tables
I, II, III, and IV of the current version of
Standard No. 108, tables which have
been part of the standard for decades.
The agency rarely receives questions or
complaints about regulatory content
contained in Tables I through IV, but
instead, they are often considered the
most useful feature of the current
version. We received no comments,
including the ASSN/AAM submission,
which suggested elimination of Table I.
We also believe that the suggestion of
ASSN/AAM to remove the activation
requirements from Table I and place
them all in a new section titled
‘‘Electrical’’ was without merit. The
activation requirements of the various
types of lamps, like the other categories
listed in Table I, are primarily vehiclelevel requirements rather than devicelevel requirements, and are best
presented along with those other
requirements.
Table V of the NPRM is a restatement
of Figures 19 and 20 of the current
version of Standard No. 108, which
were added in a final rule 7 published
on August 11, 2004 which promulgated
the current visibility requirements. The
agency decided that it would not be
appropriate to disperse the visibility
requirements of Table V (and likewise
the effective projected luminous lens
area requirements of Table IV) into
individual lamp sections. The primary
reason was that in real world situations,
many lamp functions are combined with
other lamp functions, very often
optically combined. It is not unusual for
a vehicle to have a combination rear
lamp where the taillamp, stop lamp, and
rear turn signal lamp functions are
optically combined. The same holds
true for front turn signal lamps and
parking lamps. The presentation of
visibility requirements for all regulated
lamp functions together in Table IV
allows regulated parties to quickly
determine the appropriate requirements
for such combination lamps and
perhaps aid the decision about which
visibility alternative to use for
certification.
The decision to leave Tables I, IV, and
V intact in the final rule means that
adopting the ASSN/AAM template for
individual lamp sections would result
in large scale duplication of
requirements in Standard No. 108.
Duplication of the same requirement in
more than one location in a regulatory
document has the potential for
7 69 FR 48805 (Aug. 11, 2004) (Docket No. 2004–
18794–1).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68240
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
unintended consequences. We intended
to avoid those consequences by having
each discrete requirement only stated
once in Standard No. 108.8
Therefore, to be responsive to the
request of ASSN/AAM concerning the
format of individual lamp sections
while still maintaining the integrity of
the standard by having only a single
statement of each requirement, we have
adopted the use of pointing statements.
These pointing statements appear in
those subsections of each lamp section
where a requirement does exist but is
stated in another location of the
standard. For instance, in paragraph
S7.4 pertaining to side marker lamps,
subsections 7.4.1 Number, 7.4.2 Color of
light, 7.4.3 Mounting location, 7.4.4
Mounting height, and 7.4.5 Activation,
all conclude with the pointing statement
‘‘See Tables I–a, I–b, and I–c.’’
Similarly, S7.4.9 Markings points to
S6.5 for details of the applicable
marking requirements. S7.4.6 Effective
projected luminous lens area, S7.4.7
Visibility, S7.4.8 Indicator, S7.4.10
Spacing to other lamps, S7.4.11
Multiple compartment and multiple
lamps, and S7.4.12 Ratio all conclude
with the term ‘‘No requirement’’
indicating a requirement for those
specific items of lamp performance does
not exist in Standard No. 108.
The entire content of Table III of the
NPRM, dealing with conspicuity
systems, was moved to paragraph S8.2
of the final rule. A new Table III was
created to serve as a compilation of
pointing statements directed to the
locations within the final rule where
marking requirements reside. While
some headlamp marking requirements
were relocated to paragraph S6.5 in the
final rule, a number of other marking
requirements continue to be dispersed
within the document. In these cases, we
have decided that the marking
requirements are best located near the
specific items to which they apply.
However, these locations are all
identified in Table III and consultation
with this table should lead the user to
all applicable marking requirements.
Grote suggested that lengthy
paragraphs of regulatory text be
simplified by splitting them into
separately numbered sub-paragraphs,
particularly where the requirements
were diverse. In a number of instances,
we have been able to create such
separation. Regulatory provisions
(including renumbered paragraphs)
where this has been done include:
S6.1.3, S6.1.4.2, S6.1.5.2, S6.2.6,
8 See the discussions of Table II and Table IX for
explanations of existing duplicated requirements in
the current version of FMVSS No. 108.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S6.5.3.3, S6.5.3.4, S6.6, S7.1.1.11,
S7.1.1.12, S7.1.2.11, S7.1.2.12, S7.1.3,
S7.2.11, S7.3.11, S7.3.12, S7.3.15,
S7.7.13, S7.7.15, S7.9.14, S8.2.1,
S8.2.2.3, S9.3.4, S9.8, S10.14.2,
S10.17.1.1, S10.17.1.2, S10.17.1.3, S13,
S14.1.4, S14.2.1, S14.2.3, S14.2.4,
S14.2.5, S14.4.1, S14.4.2, S14.5, S14.6,
S14.7, and S14.9. We have included the
term ‘‘split for clarity’’ or similar
language, often parenthetically,
numerous places in the discussion of
revisions to note where a section of text
from the NPRM was divided into several
smaller sub-sections in the final rule but
not otherwise revised.
Guide submitted numerous
suggestions for reorganizing the NPRM
by the reassignment of certain
paragraphs within the organizational
framework of the NPRM. In several
instances, the agency concluded that the
Guide suggestion proved to be a more
appropriate location for a paragraph
than the location proposed in the
NPRM. We have noted these
reassignments in our discussion (but
without attribution to a Guide
suggestion in some cases). This has
caused numerous changes in the
paragraph numbers throughout the
regulatory text. Where a requirement in
the final rule was identified differently
in the NPRM, we have indicated the
previous paragraph number in the
revision summary.
A number of Guide’s suggested
reassignments were not adopted,
because we decided that the applicable
textual provisions were already situated
in the most appropriate location. Again,
we did not mention every such rejection
of Guide’s suggested ordering or our
reasoning for such decisions. While we
believe that the final rule’s
organizational structure is the optimal
choice, we recognize that it is not the
only choice. Often, some of the
requirements of Standard No. 108
intermix several attributes of lamps.
Such an example is paragraph S7.11.2.1
which contains requirements for a DRL
spaced near a turn signal lamp (e.g.,
considerations for the actual separation
distance, the luminous intensity of both
the DRL and the turn signal lamp,
whether the DRL is optically combined
with a lower beam headlamp, and the
activation properties of both the DRL
and turn signal lamp). Requirements
such as these do not fit neatly into a
Mounting Location section or an
Activation section, and their essence
would not survive dispersion of the
component requirements into these
sections because of their
interdependence on several diverse
attributes.
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Another such situation involves the
presentation of the requirements for
conspicuity systems. The content of
Table III of the NPRM was moved to
paragraph S8.2 of the regulatory text to
provide a more comprehensible
presentation format. An argument could
be made that this content should be
split into two portions, one portion
describing how conspicuity material is
spaced and arranged and another
portion describing where conspicuity
material is to be placed on applicable
vehicles. If this apportionment were
made, the first portion could be
considered a device-level requirement
and the second portion a vehicle-level
requirement. Dispersing conspicuity
system content in this way may seem
correct from an organizational
perspective, but would be in conflict
with the goals of the rewrite of Standard
No. 108 to present the requirements in
a straight forward and logical manner.
Our guiding principle in organizing
the structure of the FMVSS No. 108
final rule was to attempt to locate each
requirement in the place where a user
would be most likely to look for it.
Accordingly, the final rule has been
organized with the following major
sections:
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
Scope.
Purpose.
Application.
Definitions.
References to SAE publications.
Vehicle requirements.
Signal lamp requirements.
Reflective device requirements.
Associated equipment requirements.
Headlighting system requirements.
Replaceable light source requirements.
Headlamp concealment device
requirements.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens
requirements.
S14 Physical and photometry test
procedures and performance
requirements.
Tables
Table I Required Lamps and Reflective
Devices.
Table II Headlighting Systems.
Table III Marking Requirements Location.
Table IV Effective Projected Luminous
Lens Area Requirements.
Table V Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices.
Table VI Front Turn Signal Lamps
Photometry Requirements.
Table VII Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Photometry Requirements.
Table VIII Taillamp Photometry
Requirements.
Table IX Stop Lamp Photometry
Requirements.
Table X Side Marker Lamp Photometry
Requirements.
Table XI Clearance and Identification
Lamps Photometry Requirements.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table XII Backup Lamp Photometry
Requirements.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle Turn Signal
Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements.
Table XIII–b Motor Driven Cycle Stop
Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements.
Table XIV Parking Lamp Photometry
Requirements.
Table XV High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Photometry Requirements.
Table XVI Reflex Reflector and
Retroreflective Sheeting Photometry
Requirements.
Table XVII School Bus Signal Lamp
Photometry Requirements.
Table XVIII Headlamp Upper Beam
Photometry Requirements.
Table XIX Headlamp Lower Beam
Photometry Requirements.
Table XX Motorcycle Headlamp
Photometry Requirements.
Figures
Figure 1 Chromaticity Diagram.
Figure 2 Flasher Performance Chart.
Figure 3 Replaceable Bulb Headlamp
Aim Pads.
Figure 4 Headlamp Connector Setup.
Figure 5 Headlamp Abrasion Test
Fixture.
Figure 6 Thermal Cycle Test Profile.
Figure 7 Dirt/Ambient Test Setup.
Figure 8 Replaceable Light Source
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 9 Environmental Test Profile.
Figure 10 Headlamp Replaceable Light
Source Pressure Test Setup.
Figure 11 Trailer Conspicuity Treatment
Examples.
Figure 12–1 Trailer Conspicuity Detail I.
Figure 12–2 Trailer Conspicuity Detail II.
Figure 13 Tractor Conspicuity Examples.
Figure 14 92x150 Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 15 Types G and H Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 16 Types A and E Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 17 Type B Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 18 Types C and D Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 19 License Plate Lamp Target
Locations.
Figure 20 License Plate Lamp
Measurement of Incident Light Angle.
Figure 21 Vibration Test Machine.
Figure 22 Flasher Test Standard Circuit.
4. Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the
Rewrite
Units of Measurements
Several comments were received
concerning the way quantities in the
NPRM were measured, in terms of units.
In some cases, measurements were only
in metric units, others in only English
units, and still others dual-dimensioned
with both metric and English units. We
note that this situation currently exists
within Standard No. 108 and the SAE
standards and Recommended Practices
incorporated by reference. Such
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
perceived inconsistencies in the final
rule are the result of the agency’s
decision to make no substantive changes
to Standard No. 108 during the rewrite
process. This means stating
measurements in their original form
consistent with their original source
documents, instead of attempting to
convert and standardize the units.
ASSN preferred dual English/metric
measurements for every quantity and
requested that both be provided in the
final rule. The commenter also preferred
that linear measurements be expressed
in both inches and centimeters. AAM
requested dual units with metric units
followed by English units and the use of
direct conversions to establish those
measurements that were only stated in
one unit in the NPRM. Nissan argued
that in recent rulemakings, the agency
has consistently listed measurements
using metric units with English units
referenced parenthetically. Nissan
preferred linear measurements that were
in millimeters, except for photometric
test distances which should remain
dimensioned in meters. Conversely,
Grote recommended that measurements
be expressed in inches followed by
centimeters in parentheses, believing
that the vast majority of current users
continue to use English measurements.
SEMA also supported dual units of
measurements with a preference for
centimeters rather than millimeters. In
supplemental comments, AAM/ASSN
requested all quantities in FMVSS No.
108 that are not now metric be
converted to metric pursuant to
Executive Order 12770 (Metric Usage in
Federal Government Programs).
The FMVSS No. 108 rewrite is
considered an administrative action
because existing requirements and
obligations are not being increased,
decreased, or substantively modified.
The agency has decided that converting
values and providing dual-dimensions
is outside the scope of this final rule.
The conversion process, in some cases,
would result in substantive change in
the current requirements of the
standard. This is because such
conversions rarely result in a whole
number equivalent, but more likely in
an unwieldy value with more digits
than the value it was converted from.
The converted unit may have a nonexact value requiring it to be truncated
after several digits. Such rounding may
have little effect on some attributes but
significant effect on others. An
additional complication is that some
currently dual-dimensioned values in
FMVSS No. 108 are not exact
equivalents. For instance, the air
pressure required to be applied to the
replaceable light source in the
PO 00000
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68241
replaceable light source pressure test is
expressed as 70 KPa (10 psig). However,
the English equivalent of 70 KPa is
10.152641661 psig and the metric
equivalent of 10 psig is 68.9475728 KPa.
Thus, a user may conclude that a
replaceable light source may be
compliant with the standard if it
withstands a pressure of 68.9475728
KPa and not 70 KPa.
Additionally, the comments received
in response to the NPRM show that
users of FMVSS No. 108 do not have a
consistent preference for a particular
approach regarding units of
measurement. In consideration of our
principle not to change any existing
requirements, as well as the wide range
of opinions on the best approach for
dual-dimensioning, the agency decided
to present values consistent with the
current standard instead of choosing
one of the suggested options.
Photometric Maps
As previously mentioned, the AAM/
ASSN supplementary comments, the
ASSN initial comments, and the NAL
comments recommend inclusion of a
number of new graphical maps that
would show details of the requirements
for the various photometric test
patterns. The signal lamp maps would
show the position of each individual
test point and how those points are
combined into groups. The headlamp
maps would show individual test
points, linear test elements, and zonal
test elements.
In reviewing the suggested graphical
maps, it was unclear which test points
were part of which zone. Furthermore,
such maps are beyond the scope of the
administrative rewrite. In addition,
there were no compelling arguments
presented addressing how their
inclusion would advance the goals of
the rewrite. Adding such graphical
maps would provide redundant
information, significantly increasing the
risk of potentially conflicting
requirements, and likely generate
numerous interpretation requests,
especially if users were confused by the
new graphs.
That is not to say that these types of
illustrations have no value. They seem
particularly well suited for use by
design and manufacturing organizations
use in their internal design standards or
photometric test procedures documents.
Standard No. 108, like all Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards, strives to
present regulatory requirements in the
clearest way possible. It is not intended
to serve as an all-inclusive working
guide for designing, testing, or
manufacturing lamps, reflective devices,
or associated equipment. NHTSA
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68242
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
anticipates that user organizations will
carefully incorporate the requirements
of FMVSS No. 108 into their internal
working documents.
Requests for New or Revised Definitions
Commenters requested inclusion in
the final rule of numerous definitions
for specific terms. These include:
‘‘center (of item),’’ ‘‘fixed body panel,’’
‘‘four lamp type headlamp,’’ ‘‘hazard
warning lamps,’’ ‘‘obstruction,’’ ‘‘rigid
part of vehicle,’’ ‘‘separately lighted
areas,’’ ‘‘two lamp type headlamp,’’
‘‘special tools,’’ ‘‘tools ordinarily
available,’’ ‘‘supplemental lamp,’’ and
‘‘auxiliary lamp.’’ There was also a
suggestion for a revised definition for
the term ‘‘color bleeding,’’ alleging it
could be mistaken for the term ‘‘light
bleed.’’ A suggestion was also submitted
for addition of definitions of all lamp
types mentioned in the current version
of FMVSS No. 108, with the specific
example of fog lamp.
In its initial submission, AAM
suggested the final rule use the term
‘‘* * * light source optical centers
* * *’’ in place of the term ‘‘* * * light
sources * * *’’ and the term ‘‘* * *
optical centers * * *’’ in place of the
term ‘‘* * * optical axes * * *’’ as
revisions that would be technologyneutral in the specific case of a series
wired array of LEDs being considered a
single light source per the January 5,
2006 letter of interpretation to AMECA.9
There were also suggestions that the
term ‘‘lighted section’’ be used
exclusively and in place of ‘‘multiple
compartment’’ and ‘‘multiple lighted
area.’’ Adopting any of these suggestions
would have been a substantive action
which would be beyond the defined
scope of this rewrite. For this reason we
have not adopted any of these suggested
modifications in the final rule.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
5. Suggestions Within the Scope of the
Rewrite
SAE Documents
A significant initiative of the FMVSS
No. 108 rewrite was the incorporation of
requirements contained in SAE
Standards and Recommended Practices
(currently incorporated by reference or
sub-reference) directly into the body of
the standard. The current version of
Standard No. 108 relies heavily on the
content of numerous SAE documents. It
contains over 100 references to some 35
different SAE documents, many of
which were issued in the 1960s. Some
of these documents are incorporated in
their entirety, whereas only portions of
others are cited. The NPRM integrated
much of the content of these SAE
9 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/Wolford.2.html.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
document directly into the regulatory
language, resulting in only eight SAE
documents continuing to be
incorporated by reference.
Generally commenters supported this
action. SEMA requested that all
referenced and sub-referenced SAE
documents be included in the regulatory
text of the final rule. While total
elimination of documents incorporated
by reference proved to be impractical,
we did eliminate references to three
additional SAE documents in the final
rule as discussed below. We also
restored a reference to SAE J567b, Bulb
Sockets, in S14.2.1.6.2 of the final rule
based upon comments by Calcoast. This
reference exists in Footnotes 2 and 3,
which follow Table IV, of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, but was
eliminated in the NPRM. We agree with
Calcoast that the exemption permitted
in these footnotes stating that bulbs not
listed in SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and
Sealed Units, December 1968, are not
required to use a socket that conforms
to the requirements of SAE J567b, Bulb
Sockets, April 1964, is needed in the
final rule.
SAE J577, Vibration Test Machine,
April 1964, has been replicated as
Figure 21, and all references to SAE
J577 have been removed from the final
rule. SAE J823b, Flasher Test
Equipment, April 1968, describes a
standard test circuit to be used in the
performance testing of vehicular hazard
warning signal flashers and turn signal
flashers. This SAE standard also has
specifications for power supplies used
in these tests and describes the circuit
adjustments necessary to perform valid
tests. We have chosen to incorporate the
content of SAE J823b into the final rule.
New Figure 22, Flasher Standard Test
Circuit, provides the test circuit
schematic diagram from Figure 1 of SAE
J823b. Paragraph S14.9.3.1 of the final
rule states requirements for circuit
adjustments applicable to flasher tests,
and paragraph S14.9.3.2 provides
separate power supply specifications for
the various flasher performance tests.
With the inclusion of paragraph S14.9.3
and Figure 22 in the final rule, all
references to SAE J823b have been
deleted.
SAE J588e, Turn Signal Lamps,
September 1970, incorporated by
reference in FMVSS No. 108, is
referenced in paragraph S5.1.1.1 of the
current version of the standard solely to
establish requirements for double-sided
turn signal lamps installed on truck
tractors. It was eliminated from the final
rule by incorporating the content of
paragraph 3.4 and a portion of
paragraph 3.9.1 of SAE J588e into
paragraph S6.1.1.3 of the NPRM. The
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
remaining portion of paragraph 3.9.1
was incorporated in Table VII, Rear
Turn Signal Lamp Photometry
Requirements, of the NPRM by revision
to Footnote 6.
The revised paragraph S6.1.1.3 now
reads, ‘‘ * * * A truck tractor need not
be equipped with turn signal lamps
mounted on the rear if the turn signal
lamps at or near the front are of doubleface construction and are located such
that they meet the photometric
requirements for double-faced turn
signal lamps specified in Footnote 6 of
Table VII.’’ Continuing, paragraph
S6.1.1.3.1 states, ‘‘The flashing signal
from a double-faced signal lamp must
not be obliterated when subjected to
external light rays from either in front
or behind, at any and all angles.’’ The
revised Footnote 6 to Table VII now
states, ‘‘A double-faced turn signal lamp
installed as described in paragraph
S6.1.1.3 on a truck tractor need only
meet the photometric requirements for a
left side lamp where the lamp is
mounted on the left side of the vehicle,
and for a right side lamp where the
lamp is mounted on the right side of the
vehicle.’’
This same SAE standard, J588e, Turn
Signal Lamps, September 1970, is cited
in the current version of FMVSS No.
108 as containing the requirements for
the illuminated pilot indicator for turn
signal lamp failure. The NPRM had
erroneously stated the requirements
from SAE J588 NOV84, Turn Signal
Lamps. Paragraph S9.3 of the final rule
now correctly states the illuminated
area of the indicator and the acceptable
modes of indication. Consistent with
these changes, all references to SAE
J588e have been removed from the
standard.
We undertook the effort to eliminate
these additional SAE references in the
final rule in part because the nature of
some comments suggested that the
relationship between FMVSS No. 108
and its incorporated SAE documents
causes significant confusion.
One example of such confusion is
found in the comments of Grote and
Koito in reference to the limitations in
applying reduced photometric
requirements to adjacent front and rear
side marker lamps. This section is based
upon paragraph S5.1.1.8 of the current
version of Standard No. 108 which
states, ‘‘For each motor vehicle less than
30 feet in overall length, the
photometric minimum candlepower 10
requirements for side marker lamps
specified in SAE Standard J592e,
10 The term ‘‘candlepower’’ used in this context
means the contemporary unit of measurement used
to express the luminous intensity attribute.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Clearance, Side Marker, and
Identification Lamps, July 1972, may be
met for all inboard test points at a
distance of 15 feet from the vehicle and
on a vertical plane that is perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle
and located midway between the front
and rear side marker lamps.’’ In this
case, the limitation of vehicles less than
30 feet in overall length recognizes that
those vehicles are ones where
intermediate side marker lamps (and
intermediate side reflex reflectors) are
not required to be installed. Table 1 of
SAE J592e, detailing the photometric
requirements of side marker lamps, also
contains a footnote ‘‘b’’ further limiting
the vehicles where reduced photometric
requirements can be applied. Footnote
‘‘b’’ states that, ‘‘The requirements for
side markers used on vehicles less than
80 inches (2 meters) wide may be met
for inboard test points * * * ’’ This
vehicle width limitation is reflected in
Footnote 1 of Table X. This is an
example where the text of an
incorporated SAE document applies
limitations beyond those contained in
the text of FMVSS No. 108.
Another example is illustrated in the
comments by AAM and Koito about the
spatial relationship between front turn
signal lamps and certain other frontmounted lamps and the photometric
requirements the relationship imposes
on the front turn signal lamp as stated
in paragraph S7.1.1.2 of the NPRM
(S7.1.1.10 of the final rule). Current
FMVSS No. 108, at paragraph S5.3.1.7,
imposes a multiplier of 2.5 on minimum
photometric intensity requirements for a
front turn signal lamp mounted less
than 100 mm from the lighted edge of
a lower beam headlamp. Turn signal
lamps are also required to be designed
to conform to referenced standards SAE
J588 NOV84 for vehicles less than 2032
mm in overall width and SAE J1395
APR85 for vehicles 2032 mm or more in
overall width. These documents
provide, in paragraph 5.1.5.4 of SAE
J588 and paragraphs 5.1.5.4, 5.1.5.5, and
5.1.5.6 of SAE J1395, additional
photometric requirements for turn
signal lamps based upon their
construction. The method the turn
signal lamp uses to project light (i.e.,
whether it primarily uses a reflector to
direct light or not) determines how the
relationship is measured between the
turn signal lamp and the lower beam
headlamp, or a surrogate lower beam
headlamp such as an auxiliary lower
beam headlamp or a fog lamp. Based
upon this measurement, the turn signal
lamp may be required to have a
multiplier of 1.5, 2.0, or 2.5 times the
minimum photometric intensity. Thus,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
it is possible for a turn signal lamp not
to be required to have increased
intensity based upon paragraph S5.3.1.7
of current FMVSS No. 108 but still be
required to have increased intensity
because of its construction or proximity
to another front lamp, such as a fog
lamp. This is an example where an
incorporated SAE document imposes
requirements beyond those explicitly
stated in the regulatory text of Standard
No. 108.11
In its comments, AAM stated that
FMVSS No. 108 has never contained a
requirement for a vehicular hazard
warning signal pilot indicator as
contained in paragraph S6.6 of the
NPRM (paragraph S9.8 of the final rule).
We note that this requirement came
from SAE J910, Vehicular Hazard
Warning Signal Operating Unit, January
1966, and SAE J945, Vehicular Hazard
Warning Flasher, February 1966, both
incorporated by reference in Tables I
and III of the current version of FMVSS
No. 108. The requirements from SAE
J910 contained in paragraph 5 detail
how the pilot indicator is to operate,
how it can be combined with the turn
signal indicator, and the size and color
of a dedicated vehicular hazard warning
signal pilot indicator. The requirements
from SAE J945 describe how the means
of providing the indication can be
incorporated into the flasher if it
functions under all test conditions
applied to the flasher and how an
audible indication can be used in
conjunction with the visible indication.
This is an example where incorporated
SAE documents contain a requirement
that is not expressly stated in the text of
FMVSS No. 108.
AAM also stated in its comments that
only the lighting equipment
requirements of SAE J587 OCT81,
License Plate Lamps (Rear Registration
Plate Lamps), are incorporated by
reference in Standard No. 108 (i.e., in
paragraph S5.1.1 of the current version).
AAM argued that a license plate holder
is not an item of lighting equipment and
that requirements for the holder would
also apply to a front license plate
holder. In response, we note that SAE
J587 OCT81 does contain specific
requirements for a license plate holder
and its relationship with the license
plate, the surface the vehicle stands on,
and the license plate lamp. The
performance of a license plate lamp is
dependent upon its physical
relationship with the license plate. The
license plate must be secured in
11 The subject of turn signal lamp photometric
requirements based upon spacing to other front
lamps is discussed in several interpretations such
as Matsui (9/20/95).
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68243
position to evaluate this performance.
To alleviate AAM’s concern with
application of the requirement to a front
license plate holder, we have revised
the text of paragraph S6.6.3 of the final
rule (paragraph S6.1.1 of the NPRM) to
state, ‘‘Each rear license plate holder
must be designed and constructed to
provide a substantial plane surface on
which to mount the plate. The plane of
the license plate mounting surface and
the plane on which the vehicle stands
must be perpendicular within ± 15° ’’
(emphasis added).
Grote commented that lamps designed
to conform to SAE J1395 APR85, Turn
Signal Lamps for use on Motor Vehicles
2032 mm or more in Overall Width, and
SAE J1398 MAY85, Stop Lamps for use
on Motor Vehicles 2032 mm or more in
Overall Width, incorporated by
reference in Table I of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 for use on
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, trailers, and buses, of 80 or more
inches in overall width, could also be
used on vehicles less than 80 inches
(2032 mm) overall width, without
meeting the requirements listed in Table
III for these lamps. Grote based its
comment on a statement in the Scope of
SAE J1395 stating that, ‘‘Turn signal
lamps conforming to this report may
also be used on vehicles less than 2032
mm in overall width.’’ The Scope of
SAE J1398 has a similar statement
concerning stop lamps. This assertion is
simply not correct. Table III of the
existing version of Standard No. 108
applies to all passenger cars and
motorcycles, and multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, buses and
trailers of less than 80 inches (2032 mm)
in overall width. Table III clearly
requires turn signal lamps to comply
with SAE J588 NOV84 and stop lamps
to comply with SAE J586 FEB84.
Therefore, manufacturers may choose to
design their lamps to also comply,
respectively, with SAE J1395 APR85
and SAE J1398 MAY85, but they also
must be designed to comply,
respectively, with SAE J588 NOV84 and
SAE J586 FEB84. We do not agree with
the argument that compliance with only
SAE J1395 APR85 and SAE J1398
MAY85, respectively, is permitted,
because this clearly contradicts the
language in the existing regulatory text.
Table III of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 requires that all
passenger cars and motorcycles, and
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, trailers, and buses, of less than
80 inches (2032 mm) in overall width
must be equipped with lamps designed
to conform to the requirements of SAE
J588 NOV84, Turn Signal Lamps for use
on Motor Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68244
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
in Overall Width, and SAE J586 FEB84,
Stop Lamps for use on Motor Vehicles
Less Than 2032 mm in Overall Width.
Thus, if a turn signal lamp or stop lamp
is not designed to conform with SAE
J588 NOV84 or SAE J586 FEB84
respectively, it cannot be used on any
passenger car or motorcycle or on any
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,
trailer, or bus of less than 80 inches in
overall width, no matter whether it also
is designed to conform to SAE J1395
APR85 or SAE J1398 MAY85. The
explicit requirements of FMVSS No. 108
prevail over any seemingly
contradictory language of an
incorporated third-party document.
Observing the confusion that exists
because the current version of Standard
No. 108 relies so heavily upon reference
to third-party documents, we are
convinced that our action to remove
those references to the maximum extent
possible was a correct decision.
Remaining references to SAE documents
in the final rule include:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S6.4.5 SAE J602, Headlamp Aiming Device
for Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units, August 1963
S9.3.5 SAE J941b, Motor Vehicle Driver’s
Eye Range, February 1969
S10.14.7.7 SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable
Sealed Beam Headlamp Units
S10.15.7.6 SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable
Sealed Beam Headlamp Units
S10.16.3.6 SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable
Sealed Beam Headlamp Units
S10.18.7 SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable
Sealed Beam Headlamp Units
S10.18.7.2 SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically Aimable
Sealed Beam Headlamp Units
S11.3 SAE J2009 FEB93, Discharge Forward
Lighting Systems
S14.2.1.6 SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and
Sealed Units, December 1968
S14.2.1.6.1 SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and
Sealed Units, December 1968
S14.2.1.6.2 SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and
Sealed Units, December 1968
S14.2.1.6.2 SAE J567b, Bulb Sockets, April
1964
S14.7.3.1.2 SAE J2009 FEB93, Discharge
Forward Lighting Systems
Cited Interpretations
In the rewrite proposal, the agency
integrated the clarifications provided by
key letters of interpretation into the
regulatory text of the standard. The
criteria used in determining whether an
interpretation was significant focused
on whether it provided value in
clarifying the provisions in the
standard. In the vast majority of cases,
past requests for interpretation have
identified questions regarding
applicability of certain provisions of the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
standard to specific design
configurations. However, influential
interpretations that clarified provisions
of the standard, and continue to provide
guidance to various parties beyond the
original requestor, were believed to be
particularly useful additions to the
regulatory text. In the NPRM, the agency
solicited public comment about
additional interpretations that might be
included in the final rule.
In their submissions, several
commenters mentioned specific
interpretations of FMVSS No. 108 as
candidates for incorporation in the
regulatory text of the final rule. In two
instances, we decided that the cited
interpretations would make the
standard more precise and added them
to the final rule. The two interpretations
are discussed below. Several
commenters suggested other potential
interpretations for inclusion into the
final rule; however the agency decided
that none of these provided enough
value in clarifying the provisions of
FMVSS No. 108.
Nissan suggested that inclusion of the
June 18, 1985 interpretation to Mr.
Nakaya 12 would more precisely define
where the measurement of the height of
a high-mounted stop lamp should be
made with respect to the rear window
of a passenger car. A more detailed
description of this interpretation is
found in the discussion of revised
paragraph S6.1.3.2.1 of the final rule.
A suggestion of TTMA was to
incorporate an interpretative rule 13
published in 1999 into the standard.
This interpretative rule quantifies the
‘‘as near the top as practicable’’
mounting requirement that applies to
clearance lamps and identification
lamps mounted on a vehicle with cargo
doors. That rule states that NHTSA will
presume it practical to mount these
lamps above the cargo doors when the
header above those doors extends at
least 25 mm (1 inch) above them. A
more detailed discussion of this issue is
found in the discussion of Table I.
Revisions to the Proposal
S1 Through S3
There were no comments submitted
that related to S1, S2, or S3.
S4 Definitions
AAM objected to mounting and
spacing criteria being part of the
definitions of a clearance lamp,
identification lamp, and side marker
lamp. In response, we note that all three
of these definitions are faithful to the
12 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/gm/85/1985–
02.42.html
13 64 FR 16358, (April 5, 1999).
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
applicable, long-referenced, SAE
standards whose content we have
included in both the proposal and final
rule text. These mounting and spacing
criteria serve to clarify the spatial
function of the lamps and are
appropriate parts of the definitions.
Therefore, we are keeping these criteria
in the final rule.
We removed the third sentence from
the definition of ‘‘effective projected
luminous lens area,’’ stating the term
‘‘functional lighted lens area’’ appearing
in any SAE document had an identical
meaning. The single instance of the term
‘‘functional lighted (lens) area’’
appearing in the NPRM was in
paragraph S7.1.1.2.2 (S7.1.1.10.3 in the
final rule) in reference to the procedure
to determine the measurement point for
a front turn signal lamp with a reflector.
We replaced ‘‘functional lighted (lens)
area’’ in paragraph S7.1.1.10.3 with
‘‘effective projected luminous lens area’’
and were thereby able to remove any
reference to ‘‘functional lighted lens
area’’ in the standard.
Nissan observed that the definitions
for ‘‘mechanically aimable headlamp’’
and ‘‘material’’ were not in alphabetical
order in the NPRM. We have corrected
this in the final rule.
GE commented that the definition of
‘‘replaceable light source’’ in the NPRM
was not identical to that of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108. As stated in
the NPRM ‘‘replaceable light source,’’
means an assembly of a capsule, base,
and terminals manufactured as a light
source for an upper and/or lower beam
of a replaceable bulb headlamp that is
designed to conform to the requirements
of Appendix A or Appendix B of 49 CFR
part 564, Replaceable Light Source
Information. The italicized text was
added to the definition included in the
current version of FMVSS No. 108 as
part of an attempt to clarify that integral
beam and replaceable bulb headlamps
are allowed to incorporate ‘‘replaceable
light sources’’ that are used for purposes
other than headlighting. However these
‘‘replaceable light sources’’ are not those
defined in S4, but rather ones typically
used for non-headlighting functions
such as turn signal lamps, parking
lamps, and front side marker lamps. In
the final rule, as explained later in the
discussion of S10 Headlighting system
requirements, we have decided to
address this issue by revising how these
non-headlighting light sources were
described. Because the revisions in
language in S10 should eliminate
confusion between headlighting and
non-headlighting replaceable light
sources, there is no need to change the
definition in S4 and it is identical in the
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
final rule to that of the current version
of FMVSS No. 108.
Nissan commented that the
definitions for ‘‘vehicular hazard
warning signal flasher’’ from SAE J945,
Vehicular Hazard Warning Signal
Flasher, February 1966, and for
‘‘vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit’’ from SAE J910,
Vehicular Hazard Warning Signal
Operating Unit, January 1966, described
the function of the hazard warning
signal system in slightly different ways.
Nissan contended, and we agree, that
the description of the operation of the
hazard warning signal system should be
consistent. Therefore, we have revised
the definition of ‘‘vehicular hazard
warning signal flasher’’ from ‘‘ * * *
means a device which, as long as it is
turned on, causes all the required
hazard warning lamps to flash’’ to ‘‘
* * * means a device which, as long as
it is turned on, causes all the required
turn signal lamps to flash.’’ Similarly
the definition of the ‘‘vehicular hazard
warning signal operating unit’’ was
revised from ‘‘ * * * means a driver
controlled device which causes all turn
signal lamps, or other hazard warning
lamps, to flash simultaneously to
indicate to approaching drivers the
presence of a vehicular hazard’’ to ‘‘
* * * means a driver controlled device
which causes all required turn signal
lamps to flash simultaneously to
indicate to approaching drivers the
presence of a vehicular hazard’’. This
revision recognizes that the hazard
warning signal of paragraph S6.1.5.1
only requires simultaneous flashing of
sufficient turn signal lamps to meet the
turn signal photometric requirements of
Standard No. 108.
S5 References to SAE Publications
In paragraph S5.2 of the NPRM we
stated that ‘‘A complete list of all SAE
publications incorporated by reference
in this standard are indexed at 49 CFR
571.5(j)’’. This inclusion was in
anticipation of a final rule based upon
a NPRM 14 that would have established
49 CFR 571(j) to contain this list. This
final rule has not been issued.
Therefore, we have deleted this
reference from the final rule.
AAM requested that the word
‘‘required’’ be inserted into the first
sentence of paragraph S5.1 between the
words ‘‘Each’’ and ‘‘lamp’’ to be faithful
to paragraph S5.1.1 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 containing
provisions for lamps, reflective devices,
and associated equipment to be
designed to comply with specific SAE
14 70
FR 36094, (June 22, 2005)(Docket No. 2005–
21600–1).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Standards and Recommended Practices.
We agree and have revised the final
rule.
S6 Vehicle Requirements
Proposed paragraph S6.1.1.1.1,
allowing conspicuity material on a
trailer to also serve as the required
reflex reflectors if the conspicuity
material was placed at the required
locations of the reflex reflectors, has
been relocated into the Reflex Reflectors
portion of Table I-b of the final rule.
Paragraph S6.1.1.3 was modified as
stated in the SAE Documents section
above to fully integrate the requirements
of SAE J588e, Turn Signal Lamps,
September 1970, relating to the use of
double-faced turn signal lamps on truck
tractors. This amendment also required
a revision to Table XII and its Footnote
6 as well as the addition of paragraph
3.9.1 of SAE J588e as paragraph S6.1.1.3
of FMVSS No. 108 and paragraph 3.4 of
SAE J588e as paragraph S6.1.1.3.1 of
FMVSS No. 108.
Paragraph S6.1.1.4 of the final rule,
(paragraph S6.2.4 of the NPRM), was
moved into the Vehicle requirements
section based upon the Guide comment
that it was a more appropriate location
than the Impairment section. A
typographical correction was also made
to clarify that a parking lamp or a fog
lamp may not be used as a DRL. This
correction now results in language that
is faithful to the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 at paragraph S5.5.11(a).
Paragraph S6.1.1.4, Hazard warning
lamps, of the NPRM describing
activation provisions for hazard warning
lamps was moved to the Activation
section where it became paragraph
S6.1.5.1 in the final rule.
The phrase ‘‘fixed body panel’’ in
proposed paragraph S6.1.3.1 was
objected to by Koito as being more
restrictive than the phrase ‘‘rigid part’’
which is used in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 at paragraph S5.3. We
have decided to retain ‘‘rigid part’’ in
the final rule to be faithful to the
original language and meaning. The
phrase ‘‘ * * * the mounting location
and * * * ’’ has been added to
paragraph S6.1.3.1 ahead of ‘‘height’’ to
be consistent with the references to
Tables I, II, III, and IV of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 as referenced
at paragraph S5.3 of that document.
This clarification was recommended by
Guide.
Guide also suggested that the
requirements of the second sentence of
paragraph S6.1.3 of the NPRM, which
becomes paragraph S6.1.3.2 of the final
rule, deal more with photometry than
lamp mounting location. We do not
agree with this suggestion. This
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68245
requirement deals with how to consider,
for photometry purposes, the individual
compartments or lamps of an array that
consists of portions on both rigid and
non-rigid parts of the vehicle as
described in the July 12, 2000, letter of
interpretation to Mr. King.15 Because
this provision establishes photometric
performance requirements based upon
what kind of surface a lamp is mounted
upon, its inclusion in the Mounting
location section is appropriate. We have
added a pointing statement in
paragraphs S7.1.1.11.1 (front turn signal
lamps), S7.1.2.11.1 (rear turn signal
lamps), S7.2.11.1 (taillamps), and
S7.3.11.1 (stop lamps) in the final rule
to direct users to this requirement.
Guide also stated that this section
should also apply to the rear reflex
reflector. However, as stated in several
interpretations, reflex reflector
requirements must be met by single
reflectors, not a combination of separate
reflectors. Supporting this position is
the May 23, 2003 letter of interpretation
to Mr. Babcock 16 as well as the April
14, 2004 letter of interpretation to Mr.
Strassburger.17
Paragraph S6.1.4, License plate lamp,
of the NPRM has been relocated to
paragraph S6.1.3.3 of the final rule in
recognition that it states a requirement
for mounting location.
Paragraphs S7.9.1, Accessibility, and
S7.9.2 Interior mounting, (duplication at
S6.1.3.2.2 deleted) of the NPRM
referring to high-mounted stop lamps
(HMSL) were relocated in the final rule
to be paragraphs S6.1.3.4.2 and
S6.1.3.4.1 respectively. These
requirements relate primarily to how the
HMSL is mounted to the vehicle, so
paragraph S6.1.3 is the most appropriate
location in Standard No. 108 for them.
Guide commented that the content of
paragraphs S8.1.3 and S8.1.4 of the
NPRM, dealing with headlamp beam
mounting, belonged in that part of
Standard No. 108 related to lamp
mounting location. We agree and have
moved them intact to become paragraph
S6.1.3.5 of the final rule.
Grote, Guide, Innovative, TMA, and
TTMA all noted the typographical error
in paragraph S6.2.5 of the NPRM. Both
the title and text of this section
contained the phrase ‘‘* * * auxiliary
identification lamp * * *’’ which
should be ‘‘* * * auxiliary lamp* * *’’
The correction has been made in the
final rule, and this requirement has been
relocated to the Mounting location
15 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/21605.ztv.html.
16 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/babcock.ztv.html.
17 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/GF007569–
2.html.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68246
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
section as paragraph S6.1.3.6, as it states
a mounting limitation.
Paragraph S6.1.3.2.1 of the NPRM
becomes paragraph S6.1.4.1, Highmounted stop lamp, in the final rule.
Nissan suggested that the term
‘‘window’’ in the text had been defined
more precisely in the June 18, 1985
letter of interpretation to Mr. Nakaya 18
as ‘‘glazing’’ and suggested use of that
term in the final rule. We agree and
revised the text accordingly.
Guide commented that paragraph
S6.1.5.1 of the NPRM, concerning
optional activation of stop lamps by
vehicle retarders, duplicated Table I.
Upon review, we believe it is a
duplication, and we have decided that
Table I is the appropriate location for it.
Therefore, in the final rule this
allowance is included in the Stop lampDevice Activation portion of Tables I-a,
I-b, and I-c.
We have relocated to paragraph
S6.1.5.1 of the final rule the content of
paragraph S6.1.1.4 of the NPRM stating
requirements of the hazard warning
signal. This is appropriate since, as we
noted in our discussion of the
definitions of vehicular hazard warning
signal flasher and vehicular hazard
warning signal operating unit, the only
requirement of this system is
simultaneous flashing of sufficient turn
signal lamps to meet the turn signal
photometric requirements of Standard
No. 108.
Another section relocated to S6.1.5,
Activation, is paragraph S6.1.5.2 of the
final rule, which details the
requirements for simultaneous
activation of lower beam and upper
beam headlamps. These requirements
had been included as paragraph S8.2 of
the NPRM. We agree with the comment
of Guide that this content was most
appropriately located in the Activation
section.
We removed paragraph S6.2.3 of the
NPRM, which addressed specific
requirements for auxiliary lamps
performing the function of a required
lamp, from the final rule. Grote, Guide,
SEMA, and TMA persuaded us that the
proposed S6.2.3 contained language that
was not faithful to the current version
of FMVSS No. 108 and did not add to
the understanding of impairment.
Paragraph S14.2 of the NPRM was
relocated to be paragraph S6.2.6 of the
final rule. This section states the
restrictions that apply to equipment in
front of a headlamp lens. Paragraph
S6.2, Impairment, was judged the most
appropriate location for it. SEMA
suggested revising the language of this
section in a way that was inconsistent
with the current version of Standard No.
108 by allowing obstructions if some
undefined visibility requirement were
met. This suggestion would be a
substantive change outside the scope of
this rewrite project, and, as such, was
not adopted in the final rule.
As previously mentioned, paragraph
S6.2.4 of the NPRM stating the
requirements for DRLs was relocated to
be paragraph S6.1.1.4 of the final rule.
The text of paragraph S6.3,
Equipment combinations, of the final
rule remains identical to that of the
NPRM.
Paragraph S6.4, titled Visibility and
aiming in the NPRM, was re-titled Lens
area, visibility and aiming in the final
rule, recognizing the lens area
requirements of paragraph S6.4.1.
References in paragraph S6.4 to Table IV
were revised in the final rule to
reference Table IV-a, Table IV-b, or
Table IV-c, as appropriate.
AAM and Koito commented that the
requirement of a manufacturer to
irrevocably certify compliance to one of
the visibility options of paragraph
S6.4.3 was on a ‘‘lamp function’’ basis
rather than a ‘‘lamp’’ basis as stated in
the NPRM. We agree and have revised
the text of paragraph S6.4.3 accordingly
to bring it in conformity to the final
rule 19 establishing these visibility
requirements.
Nissan objected to the title of
paragraph S6.4.4, SAE visibility
alternative, of the NPRM stating they
did not like the use of the term SAE as
part of that title. Considering one of the
goals of the FMVSS No. 108 rewrite was
to reduce reliance upon third party
documents, particularly SAE documents
incorporated by reference, we have
eliminated ‘‘SAE’’ from the paragraph
S6.4.4 title in the final rule. The title of
this section in the final rule is Legacy
visibility alternative recognizing that it
contains requirements that have long
been a part of Standard No. 108.
Nissan also commented that
paragraph S6.4.5, Low-mounted lamps,
duplicated requirements stated in
footnotes to Tables V-b, V-c, VI, VII,
VIII, IX, XI, XIV, XVI-a, and XVII. We
agree with Nissan that these footnotes
are the appropriate location for these
requirements and have eliminated this
subparagraph from the final rule.
The addition of a new Table III to the
final rule as a repository for listing the
location in the regulatory text of each
marking requirement of Standard No.
108 is noted in paragraph S6.5.
18 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/gm/85/1985–
02.42.html
19 69 FR 48805 (August 11, 2004) (Docket No.
2004–18794).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
AAM and Koito noted that the
regulatory requirement identified in
paragraph S6.5.1 of the NPRM for the
‘‘DOT’’ marking was stated as ‘‘the
standard’’ rather than ‘‘49 U.S.C. 30115’’
as stated in paragraph S7.2(a) of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108. We
have revised the text of this section in
the final rule to be faithful to the
existing language.
Paragraph S6.5.2, DRL marking, has
been revised in the final rule to include
the phrase ‘‘* * * on its lens * * *’’
after ‘‘DRL’’ to be faithful to the marking
requirement as stated in paragraph
S5.5.11(a)(2) of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108.
Several sections of the NPRM
containing marking requirements for
headlamps have been relocated in their
entirety and without revision to
paragraph S6.5.3 of the final rule. These
include: (1) Proposed paragraph S17.1
which becomes S6.5.3.1; (2) S17.2
which becomes S6.5.3.2; (3) S17.3
which becomes S6.5.3.3 (split into
several sections for clarity); and (4)
S17.4 which becomes S6.5.3.4 (split for
clarity and updated section references).
Similarly, proposed paragraph S17.5
summarizing the location of other
headlamp marking requirements
becomes paragraph S6.5.3.5.
Proposed paragraph S6.6 stating
requirements for associated equipment
on regulated vehicles has been updated
to indicate that the specific
requirements for associated equipment
are located in paragraph S9 of the final
rule.
Proposed paragraph S6.6.1, License
plate holder, has been redesignated as
paragraph S6.6.3 in the final rule due to
renumbering of portions of paragraph
S6.6 for clarity. AAM objected to this
provision as stated previously in our
discussion of SAE documents. The
clarification that this section applied to
rear license plate holders appears in the
final rule (emphasis added).
Paragraph 6.7, Replacement
equipment, of the NPRM continues as
that paragraph in the final rule. AAM,
ASSN, and SEMA noted a typographic
error in paragraph S6.7.1.2 where the
word ‘‘to’’ inadvertently appears in the
phrase ‘‘* * * designed so that it does
not to take the vehicle * * *’’
(emphasis added). This error was
corrected by removing that word from
paragraph S6.7.1.2 of the final rule.
SEMA commented that the language of
paragraph S6.7 ‘‘* * * infers that the
standard would not preclude the
installation of newer technologies on
older vehicles and there is no suggestion
that the introduction of lighting
equipment into the marketplace is tied
to vehicle manufacturer certification,’’
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
and requested confirmation of this
assumption by a response to its letter of
December 16, 2005 requesting an
interpretation by the Chief Counsel.
SEMA’s comment sought clarification of
a notice of interpretation published in
the Federal Register on November 1,
2005 20 rather than addressing the
substance of the rewrite of Standard No.
108, and, thus, was beyond the scope of
the rewrite. We note that SEMA’s
concern was addressed by the agency in
an August 24, 2006 letter of
clarification.21
In its comments, ASSN objected to the
inclusion of the second sentence of
paragraph S6.7.1.2 of the NPRM which
states in part, ‘‘* * * the determination
of whether a vehicle would be taken out
of compliance with this standard when
an individual device is installed on the
vehicle is made without regard to
whether additional devices, including
separate lamps or reflective devices sold
together with the device, would also be
installed.’’ Its contention is that this
language which ‘‘converts its informal
interpretation into a formal rule’’ was
included in the rewrite of FMVSS No.
108 without ‘‘the required cost benefit
analysis’’ and would limit the
‘‘opportunities for vehicle
personalization.’’ The incorporation of
the replacement equipment
interpretation of 70 FR at 65972, or any
interpretation, does not constitute a
change in the requirements of the
standard. An interpretation simply
clarifies the existing requirements of the
standard and as such does not require
the cost-benefit analysis or other
rulemaking formalities as ASSN
suggested. Regulated parties are bound
by the regulatory requirements
regardless of whether they are expressed
in the regulatory text or in
interpretations either by letter or
publication. A vehicle owner can
continue to modify the lighting on his
vehicle, including obtaining devices for
that purpose from regulated parties such
as vehicle dealers, so long as the vehicle
continues to meet the requirements of
FMVSS No. 108 and the replacement
lighting equipment provides all
regulated functions of the device being
replaced in a single unit.
Grote also commented on paragraph
S6.7, requesting that the provisions of
paragraph S6.7.1.2 not be applicable to
heavy vehicles. Grote was concerned
that a replacement lamp, reflective
device, or item of associated equipment
which is designed or recommended for
particular vehicle models must be
20 70 FR 65972 (Nov. 1, 2005) (Docket No.
NHTSA 03–15651).
21 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/SEMA.htm
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
designed per S6.7.1.2 so that it does not
take the vehicle out of compliance with
this standard when the individual
device is installed on the vehicle. Grote
suggested that in the heavy vehicle
market that it primarily serves, an
owner of a fleet of heavy vehicles may
elect to remove the original equipment
lamps and reflective devices and replace
them with equally compliant lamps and
devices but in different functional
combinations. That means, for example,
one of a set of original equipment lamps
installed on a particular vehicle may
contain the stop lamp, taillamp, and
side marker lamp function, while the
other separate lamp contains the turn
signal lamp, backup lamp, and reflex
reflectors. Grote would like to be able to
recommend a set of replacement lamps
for this vehicle where the individual
lamps of the set do not have the
required functions grouped in exactly
the same combinations as those of the
original equipment set.
Grote believes that it should be
permissible to do this because the
agency stated in the interpretation 22
published in the Federal Register on
November 1, 2005 that, ‘‘* * * while
our interpretation of S5.8.1 [of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108] is
not dependent on the size of the vehicle
for which a lamp is intended, it has a
more limited application to aftermarket
lighting equipment for heavy vehicles
than to light vehicles.’’ However, the
agency continued the discussion by
stating, ‘‘The specific context of the
questions asked by Calcoast was
aftermarket combination lamps for light
vehicles, such as passenger cars. These
lamps are typically designed for specific
models and can only be installed on
those models in the same location as the
lamps they replace. However, for heavy
vehicles, lighting equipment is often
generic and not designed for specific
models. Truck-Lite, for example,
commented on our notice of draft
interpretation that it sells many kinds of
lighting devices through catalog sales to
hundreds of vehicle manufacturers
whose equipment it has no way of
knowing about. Consistent with our
discussion in the October 2004 notice of
interpretation, we note that our
interpretation does not mean that the
manufacturer of generic lighting
equipment has the responsibility for
ensuring correct selection and
installation of its equipment. On the
other hand, under our interpretation, a
manufacturer of aftermarket lighting
equipment could not design or
recommend lighting equipment for a
specific vehicle if the vehicle
22 70
PO 00000
FR 65972 (Nov. 1, 2005).
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68247
manufacturer could not have certified
the vehicle using that lighting
equipment instead of the lighting
equipment it actually used.’’ We did not
suggest in this interpretation that when
we spoke of a ‘‘more limited
application’’ in reference to heavy
vehicles, we intended to treat
replacement lamps and reflective
devices for heavy vehicles significantly
different than those for light vehicles.
We were merely pointing out that we
did not consider manufacturers of
generic lighting equipment responsible
for ensuring the correct selection and
installation of their equipment.
Therefore, with the exception of the
previously mentioned typographical
error correction, paragraph S6.7 in the
final rule is identical to that of the
NPRM.
Proposed paragraph S6.8 of the NPRM
has been relocated to be part of
paragraph S14 of the final rule.
Substantive issues raised in the public
comments to the NPRM will be
discussed in paragraph S14.
S7
Signal Lamp Requirements
Paragraph S7 of the NPRM contained
specific requirements for signal lamps,
reflective devices, and associated
equipment. With the reorganization of
the final rule, only the signal lamp
requirements remain in S7. In some
cases, the order of appearance of
specific lamp types in S7 has changed
from the NPRM.
As previously mentioned, we have
partially adopted the request of ASSN/
AAM concerning the format of
individual lamp sections. We have
modified the individual signal lamp
sections so that a series of specific types
of requirements are listed for each lamp
in the same order in a ‘‘template’’
format. These requirements, in order,
are: (1) Number, (2) Color of light, (3)
Mounting location, (4) Mounting height,
(5) Activation, (6) Markings, (7) Effective
projected luminous lens area, (8)
Visibility, (9) Indicator, (10) Spacing to
other lamps, (11) Multiple compartment
and multiple lamps, and (12) Ratio.
These are followed by sections on
Photometry and Physical tests. In many
cases, the text following one of these
types of requirements will ‘‘point’’ to a
table or another section of the standard.
Also, there are numerous instances
where the specific lamp has no
performance requirement for a category,
and the text states ‘‘No requirement.’’
References to physical tests applicable
to signal lamps contained in Table XXII
of the NPRM have been revised in the
final rule to refer to paragraphs S14.4
and S14.5.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68248
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Paragraph S7.1 of the final rule
continues to contain the requirements
for turn signal lamps. Paragraph S7.1.1.3
of the NPRM, addressing multiple
compartment and multiple front turn
signal lamps, becomes paragraph
S7.1.1.11 in the final rule and has been
split for clarity. In this section, Nissan
stated that the term ‘‘compartments’’
after the word ‘‘three’’ was incorrectly
plural; it has been changed to singular
form in the final rule.
As mentioned in the discussion of
definitions, we replaced the term
‘‘functional lighted area’’ in paragraph
S7.1.1.2.2 of the NPRM (paragraph
S7.1.1.10.3 in the final rule), with the
equivalent term ‘‘effective projected
luminous lens area.’’ Since this
paragraph was the only instance in
Standard No. 108 where the term
‘‘functional lighted area’’ was used, it
was eliminated from the definition of
‘‘Effective projected luminous lens area’’
in the final rule.
Calcoast objected to the language of
paragraph S7.1.1.3.1 of the NPRM
which stated, ‘‘* * * overall width
must meet the photometric
requirements specified for a single
section and not * * *’’ photometric
requirements for lamps installed on
vehicles 2032 mm or more in overall
width. In the final rule, we have
changed this language in paragraph
S7.1.1.11.4 to be faithful to the language
of paragraph S5.1.1.12 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108. It now
states, ‘‘* * * overall width require
measurement of the photometrics for the
entire lamp and not.* * *’’ This same
issue was raised concerning rear turn
signal lamps and stop lamps. Therefore,
similar changes were made in paragraph
S7.1.2.11.4 of the final rule for rear turn
signal lamps and in paragraph S7.3.11.4
for stop lamps.
Paragraph S7.1.1.3.2 of the NPRM
(containing requirements for the ratio
between the photometric intensity of a
front turn signal lamp and that of a
parking lamp or clearance lamp where
optically combined) has become
paragraph S7.1.1.12 in the final rule and
has been split for clarity.
Paragraph S7.1.2.2 of the NPRM
(addressing multiple compartment and
multiple rear turn signal lamps)
becomes paragraph S7.1.2.11 in the final
rule and has been split for clarity. Once
again, Nissan stated that in this section,
the term ‘‘compartments’’ after the word
‘‘three’’ was incorrectly plural; it has
been changed to singular form in the
final rule.
Paragraph S7.1.2.3 of the NPRM
(containing requirements for the ratio
between the photometric intensity of a
rear turn signal lamp and that of a
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
taillamp or clearance lamp where
optically combined) becomes paragraph
S7.1.2.12 in the final rule and has been
split for clarity.
Paragraph S7.2.1.1 of the NPRM
(addressing multiple compartment and
multiple taillamps) becomes paragraph
S7.2.11 in the final rule and has been
split for clarity. Again, Nissan stated
that in this section the term
‘‘compartments’’ after the word ‘‘three’’
was incorrectly plural; it has been
changed to singular form in the final
rule. Also, AAM and Koito commented
that there was an incorrect reference to
Table VII instead of Table VIII in the
NPRM; this has been corrected in the
final rule.
Paragraph S7.2.12, Ratio, has been
added in the final rule to point to the
ratio requirements for rear turn signal
lamps and stop lamps optically
combined with taillamps.
Paragraph S7.3.1.1 of the NPRM
(addressing multiple compartment and
multiple stop lamps) becomes paragraph
S7.3.11 in the final rule and has been
split for clarity. Again, Nissan stated
that in this section the term
‘‘compartments’’ after the word ‘‘three’’
was incorrectly plural; it has been
changed to singular form in the final
rule.
Paragraph S7.3.1.2 of the NPRM
(containing requirements for the ratio
between the photometric intensity of a
stop lamp and that of a taillamp where
optically combined) becomes paragraph
S7.3.12 in the final rule and has been
split for clarity.
Koito commented about the limitation
of the application of reduced
photometry requirements of paragraph
S7.4.1.1 of the NPRM to side marker
lamps installed on vehicles less than 80
inches wide. This limitation is
consistent with Table 1, footnote ‘‘b’’ of
SAE J592e. A more comprehensive
discussion of this issue is part of the
section on SAE documents in this final
rule.
Paragraph S7.5.12, Ratio, has been
added in the final rule to point to the
ratio requirements for front and rear
turn signal lamps optically combined
with clearance lamps.
Paragraphs S7.7.2, Photometry, and
S7.7.1, Installation, of the NPRM
(applicable to license plate lamps) have
been split for clarity as paragraphs
S7.7.13 and S7.7.15 respectively, in the
final rule.
A reference to new Figure 20, License
Plate Lamp Measurement of Incident
Light Angle, was added to paragraph
S7.7.15.4 of the final rule (paragraph
S7.7.1.1 in the NPRM.)
Paragraphs S7.9.1, Accessibility, and
S7.9.2, Installation, of the NPRM
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(applicable to high-mounted stop lamps)
were relocated in the final rule to be
paragraphs S6.1.3.4.2 and S6.1.3.4.1,
respectively.
Guide commented that paragraph
S7.11.2.2(c) of the NPRM should be
relocated to the DRL activation portion
of Table I-a. We disagree. This
requirement, which becomes paragraph
S7.10.10.1(c) in the final rule, only
specifies activation and deactivation of
the DRL when the turn signal is
activated on a vehicle where the DRL is
in close proximity to a turn signal lamp.
Given these constraints of limited
application, its present placement in the
final rule is the most appropriate
location. A statement in the DRL
activation portion of Table I-a does
point to paragraph S7.10.10.1(c) to also
alert users to this requirement.
S8 Reflective Device Requirements
Requirements for reflex reflectors
located in paragraph S7.10 of the NPRM
have been relocated to paragraph S8.1 in
the final rule. Paragraphs S8.1.1 through
S8.1.10 are categorized identically to the
organizational template of signal lamps.
However, a section covering multiple
compartment lamp and multiple lamps
and a section covering ratio are clearly
not applicable to reflex reflectors and
are not included. Paragraph S8.1.11,
Photometry, replaces paragraph S7.10.1
of the NPRM, while paragraph S8.1.12,
Physical tests, replaces paragraph
S7.10.2 and paragraph S8.1.13,
Alternative reflex material, replaces
paragraph S7.10.1.1.
References to physical tests applicable
to reflex reflectors contained in Table
XXII of the NPRM have been revised in
the final rule to refer to paragraphs
S14.4 and S14.5.
The final rule combines the content of
paragraph S7.12 and Table III of the
NPRM into paragraph S8.2. Specifically,
proposed paragraph S7.12 becomes
paragraph S8.2, proposed paragraph
S7.12.1 becomes paragraph S8.2.1,
Retroreflective sheeting, (split for
clarity), and proposed paragraph
S7.12.1.1 becomes paragraph S8.2.1.3,
Certification marking.
Following this, the text of the
proposed Application patternAlternating red and white materialsRetroreflective sheeting box of Table III
is stated as paragraph S8.2.1.4, the text
of the proposed Application locationRetroreflective sheeting box of Table III
is stated as paragraph S8.2.1.5, and the
text of the proposed Application
spacing-Retroreflective sheeting box of
Table III is stated as paragraph S8.2.1.6.
3M commented that they believe that
the use of the phrase ‘‘* * * material is
required to be installed * * *’’ in both
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
the requirements for Application
pattern-Retroreflective sheeting and
Application pattern-Conspicuity reflex
reflectors implies that there is only one
method of meeting conspicuity
requirements, not two alternative
methods. To increase clarity of these
alternative requirements, we have
revised the first sentence of the
Alternating red and white materialsRetroreflective sheeting, (now paragraph
S8.2.1.4.1) requirement to read ‘‘* * *
where alternating material is installed
* * *’’ We have also eliminated the
phrase ‘‘Where alternating color
material is required to be installed’’
from the beginning of the first sentence
of Alternating red and white materialsConspicuity reflex reflectors section
(now paragraph S8.2.2.2.1).
3M also commented that the language
in the Application pattern-White
material-Conspicuity reflex reflectors
section (paragraph S8.2.2.2.2 of the final
rule) discussing the dimensional
relationship between adjacent white
conspicuity reflex reflectors would be
more appropriately included in the
Application location portion. We
disagree because the requirements in the
Application location portion refer to the
location of the material on the vehicle
while the requirements in the
Application pattern portion only refer to
the location of a reflector to an adjacent
reflector.
AAM commented that the language of
the Application location-Retroreflective
sheeting portion begins with the phrase
‘‘Not permitted * * *’’ which imposes
a different requirement than paragraph
S5.7.1.4 of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 which states ‘‘* * *
but need not be applied * * *’’ We
agree and have revised the requirement
of the Application locationRetroreflective sheeting (now paragraph
S8.2.1.5 in the final rule) to begin,
‘‘Need not be installed, as illustrated in
Figure 12–2, * * *’’
Proposed paragraph S7.12.1.2,
Photometry, becomes paragraph S8.2.1.7
in the final rule with no substantive
changes. The photometry requirements
reference was updated to Table XVI–c
and the photometry test procedure
reference to paragraph S14.2.3.
Proposed paragraph S7.12.2,
Conspicuity reflex reflectors, becomes
paragraph S8.2.2 and proposed
paragraph S7.12.1, Certification
marking, becomes paragraph S8.2.2.1 in
the final rule.
Following this, the text of the
proposed Application patternAlternating red and white materialConspicuity reflex reflectors box of
Table III is stated as paragraph
S8.2.2.2.1 and the proposed Application
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
pattern-White material-Conspicuity
reflex reflectors box of Table III is stated
as paragraph S8.2.2.2.2. Regarding
retroreflective sheeting, we have
addressed the previously noted 3M
comment about alternative methods of
meeting conspicuity requirements by
eliminating the phrase ‘‘Where white
material is required to be installed’’
from the beginning of the first sentence
of the Application pattern-White
material-Conspicuity reflex reflectors
(now paragraph S8.2.2.2.2) section.
Proposed paragraph S7.12.2.2,
Photometry, has become paragraph
S8.2.2.3 (split for clarity) in the final
rule.
Paragraph S8.2.3 of the final rule
contains the requirements for
conspicuity systems installed on trailers
that were part of Table III in the NPRM.
Paragraph S8.2.3.1 (split for clarity)
includes the requirements for the three
conspicuity elements required on the
rear of a trailer and paragraph S8.2.3.2
(split for clarity) states requirements for
the alternating color side conspicuity
treatment required on trailers.
AAM requested that the specific
grades of sheeting permitted be
mentioned in the requirements for
Trailer rear-Element 2-white, now in
paragraph S8.2.3.1.2.1. Therefore, we
have inserted the phrase ‘‘* * * of
Grade DOT–C2, DOT–C3, or DOT–C4
* * *’’ between the word ‘‘long’’ and
the word ‘‘applied’’ in the first sentence
making the language of the requirement
faithful to that of paragraph S5.7.1.4.1(b)
of the current version of FMVSS No.
108.
TTMA commented that certain tank
trailers may not have a vertical surface
suitable for installing the Trailer sidealternating red and white materials
conspicuity material between 375 mm
and 1525 mm above the road surface. If
installed in a downward orientation, it
would not be effective for its purpose.
The requirement of this section states
that the material must be installed in
this height range if practicable and
going beyond this range is permitted if
it aids correct orientation. We believe
that the language of paragraph S8.2.3.2.1
of the final rule, along with the
illustrative examples of conspicuity
treatment applied to tank trailers shown
in Figure 11, adequately addresses this
issue.
Paragraph S8.2.4 of the final rule
contains the requirements for
conspicuity systems installed on truck
tractors, which was part of Table III in
the NPRM. Paragraph S8.2.4.1 (split for
clarity) contains requirements for
Element 1 (alternating color) and
paragraph S8.2.4.2 (split for clarity)
states the requirements for Element 2
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68249
(white). One mounting alternative for
conspicuity treatment requirements in
Truck tractor-Element 1 was
inadvertently omitted from the NPRM.
This material is allowed to be mounted
to ‘‘plates attached to the mudflap
support brackets’’ as stated in the
current version of FMVSS No. 108 at
paragraph S5.7.1.4.3(a). We have
inserted this alternative mounting
location after ‘‘mudflap support
brackets’’ and before ‘‘or on the
mudflaps’’ in paragraph S8.2.4.1.1 of the
final rule.
S9 Associated Equipment
Requirements
Section 7.14 of the NPRM, Associated
equipment requirements, is relocated to
paragraph S9 in the final rule.
Koito and Nissan commented that the
first sentence of paragraph S7.14.1 of
the NPRM, now paragraph S9.1.1 of the
final rule, virtually duplicated the
definition of Turn signal operating unit
in S4. We agree and removed that
sentence from paragraph S9.1.1.
Paragraph S9.1.2 of the final rule states
that turn signal operating units must
meet the applicable performance
requirements of paragraph S14.9. These
references are to paragraph S6.6 and
Table XXI in the NPRM.
Similarly, the first sentence of
paragraph S7.14.2 of the NPRM, now
paragraph S9.2.1 of the final rule,
virtually duplicated the definition of
Turn signal flasher in S4. We removed
that sentence from paragraph S9.2.1.
Paragraph S9.2.2 of the final rule states
that turn signal flashers must meet the
applicable performance requirements of
paragraph S14.9. These references are to
paragraph S6.6 and Table XXI in the
NPRM.
In the NPRM, paragraph S7.14.3
stated requirements for the turn signal
pilot indicator. These requirements have
been relocated to paragraph S9.3 (split
for clarity) in the final rule. Paragraph
S7.14.3.1 of the NPRM described the
turn signal pilot indicator size and color
requirements. These requirements were
erroneously based on paragraph 5.4.3 of
SAE J588 NOV84, Turn Signal Lamps
for use on Motor Vehicles less than 2032
mm in Overall Width. These
requirements should have been based
upon paragraph 4.5 of SAE J588e, Turn
Signal Lamps, September 1970, as
specified by paragraph S5.5.6 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108. We
have stated the correct requirements in
paragraph S9.3.4 of the final rule. These
corrected requirements include a
visibility requirement that references
SAE J941b, Motor Vehicle Driver’s Eye
Range, February 1969, rather than the
incorrect reference to SAE J1050,
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68250
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Describing and Measuring the Driver’s
Field of View, which was included in
the NPRM.
The incorporation in paragraph
S7.14.3.2 of the NPRM of the language
from the incorrect version of SAE J588
also caused the description of the modes
of indication of the turn signal pilot
indicator to be omitted as noted in the
comments from AAM. We have
corrected this in the final rule by
inserting the phrase ‘‘* * *by a ‘‘steady
on’’, ‘‘steady off’’, or by a significant
change in the flashing rate* * *’’ into
the text of paragraph S9.3.6.
We also neglected in the NPRM to cite
the reason for our use of the failure
indication criteria of ‘‘* * *minimum
photometric performance specified in
Tables VI or VII* * *’’ rather than the
text of paragraph S5.5.6 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, which states
that criteria as ‘‘Failure of one or more
turn signal lamps to operate* * *.’’ The
language incorporated in the NPRM
came from the July 10, 1998 letter of
interpretation to Mr. Binder.23 In that
interpretation, the issue of how to
indicate to the driver the failure of a
turn signal lamp that consisted of a
number of LED light sources was
discussed. The failure indication criteria
for this situation was stated in Binder in
this way, ‘‘If a light source fails in a turn
signal lamp on a vehicle that is not
equipped to tow a trailer, Standard No.
108 requires that the failure be
indicated to the driver. We are not
aware of any LED turn signals in use, or
how manufacturers would design such a
unit to comply with this requirement.
However, we believe that a failure
should be indicated to the driver at the
point where an LED turn signal ceases
to furnish the minimum photometric
performance required by Standard No.
108.’’ The statements in the Binder
interpretation also apply to turn signal
lamps using conventional incandescent
light sources. If a turn signal lamp using
an incandescent light source fails, it
obviously has zero photometric output.
Therefore, we adopted the language of
Binder in the NPRM but omitted
mention of it as one of the incorporated
interpretations. We are correcting that
omission here and are preserving the
failure indication criteria of the NPRM
in paragraph S9.3.6 of the final rule.
Paragraphs S7.14.4, Headlamp beam
switching device, and S7.14.4.1, Semiautomatic headlamp beam switching
device, of the NPRM, were re-designated
as paragraphs S9.4 and S9.4.1,
respectively, in the final rule. Paragraph
S9.4.1.4 of the final rule, which was
paragraph S7.14.4.1.4 in the NPRM, had
23 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/18121.ztv.html
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
a second sentence added to it which
states, ‘‘The device shall not affect the
function of the upper beam indicator
light.’’ which was inadvertently omitted
from the NPRM. This requirement
comes from paragraph 4.14 of SAE
J565b, Semiautomatic Headlamp Beam
Switching Devices, February 1969,
which is incorporated by reference in
the current version of FMVSS No. 108.
Paragraph S9.4.1.7 of the final rule
states that semi-automatic headlamp
beam switching devices must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of paragraph S14.9. These
references are to paragraph S6.6 and
Table XXI in the NPRM.
Paragraphs S7.14.5 Upper beam
headlamp indicator, and S7.14.5.1
Indicator size, location, and color, of the
NPRM, become paragraphs S9.5 and
S9.5.1, respectively, in the final rule.
However, the term ‘‘color’’ and the last
sentence of paragraph S7.14.5.1 stating
that the color of the indicator need not
be red were deleted from paragraph
S9.5.1. By removing this language and
making Standard No. 108 silent about
the color of the upper beam headlamp
indicator, we have simplified the
manner in which the requirement is
presented. The current version of
FMVSS No. 108 states in paragraph
S5.5.2 that, ‘‘Each vehicle shall have a
means for indicating to the driver when
the upper beams of the headlamps are
on that conforms to SAE Recommended
Practice J564a, April 1964, except that
the signal color need not be red’’. The
second paragraph of SAE J564a states
that ‘‘* * *The upper beam indicator
should consist of a red light* * *.’’ As
noted in the comments of AAM, we
incorporated in the NPRM the
requirements of SAE J564a directly into
the text of the Standard No. 108 without
including the red color requirement
because of the noted exclusion.
However, we neglected to remove the
excluding language from the NPRM. We
are doing so in the final rule.
Koito and Nissan commented that the
first sentence of paragraph S7.14.6 of
the NPRM, now paragraph S9.6.1 of the
final rule, virtually duplicated the
definition of Vehicular hazard warning
signal operating unit in S4. We agree
and removed that sentence from
paragraph S9.6.1. Paragraph S9.6.3 of
the final rule states that vehicular
hazard warning signal operating units
must meet the applicable performance
requirements of paragraph S14.9. These
references are to paragraph S6.6 and
Table XXI in the NPRM.
Similarly, the first sentence of
paragraph S7.14.7 of the NPRM, now
paragraph S9.7.1 of the final rule,
virtually duplicated the definition of
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher
in S4. We removed that sentence from
paragraph S9.7.1. Paragraph S9.7.2 of
the final rule states that vehicular
hazard warning signal flashers must
meet the applicable performance
requirements of paragraph S14.9. These
references are to paragraph S6.6 and
Table XXI in the NPRM.
Requirements for the vehicular hazard
warning signal pilot indicator from
paragraph S7.14.8 of the NPRM are
relocated intact to paragraph S9.8 (split
for clarity) in the final rule. AAM
commented that a vehicular hazard
warning signal pilot indicator was not
required by FMVSS No. 108. We direct
AAM’s attention to SAE J910, Vehicular
Hazard Warning Signal Operating Unit,
January 1966, specifically paragraph 5.
When we removed J910 as a referenced
document in the NPRM, we
incorporated the requirements of
paragraph 5 into paragraph S7.14.8,
which we are now designating as
paragraph S9.8 in the final rule. 24
S10 Headlighting System
Requirements.
The headlighting system requirements
of S8 of the NPRM become S10 of the
final rule.
Paragraph S8.1 of the NPRM is now
paragraph S10.1 (split for clarity) in the
final rule. Guide commented that
paragraphs S8.1.1 and S8.1.2 of the
NPRM were redundant with the
requirement, of paragraph S8.1, that the
headlighting system conforms to one of
the systems of Table II. We agree and
eliminated paragraphs S8.1.1 and S8.1.2
from the final rule.
We mentioned previously in the
discussion of mounting location
requirements that Guide commented
that the content of sections 8.1.3 and
8.1.4 of the NPRM, dealing with
headlamp beam mounting, was most
appropriately located in the lamp
mounting location section. We agree
and have moved them intact to become
paragraph S6.1.3.5 of the final rule.
Paragraph S8.1.5, Headlamp
adjustments, of the NPRM was relocated
to be paragraphs S10.18.1.1 and
S10.18.1.2 of the final rule.
We adopted, in S10 of the final rule,
the ASSN/AAM suggested standard
format similar to that of the signal lamp
and reflex reflector sections. Those
standardized criteria that apply to
headlamps with the appropriate
24 SAE J945, Vehicular Hazard Warning Signal
Flasher, February 1966 incorporated by reference in
the current version of FMVSS No. 108 also
discusses a visible pilot indicator for the vehicular
hazard warning signal. The test condition
requirement of S9.8.3 of the final rule comes from
J945.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
pointing statements or ‘‘no
requirement’’ notations become
paragraphs S10.3 through S10.12 of the
final rule.
The requirements for a sealed beam
headlighting system, which were S9 of
the NPRM, become paragraph S10.13 in
the final rule. Paragraphs S9 and S9.1 of
the NPRM have been relocated intact to
become paragraphs S10.13 and S10.13.1
respectively in the final rule. The
simultaneous aim requirements for type
‘‘F’’ sealed beam headlamps, which
were paragraph S9.2 in the NPRM,
become S10.13.2 in the final rule, the
only revision being the revised reference
for the applicable photometry
procedure. Paragraph S9.3, Photometry,
of the NPRM becomes paragraph
S10.13.3 in the final rule, again with a
revised reference to the photometry
procedure. The physical tests
requirements of paragraph S9.4 of the
NPRM, which referenced Tables XXII
and XXIII, become paragraph S10.13.4
(split for clarity) in the final rule, with
updated references to the applicable test
procedures and performance
requirements in paragraph S14.
The requirements for an integral beam
headlighting system that were paragraph
S10 of the NPRM become paragraph
S10.14 in the final rule. Paragraphs S10
and S10.1 of the NPRM have been
relocated to be paragraphs S10.14 and
S10.14.1, respectively, in the final rule,
with the only revision being the
substitution of the term ‘‘activated’’ for
the term ‘‘mechanized’’ used in the
NPRM. Paragraphs S10.2, S10.3, and
S10.4 of the NPRM have been relocated
to become paragraphs S10.14.2 (split for
clarity), S10.14.3, and S10.14.4
respectively in the final rule.
AAM and Koito both commented that
the language in paragraph S10.5
(repeated in paragraph S11.3) of the
NPRM, stating that, ‘‘An integral beam
(replaceable bulb in paragraph S11.3)
headlamp may incorporate replaceable
light sources that are used for purposes
other than headlighting’’, could be
interpreted to mean those ‘‘replaceable
light sources’’ defined in S4 of the
NPRM. This language came from
paragraphs S7.4(i) and S7.5(j) of the
current version of Standard No. 108. To
alleviate concerns that this incorrect
interpretation could be applied, we have
revised the language of paragraph S10.5
(and paragraph S11.3) of the NPRM.
Paragraph S10.14.5 (and paragraph
S10.15.5) of the final rule now states,
‘‘An integral beam (replaceable bulb in
paragraph S10.15.5) headlamp may
incorporate light sources that are used
for purposes other than headlighting
and are capable of being replaced.’’
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Paragraph S10.6, Photometry, of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S10.14.6 in
the final rule, with a revised reference
to the photometry procedure. The
physical test requirements of paragraph
S10.7 of the NPRM, which referenced
Table XXII and Table XXIII, become
paragraph S10.14.7 (split for clarity) in
the final rule, with updated references
to the applicable test procedures and
performance requirements in paragraph
S14.
The requirements for a replaceable
bulb headlighting system, which were
paragraph S11 of the NPRM, become
paragraph S10.15 in the final rule.
Paragraph S11 of the NPRM has been
relocated intact to be paragraph S10.15
in the final rule. Koito commented that
the language of paragraph S11.1 of the
NPRM stating, ‘‘* * *must consist of
the correct number of designated
headlamp units shown for* * *’’ did
not clearly express the requirement. We
agree and have revised this phrase to,
‘‘* * *must consist of either two or four
headlamps shown for* * *’’ in
paragraph S10.15.1 of the final rule.
Paragraph S11.2 of the NPRM
becomes paragraph S10.15.2 in the final
rule. Paragraph S11.4 of the NPRM has
the phrase ‘‘* * *be designed to* * *’’
inserted before the word ‘‘conform’’
when it becomes paragraph S10.15.3 of
the final rule.
Paragraph S11.5 of the NPRM is
relocated to become paragraph
S10.14.4.1 of the final rule. It is
supplemented by a new paragraph
S10.15.4.2 stating the exception from
the requirements of paragraph
S10.14.4.1 (that were contained in
paragraphs S7.5(d)(3)(i)(A) and
S7.5(d)(3)(ii)(A) of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108), which was omitted
from the NPRM, as noted in the
comments of Guide and Koito.
As previously mentioned, paragraph
S11.3 of the NPRM was revised for
clarity and becomes paragraph S10.15.5
in the final rule.
Paragraph S11.6, Photometry, of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S10.15.6 in
the final rule, with a revised reference
to the photometry procedure. The
physical tests requirement of paragraph
S11.7 of the NPRM, which referenced
Table XXII and Table XXIII, becomes
paragraph S10.15.7 (split for clarity) in
the final rule, with updated references
to the applicable test procedures and
performance requirements in paragraph
S14.
The requirements for a combination
headlighting system that were S12 of the
NPRM become paragraph S10.16 in the
final rule. Paragraphs S12 and S12.1 of
the NPRM have been relocated to be
paragraphs S10.16 and S10.16.1,
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68251
respectively, in the final rule, with the
only revision being the substitution of
the term ‘‘activated’’ for the term
‘‘mechanized’’ used in the NPRM.
Paragraph S12.2, Photometry, of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S10.16.2 in
the final rule, with a revised reference
to the photometry procedure. The
physical test requirements of paragraph
S12.3 of the NPRM, which referenced
Table XXII and Table XXIII, become
paragraph S10.16.3 (split for clarity) in
the final rule, with updated references
to the applicable test procedures and
performance requirements in paragraph
S14.
The requirements for a motorcycle
headlighting system that were S13 of the
NPRM become paragraph S10.17 in the
final rule. Paragraphs S13.1, S13.1.1
(split for clarity), S13.1.2 (split for
clarity), and S13.1.3 (split for clarity) of
the NPRM are relocated intact to
become paragraphs S10.17.1, S10.17.1.1,
S10.17.1.2, and S10.17.1.3, respectively,
of the final rule. Paragraph S13.4 of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S10.17.2 of
the final rule.
Paragraph S13.2, Photometry, of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S10.17.3 in
the final rule, with a revised reference
to the photometry procedure. The
physical test requirements of paragraph
S13.3 of the NPRM, which referenced
Table XXII, become paragraph S10.17.5
in the final rule, with updated
references to the applicable test
procedures and performance
requirements in paragraph S14.
Paragraphs S13.5.1, Modulation,
S13.5.2, Replacement modulators,
S13.5.2.1, Replacement performance,
and S13.5.2.2, Replacement
instructions, of the NPRM are relocated
intact to become paragraphs S10.17.5.1,
S10.17.5.2, S10.17.5.2.1, and
S10.17.5.2.2, respectively, in the final
rule.
Headlamp aimability requirements
that were located in S14 in the NPRM
have been relocated to paragraph S10.18
in the final rule with one exception and
with very few revisions. The exception
is proposed paragraph S14.2 dealing
with equipment in front of a headlamp
lens. The requirements of this section
were moved to paragraph S6.2.6 in the
Impairment section of the final rule.
Paragraph S14.8.2 of the NPRM,
which becomes paragraph S10.18.7.2 of
the final rule, contains requirements for
use of nonadjustable headlamp aiming
device locating plates for five types of
sealed beam headlamps. The language
in the NPRM stated that these units
should incorporate lens-mounted
aiming pads specified in Figures a, b, c,
d, or e of the NPRM. The figures referred
to were intended to be placeholders in
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68252
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
a draft version of the NPRM. The NPRM
should have stated that, ‘‘* * *
incorporate lens-mounted aiming pads
as specified for those units in Appendix
C of part 564 of this chapter,’’ which is
incorporated in paragraph S10.18.7.2 of
the final rule.
Koito requested that an alternative
measurement distance of 25 m be
permitted for the measurement of the
cutoff parameter for a visually/optically
aimed headlamp. Paragraph S14.10.1.5
of the NPRM, based upon the April 6,
2000 letter of interpretation to Mr.
Spingler,25 required the measurement
distance to be 10 m. One of the
objectives of the rewrite of Standard No.
108 is to improve the clarity of the
document without changing the
substance of the existing requirements.
The referenced letter of interpretation
states a specific measurement distance
without alternatives. Therefore, Koito’s
request would be a substantive change
beyond the scope of the rewrite and
paragraph S10.18.9.1.5 of the final rule
duplicates the requirement from the
NPRM.
S11 Replaceable Light Source
Requirements
Paragraph S15 of the NPRM,
Replaceable light source requirements,
is relocated to S11 in the final rule.
Paragraphs S15 and S15.1 from the
NPRM become paragraphs S11 and
S11.1, respectively, in the final rule.
Paragraph S15.4, Ballast markings, of
the NPRM becomes paragraph S11.2 in
the final rule and paragraph S15.5, Gas
discharge laboratory life, becomes
paragraph S11.3. Paragraph S15.6 of the
NPRM, containing requirements for
physical tests of replaceable light
sources, is split into paragraphs S11.4.1
and S11.4.2 in the final rule. Paragraph
S11.4.1 references the deflection test
and pressure test applicable to
replaceable light sources, which were
part of Table XXIII in the NPRM and
have been relocated to paragraph S14.7
in the final rule. Paragraph S11.4.2
references a restated power and flux
measurement test that is described in
paragraph S14.7.3 of the final rule,
noting that the performance
requirements for this test do not reside
in the main text of Standard No. 108,
but in the applicable appendix of part
564 of this chapter.
The NPRM contained paragraphs
S15.2 and S15.3, both titled Power and
flux measurement, which essentially
described the same test of replaceable
light sources. Recognizing that they
were test procedures and striving to
advance the objectives of the rewrite, we
25 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/21406.ztv.html
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
consolidated the procedures of
paragraphs S15.2 and 15.3 into a single
procedure, without revising or
modifying the requirements, and
relocated it to paragraph S14.7.3 of the
final rule.
S12 Headlamp Concealment Device
Requirements
The headlamp concealment device
requirements of S16 of the NPRM are
relocated intact to S12 of the final rule.
S13 Replaceable Headlamp Lens
Requirements
The replaceable headlamp lens
requirements of paragraph S18 of the
NPRM are relocated intact (split for
clarity) to paragraph S13 of the final
rule.
S14 Physical and Photometry Test
Procedures and Performance
Requirements
As previously mentioned, ASSN/
AAM and Grote commented that tables
containing significant amounts of text,
such as the test requirements in Tables
XXI, XXII, and XXIII of the NPRM, are
difficult to use because of lengthy
passages that contain several sentences
and express several unique test
conditions or requirements. We agree
with these comments. In the final rule,
we have moved virtually all test
procedures and their associated
performance requirements to S14.
General test procedures and
performance requirements that were
located in paragraph S6.8 of the NPRM
have been placed in paragraph S14.1 of
the final rule. Similarly, the photometric
test procedures of paragraph S6.8 of the
NPRM are now paragraph S14.2 of the
final rule.
Part of Table XXII of the NPRM, the
out of focus test applicable to
motorcycle headlamps designed to
conform to paragraph S10.17(b),
becomes paragraph S14.3 in the final
rule. The color test and plastic optical
materials test of Table XXII become
paragraph S14.4 in the final rule. The
remaining tests of Table XXII, the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test, become paragraph
S14.5 in the final rule.
All tests applicable to complete
headlamps included in Table XXIII of
the NPRM have been relocated to
paragraph S14.6 of the final rule. The
tests in Table XXIII of the NPRM related
to replaceable light sources become
paragraph S14.7 in the final rule. Tests
in Table XXIII of the NPRM that apply
to vehicle headlamp aiming devices
(VHAD) were relocated to be paragraph
S14.8 in the final rule. Also, the tests
applicable to associated equipment that
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
were located in Table XXI of the NPRM
become paragraph S14.9 in the final
rule.
S6.8.1 of the NPRM, stating that
lamps, reflective devices, and associated
equipment regulated by Standard No.
108 be designed to conform to
applicable physical test requirements,
becomes paragraph S14.1.1 of the final
rule. This is followed by proposed
paragraphs S6.8.4 and S.8.4.1 of the
NPRM, applicable to plastic optical
materials, which become paragraphs
S14.1.2 and S14.1.3, respectively, in the
final rule. Bayer had asked that the
word ‘‘reflex’’ be placed before the word
‘‘reflector’’ in paragraph S14.1.2 but we
prefer to keep the language faithful to
paragraph S5.1.2 of the current version
of Standard No. 108. Paragraph S14.1.4,
Samples, of the final rule is paragraph
S6.8.2 (split for clarity) of the NPRM,
except for the sentence ‘‘A mounting
bracket with a sample headlamp
installed must not have a resonant
frequency in the 10–55 Hz. range’’
which was relocated to paragraph
S14.6.8.1 in the final rule because of its
specific applicability to the vibration
test for headlamps. Paragraph S6.8.3 of
the NPRM is now paragraph S14.1.5 of
the final rule.
Paragraph S6.8.5 of the NPRM
becomes paragraph S14.2, Photometric
test procedures, in the final rule.
Paragraph S6.8.5.1 was split for clarity
and becomes paragraph S14.2.1 in the
final rule. Nissan commented that the
measurement distance requirements in
paragraph S6.8.5.1 were confusing
because they mentioned license plate
lamps and headlamps. We agree and
have revised the text of paragraph
S14.2.1.3 of the final rule to expressly
state the required distance for all lamps
that paragraph S14.2.1 applies to.
Nissan also noted that proposed
paragraph S6.8.5.1 contained a
requirement for photometric intensity
between test points that was duplicated
in several photometry requirements
tables as a footnote. We eliminated this
language from paragraph S14.2.1 of the
final rule, deciding that the individual
requirements tables were the
appropriate location for the intensity
between test point requirements.
Paragraph S6.8.5.1.1 of the NPRM
becomes, in its entirety, paragraph
S14.2.1.4 (split for clarity) of the final
rule. Paragraph S6.8.5.1.2, detailing
requirements for photometry of multiple
compartment lamps and multiple
lamps, becomes paragraph S14.2.1.5 in
the final rule. We adopted the
suggestion of Koito to specifically
indicate the type of lamps to which this
section applies.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Paragraph S6.8.5.2 of the NPRM
becomes paragraph S14.2.1.6 (split for
clarity) in the final rule. Paragraph
S14.2.1.6.2 was added to this section at
the suggestion of Calcoast, which
observed that the NPRM had not
included the content of Footnotes 2 and
3, which follow Table IV, of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108. The last
sentence of paragraph S6.8.2, which
specifically addressed samples for the
color test of reflex reflectors, was moved
to be paragraph S14.4.1.1 of the final
rule.
Paragraph S6.8.5.3, License plate
lamp photometry, of the NPRM becomes
paragraph S14.2.2 in the final rule.
Paragraphs S6.8.5.3.1 and S6.8.5.3.2 of
the NPRM become paragraphs S14.2.2.1
and S14.2.2.2, respectively, in the final
rule. Nissan observed that the language
of paragraph S6.8.5.3.2 was awkward
and suggested a revision that did not
change the substance of the
requirement. We adopted Nissan’s
suggestion in paragraph S14.2.2.2. We
also added paragraph S14.2.2.3 to the
final rule to clarify that the bulb
requirements of paragraph S14.2.1.6
also apply to license plate lamp
photometry.
Proposed paragraph S6.8.5.4, stating
requirements for reflex reflector and
retroreflective sheeting photometry,
becomes paragraph S14.2.3 in the final
rule. For clarity, paragraph S6.8.5.4 of
the NPRM has been split into
paragraphs S14.2.3.1 through S14.2.3.6
and paragraph S6.8.5.4.1 has been split
into paragraphs S14.2.3.7.1 through
S14.2.3.8.2 in the final rule. Likewise,
paragraph S6.8.5.4.1.1 in the NPRM
becomes paragraph S14.2.3.8.3.1 in the
final rule.
3M commented that the language of
paragraph S6.8.5.4.1 of the NPRM,
which is paragraph S14.2.3.7 of the final
rule, did not allow a complete
photometric evaluation of retroreflective
sheeting because a presentation angle
was not specified. 3M’s premise was
that the test method of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 relies on
conventions regarding orientation and
presentation that are part of ASTM E
810, Standard Test Method for
Coefficient of Retroreflection of
Retroreflective Sheeting Utilizing the
Coplaner Geometry, which is referenced
by ASTM D 4956, Standard
Specification for Retroreflective
Sheeting for Traffic Control, a document
3M contends is no longer referenced in
the NPRM. This contention is incorrect.
The reference to ASTM D 4956, from
paragraph S5.7.1.2 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, is replicated
in paragraph S7.12.1 of the NPRM and
finally by paragraph S8.2.1.2 of the final
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
rule, with consistent language
throughout. Since the connection to
ASTM E 810 still exists, we see no
reason to modify the final rule as 3M
suggested.
Nissan suggested that the language
concerning the mounting of a reflex test
sample for photometry, which becomes
paragraph S14.2.3.1 of the final rule, did
not allow for a test chamber which does
not provide a linear 100 foot test
distance, but rather was arranged in a
non-horizontal orientation. We do not
agree and, therefore, have not changed
the text from the NPRM to the final rule.
The procedure of paragraph S14.2.3.1 is
faithful to the language of paragraph
3.1.7 of SAE J594f, Reflex Reflectors,
January 1977, incorporated by reference
in the current version of FMVSS 108.
The reflex reflector photometry test,
like all tests in Standard No. 108,
describes a procedure that NHTSA
would use to test a reflex reflector for
purposes of compliance. It also
describes the performance requirements
that the reflector must be designed to
conform to, when tested according to
the procedure. If a manufacturer
chooses to use a procedure that differs
with that described in FMVSS No. 108
as its basis of compliance, or to establish
a basis of compliance that does not rely
on an actual test, it is free to do so.
However, the manufacturer must
exercise due care in designing its
product to conform to the performance
requirements of all applicable tests in
Standard No. 108 when tested according
to the procedures stated in the standard.
Paragraph S6.8.5.5, Daytime running
lamp (DRL) photometry measurements,
of the NPRM becomes paragraph S14.2.4
(split for clarity) of the final rule.
Paragraph S14.2.4.3 was added to the
final rule to clarify that the bulb
requirements of paragraph S14.2.1.6
also apply to DRL photometry.
Nissan expressed some confusion
regarding how a dedicated DRL, without
any equipment that alters or conditions
the voltage, should have power applied
to it for photometric testing as stated in
paragraph S14.2.4. We are unable to
answer this question as part of the
rewrite process and note Nissan can
request an interpretation for this
specific situation.
Paragraph S6.8.5.6 of the NPRM,
covering photometry measurements of
headlamps, becomes paragraph S14.2.5
in the final rule. Some rearrangement of
content and splitting of sections for
clarity was incorporated into the final
rule. Specifically, paragraph S14.2.5.1 of
the final rule contains the first sentence
of paragraph S6.8.5.6 of the NPRM,
paragraph S14.2.5.2 contains the last
sentence of paragraph S6.8.5.6.5,
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68253
paragraph S14.2.5.3 contains the last
sentence of paragraph S6.8.5.6,
paragraph S14.2.5.4 duplicates
paragraph S6.8.5.6.1, paragraph
S14.2.5.5 duplicates paragraph
S6.8.5.6.2, paragraphs S14.2.5.5.1 and
S14.2.5.5.2 duplicate paragraphs
S6.8.5.6.2(a) and S6.8.5.6.2(b)
respectively, paragraph S14.2.5.5.3
(split for clarity) duplicates paragraph
S6.8.5.6.2(c), paragraph S14.2.5.5.4
duplicates paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(d),
paragraph S14.2.5.5.5 (split for clarity)
duplicates paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(e),
paragraph S14.2.5.5.6 (split for clarity)
duplicates paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(f),
paragraph S14.2.5.5.7 (split for clarity)
duplicates paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(g),
paragraph S14.2.5.5.8 duplicates
paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(i), and paragraph
S14.2.5.5.9 duplicates paragraph
S6.8.5.6.2(j). Paragraph S6.8.5.6.2 of the
NPRM becomes paragraph S14.2.5.6 of
the final rule, paragraph S6.8.5.6.4
becomes paragraph S14.2.5.7 (split for
clarity), paragraph S6.8.5.6.5 (less the
last sentence) becomes paragraph
S14.2.5.8 (split for clarity), and
paragraph S6.8.5.6.6 becomes paragraph
S14.2.5.9. Guide commented that
paragraph S6.8.5.6.2(h) of the NPRM
described photometry measurement for
moveable reflector headlamps rather
than an aiming procedure and did not
belong where it was located. We agree
and have designated this provision as
paragraph S14.2.5.10 in the final rule.
AAM and Honda objected to the word
‘‘specified’’ which appeared before
‘‘position relative to the * * *’’ in the
NPRM. We omitted ‘‘specified’’ in the
final rule to be faithful to paragraph
S7.8.2.2(b) of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108. We also added a
horizontal range exclusion for visually/
optically aimed moveable reflector
headlamps with a fixed horizontal aim
to be faithful to paragraph S7.8.2.2(d) of
the current version of FMVSS No. 108,
as noted in the comments of Nissan.
Paragraph S14.3 of the final rule
contains the out of focus test that was
part of Table XXII of the NPRM. This
test only applies to motorcycle
headlamps that are designed to conform
to paragraph S10.17(b) of the final rule.
AAM identified two typographical
errors in the out of focus test procedure
where there were no periods after the
abbreviations ‘‘in’’. Our practice is to
not include a period after such
abbreviations, so the text identified by
AAM is correct although in several
other instances we did include a period
after such an abbreviation. In the final
rule we have removed periods after all
such abbreviations, except in those
situations where other grammatical
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68254
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
requirements, such as the end of a
sentence, require a period.
Paragraph S14.4 of the final rule,
General test procedures and
performance requirements, contains the
color test and plastic optical materials
test, along with applicable
requirements, from Table XXII of the
NPRM. In both tests, the text as stated
in the NPRM has been split for clarity
in the final rule.
AAM noted that the Scope of SAE
J578c, Color Specification for Electric
Signal Lighting Devices, February 1977,
contains limitations on the application
of this standard that may be important
to lighting manufacturers. This portion
of SAE J578c was inadvertently left out
of Table XXII in the NPRM. In the final
rule, we have added it as paragraph
S14.4.1. This section will now read,
‘‘The requirement applies to the overall
effective color of light emitted by the
device and not to the color of the light
from a small area of the lens. It does not
apply to any pilot, indicator, or tell-tale
lights. The color of the sample device
* * *’’
Paragraph S14.4.1.1 of the final rule,
detailing alternatives for samples used
in the color test of reflex reflectors,
originated from the last sentence of
paragraph S6.8.2 of the NPRM.
Koito, 3M, and Honda commented
that the language of the performance
requirement for the color test for the
color yellow using the visual evaluation
method omitted a key word. In the
NPRM, the requirement is stated as,
‘‘Yellow (Amber) is acceptable if it is
less saturated (paler), greener, or redder
than the limit standard.’’ The revised
text in the final rule states, ‘‘Yellow
(Amber) is not acceptable if it is less
saturated (paler), greener, or redder than
the limit standard’’ [emphasis added].
AAM commented that the color
restricted blue should be included in
the final rule because it appears in SAE
J578c. We know of no requirements in
Standard No. 108 for the light from a
lamp or the color of a lens material to
be restricted blue. We also observed that
there are also no such requirements for
the colors green or blue. Therefore, we
have not only decided against adding
requirements for restricted blue but also
have removed the requirements for the
colors blue and green for both the visual
evaluation method and the tristimulus
evaluation method of the color test of
paragraph S14.4.1 in the final rule.
AAM commented that Section 3.2,
Tristimulus Method, from SAE J578c is
not stated in its entirety in the
procedure column of the color test of
proposed Table XXII. We have reviewed
SAE J578c and the text of the
Tristimulus Method procedure from
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
proposed Table XXII. We do not find
that the text of proposed Table XXII
omitted any substantive portion of SAE
J578c that describes how the test is
performed. In the absence of any
specific explanation of its comments by
AAM, we are not revising the
Tristimulus Method section, now
located in paragraph S14.4.1.4 of the
final rule.
Paragraph S14.4.2 of the final rule
contains the plastic optical materials
tests from Table XXII of the NPRM.
Atlas, Bayer, Grote, and AAM
commented that the performance
requirement for headlamp lens materials
after the outdoor exposure test portion
of the plastic optical materials tests in
Table XXII of the NPRM was not
identical to that stated in Section 4.2.3
of SAE J576 JUL91. The language of the
NPRM stated that the requirement was
no haze greater than 0% when measured
by ASTM D 1033 (1992). SAE J576
JUL91 states the requirement as ‘‘shall
show no deterioration.’’
Koito noted that while the
measurement method of ASTM D 1033
(1992) was required for evaluation of the
post exposure haze of other materials, it
was not required for the evaluation of
headlamps. Koito also stated that the
post exposure performance
requirements for luminous
transmittance and color required by
SAE J576 at Sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 are
missing from the NPRM. We agree with
these comments and have revised the
plastic optical materials test outdoor
exposure test portion performance
requirements accordingly. Specifically,
the performance requirement section for
headlamp lenses, now paragraph
S14.4.2.2.4.2 of the final rule, no longer
requires evaluation by ASTM D 1033
(1992) and states, ‘‘After completion of
the outdoor exposure test, materials
used for headlamp lenses must show no
deterioration.’’ The performance
requirement section for luminous
transmittance, now paragraph
S14.4.2.2.4.4, states, ‘‘After completion
of the outdoor exposure test, all
materials, when compared with the
unexposed control samples, must not
have their luminous transmittance
changed by more than 25% when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 308–66
(1973) using CIE Illuminant A (2856K).’’
The performance requirement section
for color, now paragraph S14.4.2.2.4.5,
states, ‘‘After completion of the outdoor
exposure test, all materials must
conform to the color test of this standard
in the range of thickness stated by the
material manufacturer.’’
Bayer stated that specifying 2.3 mm
thick test samples for the plastic optical
materials tests represents a change from
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the current version of FMVSS No. 108
and may increase the testing burden of
the industry. We do not believe that
specifying 2.3 mm thick samples is a
change from current requirements. SAE
J576 JUL91 does only suggest 2.3 mm
samples, paragraph S5.2.1 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 (and
paragraph S5.1 of the NPRM) states that,
‘‘The words ‘It is recommended that’,
‘recommendations’, or ‘should be’
appearing in any SAE Standard or
Recommended Practice referenced or
subreferenced by this standard shall be
read as setting forth mandatory
requirements * * *’’ We consider the
term ‘‘suggest’’ to have a similar
meaning as the term ‘‘should be’’ and
have therefore included 2.3 mm as one
of the sample thicknesses used for the
plastic optical material test. We believe
there is value in specifying sample
thickness. The inclusion of the 2.3 mm
sample thickness also serves to alert
regulated parties that should the agency
choose to perform a compliance test, it
will perform the test on this sample
thickness.
AAM suggested eliminating the
notation concerning test samples having
32 sq cm of exposed area from the
Procedure column of Table XXII of the
NPRM and allowing it to remain in the
Samples column of the outdoor
exposure test portion of the plastic
optical materials tests. We do not agree
with this suggestion. The area
requirement is important in both the
preparation of the samples and their
mounting orientation for the exposure
test. An area specification is appropriate
in both places and is included in both
paragraph S14.4.2.1.2 and paragraph
S14.4.2.2.3.1 of the final rule.
The NPRM omitted the third sentence
of SAE J576 JUL91 Section 3.3.2
requiring that samples be mounted in
the open with a minimum 30 cm (11.8
in) separation from their background.
This has been corrected in the final rule
by including the separation requirement
in paragraph S14.4.2.2.3.1.
AAM suggested that content of the
Samples column of Table XXII of the
NPRM for the outdoor exposure test
portion of the plastic optical material
tests be repeated for the heat test portion
separately. We agree that this would add
clarity. We have revised the heat test
portion of the plastic optical materials
tests to appear as a test separate from
the outdoor exposure test and have
placed content specific to the heat test
into paragraph S14.4.2.3 of the final
rule.
Paragraph S14.5 of the final rule,
Signal lamp and reflective device test
procedures and performance
requirements, contains the vibration,
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
moisture, dust, and corrosion tests that
were located in Table XXII of the
NPRM.
As previously mentioned, the
references in the NPRM to SAE J577,
Vibration Test Machine, April 1964,
have been eliminated in the final rule
with the incorporation of the drawing
and mechanical details of the vibration
machine as Figure 21. The reference in
the vibration test procedure to SAE J577
has been revised to Figure 21 in
paragraph S14.5.1.1 of the final rule.
AAM, Honda, and Guide commented
about the inadvertent omission of the
phrase ‘‘one hour’’ from the moisture
test procedure of Table XXII of the
NPRM. This is corrected in the final rule
where paragraph S14.5.2.1, second
sentence, states, ‘‘* * * followed by a
one hour drain period * * *’’
We have decided that the first
sentence of the moisture test
performance requirements of the NPRM
stating, ‘‘After completion of the
moisture test * * *’’ is more
appropriately part of the test procedure.
Therefore, we are relocating it to be the
last sentence of paragraph S14.5.2.1 of
the final rule.
Calcoast commented that the moisture
test performance requirement for a
sealed reflex unit stated in SAE J594f,
January 1977, at Section 3.1.4 is ‘‘any
visible moisture constitutes a failure.’’
We agree and have revised the moisture
test performance requirements of
paragraph S14.5.2.2 in the final rule to
state ‘‘Accumulation of moisture in
excess of 2 cc, or any visible moisture
in a sealed reflex unit, must constitute
a failure.’’
AAM noted that the dust test of Table
XXII of the NPRM is not required to be
performed on sealed units per SAE
J575d, August 1967, Section G, and SAE
J575e, August 1970, Section G. We agree
and in the final rule paragraph
S14.5.3.1, Samples states, ‘‘A sealed
unit is not required to meet the
requirements of this test.’’ We also
decided that the first sentence of the
performance requirements of the dust
test stating, ‘‘After completion of the
dust test the exterior surface of the
device must be cleaned’’ was part of the
test procedure rather than a
performance requirement so that
sentence was moved to paragraph
S14.5.3.2 in the final rule.
Paragraph S14.6 of the final rule,
Headlamp physical test procedures and
performance requirements, consists of
all headlamp test procedures from Table
XXIII of the NPRM, except for those that
apply specifically to replaceable light
sources or vehicle headlamp aiming
devices (VHAD). Several of the tests that
become paragraph S14.6 had significant
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
portions of their text split for clarity as
part of their relocation from Table XXIII
of the NPRM to paragraph S14.6 of the
final rule. These tests include: (1)
Abrasion test, (2) chemical resistance
test, (3) corrosion connector test, (4)
dust test, (5) temperature cycle test, (6)
internal heat test, (7) humidity test, (8)
sealing test, (9) chemical resistance of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps,
(10) corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps, (11) torque
deflection test, and (12) both aiming
adjustment tests.
Honda commented that the pad
cycling rate of the abrasion test
procedure of Table XXIII of the NPRM
contained typographical errors. We
agree and have revised the text in
paragraph S14.6.1.1.3 of the final rule
from ‘‘11 cycles at 10 ± cm per second
* * *’’ to the correct language from the
current version of FMVSS No. 108
paragraph S8.2(b) which is, ‘‘* * * 11
cycles at 4 ± 0.8 in (10 ± 2 cm) per
second * * *.’’
AAM stated the requirement that the
same sample headlamp be used in both
the temperature cycle test and the
internal heat test was not supported in
the current version of FMVSS No. 108.
We disagree. The current version of
Standard No. 108 states, concerning
integral beam headlamps at paragraph
S7.4(h)(5), ‘‘The headlamp shall meet
the requirements of subparagraph (i)
and then those of subparagraph (ii)
[emphasis added]. Subparagraph (i)
describes a temperature cycle test in
accordance with paragraph S8.6.1 and
subparagraph (ii) describes an internal
heat test in accordance with paragraph
S8.6.2. Paragraph S7.5(h)(i) requires
replaceable bulb headlamps to meet the
same physical tests in paragraphs 7.4(g)
and S7.4(h) that are required of an
integral beam headlamp. Thus, there is
a very clear requirement that a single
headlamp sample be used, in sequence,
in the temperature cycle test and then
the internal heat test.
Guide and VS commented that the
humidity test of Table XXIII of the
NPRM incorrectly included a
performance requirement of post-test
photometry. We agree, and the post-test
photometry provision has been removed
from the humidity test, which is
contained in paragraph S14.6.7.2 of the
final rule.
Honda and AAM observed a
typographical error in the tolerance for
air flow uniformity in paragraph (d) of
the humidity test procedure. The text of
the NPRM states, ‘‘* * * each grid point
is 10% of the average * * *’’ while the
corrected text of paragraph S14.6.7.1.6
of the final rule states, ‘‘* * * each grid
point is ± 10% of the average* * *’’
PO 00000
Frm 00023
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68255
which is faithful to paragraph S8.7(d) of
the current version of FMVSS No. 108.
As we mentioned in the discussion of
paragraph S14.5, the references in the
NPRM to SAE J577, Vibration Test
Machine, April 1964, have been
eliminated in the final rule with the
incorporation of the drawing and
mechanical details of the machine as
Figure 21. The reference in the vibration
test procedure of Table XXIII of the
NPRM to SAE J577 has been revised to
Figure 21 in the final rule.
Nissan observed that the applicability
of the chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test and
the corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test did not
include integral beam headlamps, as
required by paragraph S5.8.11 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108. Its
comment is correct and paragraph
S10.14.7.6 of the final rule correctly
states the requirement for these two
tests.
Koito and Nissan questioned whether
the inward force test of Table XXIII
applied to headlamps other than sealed
beams, particularly those headlamps
that utilize a VHAD or are visually/
optically aimed. This requirement
comes from paragraph S7.8.5.1(b) of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108. That
paragraph states, ‘‘when a headlamp is
installed on a motor vehicle, its aim in
any direction shall not change by more
than 0.30 degree nor shall the lamp
recede more than 0.1 in (2.5 mm) after
being subjected to an inward force of 50
pounds (222 newtons) applied evenly to
the lens parallel to the mechanical
axis.’’ There is no distinction in this
paragraph to any particular type of
headlamp, so it must be applied to all
headlamps.
Nissan commented that the
performance requirements of the aiming
adjustment test (laboratory) were
‘‘difficult to read’’ as presented but did
not explain the difficulties or suggest
alternative language. In the final rule,
we have split the performance
requirements of this test into paragraphs
S14.6.17.2.1, S14.6.17.2.2, and
S14.6.17.2.3, which we believe will
improve clarity.
Paragraph S14.7 of the final rule,
Replaceable light source physical test
procedures and performance
requirements, consists of the deflection
test for replaceable light sources and the
pressure test for replaceable light
sources from Table XXIII of the NPRM,
along with a replaceable light source
power and flux measurement procedure.
The text of all of these items has been
split for clarity in the final rule. There
were no comments submitted that
impacted the substance of these
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68256
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
procedures and requirements. However
as mentioned in the discussion of
paragraph S11, the NPRM contained
paragraphs S15.2 and S15.3, both titled
Power and flux measurement, that
essentially described the same test of
replaceable light sources. We
consolidated the procedures of
paragraphs S15.2 and S15.3 into a single
procedure, without revising or
modifying the requirements, and
relocated it to paragraph S14.7.3 of the
final rule.
Paragraph S14.8 of the final rule,
Vehicle headlamp aiming device
(VHAD) physical test procedures and
performance requirements, consists of
the six VHAD tests that were part of
Table XXIII of the NPRM. There were no
comments submitted that impacted the
substance of these procedures and
requirements.
Paragraph S14.9 of the final rule,
Associated equipment physical test
procedures and performance
requirements, consists of the tests
contained in Table XXI of the NPRM.
These test procedures and performance
requirements, as written in Table XXI of
the NPRM, were in block paragraph
form. As we have done in several places
throughout the final rule, we have split
some of these longer paragraphs into
several smaller sections, which are
grouped according to similar content, in
an effort to improve clarity.
One of the goals of the FMVSS No.
108 rewrite was to remove outdated
requirements from the document. The
physical test requirements for associated
equipment presented an opportunity to
pursue this goal. The applicable SAE
documents incorporated by reference in
FMVSS No. 108 were adopted between
1964 and 1969 and several of them
contained specifications for both
vehicles with a nominal 12 volt
electrical system as well as those with
a nominal 6 volt electrical system.
Believing that few, if any, vehicles
manufactured after the effective date of
FMVSS No. 108 have been equipped
with a nominal 6 volt electrical system,
we deleted references to that voltage in
the proposal.
In its comments, AAM requested that
we restore the nominal 6 volt
requirements to the physical test
requirements for associated equipment.
Presumably, this comment was based
upon the knowledge that one of its
constituent organizations was producing
a 6 volt device for a regulated vehicle
or had plans to do so. While we
continue to believe that those
requirements are not currently being
used by any regulated party, we do not
want to eliminate a compliance option
that has value. Therefore, we have
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
restored the applicable language from
the SAE documents 26 incorporated by
reference in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 for testing devices used
in a nominal 6 volt electrical system.
The restoration of nominal 6 volt
requirements necessitated revisions in
the following portions of paragraph
S14.9 of the final rule: (1) S14.9.1 turn
signal operating unit durability test
procedure, (2) S14.9.2.2 vehicular
hazard warning signal operating unit
durability performance requirements,
and (3) S14.9.3 turn signal flasher and
vehicular hazard warning signal flasher
test procedure and performance
requirements.
AAM and Honda commented that the
reference in the turn signal operating
unit durability test procedure in Table
XXI of the NPRM incorrectly stated the
ripple voltage tolerance of the power
supply. We agree and have revised the
language of that procedure in the final
rule. The text ‘‘ * * * ripple voltage of
less than 5% * * * was changed to
‘‘ * * * ripple voltage of not more than
5% * * *.’’
The turn signal flasher and vehicular
hazard warning signal flasher both
maintained their reference to SAE
J823b, Flasher Test Equipment, April
1968, in the NPRM. As previously
mentioned, this document was
eliminated from the final rule by
incorporating its content directly into
Standard No. 108. This was
accomplished in the final rule by
creating Figure 22, Flasher Standard
Test Circuit, for the circuit diagram of
Figure 1 of SAE J823b, and also by
listing the test setup requirements of
Sections 3 through 9 of SAE J823b in
paragraph S14.9.3 of the final rule as
well as the power supply specifications
for testing performance requirements
and those specifications for testing
durability requirements that were
Section 10 of SAE J823b into paragraph
S14.9.3.2 of the final rule.
Koito commented on the load
requirements (from paragraph S5.1.1.19
of the current version of FMVSS No.
108) for variable load turn signal
flashers for the turn signal flasher
starting time test and the flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test. In the
proposal, this information was located
parenthetically after the notation
‘‘Starting time test’’ and ‘‘Flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test’’. We
agree with Koito that this is not the
26 SAE J589, Turn Signal Operating Units, April
1964; SAE J910, Vehicular Hazard Warning Signal
Operating Unit, January 1966; SAE J945, Vehicular
Hazard Warning Signal Flasher, February 1966;
SAE J590b, Automotive Turn Signal Flashers,
October 1965; and SAE J823b, Flasher Test
Equipment, April 1968.
PO 00000
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
optimum location for this provision,
and have inserted it into the applicable
test procedure in the final rule. Where
those proposed procedures stated
‘‘* * * with the design load connected
* * *’’ the text of the final rule now
states ‘‘* * * with the design load
(variable load flashers are tested with
their minimum and their maximum
design load) connected * * *.’’
Koito and AAM observed that load
specifications stated in the procedure
for the turn signal flasher voltage drop
test and durability test procedures did
not clearly replicate the requirements
from paragraph S5.1.1.19 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, and SAE
J590b, October 1965, Section 2. We have
revised the language of those procedures
in the final rule to clarify the load
specifications. The proposed procedures
stated ‘‘* * * with the maximum design
load connected * * *’’ which has
changed in the final rule to state ‘‘ * * *
with the design load (variable load
flashers are tested with their maximum
design load) connected * * *.’’
Honda observed that the durability
test performance requirements for the
vehicular hazard warning signal flasher
did not include the notation from SAE
J945, February 1966, Section 7,
requiring the post durability test to
incorporate pilot lamps as part of the
maximum design load. We agree and
have revised the language of the
performance requirements in paragraph
S14.9.3.10.3 of the final rule from
‘‘ * * * maximum design load at an
ambient * * * ’’ to ‘‘maximum design
load, including pilot lamps as specified
by the manufacturer, at an
ambient* * *.’’
Honda, AAM, and Koito all
commented that the column headings
for the semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test
performance requirements were
incorrect. We agree and have revised
them in paragraph S14.9.3.11.2.3.1 of
the final rule. They now read from left
to right: Test position (degrees) [above
the two columns of lateral and vertical
test points], Dim (cd at 100 ft), and Hold
(cd at 100 ft).
Honda observed that the maximum
dim sensitivity at test point H–5R was
incorrectly stated in the NPRM as 100
(cd at 100 feet). The correct value is 150
(cd at 100 feet) as shown in Table 1 of
SAE J565b, February 1969. We
incorporated this revision in the final
rule.
Koito also commented that the
semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test
procedure incorrectly refers to ‘‘dim’’
sensitivity in the NPRM. The correct
notation is ‘‘hold’’ sensitivity and that is
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
what appears in paragraph
S14.9.3.11.3.1.2 of the final rule.
AAM commented that the language of
the semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test
performance requirement of the NPRM
was not faithful to SAE J565b, February
1969, Section 4.5. We have revised that
language in paragraph S14.9.3.11.5.2 of
the final rule to be identical to the first
sentence of Section 4.5, specifically, ‘‘If
the warmup time of the device exceeds
10 seconds, it must maintain the
headlamps on lower beam during
warmup.’’
Tables
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table I–a
Portion of Proposed Table I
As mentioned previously, we have
decided to split Table I of the NPRM
into three sections. Table I–a lists lamp
and reflective device requirements for
passenger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, trucks, and buses of all widths.
Where we refer to comments about the
content of Table I–a, it indicates that
those comments were submitted about
the content of the portion of Table I of
the NPRM now contained in Table I–a
of the final rule.
Based on comments submitted to the
docket regarding our proposal, we have
decided to make several revisions to
Table I–a. One of these revisions was
the inclusion of the abbreviation ‘‘MPV’’
in parenthesis after the term
‘‘Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle’’ in
the title of Table I–a. We have
subsequently used this abbreviation
several times in this document.
Guide commented that the reference
in Table I for the number and color of
headlamps does not directly state a
number but instead makes an additional
reference to Table II. We do not find this
method difficult or complex, it
somewhat duplicates the method of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108. Subreferencing is necessary because the
number of headlamps actually used
depends on the headlighting system
chosen. We clarified the language of
Table I–a for the number of upper beam
and lower beam headlamps from
‘‘ * * * type and number * * * ’’ to
‘‘ * * * headlighting system * * * ’’ to
more precisely describe this sub
reference.
AAM and Koito commented about the
inclusion of the phrase ‘‘ * * * equal to
or wider than the upper beam
headlamps’’ in the mounting location
description for lower beam headlamps
along with the corresponding phrase
‘‘ * * * equal to or narrower than the
lower beam headlamps’’ in the
mounting location description for the
upper beam headlamps. They, along
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
with Honda, which commented about
the same language in Table I relating to
motorcycle headlamps, believe that this
phrase is inconsistent with the current
FMVSS No. 108 requirement. We agree
that it does not fully describe the
relationship required between upper
and lower beam headlamps. We
removed this language from Tables I–a
and I–c of the final rule and
incorporated headlamp beam spacing
requirements in paragraph S6.1.3.5.
AAM commented that the activation
requirement for turn signal lamps
stating, ‘‘Current 108 paragraph
S5.1.1.19 references SAE J590b * * * in
which Figure 1 combines flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time. This figure
appears as Figure 2 in Rewrite 108.
There is no reference to percent current
‘‘on’’ time in Rewrite 108 Table I. We
are unable to find a reference to Rewrite
Figure 108 anywhere within the Rewrite
108 text.’’ The reference to NPRM
Figure 2 is contained in Table XXI
which details the performance of turn
signal (and vehicular hazard warning
signal) flashers, specifically in the
performance requirements for the Flash
Rate and Percent Current ‘‘On’’ Time
Test. We agree that including the rate of
60 to 120 flashes per minute in Table I
is a detail that is not needed. The flash
rate will be determined by the choice of
flasher and its performance when
subjected to the test of paragraph
S14.9.3. Therefore, we are revising the
Device Activation requirement for turn
signal lamps in Table I–a (and the
corresponding requirement in Table I–b
for trailers and in Table I–c for
motorcycles) to read, ‘‘Flash when the
turn signal flasher is actuated by the
turn signal operating unit.’’ This
statement more accurately describes the
process by which the turn signal lamps
are caused to flash.
AAM, Honda, and Koito commented
about the activation requirements for
taillamps, side marker lamps, and
license plate lamps with respect to their
required activation when the parking
lamps are activated. AAM contended
that the NPRM does not clearly state
that the taillamps, side marker lamps,
and license plate lamps are required to
be activated when the parking lamps are
activated only on vehicles less than
2032 mm in overall width. To clarify
those requirements, we revised the
language of the activation requirement
from * * * ‘‘Must be activated when
the headlamps are activated in a steady
burning state or the parking lamps are
activated (not a requirement for vehicles
2032 mm or more in overall width)‘‘, to
* * * ‘‘Must be activated when the
headlamps are activated in a steady
burning state or the parking lamps on
PO 00000
Frm 00025
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68257
passenger cars and MPVs, trucks, and
buses less than 80 inches in overall
width are activated.’’ This revision was
made to the Device Activation
requirements for taillamps, side marker
lamps, intermediate side marker lamps,
and license plate lamps in Table I–a.
AAM also commented that the
activation requirement for a stop lamp
optically combined with a turn signal
lamp was not stated in Table I using the
language from SAE J586 FEB84, at
Section 5.4.2 and SAE J1398 MAY85,
also at Section 5.4.2. One of the stated
intentions of the rewrite is to clarify
requirements without making
substantive changes to them. Although
we were satisfied with the language of
the NPRM in this situation, we revised
the language to be faithful to the original
SAE language. We replaced the third
sentence of the Device Activation
requirement for stop lamps in Table I–
a with ‘‘When a stop signal is optically
combined with the turn signal, the
circuit must be such that the stop signal
cannot be turned on if the turn signal is
flashing.’’ Identical revisions have been
made in Table I–b for trailers and Table
I–c for motorcycles.
We have corrected an omission in
Table I–a with respect to the
requirements applicable to a truck
tractor. The current version of FMVSS
No. 108 excludes, in paragraph S5.1.1.2,
a truck tractor from being required to be
equipped with any rear side marker
devices, rear clearance lamps, and rear
identification lamps. The NPRM
included this exclusion for rear side
marker lamps, rear clearance lamps, and
rear identification lamps but failed to
include the notation for rear side reflex
reflectors. This has been corrected in the
final rule.
TTMA stated in its comments that the
partial photometric output exclusion for
clearance lamps mounted other than on
the front or rear of a vehicle where
necessary to indicate overall vehicle
width or protect the lamps from
damage, appearing in paragraph S5.3.2.1
of the current version of FMVSS No.
108, does not appear in the NPRM. The
exclusion for mounting location does
appear in the Mounting Location portion
of Table I–a for both front and rear
clearance lamps (and has been added to
Table I–b for trailer clearance lamps).
The photometric output exclusion for
such lamps appears in Table XI as
Footnote 4, which is the appropriate
location for this detail.
TTMA also called attention to an
interpretative rule issued by the agency
in 1999 and published at 64 FR 16358 27
27 64
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
FR 16358, (April 5, 1999).
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68258
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
which quantifies the requirement that
clearance lamps and identification
lamps be mounted ‘‘as near the top as
practicable’’ and describes how
‘‘practicability’’ will be determined for
these lamps when mounted on a vehicle
with cargo doors. We agree that this
interpretative rule concerning
presumption of practicability is
important to include in FMVSS No. 108.
Therefore, we have added to the
Mounting Height portion of Table I–a,
applicable to rear clearance lamps and
rear identification lamps (and to those
same lamps in Table I–b applicable to
trailers), the sentence ‘‘Practicability of
locating lamps on the vehicle header is
presumed when the header extends at
least 25 mm (1 inch) above the rear
doors.’’
ASSN commented that the
incorporation of the May 26, 2000 letter
of interpretation to Mr. Farber 28
permitting stop lamps to be activated
when a vehicle is slowed by a device
designed to retard the motion of a
vehicle, should also be extended to
activation of a high-mounted stop lamp.
The Farber interpretation was issued
several years after high-mounted stop
lamps were first required on vehicles
but does not explicitly address their
activation. The current version of
FMVSS No. 108 contains, in paragraph
S5.5.4, slightly different activation
requirements for stop lamps and for
high-mounted stop lamps. It states,
‘‘The stop lamps on each vehicle shall
be activated upon application of the
service brakes. The high-mounted stop
lamp on each vehicle shall be activated
only upon application of the service
brakes’’ (emphasis added). This
difference in activation requirements is
explained in the September 10, 1990
letter of interpretation to Mr.
Henneberger 29 which states, ‘‘ * * *
The second sentence of S5.5.4 restricts
operation of the center stop lamp to
application of the service brakes, but no
such restriction exists in the first
sentence. Although the first sentence
requires operation of the stop lamps
upon application of the service brakes,
when considered in conjunction with
the restriction stated in the second
sentence, it can be read as implying that
there may be other conditions under
which activation of the stop lamps is
permissible. However the reason for the
difference in the two sentences is
otherwise. Commonly, in red rear
combination lamps, the same filament
serves both the stop and turn signal
functions. If the turn signal is
28 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/21341.ztv.html
29 https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/gm/90/nht90–
3.93.html
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
functioning when the brakes are
applied, the first sentence ensures that
the stop signal overrides the turn
signal.’’
The Farber interpretation was
incorporated into the NPRM because of
its conclusion that, ‘‘ * * * when a
vehicle is slowed by downshifting or an
engine retarder, from the perspective of
the following driver, it would be
equivalent to what would occur if the
service brakes were applied. Therefore,
it would be permissible for the stop
lamps to be illuminated under this
scenario, since such illumination would
not create any confusion in the mind of
a following driver and thus would not
‘‘impair the effectiveness’’ of the
required stop lamps.’’ Clearly, the
Farber interpretation establishes a
situation where the action of a retarder
or similar device is equivalent to the
action of applying the service brakes.
Since S5.5.4 of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 requires activation of
the high-mounted stop lamp when the
service brake is applied, it follows that
it may also be activated by application
of a retarder. Table I–a of the final rule
has been revised to include this
permitted activation.
AAM recognized a typographical error
in Table I–a in describing the mounting
location requirements for school bus
signal warning lamps. AAM suggested
language that is more faithful to that of
SAE J887, School Bus Red Signal
Lamps, July 1964, the document
incorporated by reference in the current
version of Standard No. 108. We have
revised the language of the final rule
applicable to the mounting location of
these lamps to state, ‘‘ * * * but in no
case shall the spacing between lamps be
less than 40 inches’’, which is more
faithful to SAE J887.
Nissan commented that inclusion of
the Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) in a
Table titled Required Lamps and
Reflective Devices implied that the DRL
was the only non-required lamp
permitted on regulated vehicles. We
have discussed previously that we
believe Table I–a is the appropriate
location for the DRL in the standard.
However, we have clarified the portion
of Table I–a applicable to the DRL by
revising the title from ‘‘Additional
Lamps Allowed * * *’’ to ‘‘Daytime
Running Lamps Allowed * * *.’’
Nissan and AAM commented that
Table I–a did not completely describe
all mounting height restrictions on DRLs
in the appropriate portion of the table.
We have clarified in Table I–a that
additional requirements do apply and
are included in paragraph S7.10.13(b) of
the final rule.
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Guide commented that additional
DRL activation requirements are
contained in paragraph S7.11.2 of the
NPRM and should be added to Table I–
a. We disagree. There is language in
Table I–a calling attention to these
additional requirements and directing
users to paragraph S7.10.10.1(c) of the
final rule, a notice that we believe is
adequate.
Table I–b Portion of Proposed Table I
In addition to those revisions to Table
I–b that were listed in the preceding
section, several others have been
incorporated in the final rule.
AAM commented that the width
criteria for installing a single taillamp,
stop lamp, or rear reflex reflector on a
trailer was incorrectly dimensioned.
Table I–b stated that the installation of
a single such device can occur ‘‘* * *
on trailers less than 760 mm wide.’’ The
correct dimension from paragraph
S5.1.1.14 of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 is 30 inches, and the
final rule states that dimension for all
three devices. Current paragraph
S5.1.1.14 also states that when single
devices are used, they shall be located
‘‘* * * at or near its vertical
centerline.’’ To clarify this requirement,
we have revised the Mounting Location
requirement language from ‘‘A single
lamp (reflector) must be mounted at or
near the vertical centerline’’ to ‘‘When
a single lamp (reflector) is installed, it
must be mounted at or near the vertical
centerline.’’
AAM, Grote, and Koito all
commented that the NPRM did not
include the mounting height limitation
of 60 inches for rear side marker lamps
installed on trailers 2032 mm or more in
overall width, which is stated in Table
II of the current version of FMVSS No.
108. This omission is corrected in Table
I–b in the final rule.
TTMA commented on the appropriate
location for the requirement stating that
conspicuity treatment on a trailer can
serve as the required reflex reflectors if
the conspicuity treatment is placed at
the locations required for reflex
reflectors. This alternative is contained
in paragraph S6.1.1.1.1 in the NPRM,
but we agree it is best located in Table
I–b and have moved it there, following
the listing of ‘‘Reflex Reflectors’’ and
‘‘Intermediate Reflex Reflectors’’, and
have eliminated paragraph S6.1.1.1.1
from the final rule.
TTMA commented that the
requirements for mounting height for
clearance lamps and identification
lamps in Table I–b was missing. We
have corrected this by adding the
appropriate language from Table II of
the current version of FMVSS No. 108,
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
‘‘As near the top as practicable.’’ We
have also added language to the
Mounting Height portion of the rear
clearance lamp section stating that,
similar to Table I–a, they are not
required to be mounted as near the top
as practicable when the rear
identification lamps are mounted at the
extreme height of the vehicle, an
exclusion provided by paragraph
S5.3.1.4 of the current version of
FMVSS No. 108 and inadvertently
omitted from the NPRM.
Table I–c
Portion of Proposed Table I
Consistent with the revision in
language to the Number and Color
portion of headlamps in Table I–a, we
have revised Table I–c. It previously
stated ‘‘* * * of a type and number
listed * * *,’’ but now states ‘‘* * * of
a headlighting system listed * * *.’’ We
believe that this revision more precisely
describes this requirement.
AAM commented that there are
additional motorcycle headlamp
mounting restrictions that are not
acknowledged in Table I–c. We agree
and have added language to direct the
reader to paragraphs S10.17.1.1,
S10.17.1.2, and S10.17.1.3 of the final
rule for additional headlamp mounting
requirements.
We have inserted the language ‘‘a turn
signal’’ between the words ‘‘between’’
and ‘‘lamp’’ in the last sentence of the
Mounting Location portion of the front
turn signal lamp requirements section of
Table I–c of the final rule to clarify that
requirement. Also, the language of the
last sentence of the Mounting Location
portion of the rear turn signal lamp
requirements section of Table I–c was
revised so that it now states, ‘‘* * *
between the turn signal lamp and
taillamp or stop lamp is 4 inches
* * *,’’ a change that clarifies the
requirement in the final rule.
Table II–a Headlighting Systems—
Sealed Beam
GE, Honda, AAM, and Koito
commented that the reference to
photometry requirements in Table XIX
of the NPRM for a lower beam visual
aim ‘‘LF’’ headlamp erroneously stated
‘‘LB1(1)’’ rather than ‘‘LB1V(1).’’ We
agree and this has been corrected in the
final rule.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table II–b Headlighting Systems—
Combination
GE, Honda, AAM, and Koito
commented that the reference to
photometry requirements in Table XIX
of the NPRM for a 4 lamp system, lower
beam visual aim headlamp erroneously
stated ‘‘LBV(4)’’ rather than ‘‘LB1V(4).’’
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
We agree and this has been corrected in
the final rule.
Koito commented that if an integral
beam headlamp was used in a
combination headlighting system, it
could consist of beam contributors and
if so, they would be subject to the
photometric allocation formula
described in paragraph S6.8.5.6.6 of the
NPRM. Koito requested that a footnote
be added to call attention to that
possibility. We agree and have added
Footnote 7 to the final rule stating
‘‘Beam contributor photometric
allocation formula of paragraph
S14.2.5.9 may apply.’’
Table II–c Headlighting Systems—
Integral Beam
Footnote 6 was revised for clarity in
the final rule to read, ‘‘Beam contributor
photometric allocation formula of
paragraph S14.2.5.9 applies.’’
Koito commented that the lower beam
photometry requirements reference in
the NPRM for the headlamp in a four
lamp system that provides a portion of
the upper beam and the lower beam
should be ‘‘LB3M’’ rather than ‘‘LB4M’’
for a mechanically aimed headlamp and
‘‘LB3V’’ rather than ‘‘LB2V’’ for a
visually/optically aimed headlamp.
These references are taken from
paragraph S7.4(a)(1)(iii) of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, which
specifies Figure 28–1 or Figure 28–2.
LB4M is a restatement of the
requirements of Figure 28–1 and LB2V
similarly of Figure 28–2.30 We do not
agree with Koito’s comment and are
therefore making no revision in the final
rule.
Table II–d Headlighting Systems—
Replaceable Bulb
AAM and Koito commented that the
references in Table II–d to photometry
requirements in Table XIX for UB1,
LB1M, and LB1V should include
Footnote 4, ‘‘Lower beams may remain
activated when upper beams are
activated,’’ based upon paragraph S5.8.8
of the current version of FMVSS No.
108. We agree that the UB1, LB1M, and
LB1V requirements are derived from
Figures 15–1 and 15–2 of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108. Paragraph
S5.8.8 states that a headlighting system
designed to conform to the photometric
requirements of Figures 15–1 and 15–2
may be so wired. That footnote has been
added to the final rule.
Koito and AAM commented that the
photometric requirement reference in
Table II–d of the NPRM for the upper
beam of a 2 lamp system with a light
30 And also Figure 17–2 which has identical
requirements.
PO 00000
Frm 00027
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68259
source composition of HB2 or any single
filament type used alone or with any
other single or dual filament type,
should include UB3 (Figure 27–1 or 27–
2 in the current version of FMVSS No.
108) as well as the listed UB2 (Figure
17–1 or 17–2 in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108). They provide the
rationale that this is permitted by
paragraph S7.5(d)(2)(ii)(A)(1) of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108.
Indeed, a literal reading of that text
could lead to such a conclusion.
However, Figure 26, Table for
Determining the Photometric
Requirements of Replaceable Bulb
Headlamp Systems, of the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 clearly
shows, in the box where the row marked
‘‘Two-Headlamp System’’ intersects the
column marked ‘‘HB2 or Any Single
Filament Type used Alone or with Any
Other Single or Dual Filament Type,’’
that the applicable photometry
requirements are those of Figure 17–1 or
17–2.31 Faced with the seeming
contradiction between paragraph S7.5
(d)(2)(ii)(A)(1) and Figure 26, we looked
for other cues in FMVSS No. 108 that
would confirm the correct requirement.
One such cue is in paragraph S7.5(b)
which states that, ‘‘The photometrics as
specified in subparagraphs (c) through
(e) of this paragraph (depicted in Figure
26), using any light source of the Type
intended for use in such system.’’ This
clearly indicates that paragraph S7.5
and Figure 26 provide identical
information. Another cue is the
language in paragraph S7.5(d)(2)(i)(A)(2)
which states that only the photometry
requirements of Figure 17–1 or 17–2 are
to be used for lower beam with a two
lamp system that uses an HB2 source.
The specific language of paragraph
S7.5(d)(2)(ii)(A)(1) first appeared in
Standard No. 108 several years ago
during a revision in text. Instead of
concluding with ‘‘* * * light sources
that include Type HB2 * * *’’
paragraph S7.5(d)(2)(ii)(A)(1) should
have concluded with ‘‘* * * light
sources other than Type HB2 * * *’’
This would make it consistent with
paragraph S7.5(d)(2)(i)(A)(1), which
addresses the lower beam, and Figure
26.
Because this ambiguity has existed for
a considerable length of time, it would
be a substantive change to revise it in
the final rule and thus is outside the
scope of the rewrite. We have revised
31 The current version of FMVSS 108 presents
headlamp photometry requirements in sets of
related tables that differ only by application to type
of aiming system used. In this instance Table 17–
1 applies to mechanically aimed headlighting
systems while Table 17–2 applies to visually/
optically aimed headlighting systems.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68260
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Table II–d in the final rule to indicate
that UB3 may be used as an upper beam
photometry requirement for a 2 lamp
system using a Type HB2 or any single
filament type used alone, or with any
other single or dual filament type.
However, regulated parties should be
aware that we consider this to be
incorrect and we may take action soon
to correct what we believe is a mistake.
Table III Conspicuity Systems
Requirements Becomes Table III
Marking Requirements Location
The recognition that the tabular
method of organization did not work
well for the presentation of lengthy
textual requirements provided the
rationale for moving the conspicuity
systems requirements content of Table
III of the NPRM to paragraph S8.2 of the
regulatory text of the final rule. The
substantive issues raised by public
comment and the revisions to
conspicuity systems are discussed
under paragraph S8.2. As discussed
under paragraph S6.5, Table III has been
re-designated as a source for listing each
location in the regulatory text of the
final rule applicable for each marking
requirement of Standard No. 108.
Table IV Effective Projected Luminous
Lens Area Requirements
As previously mentioned, this table
has been divided into three sections in
the final rule.
Koito and Guide commented that the
effective projected luminous lens area
requirements for a front turn signal
lamp were incorrectly stated in what is
now Table IV–a and did not agree with
the requirements of SAE J588 NOV84.
We concur and have clarified those
requirements in the final rule to indicate
that there is no effective projected
luminous lens area requirement for each
compartment of a multiple compartment
front turn signal lamp.
There were no comments submitted
that impacted what are now Tables IV–
b and IV–c in the final rule.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table V Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices
As previously mentioned, this table
has been divided into four sections.
AAM suggested that the column marked
‘‘Applicable Vehicles’’ was not needed.
We agree and have removed it from all
four sections of Table V in the final rule.
Table V–a Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices
AAM suggested alternative language
referring to the required visibility of
high-mounted stop lamps when two
lamps are installed. We agree with its
suggestion and have revised the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
language of the final rule appearing in
parenthesis to read (Single lamp or two
lamps together where required by
paragraph S6.1.1.2 of this standard.)
Table V–b Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices (Lens Area
Visibility Option)
Grote suggested that the mandatory
enforcement dates for the exclusive use
of the visibility options of Table V–b
and V–c be included in those tables. We
believe it is preferable to include these
dates in paragraph S6.4.4 of the
regulatory text of the final rule, where
additional details about choosing a
visibility compliance method are
located.
AAM suggested that the language of
Footnote 2 of Table V–b (and Footnote
2 of Table V–c) be revised for clarity.
We agree and those footnotes now read
in the final rule, ‘‘Where a lamp is
mounted with its axis of reference less
than 750 mm above the road surface, the
vertical test point angles located below
the horizontal plane subject to visibility
requirements may be reduced to 5°
down.’’
Table V–c Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices (Luminous
Intensity Visibility Option)
AAM claimed that the visibility
requirements specifying corner points at
80° outboard are erroneous. We disagree
because these corner points are faithful
to those stated in Figure 20 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108.
Table V–d Visibility Requirements of
Installed Lighting Devices (Legacy
Visibility Alternative)
AAM identified a typographical error
in the proposal where a period did not
directly follow the abbreviation ‘‘mm’’
in the required visibility of turn signal
lamps. This has been corrected in the
final rule by removing all periods after
these abbreviations in keeping with the
style of regulatory text.
Nissan believed that the term
‘‘existing’’ in the parenthetical subtitle
of this section was indeterminate and
suggested it be removed. We decided to
revise the subtitle from ‘‘(Existing SAE
Visibility Alternative)’’ to ‘‘(Legacy
Visibility Alternative)’’ in the final rule
suggesting that these requirements are
ones that have historically been used.
Guide commented that the sentence
‘‘Where more than one lamp or optical
area is lighted on each side of the
vehicle, only one such area on each side
need comply’’ should not be included in
visibility requirements. We disagree
because it is an integral part of the SAE
PO 00000
Frm 00028
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
documents incorporated by reference in
the current version of FMVSS No. 108.32
Guide also suggested that the phrase
‘‘To be considered visible’’ preface the
specific visibility requirements in Table
V–d. We believe that the language of the
requirements in Table V–d, along with
the text of paragraph S6.4.4, clearly
describe what is required and the
additional language is not needed.
We have revised the visibility
requirement minimum value for a
taillamp in Table V–d from 1250 sq mm
to 2 sq in to be faithful to the language
of SAE J585e, September 1977, Section
4, incorporated by reference in the
current version of FMVSS No. 108,
which is the original source of this
requirement.
Table VI Front Turn Signal Lamp
Photometry Requirements
As previously mentioned, this table
has been divided into two sections.
Table VI–a contains the base front turn
signal lamp photometry requirements
and the 2.5 times base front turn signal
lamp photometry requirements. Table
VI–b contains the 1.5 times base and the
2.0 times base front turn signal lamp
photometry requirements.
Nissan, AAM, and Koito commented
that displaying the ratio requirements
for both turn signal lamps combined
with parking lamps and turn signal
lamps combined with clearance lamps
in the same column of our proposal was
confusing. We agree and have placed
the requirements for those two
combinations in separate columns in
both Tables VI–a and VI–b in the final
rule.
Koito and AAM commented that
Footnote 4 does not accurately state the
requirements of SAE J1395 AP85,
Section 5.1.5.2, incorporated by
reference in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108. We agree and have
revised that footnote in the final rule to
read ‘‘When a clearance lamp on a
vehicle 2032 mm or more in overall
width is combined with a front turn
signal lamp and the maximum luminous
intensity of the clearance lamp is
located below horizontal and within a
1.0° radius around the test point, the
ratio for the test point may be computed
by using the lowest value of the
clearance lamp luminous intensity
within the generated area.’’
AAM noted several instances where
the group minimum photometric
intensity values for 2 and 3 lighted
sections, 2.5x base photometry lamps,
were erroneous. These five values were
32SAE J1395 APR85, S5.4.1, SAE J586 FEB84,
S5.4.1, SAE J1398 MAY85, S5.4.1, and SAE J585e,
September 1977, S4.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
all 0.5 cd less than their calculated
values. The correct values have been
incorporated in Table VI–a in the final
rule.
Koito suggested that several of the
group minimum photometric intensity
values for 2 lighted sections, base
photometry lamps, are erroneous. Koito
appears to have based its comment on
the observation that the arithmetic sum
of the minimum values of all test points
included in the groups exceeds the
value shown for the group. However, in
this case all of the listed values are
accurate. They are consistent with
values of Table 1 for group requirements
and Table 3 for individual test point
requirements of SAE J588 NOV84,
incorporated by reference in the current
version of Standard No. 108. Although
in most cases SAE has specified that
group photometric values equal the sum
of the individual test point values in a
group, there are exceptions, and this is
one of those exceptions.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table VII Rear Turn Signal Photometry
Requirements
Footnote 6 of the final rule was
revised to agree with the decision to
eliminate the reference to SAE J588e for
double faced turn signal lamps installed
on truck tractors. It now reads, ‘‘A
double-faced turn signal lamp installed
as described in paragraph S6.1.1.3 on a
truck tractor need only meet the
photometric requirements for a left side
lamp where the lamp is mounted on the
left side of the vehicle, and for a right
side lamp where the lamp is mounted
on the right side of the vehicle.’’
Table VIII Taillamp Photometry
Requirements
Calcoast commented that Footnote 1
and Footnote 2 to Table VIII of the
NPRM are not mutually exclusive.
Therefore, the limitations imposed by
compliance with one of these footnotes
may negate an allowance offered by the
other. We agree with Calcoast’s
assessment. The situation that it
mentioned actually affects all lamps
where grouped test point photometric
compliance is permitted. The
requirements of Footnote 1 of Table VIII
also apply to all other lamps where
grouped compliance is permitted. The
original source of this requirement is
SAE J575, Test for Motor Vehicle
Lighting Devices and Components,
paragraph J, which is identical in both
J575d, August 1967, and J575e, August
1970, the two versions of this standard
applicable to signal lamps in FMVSS
No. 108. Footnote 2 of Table VIII
describes the basic premise of grouped
compliance. The failure of an individual
test point in the group to meet its
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
minimum photometric intensity can be
offset if one or more of the other points
in the group exceed their minimum
intensity requirement by enough margin
that the group total intensity is still met.
Additionally, turn signal lamps and
stop lamps, including high-mounted
stop lamps, also have a further
limitation from their original SAE
source document concerning how much
any individual test point can fail to
meet its minimum intensity when
considered in a group compliance
situation. This limitation states that the
measured value at each test point must
not be less than 60% of the minimum
value.
All these limitations must be
considered simultaneously when
determining grouped photometric
compliance for lamps where that
procedure is permitted. Calcoast was
correct in its assessment that these
limitations may negate full utilization of
each other.
Koito and AAM identified two
minimum test point photometric
intensity values for 3 lighted section
lamps they believe are erroneous. We
agree and have corrected the values at
5L–10D and 5R–10D in the final rule.
We have also revised Table VIII in the
final rule to reduce confusion by placing
the minimum and maximum
photometric intensity values in separate
columns for each of the lighted sections
alternatives.
Koito commented that Table VIII did
not include Footnote 5 from Table 1 of
SAE J585e, Tail Lamps (Rear Position
Lamps), September 1977, incorporated
by reference in the current version of
FMVSS No. 108. This footnote limits the
size of the area of maximum
photometric intensity in a specified
portion of the photometric pattern. This
requirement was added to Table VIII in
the final rule and now reads, ‘‘A
taillamp shall not exceed the maximum
intensity over any area larger than that
generated by a 0.25° radius, within a
solid cone angle from 20°L to 20°R and
from H to 10°U.’’
Table IX Stop Lamp Photometry
Requirements
The alternative photometric intensity
requirements for a stop lamp installed
on a motor driven cycle that were
included in Table IX in the NPRM have
been relocated to new Table XIII in the
final rule. This relocation means that
Footnote 5 is no longer needed in Table
IX and it has been eliminated. Footnote
7 of the NPRM has been redesignated as
Footnote 5 in the final rule.
Honda, AAM, and Koito all observed
an erroneous group minimum
photometric intensity value for 3 lighted
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68261
sections in group 3. The correct value is
520 cd instead of the listed 445 cd. This
error is corrected in Table IX of the final
rule.
In Table IX of the NPRM, it was stated
that when a stop lamp is combined with
a taillamp, the luminous intensity of the
stop signal must exceed the luminous
intensity of the tail signal at each test
point by a certain minimum ratio. This
ratio value is common for all vehicles at
all test points with the exception of the
test point H–5L.33 Proposed Table IX
showed the ratio value at this point as
3/5 (6) and further states at Footnote 6,
‘‘Values preceded by a slash (/) apply
only to lamps installed on multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and
buses, of 2032 mm or more in overall
width.’’ Thus, the requirement at the
H–5L test point is that the luminous
intensity of the stop lamp exceed the
luminous intensity of the combined
taillamp by at least 3 times on
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, trailers, and buses, of 2032 mm
or more in overall width, and by at least
5 times on other applicable vehicles
which includes all passenger cars and
motorcycles and all multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and
buses, less than 2032 mm in overall
width. This discrepancy exists due to
the language from which the ratio
requirements are derived. SAE J586
FEB84, Stop Lamps for use on Motor
Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm in Overall
Width, incorporated by reference in the
current version of FMVSS No. 108 states
in Section 5.1.5.3, ‘‘When a tail lamp is
combined with the stop lamp, the stop
lamp shall not be less than three times
the luminous intensity of the tail lamp
at any test point; except that at H–V, H–
5L, H–5R, and 5U–V, the stop lamp
shall not be less than five times the
luminous intensity of the tail lamp.’’
Similarly, SAE J1398 MAY85, Stop
Lamps for use on Motor Vehicles 2032
mm or More in Overall Width,
incorporated by reference in the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, states in
Section 5.1.5.2, ‘‘When a tail lamp is
combined with the stop lamp, the stop
lamp shall not be less than three times
the luminous intensity of the tail lamp
at any test point; except that at H–V, H–
5R, and 5U–V, the stop lamp shall not
be less than five times the luminous
intensity of the tail lamp.’’ Thus, the
requirements are identical with the
exception of test point
33 In the final rule we have elected to implement
a suggestion by Calcoast to identify photometric test
points consistently in the photometric requirements
tables. We have chosen to list lateral values in the
left column and vertical values in the right column.
Thus the H–5L test point of Table IX of the NPRM
appears as test point 5L–H in the final rule.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68262
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
H–5L. By not specifically identifying H–
5L as a test point requiring a 5:1 ratio,
SAE J1398 MAY85, by default, requires
a 3:1 ratio.
SAE J585e, Tail Lamps (Rear Position
Lamps), September 1977, also
incorporated by reference in the current
version of FMVSS No. 108 (applicable
to all vehicles), also contains a ratio
requirement. Footnote 4 to Table 1 of
that document states, ‘‘When a tail lamp
is combined with the turn signal lamp
or the stop lamp, the signal lamp or stop
lamp shall not be less than three times
the candlepower 34 of the tail lamp at
any test point; except that at H–V, H–
5L, H–5R, and 5U–V, the signal lamp or
stop lamp shall not be less than five
times the candlepower of the tail lamp.’’
Thus, there is a documented conflict
regarding the ratio requirement at the
H–5L test point on combined stop lamps
and taillamps used on wide vehicles.
We resolved this in the final rule by
maintaining the dual requirements
stated in the NPRM. That is the ratio of
stop lamp intensity to taillamp intensity
at that test point remains 3:1 for lamps
installed on multipurpose passenger
vehicles, trucks, trailers, and buses, of
2032 mm or more in overall width, and
5:1 for lamps installed on all passenger
cars and motorcycles and all
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, trailers, and buses, less than
2032 mm in overall width.
Although we believe there is ample
evidence that the 3:1 ratio was never
intended by SAE, to rectify this error at
this time would constitute a substantive
change and therefore be beyond the
scope of the FMVSS No. 108 rewrite.
We may address this issue in the near
future.
Table X Side Marker Photometry
Requirements
Footnote 1 was revised to be more
consistent with paragraph S7.4.1.1 of
the NPRM (paragraph S7.4.13.2 of the
final rule) concerning the widths of
vehicles that can use reduced
photometric compliance angles between
the front and rear side marker. Footnote
1 now reads, ‘‘Where a side marker
lamp installed on a motor vehicle less
than 30 feet in overall length and less
than 80 inches (2 m) in overall width
has the lateral angle nearest the other
required side marker lamp on the same
side of the vehicle reduced from 45° by
design as specified by S7.4.13.2, the
photometric intensity measurement may
be met at the lesser angle.’’ The change
in width from 2032 mm to 80 inches (2
34 The term ‘‘candlepower’’ used in this context
means the contemporary unit of measurement used
to express the luminous intensity attribute.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
m) was made to be faithful to Footnote
b of SAE J592e, Clearance, Side Marker,
and Identification Lamps, July 1972.
Table XI Clearance and Identification
Lamps Photometry Requirements
Koito and AAM commented that
Footnote 3 to Table XI did not include
the limitation on a turn signal lamp
combined with a red clearance lamp as
required by SAE J592e, July 1972, Table
1 Footnote ‘‘a’’, incorporated by
reference by the current version of
FMVSS No. 108. This is corrected in the
final rule.
Grote believed that the maximum
photometric intensity for a red clearance
lamp should be 18 cd. We disagree
because SAE J592e, July 1972,
incorporated by reference in the current
version of FMVSS No. 108, states in
Footnote ‘‘a’’ to Table 1 that 15 cd is the
maximum allowed for a red clearance
lamp.
Table XII Backup Lamp Photometry
Requirements
Guide commented that Footnotes 2
and 3 only apply to groups 1, 2 5, and
6. We agree. Figure 2, Footnote 1 of the
current version of Standard No. 108 is
the source of these requirements and the
Guide assertion is consistent with that
figure. We revised Table XII accordingly
in the final rule.
Guide suggested replacing the phrase
‘‘same or symmetrically opposite
design’’ in Footnote 2 of Table XII of the
NPRM with the phrase ‘‘symmetrical
beam pattern’’ and also replacing the
phrase ‘‘differing design’’ in Footnote 3
of Table XII with the phrase
‘‘asymmetrical beam pattern’’, claiming
the terminology of the NPRM is vague.
Guide offered no argument as to why
the suggested replacement phrases
would improve understanding. Since
the language of the NPRM is faithful to
the current version of FMVSS No. 108,
we are not implementing its suggestion
in the final rule.
We have added the term ‘‘Each Lamp’’
after the title ‘‘Two Lamp Systems’’ in
Table XII of the final rule to clarify that
each lamp of a two lamp system is to be
designed to conform to either the
individual test point photometry
requirements or the group photometry
requirements.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle Turn Signal
Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements
Table XIII–b Motor Driven Cycle Stop
Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements
Table XIII of the NPRM, License Plate
Lamp Target Locations, has been
redesignated as Figure 19 in the final
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
rule. A new Table XIII has been created
that includes the alternative stop lamp
requirements for motor driven cycles,
which were previously part of Table IX
in the NPRM and the optional turn
signal requirements for motorcycles
noted in paragraphs S7.1.1.1 and
S7.1.2.1 of the NPRM, but not
previously tabularized.
Table XIV Parking Lamp Photometry
Requirements
There were no comments submitted
that impacted Table XIV beyond those
previously mentioned.
Table XV High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Photometry Requirements
AAM suggested that Footnote 4 of
Table XV be incorporated directly into
the table where the maximum
photometric intensity is stated. AAM
offered no arguments to support this
request and we can see no compelling
reason to implement it. Table XV
appears in the final rule identical to the
NPRM.
Table XVI
As previously mentioned, Table XVI
of the NPRM has been partitioned into
three sections, Table XVI–a, Reflex
Reflector Photometry Requirements,
Table XVI–b, Additional Photometry
Requirements for Conspicuity Reflex
Reflectors, and Table XVI–c,
Retroreflective Sheeting Photometry
Requirements. The content of these
tables in the final rule is identical to
that of the NPRM.
Table XVII School Bus Signal Lamp
Photometry
There were no comments submitted
that impacted Table XVII.
Table XVIII Headlamp Upper Beam
Photometry Requirements
There were no comments submitted
that impacted Table XVIII beyond those
previously mentioned.
Table XIX Headlamp Lower Beam
Photometry Requirements
Table XIX, Headlamp Lower Beam
Photometry Requirements, has been
split into Tables XIX–a, XIX–b, and
XIX–c in the final rule.
GE, Honda, AAM, and Koito
identified that the maximum
photometric intensity value of 2,500 cd
for the 0.5D–1.5L to L test location of a
LB4M beam was inadvertently omitted
from Table XIX of the NPRM. We agree
and this value has been added in the
final rule.
Guide suggested a reduction in the
lateral limits in the NPRM for
photometry of the 10°U to 90°U glare
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
area from 90°L to 90°R to 45°L to 45°R
but offered no basis to support this
request. Such a revision would be
substantive and beyond the scope of the
rewrite, therefore this suggestion was
not pursued in the final rule.
paragraphs S14.6, S14.7, and S14.8 of
the regulatory text in the final rule.
The substantive issues raised by
public comment and the revisions to
headlamp physical test requirements are
discussed under those sections.
Table XX Motorcycle and Motor
Driven Cycle Headlamp Photometry
Requirements
Honda and Koito identified that the
maximum photometric intensity value
of 12,500 cd for the 4D–4R test location
for a motor driven cycle headlamp was
inadvertently placed in the minimum
intensity column of Table XX of the
NPRM. The value has been placed in the
correct location in the final rule.
AAM suggested that the column
heading shown for lower beam
headlamps be replicated for upper beam
headlamps. We agree that doing so
would improve clarity and have
incorporated the headings in Table XX
of the final rule.
Figures
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table XXI Associated Equipment
Physical Test Requirements (Table
eliminated in final rule)
The recognition that the tabular
method of organization did not work
well for lengthy textual requirements
provided the rationale for moving the
associated equipment physical test
requirements content of Table XXI of
the NPRM to paragraph S14.9 of the
regulatory text in the final rule.
The substantive issues raised by
public comment and the revisions to
associated equipment physical test
requirements are discussed under
paragraph S14.9.
Table XXII Lamp and Reflective
Devices Physical Test Requirements
(Table eliminated in final rule)
The recognition that the tabular
method of organization did not work
well for lengthy textual requirements
provided the rationale for moving the
lamp and reflective devices physical test
requirements content of Table XXII of
the NPRM to paragraphs S14.3, S14.4,
and S14.5 of the regulatory text in the
final rule.
The substantive issues raised by
public comment and the revisions to
lamp and reflective devices physical test
requirements are discussed under those
sections.
Table XXIII Headlamp Physical Test
Requirements (Table eliminated in final
rule)
The recognition that the tabular
method of organization did not work
well for lengthy textual requirements
provided the rationale for moving the
headlamp physical test requirements
content of Table XXIII of the NPRM to
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Figures 1 through 12 and 15 through 18
There were no comments submitted
that impacted Figures 1 through 12 or
Figures 15 through 18.
Figure 13 Tractor Conspicuity
Treatment Examples
TMA commented that Figure 31 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108,
rather than Figure 13 of the NPRM,
better illustrated that the right angle
white conspicuity treatment element
required on the upper rear outside
corners of truck tractors may not be
continuous if cab mounted hardware
makes this impractical. We have revised
Figure 13 to illustrate this condition in
the final rule.
Figure 14 92 x 150 mm Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup
GE identified 13 omissions or errors
in Figure 14 of the NPRM that were
corrected in the final rule to agree with
the source document, Figure 16 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108.
Figure 15 Types G & H Headlamp Aim
Deflection Test Setup
GE identified an omission in Figure
15 that was corrected to agree with the
source document, Figure 22 of the
current version of FMVSS No. 108.
Figure 19 License Plate Lamp Target
Locations
Figure 19, License Plate Lamp Target
Locations, was designated as Table XIII
in the NPRM. The supplementary
response from the AAM/ASSN
suggested changing it to be a figure. Its
purpose is illustrative, so it is most
appropriately designated as a figure.
AAM requested that the English units
of measurement, which were part of the
source drawings, SAE J587 OCT81
Figures 1 and 2, but not included in
Table XIII of the NPRM, be restored.
This was done, as Figure 19 is
dimensioned in both metric and English
units in the final rule.
Figure 20 License Plate Lamp
Measurement of Incident Light Angle
AAM requested that Figure 3 of SAE
J587 OCT81, License Plate Lamps, be
included to better illustrate the incident
light angle requirement of paragraph
S7.7.1.1 of the NPRM. We agree and
have included it as Figure 20, License
Plate Lamp Measurement of Incident
PO 00000
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68263
Light Angle, in the final rule. It is
referenced in paragraph S7.7.15.4 of the
final rule.
Figure 21 Vibration Test Machine
AAM requested that SAE J577,
Vibration Test Machine, April 1964, be
directly incorporated into FMVSS No.
108 rather than to continue to be
incorporated by reference. Figure 1,
Vibration Test Machine, and Table 1,
Cam Profile Radii, (from SAE J577) were
redrawn for the final rule as Figure 21,
Vibration Test Machine.
Figure 22 Flasher Standard Test
Circuit
Figure 22 includes the standard test
circuit of SAE J823b, Flasher Test
Equipment, April 1968. The procedures
of SAE J823b have also been
incorporated into paragraph S14.9 of the
final rule, allowing the subreference by
incorporation of this standard to now be
eliminated from FMVSS No. 108.
IV. The Final Rule
After careful consideration of public
comments on the NPRM, the agency has
decided to publish a final rule to amend
49 CFR Part 564 and FMVSS No. 108 as
discussed below:
A. 49 CFR Part 564
We are relocating figures addressing
sealed beam headlamps that currently
reside in FMVSS No. 108 and SAE
J1383 APR85 into a newly created
Appendix C of 49 CFR Part 564. We
have listed those specific figures and
where they currently reside in FMVSS
No. 108 or SAE J1383 APR85 in the
reference document in Appendix C of
this notice. In addition, we are making
the applicable changes to the scope and
purpose provisions of Part 564 to
account for the newly formed Appendix
C. Unlike Appendices A and B, there
will be no further additions to, or
modifications of, the sealed beam
headlamp figures in Appendix C.
B. 49 CFR Part 571.108
We are amending Standard No. 108
by: (1) Reorganizing the regulatory text
so that it provides a more straightforward and logical presentation of the
applicable regulatory requirements; (2)
including important agency
interpretations of the existing
requirements; and (3) reducing reliance
on third-party documents incorporated
by reference. This has resulted in
additional tables and figures being
added to the standard. In addition, the
structure of the standard has been
changed to present the requirements in
a more standardized and user-friendly
manner.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68264
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
V. Benefits and Costs
Because this proposal only
reorganizes the existing requirements of
the standard, we do not anticipate that
there would be any costs or benefits
associated with this rulemaking action
to implement an administrative rewrite
of FMVSS No. 108, other than the
benefits associated with a clearer,
easier-to-read standard. None of the
public comments identified any
instances where the rewritten standard
would have a cost effect. Accordingly,
the agency did not conduct a separate
economic analysis for this rulemaking.
VI. Rulemaking Analyses and Notices
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
A. Vehicle Safety Act
Under 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301, Motor
Vehicle Safety (49 U.S.C. 30101 et seq.),
the Secretary of Transportation is
responsible for prescribing motor
vehicle safety standards that are
practicable, meet the need for motor
vehicle safety, and are stated in
objective terms.35 These motor vehicle
safety standards set the minimum level
of performance for a motor vehicle or
motor vehicle equipment to be
considered safe.36 When prescribing
such standards, the Secretary must
consider all relevant, available motor
vehicle safety information.37 The
Secretary must also consider whether a
proposed standard is reasonable,
practicable, and appropriate for the type
of motor vehicle or motor vehicle
equipment for which it is prescribed
and the extent to which the standard
will further the statutory purpose of
reducing traffic accidents and associated
deaths.38 The responsibility for
promulgation of Federal motor vehicle
safety standards has been delegated to
NHTSA. 39
FMVSS No. 108, Lamps, Reflective
Devices, and Associated Equipment,
was originally established in a final rule
published in the Federal Register on
February 3, 1967 (32 FR 2408). The
purpose of the standard is to reduce
traffic accidents and deaths and injuries
resulting from traffic accidents, by
providing adequate illumination of the
roadway, and by enhancing the
conspicuity of motor vehicles on the
public roads so that their presence is
perceived and their signals understood,
both in daylight and in darkness or
other conditions of reduced visibility.
Since the time of the standard’s initial
promulgation, the agency has
35 49
U.S.C. 30111(a).
U.S.C. 30102(a)(9).
37 49 U.S.C. 30111(b).
38 Id.
39 49 U.S.C. 105 and 322; delegation of authority
at 49 CFR 1.50.
36 49
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
undertaken numerous rulemakings and
interpretations related to Standard No.
108, in many cases to deal with the
emergence of new lighting technologies.
In recent years, concerns have been
raised that after nearly four decades of
amendment, navigating the
requirements of the standard has
become increasingly difficult. Therefore,
in this final rule, the agency is
implementing an administrative rewrite
of Standard No. 108 in order to improve
its structure and clarity, without
changing any of its existing substantive
requirements. In preparing this final
rule, the agency carefully considered the
statutory requirements of 49 U.S.C.
Chapter 301.
First, this final rule reflects the
agency’s careful consideration and
analysis of all existing regulatory
provisions of FMVSS No. 108, as well
as salient letters of interpretation related
to that standard. In developing the
substantive provisions of the standard
over the years, the agency considered all
relevant, available motor vehicle safety
information, including available
research, testing results, and other
information related to various
technologies. This administrative
rewrite does not change any of these
existing provisions or the underlying
basis therefore. The final rule also
reflects the agency’s consideration of
information offered in public comments
on the notice of proposed rulemaking
which preceded today’s final rule.
Second, to ensure that the
requirements of FMVSS No. 108 are
practicable (as well as consistent with
our safety objectives), the agency
evaluated the cost, availability, and
suitability of the standard’s provisions,
both when initially adopted and during
subsequent amendments. As noted
above, the changes resulting from this
final rule are administrative in nature
and would not impact the costs and
benefits of the standard. In sum, we
believe that this final rule is practicable,
and we expect it to maintain the
benefits of Standard No. 108.
Third, the regulatory text following
this preamble is stated in objective
terms in order to specify precisely what
performance is required and how
performance will be tested to ensure
compliance with the standard. In certain
cases, the final rule modifies the
language of the standard to improve
clarity or to incorporate existing
interpretations, again without changing
the substance of the existing
requirements.
Fourth, we believe that this final rule
meets the need for motor vehicle safety
by clarifying the safety standard,
thereby making it easier for regulated
PO 00000
Frm 00032
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
parties to comply with all applicable
requirements. The impacts of the
substantive provisions on vehicle safety
were discussed at the time of adoption
of those provisions.
Finally, we believe that this final rule
is reasonable and appropriate for motor
vehicles subject to the applicable
requirements. As discussed elsewhere
in this notice, the modifications to the
standard resulting from this final rule
are administrative in nature. It does not
affect the substance of the requirements
or the bases for those requirements, as
articulated in earlier rulemakings.
Accordingly, we believe that this final
rule is appropriate for covered vehicles
that are or become subject to these
provisions of FMVSS No. 108 because it
furthers the agency’s objective of
preventing crash-related deaths and
serious injuries by ensuring adequate
illumination of roadways and enhanced
conspicuity of motor vehicles.
B. Executive Order 12866 and DOT
Regulatory Policies and Procedures
Executive Order 12866, ‘‘Regulatory
Planning and Review’’, provides for
making determinations whether a
regulatory action is ‘‘significant’’ and
therefore subject to OMB review and to
the requirements of the Executive Order.
The Order defines a ‘‘significant
regulatory action’’ as one that is likely
to result in a rule that may:
(1) Have an annual effect on the
economy of $100 million or more or
adversely affect in a material way the
economy, a sector of the economy,
productivity, competition, jobs, the
environment, public health or safety, or
State, local, or Tribal governments or
communities;
(2) Create a serious inconsistency or
otherwise interfere with an action taken
or planned by another agency;
(3) Materially alter the budgetary
impact of entitlements, grants, user fees,
or loan programs or the rights and
obligations of recipients thereof; or
(4) Raise novel legal or policy issues
arising out of legal mandates, the
President’s priorities, or the principles
set forth in the Executive Order.
This rulemaking document was not
reviewed by the Office of Management
and Budget under Executive Order
12866. The rule is not considered to be
significant within the meaning of E.O.
12866 or the Department of
Transportation’s Regulatory Policies and
Procedures (44 FR 11034 (Feb. 26,
1979)). As stated above in Section V,
Benefits and Costs, this final rule is not
expected to require parties subject to the
requirements of the safety standard to
alter their existing practices for
certifying compliance with Standard
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
No. 108 or to increase costs of
compliance, because the final rule
merely reorganizes and clarifies existing
requirements. Accordingly, the agency
has not prepared any supplemental
economic analysis to accompany this
rulemaking document.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act
Pursuant to the Regulatory Flexibility
Act (5 U.S.C. 601 et seq., as amended by
the Small Business Regulatory
Enforcement Fairness Act (SBREFA) of
1996), whenever an agency is required
to publish a notice of rulemaking for
any proposed or final rule, it must
prepare and make available for public
comment a regulatory flexibility
analysis that describes the effect of the
rule on small entities (i.e., small
businesses, small organizations, and
small governmental jurisdictions). The
Small Business Administration’s
regulations at 13 CFR Part 121 define a
small business, in part, as a business
entity ‘‘which operates primarily within
the United States.’’ (13 CFR 121.105(a)).
No regulatory flexibility analysis is
required if the head of an agency
certifies the rule will not have a
significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities.
SBREFA amended the Regulatory
Flexibility Act to require Federal
agencies to provide a statement of the
factual basis for certifying that a rule
will not have a significant economic
impact on a substantial number of small
entities.
NHTSA has considered the effects of
this final rule under the Regulatory
Flexibility Act. I certify that this final
rule will not have a significant
economic impact on a substantial
number of small entities. The rationale
for this certification is that the present
final rule does not make any substantive
changes to this safety standard, so
affected parties will be able to continue
current practices without change.
Accordingly, we do not anticipate that
this final rule will have a significant
economic impact on a substantial
number of small entities.
D. Executive Order 13132 (Federalism)
NHTSA has examined today’s final
rule pursuant to Executive Order 13132,
‘‘Federalism’’ and concluded that no
additional consultation with States,
local governments, or their
representatives is mandated beyond the
rulemaking process. The agency has
concluded that the rule does not have
Federalism implications, because the
rule does not have ‘‘substantial direct
effects on the States, on the relationship
between the national government and
the States, or on the distribution of
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
power and the responsibilities among
the various levels of government.’’
Further, no consultation is needed to
discuss the preemptive effect of today’s
rule. NHTSA rules can have preemptive
effect in at least two ways. First, the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act contains an express
preemptive provision: ‘‘When a motor
vehicle safety standard is in effect under
this chapter, a State or a political
subdivision of a State may prescribe or
continue in effect a standard applicable
to the same aspect of performance of a
motor vehicle or motor vehicle
equipment only if the standard is
identical to the standard prescribed
under this chapter.’’ 49 U.S.C.
30102(b)(1).
In addition to the express preemption
noted above, the Supreme Court has
also recognized that State requirements
imposed on motor vehicle
manufacturers, including sanctions
imposed by State tort law, can stand as
an obstacle to the accomplishment and
execution of a NHTSA safety standard.
When such a conflict is discerned, the
Supremacy Clause of the Constitution
makes the State requirements
unenforceable. See Geier v. American
Honda Motor Co., 529 U.S. 861 (2000).
NHTSA does not believe that such
conflicts are likely to arise from today’s
rulemaking, because this final rule only
results in an administrative rewrite of
the existing requirements of FMVSS No.
108. However, if such a conflict were to
become evident, NHTSA may opine on
such conflicts in the future, if
warranted. See id. at 883–86.
E. Executive Order 12988 (Civil Justice
Reform)
With respect to the review of the
promulgation of a new regulation,
section 3(b) of Executive Order 12988,
‘‘Civil Justice Reform,’’ requires that
Executive agencies make every
reasonable effort to ensure that the
regulation: (1) Clearly specifies the
preemptive effect; (2) clearly specifies
the effect on existing Federal law or
regulation; (3) provides a clear legal
standard for affected conduct, while
promoting simplification and burden
reduction; (4) clearly specifies the
retroactive effect, if any; (5) adequately
defines key terms; and (6) addresses
other important issues affecting clarity
and general draftsmanship under
guidelines issued by the Attorney
General. This document is consistent
with that requirement. Pursuant to this
Order, NHTSA notes as follows. The
preemptive effect of this rule is
discussed above. NHTSA notes further
that there is no requirement that
individuals submit a petition for
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68265
reconsideration or pursue other
administrative proceeding before filing
suit in court.
F. Executive Order 13045 (Protection of
Children From Environmental Health
and Safety Risks)
Executive Order 13045, ‘‘Protection of
Children from Environmental Health
and Safety Risks,’’ applies to any rule
that: (1) Is determined to be
‘‘economically significant’’ as defined
under Executive Order 12866, and (2)
concerns an environmental, health, or
safety risk that the agency has reason to
believe may have a disproportionate
effect on children. If the regulatory
action meets both criteria, the agency
must evaluate the environmental health
or safety effects of the planned rule on
children, and explain why the planned
regulation is preferable to other
potentially effective and reasonably
feasible alternatives considered by the
agency.
This final rule is not subject to E.O.
13045 because it is not an economically
significant regulatory action under
Executive Order 12866, and because it
does not involve decisions based upon
health and safety risks that
disproportionately affect children.
G. Paperwork Reduction Act
Under the Paperwork Reduction Act
of 1995 (PRA), a person is not required
to respond to a collection of information
by a Federal agency unless the
collection displays a valid OMB control
number. This final rule does not contain
any collection of information
requirements requiring review under the
PRA.
H. National Technology Transfer and
Advancement Act
Section 12(d) of the National
Technology Transfer and Advancement
Act of 1995 (NTTAA), Public Law 104–
113, (15 U.S.C. 272) directs the agency
to evaluate and use voluntary consensus
standards in its regulatory activities
unless doing so would be inconsistent
with applicable law or is otherwise
impractical. Voluntary consensus
standards are technical standards (e.g.,
materials specifications, test methods,
sampling procedures, and business
practices) that are developed or adopted
by voluntary consensus standards
bodies, such as the Society of
Automotive Engineers. The NTTAA
directs us to provide Congress (through
OMB) with explanations when we
decide not to use available and
applicable voluntary consensus
standards. The NTTAA does not apply
to symbols.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68266
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
This final rule does not adopt or
reference any new industry or
consensus standards that were not
already present in Standard No. 108
(although in several cases, relevant
requirements from such standards are
now included directly in the standard,
rather than being incorporated by
reference). The agency’s statements
regarding the rationale for the use (or
non-use) of information from third-party
standards, as presented in prior
rulemakings, remain unchanged.
I. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
Section 202 of the Unfunded
Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (UMRA)
requires Federal agencies to prepare a
written assessment of the costs, benefits,
and other effects of proposed or final
rules that include a Federal mandate
likely to result in the expenditure by
State, local, or tribal governments, in the
aggregate, or by the private sector, of
more than $100 million annually
(adjusted for inflation with base year of
1995 (so currently $126 million in 2006
dollars)). Before promulgating a NHTSA
rule for which a written statement is
needed, section 205 of the UMRA
generally requires the agency to identify
and consider a reasonable number of
regulatory alternatives and adopt the
least costly, most cost-effective, or least
burdensome alternative that achieves
the objectives of the rule. The
provisions of section 205 do not apply
when they are inconsistent with
applicable law. Moreover, section 205
allows the agency to adopt an
alternative other than the least costly,
most cost-effective, or least burdensome
alternative if the agency publishes with
the final rule an explanation of why that
alternative was not adopted.
This final rule is not anticipated to
result in the expenditure by State, local,
or tribal governments, in the aggregate,
or by the private sector in excess of $112
million annually. Instead, the cost
impact of this administrative rewrite of
Standard No. 108 is expected to be $0,
because it does not change or increase
the cost of existing requirements.
Therefore, the agency has not prepared
an economic assessment pursuant to the
Unfunded Mandates Reform Act.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
J. National Environmental Policy Act
NHTSA has analyzed this rulemaking
action for the purposes of the National
Environmental Policy Act. The agency
has determined that implementation of
this action would not have any
significant impact on the quality of the
human environment.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
K. Regulatory Identifier Number (RIN)
The Department of Transportation
assigns a regulation identifier number
(RIN) to each regulatory action listed in
the Unified Agenda of Federal
Regulations. The Regulatory Information
Service Center publishes the Unified
Agenda in April and October of each
year. You may use the RIN contained in
the heading at the beginning of this
document to find this action in the
Unified Agenda.
L. Privacy Act
Please note that anyone is able to
search the electronic form of all
comments received into any of our
dockets by the name of the individual
submitting the comment (or signing the
comment, if submitted on behalf of an
association, business, labor union, etc.).
You may review DOT’s complete
Privacy Act Statement in the Federal
Register published on April 11, 2000
(Volume 65, Number 70; Pages 19477–
78), or you may visit https://dms.dot.gov.
List of Subjects in 49 CFR Parts 564 and
571
Imports, Incorporation by reference,
Motor vehicle safety, Motor vehicles,
Report and recordkeeping requirements.
I In consideration of the foregoing,
NHTSA is amending 49 CFR parts 564
and 571 as follows:
PART 564—REPLACEABLE LIGHT
SOURCE INFORMATION
1. Part 564 is revised to read as
follows:
I
PART 564—REPLACEABLE LIGHT
SOURCE AND SEALED BEAM
HEADLAMP INFORMATION
Sec.
564.1 Scope.
564.2 Purposes.
564.3 Applicability.
564.4 Definitions.
564.5 Information filing; agency processing
of filings.
Appendix A to Part 564—Information to be
Submitted for Replaceable Light Sources
Appendix B to Part 564—Information to be
Submitted for Long Life Replaceable
Light Sources of Limited Definition
Appendix C to Part 564—Information
Applicable to Standardized Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115,
30117, 30166; delegation of authority at 49
CFR 1.50.
§ 564.1
Scope.
This part requires the submission of
dimensional, electrical specification,
and marking/designation information as
specified in Appendices A and B of this
part, for original equipment replaceable
PO 00000
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
light sources used in motor vehicle
headlighting systems. This part also
serves as a repository for design
information as specified in Appendix C
of this part, for original equipment and
replacement standardized sealed beam
units used in motor vehicle headlighting
systems.
§ 564.2
Purposes.
The purposes of this part are achieved
through its Appendices:
(a) The purposes of Appendix A of
this part are to ensure:
(1) The availability to replacement
light source manufacturers of the
manufacturing specifications of original
equipment light sources so that
replacement light sources are
interchangeable with original
equipment light sources and provide
equivalent performance, and
(2) That redesigned or newly
developed light sources are designated
as distinct, different, and
noninterchangeable with previously
existing light sources.
(b) The purposes of Appendix B of
this part are to ensure:
(1) That original equipment light
sources are replaceable and that
replacement light sources provide
equivalent performance, and
(2) That redesigned or newly
developed light sources are designated
as distinct, different, and
noninterchangeable with previously
existing light sources.
(c) The purpose of Appendix C of this
part is to ensure the availability to
original equipment and replacement
sealed beam headlamp manufacturers of
the manufacturing specifications of
standardized sealed beam headlamp
units used on motor vehicles so that all
sealed beam headlamp units of a
specific type are interchangeable with
all other units of that same type and
provide equivalent performance.
§ 564.3
Applicability.
This part applies to replaceable light
sources used as original equipment, and
standardized sealed beam headlamp
units used as original equipment and
replacement equipment in motor
vehicle headlighting systems.
§ 564.4
Definitions.
All terms defined in the Act and the
regulations and standards issued under
its authority are used as defined therein.
§ 564.5 Information filing; agency
processing of filings.
(a) Each manufacturer of a motor
vehicle, original equipment headlamp,
or original equipment headlamp
replaceable light source, which intends
to manufacture a replaceable light
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
source as original equipment or to
incorporate a replaceable light source in
its headlamps or motor vehicles, shall
furnish the information specified in
Appendix A. If the rated laboratory life
of the light source is not less than 2,000
hours, the manufacturer shall furnish
the information specified in either
Appendix A or Appendix B of this part.
Information shall be furnished to:
Associate Administrator for
Rulemaking, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, DC 20590 Attention: Part
564-Replaceable Light Source
Information (unless the Agency has
already filed such information in Docket
No. NHTSA 98–3397).
(b) The manufacturer shall submit
such information not later than 60 days
before it intends to begin manufacture of
the replaceable light source to which the
information applies, or to incorporate
the light source into a headlamp, or to
incorporate the light source into a motor
vehicle of its manufacture. Each
submission shall consist of one original
set of information and ten legible
reproduced copies, all on 81⁄2 by 11-inch
paper.
(c) The Associate Administrator
promptly reviews each submission and
informs the manufacturer not later than
30 days after its receipt whether the
submission has been accepted. Upon
acceptance, the Associate Administrator
files the information in Docket No.
NHTSA 98–3397. The Associate
Administrator does not accept any
submission that does not contain all the
information specified in Appendix A or
Appendix B of this part, or whose
accompanying information indicates
that any new light source which is the
subject of a submission is
interchangeable with any replaceable
light source for which the agency has
previously filed information in Docket
No. NHTSA 98–3397.
(d) A manufacturer may request
modification of a light source for which
information has previously been filed in
Docket No. NHTSA 98–3397, and the
submission shall be processed in the
manner provided by § 564.5(c). A
request for modification shall contain
the following:
(1) All the information specified in
Appendix A or Appendix B of this part
that is relevant to the modification
requested,
(2) The reason for the requested
modification,
(3) A statement that the use of the
light source as modified will not create
a noncompliance with any requirement
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 108 (49 CFR 571.108)
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
when used to replace an unmodified
light source in a headlamp certified by
its manufacturer as conforming to all
applicable Federal motor vehicle safety
standards, together with reasons in
support of the statement; and
(4) Information demonstrating that the
modification would not adversely affect
interchangeability with the original light
source.
After review of the request for
modification, the Associate
Administrator may seek further
information either from the
manufacturer or through a notice
published in the Federal Register
requesting comment on whether a
modified light source incorporating the
changes requested will create a
noncompliance with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 108 when
substituted for an unmodified light
source. If the Associate Administrator
seeks public comment on a submission
(s)he shall publish a notice stating
whether (s)he has accepted or rejected
the submission. If a submission is
accepted, the Associate Administrator
files the information in Docket No.
NHTSA 98–3397. If a submission is
rejected, a manufacturer may submit
information with respect to it, as
provides in paragraph 564.5(a), for
consideration as a new light source after
such changes as will insure that it is not
interchangeable with the light source for
which modification was originally
requested.
(e) Information submitted under this
section is made available by NHTSA for
public inspection as soon as practicable
after its receipt, but not later than the
date on which a vehicle equipped with
a new or revised replaceable light
source is offered for sale.
Appendix A to Part 564—Information
to be Submitted for Replaceable Light
Sources
I. Filament or Discharge Arc Position
Dimensions and Tolerances Using Either
Direct Filament or Discharge Arc Dimensions
or the Three Dimensional Filament or
Discharge Arc Tolerance Box
A. Lower beam filament dimensions or
filament tolerance box dimensions and
relation of these to the bulb base reference
plane and centerline.
1. Axial location of the filament centerline
or the filament tolerance box relative to the
bulb base reference plane.
2. Vertical location of the filament
centerline or the filament tolerance box
relative to the bulb base centerline.
3. Transverse location of the filament
centerline or the filament tolerance box
relative to the bulb base centerline.
4. Filament tolerance box dimensions, if
used.
B. Upper beam filament dimensions or the
filament tolerance box dimensions, and
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68267
relation of these to the bulb base reference
plane and centerline.
1. Axial location of the filament centerline
or the filament tolerance box relative to the
bulb base reference plane.
2. Vertical location of the filament
centerline or the filament tolerance box
relative to the bulb base centerline.
3. Transverse location of the filament
centerline or the filament tolerance box
relative to the bulb base centerline.
4. Filament tolerance box dimensions, if
used.
C. If the replaceable light source has both
a lower beam and an upper beam filament,
the dimensional relationship between the
two filament centerlines or the filament
tolerance boxes may be provided instead of
referencing the upper beam filament
centerline or filament tolerance box to the
bulb base centerline or reference plane.
D. For a light source using excited gas
mixtures as a filament, necessary fiducial
information and specifications including
electrode position dimensions and tolerance
information that provide similar location and
characteristics information required by
paragraphs A, B, and C of this section I for
light sources using a resistive type filament.
II. Dimensions Pertaining to Filament
Capsule and Capsule Supports
A. Maximum length from bulb base
reference plane to tip of filament capsule.
B. Maximum radial distances from bulb
base centerline to periphery of filament
capsule and/or supports.
C. Location of black cap relative to low
beam filament centerline, filament tolerance
box or other to-be-specified reference.
D. Size, length, shape, or other pertinent
features and dimensions for providing
undistorted walls for the filament capsule.
III. Bulb Base Interchangeability Dimensions
and Tolerance
A. Angular locations, diameters, key/
keyway sizes, and any other
interchangeability dimensions for indexing
the bulb base in the bulb holder.
B. Diameter, width, depth, and surface
finish of seal groove, surface, or other
pertinent sealing features.
C. Diameter of the bulb base at the interface
of the base and its perpendicular reference
surface.
D. Dimensions of features related to
retention of the bulb base in the bulb holder
such as tabs, keys, keyways, surfaces, etc.
IV. Bulb Holder Interchangeability
Dimensions and Tolerance
A. Mating angular locations, diameters,
key/keyway sizes, and any other
interchangeability dimensions for indexing
the bulb base in the bulb holder.
B. Mating diameter, width, depth, and
surface finish of seal groove, surface, or other
pertinent sealing features.
C. Mating diameter of the bulb holder at
the interface of the bulb base aperture and its
perpendicular reference surface.
D. Mating dimensions of features related to
retention of the bulb base in the bulb holder
such as tabs, keys, keyways, surfaces, etc.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68268
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
V. Wiring Harness Connector to Bulb Base
Interchangeability Dimensions and
Tolerances
Appendix B to Part 564—Information to
be Submitted for Long Life Replaceable
Light Sources of Limited Definition
A. Maximum depth of harness connector
insertion into bulb base.
B. Location of electrical pins in bulb base.
C. Dimensions of electrical pins in bulb
base—length, diameter, width, thickness and
etc.
D. Fit of harness connector into bulb base
providing all necessary dimensions, key/
keyway controls, and dimensions, tapers etc.
E. Dimensions and location of locking
features for wiring harness connector to bulb
base.
F. Identification of upper beam, lower
beam, and common terminals.
I. Filament or Discharge Arc Position
Dimensions and Tolerances Using Either
Direct Filament or Discharge Arc Dimensions
or the Three Dimensional Filament Discharge
Arc Tolerance Box
VI. Seal Specifications (if Replaceable Light
Source is Intended to be of a Sealed Base
Design)
A. Type.
B. Material.
C. Dimensions.
VII. Electrical Specifications for Each
Filament at 12.8 Volts
A. Maximum power (in watts).
B. Luminous Flux with tolerance (in
lumens) with black cap if so equipped,
measured in accordance with the document:
Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America, LM–45; IES Approved Method for
Electrical and Photometric Measurements of
General Service Incandescent Filament
Lamps (April 1980). This incorporation by
reference was approved by the Director of the
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies may be
obtained from the Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America, 345 East 47th St.,
New York, NY 10017. Copies may be
inspected at the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, Technical Information
Services, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Washington, DC 20590, or at the National
Archives and Records Administration
(NARA). For information on the availability
of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030,
or go to: https://www.archives.gov/federal_
register/code_of_ federal regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
VIII. Bulb Markings/Designation—ANSI
NUMBER, ECE IDENTIFIER,
MANUFACTURER’S PART NUMBER,
INDIVIDUALLY OR IN ANY COMBINATION
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
IX. All Other Information, Dimensions or
Performance Specifications Necessary for
Interchangeability, Replaceability, or System
Test Purposes not Listed in Sections I
Through VIII
IF A BALLAST IS REQUIRED FOR
OPERATION, A COMPLETE LISTING OF
THE REQUIREMENTS AND PARAMETERS
BETWEEN THE LIGHT SOURCE AND
BALLAST, AND BALLAST AND THE
VEHICLE SHALL ALSO BE PROVIDED.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
A. Lower beam filament or discharge arc
dimensions or filament or discharge arc
tolerance box dimensions and relation of
these to the bulb base reference plane and
centerline.
1. Axial location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base reference plane.
2. Vertical location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base centerline.
3. Transverse location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base centerline.
4. Filament or discharge arc tolerance box
dimensions, if used.
B. Upper beam filament or discharge arc
dimensions or the filament or discharge arc
tolerance box dimensions and relation of
these to the bulb base reference plane and
centerline.
1. Axial location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base reference plane.
2. Vertical location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base centerline.
3. Transverse location of the filament or
discharge arc centerline or the filament or
discharge arc tolerance box relative to the
bulb base centerline.
4. Filament or discharge arc tolerance box
dimensions, if used.
C. If the replaceable light source has both
a lower beam and upper beam filament or
discharge arc, the dimensional relationship
between the two filament or discharge arc
centerlines or the filament or discharge arc
tolerance boxes may be provided instead of
referencing the upper beam filament or
discharge arc centerline or filament or
discharge arc tolerance box to the bulb base
centerline or reference plane.
D. For a light source using excited gas
mixtures as a filament, necessary fiducial
information and specifications including
electrode position dimensions, and tolerance
information that provide similar location and
characteristics information required by
paragraphs A, B, and C of this section I for
light sources using a resistive type filament.
II. Bulb Base Interchangeability Dimensions
and Tolerance
A. Angular locations, diameters, key/
keyway sizes, and any other
interchangeability dimensions for indexing
the bulb base in the bulb holder.
B. Diameter, width, depth, and surface
finish of seal groove, surface, or other
pertinent sealing features.
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
C. Diameter of the bulb base at the interface
of the base and its perpendicular reference
surface.
D. Dimensions of features related to
retention of the bulb base in the bulb holder
such as tabs, keys, keyways, surface, etc.
III. Bulb Holder Interchangeability
Dimensions and Tolerances
A. Mating angular locations, diameters,
key/keyway sizes, any other
interchangeability dimensions for indexing
the bulb base in the bulb holder.
B. Mating diameter, width, depth, and
surface, or other pertinent sealing features.
C. Mating diameter of the bulb holder at
the interface of the bulb base aperture and its
perpendicular reference surface.
D. Mating dimensions of features related to
retention of the bulb base in the bulb holder
such as tabs, keys, keyways, surface, or any
other characteristics necessary for mating
dimensions.
IV. Electrical Specifications for Each Light
Source That Operates With a Ballast and
Rated Life of the Light Source/Ballast
Combination
A. Maximum power (in watts).
B. Luminous Flux (in lumens).
C. Rated laboratory life of the light source/
ballast combination (not less than 2,000
hours).
V. Applicable to Light Sources That Operate
With a Source Voltage Other Than 12.8 Volts
Direct Current, and When a Proprietary
Ballast Must Be Used With the Light Source
A. Manufacturer’s part number for the
ballast.
B. Any other characteristics necessary for
system operation.
VI. Bulb Markings/Designation—ANSI
NUMBER, ECE IDENTIFIER,
MANUFACTURER’S PART NUMBER,
INDIVIDUAL OR IN ANY COMBINATION
VII. All Other Identification, Dimensions or
Performance Specifications Necessary for
Replaceability or Systems Test Not Listed in
Sections I Through VI
Appendix C to Part 564—Information
Applicable to Standardized Sealed
Beam Headlamp Units
I. Dimensional Information Specific to a Type
of Standardized Sealed Beam Unit.
A. Dimensions marked ‘‘I’’, indicating
interchangeability, for which conformance is
mandatory.
B. All other dimensions which are for
design purposes.
II. Dimensional Information Applicable to the
Use of Nonadjustable Headlamp Aiming
Device Locating Plates
III. Dimensional Information Applicable to
Mounting Features, Including Mounting
Rings and Lamp Bodies, Specific to a Type
of Standardized Sealed Beam Unit
A. Dimensions marked ‘‘I’’, indicating
interchangeability, for which conformance is
mandatory.
B. All other dimensions which are for
design purposes.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Incorporated Figures [References from 49
CFR 571.108, Oct. 1, 2006]
LF Headlamp Dimensional Information
[Figure 11]
UF Headlamp Dimensional Information
[Figure 12]
LF/UF Mounting Features [Figure 13]
LF/UF Mounting Ring [Figure 14]
Type G & H Headlamp Dimensional
Information [Figure 18]
Type G & H Headlamp Mounting Information
[Figure 21]
Type 1A1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 11]
Type 2A1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 10]
Type 2B1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 13]
Type 1C1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 7]
Type 2C1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 8]
Type 2D1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 5]
Type 2E1 Headlamp Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 15]
Types 1A1, 2A1, and 2E1 Headlamp
Mounting Ring/Lamp Body Dimensional
Information [SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 12]
Type 2B1 Headlamp Mounting Ring/Lamp
Body Dimensional Information [SAE J1383
APR85, Figure 14]
Types 1C1and 2C1 Headlamp Mounting
Ring/Lamp Body Dimensional Information
[SAE J1383 APR85, Figure 9]
Type 2D1 Headlamp Mounting Ring/Lamp
Body Dimensional Information [SAE J1383
APR85, Figure 6]
PART 571—FEDERAL MOTOR
VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS
2. The authority citation for Part 571
continues to read as follows:
I
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115,
30117, 30166; delegation of authority at 49
CFR 1.50.
3. Section 571.108 is amended to read
as follows:
I
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
§ 571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps,
reflective devices, and associated
equipment.
S1 Scope. This standard specifies
requirements for original and
replacement lamps, reflective devices,
and associated equipment.
S2 Purpose. The purpose of this
standard is to reduce traffic accidents
and deaths and injuries resulting from
traffic accidents, by providing adequate
illumination of the roadway, and by
enhancing the conspicuity of motor
vehicles on the public roads so that
their presence is perceived and their
signals understood, both in daylight and
in darkness or other conditions of
reduced visibility.
S3 Application. This standard
applies to:
S3.1 Passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, buses,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
trailers (except pole trailers and trailer
converter dollies), and motorcycles;
S3.2 Retroreflective sheeting and
reflex reflectors manufactured to
conform to S8.2 of this standard; and
S3.3 Lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment for replacement of
like equipment on vehicles to which
this standard applies.
S4 Definitions.
Aiming plane means a plane defined
by the surface of the three aiming pads
on the lens.
Aiming reference plane means a plane
which is perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle and
tangent to the forwardmost aiming pad
on the headlamp.
Aiming screws are the horizontal and
vertical adjusting screws with selflocking features used to aim and retain
a headlamp unit in the proper position.
Axis of reference means the
characteristic axis of the lamp for use as
the direction of reference (H = 0°, V =
0°) for angles of field for photometric
measurements and for installing the
lamp on the vehicle.
Backup lamp means a lamp or lamps
which illuminate the road to the rear of
a vehicle and provide a warning signal
to pedestrians and other drivers when
the vehicle is backing up or is about to
back up.
Beam contributor means an
indivisible optical assembly including a
lens, reflector, and light source, that is
part of an integral beam headlighting
system and contributes only a portion of
a headlamp beam.
Cargo lamp is a lamp that is mounted
on a multipurpose passenger vehicle,
truck, or bus for the purpose of
providing illumination to load or
unload cargo.
Clearance lamps are lamps which
show to the front or rear of the vehicle,
mounted on the permanent structure of
the vehicle as near as practicable to the
upper left and right extreme edges to
indicate the overall width and height of
the vehicle.
Coated materials means a material
which has a coating applied to the
surface of the finished sample to impart
some protective properties. Coating
identification means a mark of the
manufacturer’s name, formulation
designation number, and
recommendations for application.
Color Fundamental definitions of
color are expressed by Chromaticity
Coordinates according to the
International Commission on
Illumination (C.I.E.) 1931 Standard
Colorimetric System, as described in the
CIE 1931 Chromaticity Diagram
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title).
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68269
Color bleeding means the migration of
color out of a plastic part onto the
surrounding surface.
Combination clearance and side
marker lamps are single lamps which
simultaneously fulfill the requirements
of clearance and side marker lamps.
Cracking means a separation of
adjacent sections of a plastic material
with penetration into the specimen.
Crazing means a network of apparent
fine cracks on or beneath the surface of
materials.
Cutoff means a generally horizontal,
visual/optical aiming cue in the lower
beam that marks a separation between
areas of higher and lower luminance.
Daytime running lamps (DRLs) are
steady burning lamps that are used to
improve the conspicuity of a vehicle
from the front and front sides when the
regular headlamps are not required for
driving.
Delamination means a separation of
the layers of a material including
coatings.
Design voltage means the voltage used
for design purposes.
Direct reading indicator means a
device that is mounted in its entirety on
a headlamp or headlamp aiming or
headlamp mounting equipment, is part
of a VHAD, and provides information
about headlamp aim in an analog or
digital format.
Effective light-emitting surface means
that portion of a lamp that directs light
to the photometric test pattern, and does
not include transparent lenses,
mounting hole bosses, reflex reflector
area, beads or rims that may glow or
produce small areas of increased
intensity as a result of uncontrolled
light from an area of 1⁄2° radius around
a test point.
Effective projected luminous lens area
means the area of the orthogonal
projection of the effective light-emitting
surface of a lamp on a plane
perpendicular to a defined direction
relative to the axis of reference. Unless
otherwise specified, the direction is
coincident with the axis of reference.
Exposed means material used in
lenses or optical devices exposed to
direct sunlight as installed on the
vehicle.
Filament means that part of the light
source or light emitting element(s), such
as a resistive element, the excited
portion of a specific mixture of gases
under pressure, or any part of other
energy conversion sources, that
generates radiant energy which can be
seen.
Flash means a cycle of activation and
deactivation of a lamp by automatic
means continuing until stopped either
automatically or manually.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68270
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Fully opened means the position of
the headlamp concealment device in
which the headlamp is in the design
open operating position.
H-V axis means the line from the
center of the principal filament of a
lamp to the intersection of the
horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines of
a photometric test screen.
Haze means the cloudy or turbid
appearance of an otherwise transparent
specimen caused by light scattered from
within the specimen or from its surface.
Headlamp means a lighting device
providing an upper and/or a lower beam
used for providing illumination forward
of the vehicle.
Headlamp concealment device means
a device, with its operating system and
components, that provides concealment
of the headlamp when it is not in use,
including a movable headlamp cover
and a headlamp that displaces for
concealment purposes.
Headlamp mechanical axis means the
line formed by the intersection of a
horizontal and a vertical plane through
the light source parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. If the
mechanical axis of the headlamp is not
at the geometric center of the lens, then
the location will be indicated by the
manufacturer on the headlamp.
Headlamp test fixture means a device
designed to support a headlamp or
headlamp assembly in the test position
specified in the laboratory tests and
whose mounting hardware and
components are those necessary to
operate the headlamp as installed in a
motor vehicle.
High-mounted stop lamp means a
lamp mounted high and possibly
forward of the tail, stop, and rear turn
signal lamps intended to give a steady
stop warning through intervening
vehicles to operators of following
vehicles.
Identification lamps are lamps used
in groups of three, in a horizontal row,
which show to the front or rear or both,
having lamp centers spaced not less
than [6 in] 15.2 mm nor more than [12
in] 30.4 mm apart, mounted on the
permanent structure as near as
practicable to the vertical centerline and
the top of the vehicle to identify certain
types of vehicles.
Integral beam headlamp means a
headlamp (other than a standardized
sealed beam headlamp designed to
conform to paragraph S10.13 or a
replaceable bulb headlamp designed to
conform to paragraph S10.15)
comprising an integral and indivisible
optical assembly including lens,
reflector, and light source, except that a
headlamp conforming to paragraph
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S10.18.8 or paragraph S10.18.9 may
have a lens designed to be replaceable.
License plate lamp means a lamp
used to illuminate the license plate on
the rear of a vehicle.
Lower beam means a beam intended
to illuminate the road and its environs
ahead of the vehicle when meeting or
closely following another vehicle.
Material means the type and grade of
plastics, composition, and
manufacturer’s designation number and
color.
Mechanically aimable headlamp
means a headlamp having three pads on
the lens, forming an aiming plane used
for laboratory photometric testing and
for adjusting and inspecting the aim of
the headlamp when installed on the
vehicle.
Motor driven cycle means every
motorcycle, including every motor
scooter, with a motor which produces
not more than 5 horsepower, and every
bicycle with motor attached.
Motorcycle or motor driven cycle
headlamp means a major lighting device
used to produce general illumination
ahead of the vehicle.
Mounting ring means the adjustable
ring upon which a sealed beam unit is
mounted.
Mounting ring (type F sealed beam)
means the adjustable ring upon which a
sealed beam unit is mounted and which
forces the sealed beam unit to seat
against the aiming ring when assembled
into a sealed beam assembly.
Multiple compartment lamp means a
device which gives its indication by two
or more separately lighted areas which
are joined by one or more common
parts, such as a housing or lens.
Multiple lamp arrangement means an
array of two or more separate lamps on
each side of the vehicle which operate
together to give a signal.
Optically combined means a lamp
having a single or two filament light
source or two or more separate light
sources that operate in different ways,
and has its optically functional lens area
wholly or partially common to two or
more lamp functions.
Overall width means the nominal
design dimension of the widest part of
the vehicle, exclusive of signal lamps,
marker lamps, outside rearview mirrors,
flexible fender extensions, mud flaps,
and outside door handles determined
with doors and windows closed, and the
wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Running boards may also be excluded
from the determination of overall width
if they do not extend beyond the width
as determined by the other items
excluded by this definition.
Parking lamps are lamps on both the
left and right of the vehicle which show
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
to the front and are intended to mark the
vehicle when parked or serve as a
reserve front position indicating system
in the event of headlamp failure.
Protected means material used in
inner lenses for optical devices where
such lenses are protected from exposure
to the sun by an outer lens made of
materials meeting the requirements for
exposed plastics.
Rated voltage means the nominal
circuit or vehicle electrical system
voltage classification.
Reflex reflectors are devices used on
vehicles to give an indication to
approaching drivers using reflected light
from the lamps of the approaching
vehicle.
Remote reading indicator means a
device that is not mounted in its
entirety on a headlamp or headlamp
aiming or headlamp mounting
equipment, but otherwise meets the
definition of a direct reading indicator.
Replaceable bulb headlamp means a
headlamp comprising a bonded lens and
reflector assembly and one or two
replaceable light sources, except that a
headlamp conforming to paragraph
S10.18.8 or paragraph S10.18.9 may
have a lens designed to be replaceable.
Replaceable light source means an
assembly of a capsule, base, and
terminals that is designed to conform to
the requirements of Appendix A or
Appendix B of 49 CFR part 564
Replaceable Light Source Information of
this Chapter.
Retaining ring means the clamping
ring that holds a sealed beam unit
against a mounting ring.
Retaining ring (type F sealed beam)
means the clamping ring that holds a
sealed beam unit against a mounting
ring, and that provides an interface
between the unit’s aiming/seating pads
and the headlamp aimer adapter
(locating plate).
School bus signal lamps are
alternately flashing lamps mounted
horizontally both front and rear,
intended to identify a vehicle as a
school bus and to inform other users of
the highway that such vehicle is
stopped on the highway to take on or
discharge school children.
Sealed beam headlamp means an
integral and indivisible optical assembly
including the light source with
‘‘SEALED BEAM’’ molded in the lens.
Sealed beam headlamp assembly
means a major lighting assembly which
includes one or more sealed beam units
used to provide general illumination
ahead of the vehicle.
Seasoning means the process of
energizing the filament of a headlamp at
design voltage for a period of time equal
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
to 1% of design life, or other equivalent
method.
Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device is one which provides
either automatic or manual control of
beam switching at the option of the
driver. When the control is automatic
the headlamps switch from the upper
beam to the lower beam when
illuminated by the headlamps on an
approaching vehicle and switch back to
the upper beam when the road ahead is
dark. When the control is manual, the
driver may obtain either beam manually
regardless of the conditions ahead of the
vehicle.
Side marker lamps are lamps which
show to the side of the vehicle, mounted
on the permanent structure of the
vehicle as near as practicable to the
front and rear edges to indicate the
overall length of the vehicle. Additional
lamps may also be mounted at
intermediate locations on the sides of
the vehicle.
Stop lamps are lamps giving a steady
light to the rear of a vehicle to indicate
a vehicle is stopping or diminishing
speed by braking.
Taillamps are steady burning low
intensity lamps used to designate the
rear of a vehicle.
Test voltage means the specified
voltage and tolerance to be used when
conducting a test.
Turn signal lamps are the signaling
element of a turn signal system which
indicates the intention to turn or change
direction by giving a flashing light on
the side toward which the turn will be
made.
Turn signal flasher means a device
which causes a turn signal lamp to flash
as long as it is turned on.
Turn signal operating unit means an
operating unit that is part of a turn
signal system by which the operator of
a vehicle causes the signal units to
function.
Upper beam means a beam intended
primarily for distance illumination and
for use when not meeting or closely
following other vehicles.
Vehicle headlamp aiming device or
VHAD means motor vehicle equipment,
installed either on a vehicle or
headlamp, which is used for
determining the horizontal or vertical
aim, or both the vertical and horizontal
aim of the headlamp.
Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher means a device which, as long as
it is turned on, causes all the required
turn signal lamps to flash.
Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit means a driver controlled
device which causes all required turn
signal lamps to flash simultaneously to
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
indicate to approaching drivers the
presence of a vehicular hazard.
Visually/optically aimable headlamp
means a headlamp which is designed to
be visually/optically aimable in
accordance with the requirements of
paragraph S10.18.9 of this standard.
S5 References to SAE publications.
S5.1 Each required lamp, reflective
device, and item of associated
equipment must be designed to conform
to the requirements of applicable SAE
publications as referenced and
subreferenced in this standard. The
words ‘‘it is recommended that,’’
‘‘recommendations,’’ or ‘‘should be’’
appearing in any SAE publication
referenced or subreferenced in this
standard must be read as setting forth
mandatory requirements.
S5.2 Incorporation by reference. The
Director of the Federal Register
approves the incorporation by reference
of the following material in accordance
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51.
All material is available for inspection
at the NHTSA Reading Room, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590, or at NARA. For information on
the availability of this material at
NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to:
https://www.archives.gov/
federal_register/
code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
The material is also available at the
publisher whose name and address
follow the standard number:
1. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J602, revised AUG 1963,
‘‘Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units.’’ Society of
Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA
15096.
2. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J941b, revised FEB
1969, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Driver’s Eye
Range.’’ Society of Automotive
Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth
Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
3. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J602, revised OCT 1980,
‘‘Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units.’’ Society of
Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA
15096.
4. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J2009, revised FEB
1993, ‘‘Forward Discharge Lighting
Systems.’’ Society of Automotive
Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth
Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
5. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J573d, revised DEC
1968, ‘‘Lamp Bulbs and Sealed Units.’’
PO 00000
Frm 00039
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68271
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.,
400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale,
PA 15096.
6. Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) Standard J567b, revised APR
1964, ‘‘Bulb Sockets.’’ Society of
Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA
15096.
7. International Commission on
Illumination (C.I.E.) 1931 Chromaticity
Diagram. CIE Central Bureau, Kegelgasse
27, A–1030 Vienna, Austria.
8. General Services Administration
(GSA) Federal Specification L–S–300,
approved September 1965, ‘‘Sheeting
and Tape, Reflective: Nonexposed Lens,
Adhesive Backing.’’ Superintendent of
Documents, U.S. Government Printing
Office, Washington, DC 20402,
telephone 202–512–1800.
9. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) D4956–90, published
December 1990, ‘‘Standard Specification
for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic
Control.’’ ASTM International, 100 Barr
Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959.
10. ECE 48 E/ECE/324–E/ECE/
TRANS/505, Rev.1/ADD.47/Rev.1/
Corr.2, 26 February 1996, ‘‘Uniform
Provisions Concerning the Approval of
Vehicles with Regard to the Installation
of Lighting and Light-Signaling
Devices.’’ United Nations, Conference
Services Division, Distribution and
Sales Section, Office C.115–1, Palais des
Nations, CH–1211, Geneva 10, https://
www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/
wp29regs.html.
11. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) D1003–92, published
December 1992, ‘‘Standard Test Method
for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Transparent Plastics.’’ ASTM
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO
Box C700, Conshohocken, PA 19428–
2959.
12. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) E308–66, reapproved
1981, ‘‘Standard Practice for
Spectrophotometry and Description of
Color in CIE 1931 System.’’ ASTM
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO
Box C700, Conshohocken, PA 19428–
2959.
13. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) B117–73, reapproved
1979, ‘‘Standard Method of Salt Spray
(Fog) Testing.’’ ASTM International, 100
Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959.
14. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) Co. 05.04 1985,
‘‘Annual Book of ASTM Standards: Test
Methods for Rating Motor, Diesel,
Aviation Fuels,’’ Section I, parts A2.3.2,
A2.3.3, and A2.7 in Annex 2. ASTM
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68272
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Box C700, Conshohocken, PA 19428–
2959.
15. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) D362–84, published
March 1984, ‘‘Standard Specification for
Industrial Grade Toluene.’’ ASTM
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO
Box C700, Conshohocken, PA 19428–
2959.
16. American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) C150–77, published
April 1977, ‘‘Standard Specification for
Portland Cement.’’ ASTM International,
100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959.
17. Illuminating Engineering Society
of North America (IES) LM 45, approved
April 1980, ‘‘IES Approved Method for
Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of General Service
Incandescent Filament Lamps.’’
Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America, 345 East 47th St., New
York, NY 10017.
S6 Vehicle requirements.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective
devices, and associated equipment by
vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity. Except as provided
in succeeding paragraphs of this S6.1.1
each vehicle must be equipped with at
least the number of lamps, reflective
devices, and items of associated
equipment specified for that vehicle
type and size in Table I and Section 6.6,
designed to conform to the requirements
of this standard. Multiple license plate
lamps and backup lamps may be used
to fulfill photometric requirements for
those functions.
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems. Each
trailer of 2032 mm or more in overall
width, and with a GVWR over 10,000
lbs., except a trailer designed
exclusively for living or office use, and
each truck tractor must be equipped
with retroreflective sheeting, reflex
reflectors, or a combination of
retroreflective sheeting and reflex
reflectors as specified in S8.2.
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamps.
Each multipurpose passenger vehicle,
truck, and bus required by this standard
to be equipped with a high-mounted
stop lamp, whose vertical centerline,
when the vehicle is viewed from the
rear, is not located on a fixed body
panel but separates one or two moveable
body sections, such as doors, which
lacks sufficient space to install a single
high-mounted stop lamp on the
centerline above such body sections,
must have two high-mounted stop
lamps identical in size and shape.
S6.1.1.2.1 The two lamps must be
located at the same height, with one
vertical edge of each lamp on the
vertical edge of the body section nearest
the vehicle centerline.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S6.1.1.3 Truck tractor rear turn
signal lamps. A truck tractor need not
be equipped with turn signal lamps
mounted on the rear if the turn signal
lamps installed at or near the front are
of double face construction and are
located such that they meet the
photometric requirements for double
faced turn signal lamps specified in
Footnote 6 of Table VII.
S6.1.1.3.1 The flashing signal from a
double faced signal lamp must not be
obliterated when subjected to external
light rays from either in front or behind,
at any and all angles.
S6.1.1.4 Daytime running lamps. A
passenger car, multipurpose passenger
vehicle, truck, or bus may be equipped
with a pair of daytime running lamps
(DRLs) as specified in Table I and S7.10
of this standard. DRLs may be any pair
of lamps on the front of the vehicle,
whether or not required by this
standard, other than parking lamps or
fog lamps.
S6.1.2 Color. The color in all lamps
and reflective devices to which this
standard applies must be as specified in
Table I. The color identified as amber is
identical to the color identified as
yellow.
S6.1.3 Mounting location.
S6.1.3.1 Each lamp, reflective
device, and item of associated
equipment must be securely mounted
on a rigid part of the vehicle, other than
glazing, that is not designed to be
removed except for repair, within the
mounting location and height limits as
specified in Table I, and in a location
where it complies with all applicable
photometric requirements, effective
projected luminous lens area
requirements, and visibility
requirements with all obstructions
considered.
S6.1.3.2 When multiple lamp
arrangements or multiple compartment
rear turn signal lamps, stop lamps, or
taillamps are used, with only a portion
of the compartments or lamps installed
on a rigid part of the vehicle, that
portion must meet at least the
photometric requirements for the
applicable single compartment lamp.
S6.1.3.3 License plate lamp. The
license plate lamp or lamps installed on
vehicles other than motorcycles and
motor driven cycles must be mounted so
as to illuminate the license plate
without obstruction from any designed
feature unless the lamp or lamps is (are)
designed to comply with all the
photometric requirements with these
obstructions considered.
S6.1.3.4 High-mounted stop lamps.
S6.1.3.4.1 Interior mounting. A highmounted stop lamp mounted inside the
vehicle must have means provided to
PO 00000
Frm 00040
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
minimize reflections from the light of
the lamp upon the rear window glazing
that might be visible to the driver when
viewed directly, or indirectly in the
rearview mirror.
S6.1.3.4.2 Accessibility. Each highmounted stop lamp must provide access
for convenient replacement of bulbs
without special tools.
S6.1.3.5 Headlamp beam mounting.
S6.1.3.5.1 Vertical headlamp
arrangement.
S6.1.3.5.1.1 Where multiple
headlamps with single light sources are
installed in a vertical orientation the
lower beam must be provided by the
uppermost headlamp.
S6.1.3.5.1.2 Where headlamps with
two vertically oriented light sources are
installed the lower beam must be
provided by the uppermost light source
or by all light sources.
S6.1.3.5.1.3 Where more than one
lamp must be used for a motorcycle
headlighting system, the lamps must be
mounted vertically, with the lower
beam as high as practicable.
S6.1.3.5.2 Horizontal headlamp
arrangement.
S6.1.3.5.2.1 Where multiple
headlamps with single light sources are
installed in a horizontal orientation the
lower beam must be provided by the
most outboard headlamp.
S6.1.3.5.2.2 Where headlamps with
two horizontally oriented light sources
are installed the lower beam must be
provided by the outboard light source or
by all light sources.
S6.1.3.6 Auxiliary lamps mounted
near identification lamps. Each
auxiliary lamp must be located at least
twice the distance from any required
identification lamp as the distance
between two adjacent required
identification lamps.
S6.1.4 Mounting height. The
mounting height of each lamp and
reflective device must be measured from
the center of the item, as mounted on
the vehicle at curb weight, to the road
surface.
S6.1.4.1 High-mounted stop lamps.
S6.1.4.1.1 A high-mounted stop
lamp mounted below the rear window
must have no lens portion lower than
153 mm [6 in] below the lower edge of
the rear glazing on convertibles, or 77
mm [3 in] on other passenger cars.
S6.1.5 Activation. Each lamp must
be activated as specified, in the
combinations specified, and in response
to the inputs specified in Table I and
Table II.
S6.1.5.1 Hazard warning signal. In
all passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses,
the activation of the vehicular hazard
warning signal operating unit must
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
cause to flash simultaneously sufficient
turn signal lamps to meet, as a
minimum, the turn signal photometric
requirements of this standard.
S6.1.5.2 Simultaneous beam
activation.
S6.1.5.2.1 On any vehicle to which
this standard applies where the
headlighting system is designed to
conform to the photometric
requirements of UB1 of Table XVIII and
LB1M or LB1V of Table XIX–a, the
lamps marked ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘LF’’ may remain
permanently activated when the lamps
marked ‘‘U’’ or ‘‘UF’’ are activated.
S6.1.5.2.2 On any vehicle to which
this standard applies where an integral
beam headlighting system is designed to
conform to the photometric
requirements of UB6 of Table XVIII and
LB5M of Table XIX–b or LB4V of Table
XIX–c, the lower beam headlamps must
remain permanently activated when the
upper beam headlamps are activated.
S6.1.5.2.3 On any vehicle to which
this section applies where the
headlighting system is designed to
conform to the photometric
requirements of UB2 of Table XVIII and
LB2M or LB2V of Table XIX–a, a lower
beam light source may remain
permanently activated when an upper
beam light source is activated if the
lower beam light source contributes to
the upper beam photometric compliance
of the headlighting system.
S6.2 Impairment.
S6.2.1 No additional lamp, reflective
device, or other motor vehicle
equipment is permitted to be installed
that impairs the effectiveness of lighting
equipment required by this standard.
S6.2.2 If any required lamp or
reflective device is obstructed by motor
vehicle equipment (e.g., mirrors, snow
plows, wrecker booms, backhoes,
winches, etc.) including dealer installed
equipment, and cannot meet the
applicable photometry and visibility
requirements, the vehicle must be
equipped with an additional lamp or
device of the same type which meet all
applicable requirements of this
standard, including photometry and
visibility.
S6.2.3 Headlamp obstructions.
S6.2.3.1 When activated in a steady
burning state, headlamps must not have
any styling ornament or other feature,
such as a translucent cover or grill, in
front of the lens.
S6.2.3.2 Headlamp wipers may be
used in front of the lens provided that
the headlamp system is designed to
conform with all applicable photometric
requirements with the wiper stopped in
any position in front of the lens.
S6.3 Equipment combinations. Two
or more lamps, reflective devices, or
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
items of associated equipment may be
combined if the requirements for each
lamp, reflective device, and item of
associated equipment are met with the
following exceptions:
S6.3.1 No high-mounted stop lamp
is permitted to be combined with any
other lamp or reflective device, other
than with a cargo lamp.
S6.3.2 No high-mounted stop lamp
is permitted to be optically combined
with any cargo lamp.
S6.3.3 No clearance lamp is
permitted to be optically combined with
any taillamp.
S6.4 Lens area, visibility and school
bus signal lamp aiming.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous
lens area. Each turn signal lamp, stop
lamp, high-mounted stop lamp, and
school bus signal lamp must meet the
applicable effective projected luminous
lens area requirement specified in
Tables IV–a, IV–b, and IV–c.
S6.4.2 Visibility. Each backup lamp,
single or combination of dual highmounted stop lamp(s), and school bus
signal lamp must meet the applicable
visibility requirement specified in Table
V-a.
S6.4.3 Visibility options. A
manufacturer must certify compliance
of each lamp function to one of the
following visibility requirement options,
and it may not thereafter choose a
different option for that vehicle:
(a) Lens area option. When a vehicle
is equipped with any lamp listed in
Table V-b each such lamp must provide
not less than 1250 sq mm of
unobstructed effective projected
luminous lens area in any direction
throughout the pattern defined by the
corner points specified in Table V-b for
each such lamp; or
(b) Luminous intensity option. When
a vehicle is equipped with any lamp
listed in Table V-c each such lamp must
provide a luminous intensity of not less
than that specified in Table V-c in any
direction throughout the pattern defined
by the corner points specified in Table
V-c for each such lamp when measured
in accordance with the photometry test
requirements of this standard.
S6.4.4 Legacy visibility alternative.
As an alternative to S6.4.3, each
passenger car and motorcycle, and each
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,
trailer, and bus that is of less than 2032
mm overall width, that are
manufactured on or before September 1,
2011, and each multipurpose passenger
vehicle, truck, trailer, and bus that is of
2032 mm or more overall width, that are
manufactured on or before September 1,
2014, must have each lamp located so
that it meets the visibility requirements
specified in Table V-d.
PO 00000
Frm 00041
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68273
S6.4.5 School bus signal lamp
aiming. Each school bus signal lamp
must be mounted on the vehicle with
their aiming plane vertical and normal
to the vehicle longitudinal axis. Aim
tolerance must be no more than 5 in
vertically and 10 in horizontally at 25 ft
from the lamp. If the lamps are aimed
or inspected by use of the SAE J602,
Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units, (August 1963)
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), the graduation settings
for aim must be 2° D and 0° sideways
for aiming and the limits must be 3° U
to 7° D and from 10° R to 10° L for
inspection.
S6.5 Marking. A summary of the
marking requirements of this standard
and their location in the standard is
contained in Table III.
S6.5.1 DOT marking. The lens of
each original equipment and
replacement headlamp, and of each
original equipment and replacement
beam contributor, and each replacement
headlamp lens for an integral beam or
replaceable bulb headlamp, must be
marked with the symbol ‘‘DOT’’ either
horizontally or vertically to indicate
certification under 49 U.S.C. 30115.
S6.5.1.1 The DOT marking
requirements for conspicuity materials
are specified in S8.2 of this standard.
S6.5.1.2 Each original equipment or
replacement lamp or reflective device
specified in Table I, except for a
headlamp, or an item of associated
equipment specified in S9 may be
marked with the symbol ‘‘DOT’’ which
constitutes a certification that it
conforms to the requirements of this
standard.
S6.5.2 DRL marking. Each original
equipment and replacement lamp used
as a daytime running lamp (DRL),
unless optically combined with a
headlamp, must be permanently marked
‘‘DRL’’ on its lens in letters not less than
3 mm high.
S6.5.3 Headlamp markings.
S6.5.3. Trademark. The lens of each
original and replacement equipment
headlamp, and of each original and
replacement equipment beam
contributor must be marked with the
name and/or trademark registered with
the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office of
the manufacturer of such headlamp or
beam contributor, of its importer, or any
manufacturer of a vehicle equipped
with such headlamp or beam
contributor. Nothing in this standard
authorizes the marking of any such
name and/or trademark by one who is
not the owner, unless the owner has
consented to it.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68274
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S6.5.3.2 Voltage and trade number.
Each original and replacement
equipment headlamp, and each original
and replacement equipment beam
contributor must be marked with its
voltage and with its part or trade
number.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp
markings.
S6.5.3.3.1 Each sealed beam
headlamp lens must be molded with
‘‘SEALED BEAM’’ and the appropriate
designation code as shown in Table II in
characters no less than 6.35 mm in size.
S6.5.3.3.2 The face of any character
molded on the surface of the lens must
not be raised more than 0.5 mm above
the lens surface.
S6.5.3.3.3 Type 1C1, 2C1, and 2D1
headlamps must have no raised
markings on the outside surface of the
lens between the diameters of 40 mm
and 90 mm about the lens center.
S6.5.3.3.4 Type 1A1, 2A1, 2B1, and
2E1 headlamps must have no raised
markings on the outside surface of the
lens within a diameter of 70 mm about
the lens center.
S6.5.3.3.5 Type LF, UF, 1G1, 2G1,
and 2H1 headlamps must have no raised
markings on the outside surface of the
lens within a diameter of 35 mm about
the lens center.
S6.5.3.3.6 A Type 1C1 replacement
headlamp may be marked ‘‘1’’ rather
than ‘‘1C1’’. A Type 2C1 replacement
headlamp may be marked ‘‘2’’ rather
than ‘‘2C1’’. A Type 2D1 replacement
headlamp may be marked ‘‘TOP’’ or ‘‘2’’
rather than ‘‘2D1’’.
S6.5.3.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp
markings.
S6.5.3.4.1 The lens of each
replaceable bulb headlamp must bear
permanent marking in front of each
replaceable light source with which it is
equipped that states either: The HB
Type, if the light source conforms to S11
of this standard for filament light
sources, or the bulb marking/
designation provided in compliance
with Section VIII of Appendix A of 49
CFR Part 564 (if the light source
conforms to S11 of this standard for
discharge light sources).
S6.5.3.4.1.1 No marking need be
provided if the only replaceable light
source in the headlamp is type HB1.
S6.5.3.5 Additional headlamp
markings. Additional marking
requirements for headlamps are found
in, S10.14.4, S10.15.4, S10.17.2,
S10.18.5, S10.18.7, and S10.18.9 of this
standard.
S6.6 Associated equipment.
S6.6.1 All vehicles to which this
standard applies, except trailers, must
be equipped with a turn signal operating
unit, a turn signal flasher, a turn signal
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
pilot indicator, a headlamp beam
switching device, and an upper beam
headlamp indicator meeting the
requirements of S9.
S6.6.2 All vehicles to which this
standard applies except trailers and
motorcycles must be equipped with a
vehicular hazard warning operating
unit, a vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher, and a vehicular hazard warning
signal pilot indicator meeting the
requirements of S9.
S6.6.3 License plate holder. Each
rear license plate holder must be
designed and constructed to provide a
substantial plane surface on which to
mount the plate. The plane of the
license plate mounting surface and the
plane on which the vehicle stands must
be perpendicular within ± 15°.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7.1 General.
S6.7.1.1 Each replacement lamp,
reflective device, or item of associated
equipment, including a combination
lamp, must:
(a) Be designed to conform to meet all
requirements specified in this standard
for that type of lamp, reflective device,
or other item of equipment (in the case
of a combination lamp, it must meet
these requirements for each function);
and
(b) Include all of the functions of the
lamp, reflective device, or item of
associated equipment, including a
combination lamp, it is designed to
replace or is capable of replacing (other
than functions not required by this
standard).
S6.7.1.2 Each replacement lamp,
reflective device, or item of associated
equipment, including a combination
lamp, which is designed or
recommended for particular vehicle
models must be designed so that it does
not take the vehicle out of compliance
with this standard when the individual
device is installed on the vehicle.
Except as provided in S6.7.1.3, the
determination of whether a vehicle
would be taken out of compliance with
this standard when an individual device
is installed on the vehicle is made
without regard to whether additional
devices, including separate lamps or
reflective devices sold together with the
device, would also be installed.
S6.7.1.3 In the case of a lamp or
other device that is used on each side
of the vehicle in pairs, the
determination (for the purposes of
S6.7.1.2) of whether a vehicle would be
taken out of compliance with this
standard when an individual device is
installed on the vehicle is made
assuming that the other matched paired
device would be installed on the other
side of the vehicle, whether or not the
PO 00000
Frm 00042
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
matched paired devices are sold
together. This provision does not limit
the responsibilities of manufacturers,
distributors, dealers or motor vehicle
repair businesses under 49 U.S.C.
30122, Making safety devices and
elements inoperative.
S6.7.2 Version of this standard. The
requirements of S6.7.1 must be met, at
the option of the manufacturer, using
either the current version of this
standard or the standard in effect at the
time of manufacture of the original
equipment being replaced.
S7 Signal lamp requirements.
S7.1 Turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1.1 Number. See Tables I–a and
I–c.
S7.1.1.2 Color of light. See Tables I–
a and I–c.
S7.1.1.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a and I–c.
S7.1.1.4 Mounting height. See
Tables I–a and I–c.
S7.1.1.5 Activation. See Tables I–a
and I–c.
S7.1.1.6 Effective projected
luminous lens area. See Table IV–a.
S7.1.1.7 Visibility. See S6.4.
S7.1.1.8 Indicator. See S9.3.
S7.1.1.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.1.1.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.1.1.10.1 Each front turn signal
lamp must also be designed to comply
with any additional photometry
requirements based on its installed
spacing to other lamps as specified by
this section. Where more than one
spacing relationship exists for a turn
signal lamp the requirement must be the
one that specifies the highest luminous
intensity multiplier of Tables VI–a and
VI–b.
S7.1.1.10.2 Spacing measurement
for non-reflector lamps. For any front
turn signal lamp that does not employ
a reflector to meet photometric
requirements, the spacing must be
measured from the light source of the
turn signal lamp to the lighted edge of
any lower beam headlamp, or any lamp
such as an auxiliary lower beam
headlamp or fog lamp used to
supplement the lower beam headlamp.
S7.1.1.10.3 Spacing measurement
for lamps with reflectors. For any front
turn signal lamp which employs a
reflector, such as a parabolic reflector, to
meet photometric requirements, the
spacing must be measured from the
geometric centroid of the turn signal
lamp effective projected luminous lens
area to the lighted edge of any lower
beam headlamp, or any lamp such as an
auxiliary lower beam headlamp or fog
lamp used to supplement the lower
beam headlamp.
S7.1.1.10.4 Spacing based
photometric multipliers.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
(a) where the spacing measurement of
S7.1.1.10.2 or S7.1.1.10.3 between a
turn signal lamp and the lighted edge of
any lower beam headlamp is less than
100 mm the photometric multiplier
must be 2.5.
(b) where the spacing measurement of
S7.1.1.10.2 or S7.1.1.10.3 between a
turn signal lamp and the lighted edge of
any lamp such as an auxiliary lower
beam headlamp or fog lamp used to
supplement the lower beam headlamp is
at least 75 mm but less than 100 mm the
photometric multiplier of Table VI must
be 1.5.
(c) where the spacing measurement of
S7.1.1.10.2 or S7.1.1.10.3 between a
turn signal lamp and the lighted edge of
any lamp such as an auxiliary lower
beam headlamp or fog lamp used to
supplement the lower beam headlamp is
at least 60 mm but less than 75 mm the
photometric multiplier must be 2.0.
(d) where the spacing measurement of
S7.1.1.10.2 or S7.1.1.10.3 between a
turn signal lamp and the lighted edge of
any lamp such as an auxiliary lower
beam headlamp or fog lamp used to
supplement the lower beam headlamp is
less than 60 mm the photometric
multiplier must be 2.5.
S7.1.1.11 Multiple compartments
and multiple lamps.
S7.1.1.11.1 A multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps may be used to
meet the photometric requirements of a
front turn signal lamp.
S7.1.1.11.2 If a multiple
compartment lamp or multiple lamps
are used on a passenger car or on a
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,
bus, or trailer of less than 2032 mm in
overall width, and the distance between
adjacent light sources does not exceed
560 mm for two compartment or lamp
arrangements and does not exceed 410
mm for three compartments or lamp
arrangements, then the combination of
the compartments or lamps must be
used to meet the photometric
requirements for the corresponding
number of lighted sections specified in
Tables VI–a or VI–b.
S7.1.1.11.3 If the distance between
adjacent light sources exceeds the
previously stated dimensions, each
compartment or lamp must comply with
the photometric requirements for one
lighted section specified in Tables VI–
a or VI–b
S7.1.1.11.4 Lamps installed on
vehicles 2032 mm or more in overall
width. Multiple compartment front turn
signal lamps installed on multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses
2032 mm or more in overall width
require measurement of the
photometrics for the entire lamp and not
for individual compartments.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S7.1.1.12 Ratio to parking lamps
and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.12.1 When a parking lamp, or
a clearance lamp on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, trailer, or bus
of 2032 mm or more in overall width,
is combined with a front turn signal
lamp, the luminous intensity of the
front turn signal lamp at each identified
test point must not be less than the
luminous intensity of the parking lamp
or clearance lamp at that same test point
times the multiplier shown for that test
point in Tables VI-a or VI-b.
S7.1.1.12.2 If a multiple
compartment or multiple lamp
arrangement is used on a passenger car
or on a multipurpose passenger vehicle,
truck, bus, or trailer of less than 2032
mm in overall width, and the distance
between the optical axes for both the
parking lamp and turn signal lamp is
within 560 mm for two compartment or
lamp arrangements or 410 mm for three
compartment or lamp arrangements,
then the ratio must be computed with
all compartments or lamps lighted.
S7.1.1.12.3 If a multiple
compartment or multiple lamp
arrangement is used and the distance
between optical axes for one of the
functions exceeds 560 mm for two
compartment or lamp arrangements or
410 mm for three compartments or lamp
arrangements, then the ratio must be
computed for only those compartments
or lamps where the parking lamp and
turn signal lamp are optically combined.
S7.1.1.12.4 Where the clearance
lamp is combined with the turn signal
lamp, and the maximum luminous
intensity of the clearance lamp is
located below horizontal and within an
area generated by a 1.0 radius around a
test point, the ratio for the test point
may be computed using the lowest
value of the clearance lamp luminous
intensity within the generated area.
S7.1.1.13 Photometry.
S7.1.1.13.1 When tested according
to the procedure of S14.2.1, each front
turn signal lamp must be designed to
conform to the base photometry
requirements plus any applicable
multipliers as shown in Tables VI–a and
VI–b for the number of lamp
compartments or individual lamps and
the type of vehicle it is installed on.
S7.1.1.13.2 As an alternative to
S7.1.1.13.1, a front turn signal lamp
installed on a motorcycle may be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XIII-a when
tested according to the procedure of
S14.2.1.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests. Each front
turn signal lamp must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the vibration test,
PO 00000
Frm 00043
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68275
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
test of S14.5, and the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S7.1.2 Rear turn signal lamps.
S7.1.2.1 Number. See Tables I–a, I–
b, and I–c.
S7.1.2.2 Color of light. See Tables I–
a, I–b, and I–c.
S7.1.2.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a, I–b, and I–c and S6.1.3.2.
S7.1.2.4 Mounting height. See
Tables I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S7.1.2.5 Activation. See Tables I–a,
I–b, and I–c.
S7.1.2.6 Effective projected
luminous lens area. See Table IV–a.
S7.1.2.7 Visibility. See S6.4.
S7.1.2.8 Indicator. See S9.3.
S7.1.2.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.1.2.10 Spacing to other lamps.
No requirement.
S7.1.2.11 Multiple compartments
and multiple lamps.
S7.1.2.11.1 A multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps may be used to
meet the photometric requirements of a
rear turn signal lamp provided the
requirements of S6.1.3.2 are met
S7.1.2.11.2 If a multiple
compartment lamp or multiple lamps
are used on a passenger car or on a
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,
bus, or trailer of less than 2032 mm in
overall width, and the distance between
adjacent light sources does not exceed
560 mm for two compartment or lamp
arrangements and does not exceed 410
mm for three compartment or lamp
arrangements, then the combination of
the compartments or lamps must be
used to meet the photometric
requirements for the corresponding
number of lighted sections specified in
Table VII.
S7.1.2.11.3 If the distance between
adjacent light sources exceeds the
previously stated dimensions, each
compartment or lamp must comply with
the photometric requirements for one
lighted section specified in Table VII.
S7.1.2.11.4 Lamps installed on
vehicles 2032 mm or more in overall
width. Multiple compartment rear turn
signal lamps installed on multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses
2032 mm or more in overall width
require measurement of the
photometrics for the entire lamp and not
for individual compartments.
S7.1.2.12 Ratio to taillamps and
clearance lamps.
S7.1.2.12.1 When a taillamp, or a
clearance lamp on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, trailer, or bus
of 2032 mm or more in overall width,
is combined with a rear turn signal
lamp, the luminous intensity of the rear
turn signal lamp at each identified test
point must not be less than the
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68276
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
luminous intensity of the taillamp or
clearance lamp at that same test point
times the multiplier shown for that test
point in Table VII.
S7.1.2.12.2 If a multiple
compartment or multiple lamp
arrangement is used on a passenger car
or on a multipurpose passenger vehicle,
truck, bus, or trailer of less than 2032
mm in overall width, and the distance
between the optical axes for both the
taillamp and turn signal lamp is within
560 mm for two compartment or lamp
arrangement or 410 mm for three
compartments or lamp arrangements,
then the ratio must be computed with
all compartments or lamps lighted.
S7.1.2.12.3 If a multiple
compartment or multiple lamp
arrangement is used and the distance
between optical axes for one of the
functions exceeds 560 mm for two
compartment or lamp arrangements or
410 mm for three compartment or lamp
arrangements, then the ratio must be
computed for only those compartments
or lamps where the taillamp and turn
signal lamp are optically combined.
S7.1.2.12.4 Where the taillamp or
clearance lamp is combined with the
turn signal lamp, and the maximum
luminous intensity of the taillamp or
clearance lamp is located below
horizontal and within an area generated
by a 0.5 ° radius around a test point for
a taillamp on a passenger car or on a
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,
bus, or trailer of less than 2032 mm in
overall width, or by a 1.0 ° radius
around a test point for a taillamp or
clearance lamp on a vehicle 2032 mm or
more in overall width, the ratio for the
test point may be computed using the
lowest value of the taillamp or clearance
lamp luminous intensity within the
generated area.
S7.1.2.13 Photometry.
S7.1.2.13.1 Each rear turn signal
lamp must be designed to conform to
the photometry requirements of Table
VII, when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.1, for the number of
lamp compartments or individual
lamps, the type of vehicle it is installed
on, and the lamp color as specified by
this section.
S7.1.2.13.2 As an alternative to
S7.1.2.13.1, a rear turn signal lamp
installed on a motorcycle may be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XIII-a when
tested according to the procedure of
S14.2.1.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests. Each rear
turn signal lamp must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the vibration test,
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
test of S14.5, and the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S7.1.3 Combined lamp bulb
indexing.
S7.1.3.1 Each turn signal lamp
optically combined with a taillamp or a
parking lamp, or clearance lamp where
installed on a vehicle 2032 mm or more
in overall width, where a two-filament
bulb is used must have a bulb with an
indexing base and a socket designed so
that bulbs with non-indexing bases
cannot be used.
S7.1.3.2 Removable sockets must
have an indexing feature so that they
cannot be re-inserted into lamp
housings in random positions, unless
the lamp will perform its intended
function with random light source
orientation.
S7.2 Taillamps.
S7.2.1 Number. See Tables I-a, I-b,
and I-c.
S7.2.2 Color of light. See Tables I-a,
I-b, and I-c.
S7.2.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I-a, I-b, and I-c and S6.1.3.2.
S7.2.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I-a, I-b, and I-c.
S7.2.5 Activation. See Tables I-a, I-b,
and I-c.
S7.2.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.2.7 Visibility. See S6.4.
S7.2.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.2.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.2.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.2.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.2.11.1 A multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps may be used to
meet the photometric requirements of a
taillamp provided the requirements of
S6.1.3.2 are met.
S7.2.11.2 If a multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps are used and the
distance between the optical axes does
not exceed 560 mm for two
compartment or lamp arrangements and
does not exceed 410 mm for three
compartment or lamp arrangements,
then the combination of the
compartments or lamps must be used to
meet the photometric requirements for
the corresponding number of lighted
sections specified in Table VIII.
S7.2.11.3 If the distance between
optical axes exceeds the previously
stated dimensions, each compartment or
lamp must comply with the photometric
requirements for one lighted section
specified in Table VIII.
S7.2.11.4 Taillamps installed on
vehicles 2032 mm or more in overall
width. A maximum of two taillamps
and/or two compartments per side may
be mounted closer together than 560
mm providing that each compartment
PO 00000
Frm 00044
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
and/or lamp meets the single lighted
section photometric requirements
specified in Table VIII. Each lamp and/
or compartment utilized in this manner
must meet the single lighted section
requirements for all functions for which
it is designed.
S7.2.12 Ratio. See S7.1.2.12 for rear
turn signal lamps and S7.3.12 for stop
lamps.
S7.2.13 Photometry. Each taillamp
must be designed to conform to the
photometry requirements of Table VIII,
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.1, for the number of lamp
compartments or individual lamps and
the type of vehicle it is installed on.
S7.2.14 Physical tests. Each taillamp
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S7.3 Stop lamps.
S7.3.1 Number. See Tables I-a, I-b,
and I-c.
S7.3.2 Color of light. See Tables I-a,
I-b, and I-c.
S7.3.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I-a, I-b, and I-c and S6.1.3.2.
S7.3.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I-a, I-b, and I-c.
S7.3.5 Activation. See Tables I-a, I-b,
and I-c.
S7.3.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. See Table IV-a.
S7.3.7 Visibility. See S6.4.
S7.3.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.3.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.3.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.3.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.3.11.1 A multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps may be used to
meet the photometric requirements of a
stop lamp provided the requirements of
S6.1.3.2 are met.
S7.3.11.2 If a multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamps are used on a
passenger car or on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, bus, or trailer
of less than 2032 mm in overall width,
and the distance between adjacent light
sources does not exceed 560 mm for two
compartment or lamp arrangements and
does not exceed 410 mm for three
compartment or lamp arrangements,
then the combination of the
compartments or lamps must be used to
meet the photometric requirements for
the corresponding number of lighted
sections specified in Table IX.
S7.3.11.3 If the distance between
adjacent light sources exceeds the
previously stated dimensions, each
compartment or lamp must comply with
the photometric requirements for one
lighted section specified in Table IX.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S7.3.11.4 Lamps installed on
vehicles 2032 mm or more in overall
width. Multiple compartment stop
lamps installed on multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses
2032 mm or more in overall width
require measurement of the
photometrics for the entire lamp and not
for individual compartments.
S7.3.12 Ratio to taillamps.
S7.3.12.1 When a taillamp is
combined with a stop lamp, the
luminous intensity of the stop lamp at
each identified test point must not be
less than the luminous intensity of the
taillamp at that same test point times
the multiplier shown for that test point
in Table IX.
S7.3.12.2 If a multiple compartment
or multiple lamp arrangement is used
on a passenger car or on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, bus, or trailer
of less than 2032 mm in overall width,
and the distance between the optical
axes for both the taillamp and stop lamp
is within 560 mm for two compartment
or lamp arrangements or 410 mm for
three compartment or lamp
arrangements, then the ratio must be
computed with all compartments or
lamps lighted.
S7.3.12.3 If a multiple compartment
or multiple lamp arrangement is used
and the distance between optical axes
for one of the functions exceeds 560 mm
for two compartment or lamp
arrangements or 410 mm for three
compartments or lamp arrangements,
then the ratio must be computed for
only those compartments or lamps
where the taillamp and stop lamp are
optically combined.
S7.3.12.4 Where the taillamp is
combined with the stop lamp, and the
maximum luminous intensity of the
taillamp is located below horizontal and
within an area generated by a 0.5 °
radius around a test point for a taillamp
on a passenger car or on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, bus, or trailer
of less than 2032 mm in overall width,
or by a 1.0 ° radius around a test point
for a taillamp on a vehicle 2032 mm or
more in overall width, the ratio for the
test point may be computed using the
lowest value of the taillamp luminous
intensity within the generated area.
S7.3.13 Photometry.
S7.3.13.1 Each stop lamp must be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table IX, when tested
according to the procedure of S14.2.1,
for the number of lamp compartments or
individual lamps and the type of vehicle
it is installed on.
S7.3.13.2 A stop lamp installed on a
motor driven cycle may be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
of Table XIII-b when tested according to
the procedure of S14.2.1.
S7.3.14 Physical tests. Each stop
lamp must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S7.3.15 Combined lamp bulb
indexing.
S7.3.15.1 Each stop lamp optically
combined with a taillamp where a twofilament bulb is used must have a bulb
with an indexing base and a socket
designed so that bulbs with nonindexing bases cannot be used.
S7.3.15.2 Removable sockets must
have an indexing feature so that they
cannot be re-inserted into lamp
housings in random positions, unless
the lamp will perform its intended
function with random light source
orientation.
S7.4 Side marker lamps.
S7.4.1 Number. See Tables I–a, I–b,
and I–c.
S7.4.2 Color of light. See Tables I–a,
I–b, and I–c.
S7.4.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S7.4.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S7.4.5 Activation. See Tables I–a, I–
b, and I–c.
S7.4.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.4.7 Visibility. No requirement.
S7.4.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.4.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.4.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.4.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.4.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.4.13 Photometry.
S7.4.13.1 Each side marker lamp
must be designed to conform to the
photometry requirements of Table X,
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.1, for the lamp color as
specified by this section.
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry. For
each motor vehicle less than 30 feet in
overall length and less than 2032 mm in
overall width, the minimum
photometric intensity requirements for a
side marker lamp may be met for all
inboard test points at a distance of 15
feet from the vehicle and on a vertical
plane that is perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle and
located midway between the front and
rear side marker lamps.
S7.4.14 Physical tests. Each side
marker lamp must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the vibration test,
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
PO 00000
Frm 00045
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68277
test of S14.5, and the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S7.5 Clearance and identification
lamps.
S7.5.1 Number. See Tables I–a and
I–b.
S7.5.2 Color of light. See Tables I–a
and I–b.
S7.5.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a and I–b.
S7.5.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I–a and I–b.
S7.5.5 Activation. See Tables I–a
and I–b.
S7.5.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.5.7 Visibility. No requirement.
S7.5.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.5.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.5.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.5.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.5.12 Ratio.
S7.5.12.1 Clearance lamps. See
S7.1.1.12 for front turn signal lamps and
S7.1.2.12 for rear turn signal lamps.
S7.5.12.2 Identification lamps. No
requirement.
S7.5.13 Photometry. Each clearance
or identification lamp must be designed
to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XI, for the
applicable lamp color, when tested
according to the procedure of S14.2.1.
S7.5.14 Physical tests. Each
clearance and identification must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of the vibration test,
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
test of S14.5, and the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S7.6 Backup lamps.
S7.6.1 Number. See Table I–a and
S6.1.1.
S7.6.2 Color of light.
S7.6.2.1 See Table I–a.
S7.6.2.2 A backup lamp may project
incidental red, yellow, or white light
through reflectors or lenses that are
adjacent, close to, or a part of the lamp
assembly.
S7.6.3 Mounting location. See Table
I–a.
S7.6.4 Mounting height. No
requirement.
S7.6.5 Activation. See Table I–a.
S7.6.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.6.7 Visibility. See Table V–a.
S7.6.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.6.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.6.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.6.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.6.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.6.13 Photometry. Each backup
lamp must be designed to conform to
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68278
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
the photometry requirements of Table
XII, when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.1, as specified by
this section.
S7.6.14 Physical tests. Each backup
lamp must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S7.7 License plate lamps.
S7.7.1 Number. See Tables I–a, I–b,
and I–c and S6.1.1.
S7.7.2 Color of light. See Tables I–a,
I–b, and I–c.
S7.7.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a,
I–b, and I–c.
S7.7.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S7.7.5 Activation. See Tables I–a, I–
b, and I–c.
S7.7.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.7.7 Visibility. No requirement.
S7.7.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.7.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.7.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.7.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.7.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.7.13 Photometry.
S7.7.13.1 Each license plate lamp
must be designed to conform to the
photometry requirements of this section
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.2.
S7.7.13.2 An illumination value of
no less than 8 lx [0.75 fc] must be met
at each test station target location shown
in Figure 19.
S7.7.13.3 The ratio of the average of
the two highest illumination values
divided by the average of the two lowest
illumination values must not exceed
20:1 for vehicles other than motorcycles
and motor driven cycles.
S7.7.13.4 The ratio of the highest
illumination value divided by the
average of the two lowest illumination
values must not exceed 15:1 for
motorcycles and motor driven cycles.
S7.7.14 Physical tests. Each license
plate lamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S7.7.15 Installation.
S7.7.15.1 Each license plate lamp
installed on a vehicle other than a
motorcycle or motor driven cycle must
be of such size and design as to provide
illumination on all parts of a 150 mm
by 300 mm test plate.
S7.7.15.2 Each license plate lamp
installed on a motorcycle or motor
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
driven cycle must be of such size and
design as to provide illumination on all
parts of a 100 mm by 175 mm test plate.
S7.7.15.3 The light rays must reach
all portions of an imaginary plate of the
same size at least 25 mm ahead of the
actual plate measured perpendicular to
the plane of the plate.
S7.7.15.4 Incident light from single
lamp. When a single lamp as shown in
Figure 20 is used to illuminate the
license plate, the lamp and license plate
holder must bear such relation to each
other that at no point on the plate must
the incident light make an angle of less
than 8° to the plane of the plate, this
angle being measured from the edge of
the light emitting surface of the lamp
farthest from the surface of the plate.
S7.7.15.5 Incident light from
multiple lamps. When two or more
lamps as shown in Figure 20 are used
to illuminate the license plate, the
minimum 8° incident light angle must
apply only to that portion of the plate
which the particular lamp is designed to
illuminate. The angle must be measured
in the same manner as S7.7.15.4.
S7.8 Parking lamps.
S7.8.1 Number. See Table I–a.
S7.8.2 Color of light. See Table I–a.
S7.8.3 Mounting location. See Table
I–a.
S7.8.4 Mounting height. See Table I–
a.
S7.8.5 Activation. See Table I–a.
S7.8.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.8.7 Visibility. See S6.4.
S7.8.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.8.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.8.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.8.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.8.12 Ratio. See S7.1.1.12 for front
turn signal lamps.
S7.8.13 Photometry. Each parking
lamp must be designed to conform to
the photometry requirements of Table
XIV, when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.1, as specified by
this section.
S7.8.14 Physical tests. Each parking
lamp must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S7.9 High-mounted stop lamps.
S7.9.1 Number. See Table I–a and
S6.1.1.2.
S7.9.2 Color of light. See Table I–a.
S7.9.3 Mounting location. See Table
I–a.
S7.9.4 Mounting height. See Table I–
a and S6.1.4.1.
S7.9.5 Activation. See Table I–a.
PO 00000
Frm 00046
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.9.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. See Table IV–b.
S7.9.7 Visibility. See Table V–a.
S7.9.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.9.9 Markings. See S6.5
S7.9.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.9.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.9.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.9.13 Photometry. Each highmounted stop lamp must be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
of Table XV, when tested according to
the procedure of S14.2.1, as specified by
this section.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1.1 Each high-mounted stop
lamp must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
vibration test of S14.5, and the color test
and plastic optical material test of
S14.4.
S7.9.14.1.2 Each high-mounted stop
lamp that is not mounted inside the
vehicle must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
test of S14.5.
S7.10 Daytime running lamps
(DRLs).
S7.10.1 Number. See Table I–a.
S7.10.2 Color of light. See Table I–a.
S7.10.3 Mounting location. See
Table I–a.
S7.10.4 Mounting height. See Table
I–a. and S7.10.13(b).
S7.10.5 Activation. See Table I–a.
and S7.10.10.1(c).
S7.10.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S7.10.7 Visibility. No requirement.
S7.10.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.10.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.10.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.10.10.1 Spacing to turn signal
lamps. Each DRL not optically
combined with a turn signal lamp must
be located on the vehicle so that the
distance from its lighted edge to the
optical center of the nearest turn signal
lamp is not less than 100 mm unless,
(a) The luminous intensity of the DRL
is not more than 2,600 cd at any
location in the beam and the turn signal
lamp meets 2.5 times the base front turn
signal photometric requirements, or
(b) The DRL is optically combined
with a lower beam headlamp and the
turn signal lamp meets 2.5 times the
base front turn signal photometric
requirements, or
(c) The DRL is deactivated when the
turn signal or hazard warning signal
lamp is activated.
S7.10.11 Multiple compartments
and multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.10.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.10.13 Photometry. Each DRL
must have a luminous intensity not less
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
than 500 cd at test point H–V, nor more
than 3,000 cd at any location in the
beam when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.4 as specified by this
section, unless it is:
(a) A lower beam headlamp intended
to operate as a DRL at full voltage, or a
voltage lower than used to operate it as
a lower beam headlamp, or
(b) An upper beam headlamp
intended to operate as a DRL, whose
luminous intensity at test point H–V is
not more than 7,000 cd, and whose
mounting height is not higher than 864
mm.
S7.10.14 Physical tests. Each DRL
that is not combined with another
required lamp must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S7.11 School bus signal lamps.
S7.11.1 Number. See Table I–a.
S7.11.2 Color of light. See Table I–a.
S7.11.3 Mounting location. See
Table I–a.
S7.11.4 Mounting height. See Table
I–a.
S7.11.5 Activation. See Table I–a.
S7.11.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. See Table IV–c.
S7.11.7 Visibility. See Table V–a.
S7.11.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S7.11.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S7.11.10 Spacing to other lamps. No
requirement.
S7.11.11 Multiple compartments
and multiple lamps. No requirement.
S7.11.12 Ratio. No requirement.
S7.11.13 Photometry. Each school
bus signal lamp must be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
of Table XVII, when tested according to
the procedure of S14.2.1, for the lamp
color as specified by this section.
S7.11.14 Physical tests. Each school
bus signal lamp must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the vibration test,
moisture test, dust test, and corrosion
test of S14.5, and the color test and
plastic optical material test of S14.4.
S8 Reflective device requirements.
S8.1 Reflex reflectors.
S8.1.1 Number. See Tables I–a, I–b,
and I–c.
S8.1.2 Color. See Tables I–a, I–b,
and I–c.
S8.1.3 Mounting location. See
Tables I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S8.1.4 Mounting height. See Tables
I–a, I–b, and I–c.
S8.1.5 Activation. No requirement.
S8.1.6 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S8.1.7 Visibility. No requirement.
S8.1.8 Indicator. No requirement.
S8.1.9 Markings. See S6.5.
S8.1.10 Spacing to other lamps or
reflective devices. No requirement.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S8.1.11 Photometry. Each reflex
reflector must be designed to conform to
the photometry requirements of Table
XVI–a when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.3 for the reflex
reflector color as specified by this
section.
S8.1.12 Physical tests. Each reflex
reflector must be designed to conform to
the performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, and the
color test and plastic optical material
test of S14.4.
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex
reflector material. Reflective material
conforming to Federal Specification L–
S–300, Sheeting and Tape, Reflective;
Non-exposed Lens, Adhesive Backing,
(September 7, 1965) (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title),
may be used for side reflex reflectors if
this material as used on the vehicle,
meets the performance requirements of
Table XVI–a.
S8.2 Conspicuity systems. The
requirement for conspicuity systems
may be met with retroreflective
sheeting, conspicuity reflex reflectors,
or a combination of retroreflective
sheeting and conspicuity reflex
reflectors.
S8.2.1 Retroreflective sheeting.
S8.2.1.1 Retroreflective sheeting
must consist of a smooth, flat,
transparent exterior film with
retroreflective elements embedded or
suspended beneath the film so as to
form a non-exposed retroreflective
optical system.
S8.2.1.2 Retroreflective sheeting
material. Retroreflective sheeting must
meet the requirements, except
photometry, of ASTM D 4956–90,
Standard for Retroreflective Sheeting for
Traffic Control, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
for Type V Sheeting. Sheeting of Grade
DOT–C2 of no less than 50 mm wide,
Grade DOT–C3 of no less than 75 mm
wide, or Grade DOT–C4 of no less than
100 mm wide may be used.
S8.2.1.3 Certification marking. The
letters DOT–C2, DOT–C3, or DOT–C4,
as appropriate, constituting a
certification that the retroreflective
sheeting conforms to the requirements
of this standard, must appear at least
once on the exposed surface of each
white or red segment of retroreflective
sheeting, and at least once every 300
mm on retroreflective sheeting that is
white only. The characters must be not
less than 3 mm high, and must be
permanently stamped, etched, molded,
or printed in indelible ink.
S8.2.1.4 Application pattern.
S8.2.1.4.1 Alternating red and white
materials.
PO 00000
Frm 00047
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68279
S8.2.1.4.1.1 As shown in Figures
12–1 and 12–2, where alternating
material is installed, except for a
segment that is trimmed to clear
obstructions, or lengthened to provide
red sheeting near red lamps, alternating
material must be installed with each
white and red segment having a length
of 300 ± 150 mm.
S8.2.1.4.1.2 Neither white nor red
sheeting must represent more than two
thirds the aggregate of any continuous
strip marking the width of a trailer, or
any continuous or broken strip marking
its length.
S8.2.1.5 Application location. Need
not be installed, as illustrated in Figure
12–2, on discontinuous surfaces such as
outside ribs, stake post pickets on
platform trailers, and external
protruding beams, or to items of
equipment such as door hinges and
lamp bodies on trailers and body joints,
stiffening beads, drip rails, and rolled
surfaces on truck tractors.
S8.2.1.6 Application spacing. As
illustrated in Figure 12–2, the edge of
any white sheeting must not be located
closer than 75 mm to the edge of the
luminous lens area of any red or amber
lamp that is required by this standard.
The edge of any red sheeting must not
be located closer than 75 mm to the
edge of the luminous lens area of any
amber lamp that is required by this
standard.
S8.2.1.7 Photometry. Each
retroreflective sheeting must be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XVI–c when
tested according to the procedure of
S14.2.3 for the color and grade as
specified by this section.
S8.2.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
S8.2.2.1 Certification marking. The
exposed surface of each conspicuity
reflex reflector must be marked with the
letters DOT–C which constitutes a
certification that the reflector conforms
to the conspicuity reflex reflector
requirements of this standard. The
certification must be not less than 3 mm
high, and must be permanently
stamped, etched, molded, or printed in
indelible ink.
S8.2.2.2 Application pattern.
S8.2.2.2.1 Alternating red and white
materials. Conspicuity reflex reflectors
must be installed in a repetitive pattern
of two or three white reflectors
alternating with two or three red
reflectors, with the center of each
reflector not more than 100 mm from
the center of each adjacent reflector.
S8.2.2.2.2 White material. White
conspicuity reflex reflectors must be
installed with the center of each
reflector not more than 100 mm from
the center of each adjacent reflector.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68280
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S8.2.2.3 Photometry.
S8.2.2.3.1 Each red conspicuity
reflex reflector must be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
of Table XVI–a for a red reflex reflector
and Table XVI–b for a red conspicuity
reflex reflector when tested according to
the procedure of S14.2.3 as specified by
this section.
S8.2.2.3.2 Each white conspicuity
reflex reflector installed in only a
horizontal orientation must be designed
to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XVI–a for a white
reflex reflector and Table XVI–b for a
white horizontal conspicuity reflex
reflector when tested according to the
procedure of S14.2.3 as specified by this
section.
S8.2.2.3.3 Each white conspicuity
reflex reflector installed in a vertical
orientation must be designed to conform
to the photometry requirements of Table
XVI–a for a white reflex reflector, and
Table XVI–b for a white horizontal
conspicuity reflex reflector and a white
vertical conspicuity reflex reflector
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.3 as specified by this section.
S8.2.3 Conspicuity system
installation on trailers.
S8.2.3.1 Trailer rear.
S8.2.3.1.1 Element 1—alternating
red and white materials. As shown in
Figure 11, a strip of sheeting or
conspicuity reflex reflectors, as
horizontal as practicable, must be
applied across the full width of the
trailer, as close to the extreme edges as
practicable, and as close as practicable
to not less than 375 mm and not more
than 1525 mm above the road surface at
the strip centerline with the trailer at
curb weight.
S8.2.3.1.2 Element 2—white. (not
required for container chassis or for
platform trailers without bulkheads).
S8.2.3.1.2.1 As shown in Figure 11,
two pairs of strips of sheeting or
conspicuity reflex reflectors, each pair
consisting of strips 300 mm long of
Grade DOT–C2, DOT–C3, or DOT–C4,
must be applied horizontally and
vertically to the right and left upper
contours of the body, as viewed from
the rear, as close to the top of the trailer
and as far apart as practicable.
S8.2.3.1.2.2 If the perimeter of the
body, as viewed from the rear, is other
than rectangular, the strips may be
applied along the perimeter, as close as
practicable to the uppermost and
outermost areas of the rear of the body
on the left and right sides.
S8.2.3.1.3 Element 3—alternating
red and white materials. (not required
for trailers without underride protection
devices).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S8.2.3.1.3.1 As shown in Figure 11,
a strip of Grade DOT–C2 sheeting no
less than 38 mm wide or reflectors must
be applied across the full width of the
horizontal member of the rear underride
protection device.
S8.2.3.2 Trailer side—alternating
red and white materials.
S8.2.3.2.1 As shown in Figure 11, a
strip of sheeting or conspicuity reflex
reflectors must be applied to each side,
as horizontal as practicable, originating
and terminating as close to the front and
rear as practicable, as close as
practicable to not less than 375 mm and
not more than 1525 mm above the road
surface at the strip centerline at curb
weight, except that at the location
chosen the strip must not be obscured
in whole or in part by other motor
vehicle equipment or trailer cargo.
S8.2.3.2.2 The strip need not be
continuous as long as not less than half
the length of the trailer is covered and
the spaces are distributed as evenly as
practicable.
S8.2.3.2.3 If necessary to clear rivet
heads or other similar obstructions,
Grade DOT–C2 sheeting may be
separated into two 25 mm wide strips of
the same length and color, separated by
a space of not more than 25 mm and
used in place of the retroreflective
sheeting that would otherwise be
applied.
S8.2.4 Conspicuity system
installation on truck tractors.
S8.2.4.1 Element 1—alternating red
and white materials. As shown in Figure
13, two strips of sheeting or conspicuity
reflex reflectors, each not less than 600
mm long, located as close as practicable
to the edges of the rear fenders,
mudflaps, or the mudflap support
brackets, must be applied to mark the
width of the truck tractor.
S8.2.4.1.1 The strips must be
mounted as horizontal as practicable, in
a vertical plane facing the rear, on the
rear fenders, on the mudflap support
brackets, on plates attached to the
mudflap support brackets, or on the
mudflaps.
S8.2.4.1.2 Strips on mudflaps must
be mounted not lower than 300 mm
below the upper horizontal edge of the
mudflap. If the vehicle is certified with
temporary mudflap support brackets,
the strips must be mounted on the
mudflaps or on plates transferable to
permanent mudflap support brackets.
S8.2.4.1.3 For a truck tractor without
mudflaps, the strips may be mounted
outboard of the frame on brackets
behind the rear axle or on brackets
ahead of the rear axle and above the top
of the rear tires at unladen vehicle
height, or they may be mounted directly
or indirectly to the back of the cab as
PO 00000
Frm 00048
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
close to the outer edges as practicable,
above the top of the tires, and not more
than 1525 mm above the road surface at
unladen vehicle height.
S8.2.4.1.4 If the strips are mounted
on the back of the cab, no more than
25% of their cumulative area may be
obscured by vehicle equipment as
determined in a rear orthogonal view.
S8.2.4.2 Element 2—white. As
shown in Figure 13, two pairs of strips
of sheeting or conspicuity reflex
reflectors, each pair consisting of strips
300 mm long, must be applied
horizontally and vertically as
practicable to the right and left upper
contours of the cab, as close to the top
of the cab and as far apart as practicable.
S8.2.4.2.1 No more than 25% of
their cumulative area may be obscured
by vehicle equipment as determined in
a rear orthogonal view.
S8.2.4.2.2 If one pair must be
relocated to avoid obscuration by
vehicle equipment, the other pair may
be relocated in order to be mounted
symmetrically.
S8.2.4.2.3 If the rear window is so
large as to occupy all the practicable
space, the material may be attached to
the edge of the window itself.
S9 Associated equipment
requirements.
S9.1 Turn signal operating unit.
S9.1.1 The turn signal operating unit
installed on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, and buses less than 2032 mm in
overall width must be self-canceling by
steering wheel rotation and capable of
cancellation by a manually operated
control.
S9.1.2 Physical tests. Each turn
signal operating unit must be designed
to conform to all applicable
performance requirements of S14.9.
S9.2 Turn signal flasher.
S9.2.1 The means of producing the
turn signal pilot indicator signal may be
incorporated in the flasher. A means of
producing an audible signal may be
incorporated in the flasher.
S9.2.2 Physical tests. Each turn
signal flasher must be designed to
conform to all applicable performance
requirements of S14.9.
S9.3 Turn signal pilot indicator.
S9.3.1 Each vehicle equipped with a
turn signal operating unit where any
turn signal lamp is not visible to the
driver must also have an illuminated
pilot indicator to provide a clear and
unmistakable indication that the turn
signal system is activated.
S9.3.2 The indicator must consist of
one or more lights flashing at the same
frequency as the turn signal lamps.
S9.3.3 The indicator must function
satisfactorily under all test conditions
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
imposed on the turn signal flasher in
S14.9.
S9.3.4 Indicator size and color.
S9.3.4.1 If the indicator is located
inside the vehicle it must emit a green
colored light and have a minimum area
equivalent to a 3⁄16 in diameter circle.
S9.3.4.2 If the indicator is located
outside of the vehicle it must emit a
yellow light and have a minimum
projected illuminated area of 0.1 sq in.
S9.3.5 The minimum required
illuminated area of the indicator must
be visible to any tangent on the 95th
eyellipse as defined in SAE J941b,
Motor Vehicle Driver’s Eye Range,
February 1969, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
with the steering wheel turned to a
straight ahead driving position and in
the design location for an adjustable
wheel or column.
S9.3.6 Turn signal lamp failure.
Failure of one or more turn signal lamps
such that the minimum photometric
performance specified in Tables VI or
VII is not being met must be indicated
by the turn signal pilot indicator by a
‘‘steady on’’, ‘‘steady off’’, or by a
significant change in the flashing rate,
except when a variable-load turn signal
flasher is used on a multipurpose
passenger vehicle, truck, or bus 2032
mm or more in overall width, on a truck
that is capable of accommodating a slide
in camper, or on any vehicle equipped
to tow trailers.
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching
device. Each vehicle must have a means
of switching between lower and upper
beams designed and located so that it
may be operated conveniently by a
simple movement of the driver’s hand
or foot. The switch must have no dead
point and, except as provided by
S6.1.5.2, the lower and upper beams
must not be energized simultaneously
except momentarily for temporary
signaling purposes or during switching
between beams.
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp
beam switching device. As an
alternative to S9.4, a vehicle may be
equipped with a semi-automatic means
of switching between lower and upper
beams.
S9.4.1.1 Operating instructions.
Each semi-automatic headlamp
switching device must include
operating instructions to permit a driver
to operate the device correctly
including; how to turn the automatic
control on and off, how to adjust the
provided sensitivity control, and any
other specific instructions applicable to
the particular device.
S9.4.1.2 Manual override. The
device must include a means
convenient to the driver for switching to
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
the opposite beam from the one
provided.
S9.4.1.3 Fail safe operation. A
failure of the automatic control portion
of the device must not result in the loss
of manual operation of both upper and
lower beams.
S9.4.1.4 Automatic dimming
indicator. There must be a convenient
means of informing the driver when the
device is controlling the headlamps
automatically. The device shall not
affect the function of the upper beam
indicator light.
S9.4.1.5 Lens accessibility. The
device lens must be accessible for
cleaning when the device is installed on
a vehicle.
S9.4.1.6 Mounting height. The
center of the device lens must be
mounted no less than 24 in. above the
road surface.
S9.4.1.7 Physical tests. Each semiautomatic headlamp beam switching
device must be designed to conform to
all applicable performance requirements
of S14.9.
S9.5 Upper beam headlamp
indicator. Each vehicle must have a
means for indicating to the driver when
the upper beams of the headlighting
system are activated.
S9.5.1 Indicator size and location.
The upper beam headlamp indicator
must have a minimum area equivalent
to that of a 3⁄16 in diameter circle, and
be plainly visible to drivers of all
heights under normal driving conditions
when headlamps are required.
S9.6 Vehicular hazard warning
signal operating unit.
S9.6.1 The unit may be an
independent device or it may be
combined with the turn signal operating
unit. If combined with the turn signal
operating unit, the actuating motion of
the hazard function must differ from the
actuating motion of the turn signal
function.
S9.6.2 Operating unit switch. The
unit must operate independently of the
ignition or equivalent switch. If the
actuation of the hazard function
requires the operation of more than one
switch, a means must be provided for
actuating all switches simultaneously by
a single driver action.
S9.6.3 Physical tests. Each vehicular
hazard warning signal operating unit
must be designed to conform to all
applicable performance requirements of
S14.9.
S9.7 Vehicular hazard warning
signal flasher.
S9.7.1 The means of producing the
hazard warning signal pilot indicator
signal may be incorporated in the
flasher. A means of producing an
PO 00000
Frm 00049
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68281
audible signal may be incorporated in
the flasher.
S9.7.2 Physical tests. Each vehicular
hazard warning signal flasher must be
designed to conform to all applicable
performance requirements of S14.9.
S9.8 Vehicular hazard warning
signal pilot indicator.
S9.8.1 In vehicles equipped with
right hand and left hand turn signal
pilot indicators, both pilot indicators
and /or a separate pilot indicator must
flash simultaneously while the vehicle
hazard warning signal operating unit is
turned on.
S9.8.2 In vehicles equipped with a
single turn signal pilot indicator, a
separate vehicular hazard warning
signal pilot indicator must flash and the
turn signal pilot indicator may flash
while the vehicle hazard warning signal
operating unit is turned on.
S9.8.3 The indicator must function
satisfactorily under all test conditions
imposed on the vehicular hazard
warning signal flasher in S14.9.
S9.8.4 Indicator size and color. If the
vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator is not combined with the turn
signal pilot indicator, it must emit a red
color and have a minimum area
equivalent to a 0.5 in diameter circle.
S10 Headlighting system
requirements.
S10.1 Vehicle headlighting systems.
S10.1.1 Each passenger car,
multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck
and bus must be equipped with a
headlighting system conforming to the
requirements of Table II and this
standard.
S10.1.2 Each motorcycle must be
equipped with a headlighting system
conforming to S10.17 of this standard or
one half of any headlighting system of
Table II which provides both a full
upper beam and full lower beam.
S10.2 Aiming. Each headlamp
system installed on a motor vehicle
must be aimable in accordance with the
requirements of S10.18.
S10.3 Number. See Tables I–a and I–
c.
S10.4 Color of light. See Tables I–a
and I–c.
S10.5 Mounting location. See Tables
I–a and I–c and S6.1.3.5.
S10.6 Mounting height. See Tables
I–a and I–c.
S10.7 Activation. See Tables I–a and
I–c, Table II, and S6.1.5.
S10.8 Effective projected luminous
lens area. No requirement.
S10.9 Visibility. No requirement.
S10.10 Indicator. See S9.5.
S10.11 Markings. See S6.5.
S10.12 Spacing to other lamps. See
S6.1.3.5.
S10.13 Sealed beam headlighting
systems. All sealed beam headlighting
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68282
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
systems must be of a type designated in
Table II-a. Each sealed beam headlamp
must be designed to conform to the
specifications furnished with respect to
it pursuant to Appendix C of part 564
of this chapter and Table II-a of this
standard. The dimensions applicable to
the design of a specific type are those
identified with an ‘‘I’’ for
interchangeability specified on the
applicable drawing(s) filed in Docket
No. NHTSA 98–3397.
S10.13.1 Installation. A sealed beam
headlighting system must consist of the
correct number of designated headlamp
units as specified for the applicable
system in Table II-a. The units must
have their beams activated as specified
in Table II-a. A system must provide in
total not more than two upper beams
and two lower beams.
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim. Type F
sealed beam headlamps may be
mounted on common or parallel seating
and aiming planes to permit
simultaneous aiming of both headlamps
provided that there is no provision for
adjustment between the common or
parallel aiming and seating planes of the
two lamps. When tested with any
conforming Type UF and LF headlamps
in accordance with S14.2.5, the
assembly (consisting of the Type UF and
LF headlamps, mounting rings, the
aiming/seating rings, and aim
adjustment mechanism) must be
designed to conform to the applicable
photometric requirements.
S10.13.3 Photometry. Each sealed
beam headlamp must be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
of Table XVIII for upper beam and Table
XIX for lower beam as specified in Table
II-a for the specific headlamp unit and
aiming method, when tested according
to the procedure of S14.2.5.
S10.13.4 Physical tests.
S10.13.4.1 Each sealed beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
corrosion test, vibration test, inward
force test, torque deflection test,
headlamp connector test, headlamp
wattage test, and aiming adjustment
tests of S14.6.
S10.13.4.2 Each sealed beam
headlamp except a Type G or Type H
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
retaining ring test of S14.6.
S10.13.4.3 Each sealed beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
color test of S14.4. Each sealed beam
headlamp that does not incorporate a
glass lens must be designed to conform
to the plastic optical materials test of
S14.4.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S10.14 Integral beam headlighting
systems. All integral beam headlighting
systems must be of a type designated in
Table II-c.
S10.14.1 Installation. An integral
beam headlighting system must consist
of the correct number of designated
headlamp units as specified for the
applicable system in Table II-c. The
units must have their beams activated as
specified in Table II-c. A system must
provide in total not more than two
upper beams and two lower beams.
S10.14.2 Aimability.
S10.14.2.1 A system that
incorporates any headlamp or beam
contributor that does not have a VHAD
as an integral and indivisible part of the
headlamp or beam contributor must be
designed so that the applicable
photometric requirements are met when
any correctly aimed and
photometrically conforming headlamp
or beam contributor is removed from its
mounting and aiming mechanism, and
is replaced without reaim by any
conforming headlamp or beam
contributor of the same type.
S10.14.2.2 A system that
incorporates more than one beam
contributor providing a lower beam,
and/or more than one beam contributor
providing an upper beam, shall be
designed to conform to the on-vehicle
aiming requirements specified in
S10.18.8.
S10.14.3 Simultaneous aim. An
integral beam headlighting system
consisting of four individual headlamps
or beam contributors may have the
headlamp units mounted in an assembly
to permit simultaneous aiming of the
beam(s) contributors, providing that
with any complying contributor the
assembly complete with all lamps meets
the applicable photometric
requirements when tested in accordance
with S14.2.5.
S10.14.4 Markings. An integral beam
headlamp with a single light source
providing the lower beam must have its
lens permanently marked with ‘‘L’’. An
integral beam headlamp with a single
light source providing the upper beam
must have its lens permanently marked
with ‘‘U’’.
S10.14.5 Additional light sources.
An integral beam headlamp may
incorporate light sources that are used
for purposes other than headlighting
and are capable of being replaced.
S10.14.6 Photometry. Each integral
beam headlamp must be designed to
conform to the photometry requirements
of Table XVIII for upper beam and Table
XIX for lower beam as specified in Table
II-c for the specific headlamp unit and
aiming method, when tested according
to the procedure of S14.2.5.
PO 00000
Frm 00050
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S10.14.7 Physical tests.
S10.14.7.1 Each integral beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
corrosion test, temperature cycle test,
vibration test, inward force test,
headlamp connector test, and aiming
adjustment tests of S14.6.
S10.14.7.2 Each integral beam
headlamp that is not designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the sealing test of S14.6
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
connector-corrosion test, dust test, and
humidity test of S14.6.
S10.14.7.3 Each integral beam
headlamp except those with a glass lens
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
abrasion test of S14.6.
S10.14.7.4 Each integral beam
headlamp except those with a
nonreplaceable glass lens must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of the chemical resistance
test of S14.6.
S10.14.7.5 Each integral beam
headlamp except those with a glass lens
and a non-plastic reflector must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of the internal heat test of
S14.6.
S10.14.7.6 Each integral beam
headlamp incorporating a replaceable
lens must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
chemical resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test and the
corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test of
S14.6.
S10.14.7.7 Each integral beam
headlamp capable of being
mechanically aimed by externally
applied headlamp aiming devices
specified in SAE J602 OCT80,
Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the torque
deflection test of S14.6.
S10.14.7.8 Each integral beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
color test of S14.4. Each integral beam
headlamp that does not incorporate a
glass lens must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
plastic optical materials test of S14.4.
S10.15 Replaceable bulb
headlighting systems. All replaceable
bulb headlighting systems must be of a
type designated in Table II-d.
S10.15.1 Installation. A replaceable
bulb headlighting system must consist
of either two or four headlamps as
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
specified for the applicable system in
Table II-d. The headlamps must have
their beams activated as specified in
Table II-d. A system must provide in
total not more than two upper beams
and two lower beams and must
incorporate not more than two
replaceable light sources in each
headlamp.
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions. Each
replaceable bulb headlamp designed to
conform to the external aiming
requirements of S10.18.7 must have no
mechanism that allows adjustment of an
individual light source, or if there are
two light sources, independent
adjustments of each reflector.
S10.15.3 Replacement lens reflector
units. Each lens reflector unit
manufactured as replacement
equipment must be designed to conform
to applicable photometry requirements
when any replaceable light source
designated for such a unit is inserted in
it.
S10.15.4 Markings.
S10.15.4.1 A replaceable bulb
headlamp in a four headlamp system
providing lower beam must have its lens
permanently marked with ‘‘L’’. A
replaceable bulb headlamp in a four
headlamp system providing upper beam
must have its lens permanently marked
with ‘‘U’’.
S10.15.4.1.1 No such markings are
required if the light sources in the
headlamp are any combination of dual
filament light sources other than HB2.
S10.15.5 Additional light sources. A
replaceable bulb headlamp may
incorporate replaceable light sources
that are used for purposes other than
headlighting.
S10.15.6 Photometry. Each
replaceable bulb headlamp must be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XVIII for upper
beam and Table XIX for lower beam as
specified in Table II-d for the specific
headlamp unit and aiming method,
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.5 using any replaceable light
source designated for use in the system
under test.
S10.15.7 Physical tests.
S10.15.7.1 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
corrosion test, corrosion-connector test,
dust test, temperature cycle test,
humidity test, vibration test, inward
force test, headlamp connector test, and
aiming adjustment tests of S14.6.
S10.15.7.2 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp except those with a glass lens
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
abrasion test of S14.6.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S10.15.7.3 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp except those with a
nonreplaceable glass lens must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of the chemical resistance
test of S14.6.
S10.15.7.4 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp except those with a glass lens
and a non-plastic reflector must be
designed to conform to the performance
requirements of the internal heat test of
S14.6.
S10.15.7.5 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp incorporating a replaceable
lens must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
chemical resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test and the
corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test of
S14.6.
S10.15.7.6 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp capable of being
mechanically aimed by externally
applied headlamp aiming devices
specified in SAE J602 OCT80,
Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the torque
deflection test of S14.6.
S10.15.7.7 Each replaceable bulb
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of the
color test of S14.4. Each replaceable
bulb headlamp that does not incorporate
a glass lens must be designed to
conform to the performance
requirements of the plastic optical
materials test of S14.4.
S10.16 Combination headlighting
systems. All combination headlighting
systems must be of a type designated in
Table II–b.
S10.16.1 Installation. A combination
headlighting system must consist of the
correct number of designated headlamp
units as specified for the applicable
system in Table II-b. The units must
have their beams activated as specified
in Table II-b. A system must provide in
total not more than two upper beams
and two lower beams. When installed
on a motor vehicle, the headlamps (or
parts thereof) that provide the lower
beam must be of the same type, and
provide a symmetrical effective
projected luminous lens area when
illuminated.
S10.16.2 Photometry. Each
combination headlamp must be
designed to conform to the photometry
requirements of Table XVIII for upper
beam and Table XIX for lower beam as
specified in Table II-b for the specific
headlamp unit and aiming method,
PO 00000
Frm 00051
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68283
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.5.
S10.16.3 Physical tests.
S10.16.3.1 Any component
headlamp of a combination headlighting
system that is a Type F sealed beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of
S10.13.4.
S10.16.3.2 Any component
headlamp of a combination headlighting
system that is an integral beam
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of
S10.14.7.
S10.16.3.3 Any component
headlamp of a combination headlighting
system that is a replaceable bulb
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the performance requirements of
S10.15.7.
S10.17 Motorcycle headlighting
systems. A motorcycle headlighting
system may consist of:
(a) One half of any headlighting
system of Table II which provides both
a full upper beam and full lower beam,
and is designed to conform to the
requirements for that headlamp type.
Where more than one lamp must be
used, the lamps shall be mounted
vertically, with the lower beam as high
as practicable, or
(b) A headlighting system designed to
conform to the requirements of
paragraphs S10.17.1 through S10.17.5.
S10.17.1 Installation. The
headlighting system installed on a
motorcycle must consist of one of the
system types specified in this
paragraph, and must be located on the
front.
S10.17.1.1 Single headlamp.
S10.17.1.1.1 If the system consists of
a single headlamp, it must be mounted
on the vertical centerline of the
motorcycle.
S10.17.1.1.2 If the headlamp
contains more than one light source,
each light source must be mounted on
the vertical centerline with the upper
beam no higher than the lower beam, or
horizontally disposed about the vertical
centerline and mounted at the same
height.
S10.17.1.1.3 If the light sources are
horizontally disposed about the vertical
centerline, the distance between the
closest edges of the effective projected
luminous lens area in front of the light
sources must not be greater than 200
mm.
S10.17.1.2 Two headlamps with
both beams.
S10.17.1.2.1 If the system consists of
two headlamps, each of which provides
both an upper and lower beam, the
headlamps must be mounted either at
the same height and symmetrically
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68284
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
disposed about the vertical centerline or
mounted on the vertical centerline.
S10.17.1.2.2 If the headlamps are
horizontally disposed about the vertical
centerline, the distance between the
closest edges of their effective projected
luminous lens areas must not be greater
than 200 mm.
S10.17.1.3 Two headlamps, upper
beam and lower beam.
S10.17.1.3.1 If the system consists of
two headlamps, one of which provides
an upper beam and one of which
provides the lower beam, the headlamps
must be located on the vertical
centerline with the upper beam no
higher than the lower beam, or
horizontally disposed about the vertical
centerline and mounted at the same
height.
S10.17.1.3.2 If the headlamps are
horizontally disposed about the vertical
centerline, the distance between the
closest edges of their effective projected
luminous lens areas must not be greater
than 200 mm.
S10.17.2 Motorcycle replaceable
bulb headlamp marking. Each
replaceable bulb headlamp that is
designed to conform to S10.17(b) and
that is equipped with a light source
other than a replaceable light source
meeting the requirements of S11, must
have the word ‘‘motorcycle’’
permanently marked on the lens in
characters not less than 3 mm in height.
S10.17.3 Photometry. Each
motorcycle headlamp that is not
designed to conform to S10.17(a), must
be designed to conform to the
photometry requirements of Table XX
when tested according to the procedure
of S14.2.5.
S10.17.4 Physical tests. Each
motorcycle headlamp that is not
designed to conform to S10.17(a) must
be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the
vibration test, moisture test, dust test,
and corrosion test of S14.5, the out of
focus test of S14.3, the color test of
S14.4, and each motorcycle headlamp
that does not incorporate a glass lens
must be designed to conform to the
performance requirements of the plastic
optical materials test of S14.4.
S10.17.5 Motorcycle headlamp
modulation system. A headlamp on a
motorcycle may be activated to
modulate either the upper beam or the
lower beam from its maximum intensity
to a lesser intensity, provided that:
S10.17.5.1 Modulation.
(a) The rate of modulation must be
240 ± 40 cycles per minute.
(b) The headlamp must be operated at
maximum power for 50 to 70 percent of
each cycle.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
(c) The lowest intensity at any test
point must be not less than 17 percent
of the maximum intensity measured at
the same point.
(d) The modulator switch must be
wired in the power lead of the beam
filament being modulated and not in the
ground side of the circuit.
(e) Means must be provided so that
both the lower beam and upper beam
remain operable in the event of a
modulator failure.
(f) The system must include a sensor
mounted with the axis of its sensing
element perpendicular to a horizontal
plane. Headlamp modulation must
cease whenever the level of light
emitted by a tungsten filament light
operating at 3000° Kelvin is either less
than 270 lux of direct light for upward
pointing sensors or less than 60 lux of
reflected light for downward pointing
sensors. The light is measured by a
silicon cell type light meter that is
located at the sensor and pointing in the
same direction as the sensor. A Kodak
Gray Card (Kodak R–27) is placed at
ground level to simulate the road
surface in testing downward pointing
sensors.
(g) When tested in accordance with
the test profile shown in Figure 9, the
voltage drop across the modulator when
the lamp is on at all test conditions for
12 volt systems and 6 volt systems must
not be greater than 0.45 volt. The
modulator must meet all the provisions
of the standard after completion of the
test profile shown in Figure 9.
(h) Means must be provided so that
both the lower and upper beam function
at design voltage when the headlamp
control switch is in either the lower or
upper beam position when the
modulator is off.
S10.17.5.2 Replacement modulators.
Each modulator not intended as original
equipment, or its container, must be
labeled with the maximum wattage, and
the minimum wattage appropriate for its
use.
S10.17.5.2.1 Replacement
performance. Each modulator, not
intended as original equipment, must
comply with S10.17.5.1 (a) through (g)
when connected to a headlamp of the
maximum rated power and a headlamp
of the minimum rated power, and must
provide means so that the modulated
beam functions at design voltage when
the modulator is off.
S10.17.5.2.2 Replacement
instructions. Instructions, with a
diagram, must be provided for mounting
the light sensor including location on
the motorcycle, distance above the road
surface, and orientation with respect to
the light.
PO 00000
Frm 00052
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S10.18 Headlamp aimability
performance requirements.
S10.18.1 Headlamp mounting and
aiming. Except as provided in this
paragraph, each headlamp must be
installed on a motor vehicle with a
mounting and aiming mechanism that
permits aim inspection and adjustment
of both vertical and horizontal aim, and
is accessible for those purposes without
removal of any vehicle parts, except for
protective covers removable without the
use of tools.
S10.18.1.1 The axis of the light
beams must be adjustable to the left,
right, up, or down from the designed
setting, the amount of adjustability to be
determined by practical operating
conditions and the type of equipment.
S10.18.1.2 The adjustments must be
conveniently made by one person with
tools ordinarily available. When the
headlamps are secured, the aim will not
be disturbed under ordinary conditions
of service.
S10.18.2 Headlamp aiming systems.
When a headlamp system is installed on
a motor vehicle, it must be aimable with
at least one of the following: An
externally applied aiming device, as
specified in S10.18.7; an on-vehicle
headlamp aiming device installed by the
vehicle or lamp manufacturer, as
specified in S10.18.8; or by visual/
optical means, as specified in S10.18.9.
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment
interaction. When installed on the
vehicle, adjustment of one aim axis
through its full on-vehicle range must
not cause the aim of the other axis to
deviate more than ± 0.76°. If the
performance specified is not achievable,
the requirements of S10.18.3.1 apply,
except that if the aiming mechanism is
not a VHAD, the requirements specific
to VHADs are not applicable, and the
instruction must be specific to the
aiming mechanism installed.
S10.18.3.1 Should the mechanism
not meet the requirements of S10.18.3,
a cautionary label must be placed
adjacent to the mechanism stating the
caution and including either the reason
for the caution or the corrective action
necessary. Each such label must also
refer the reader to the vehicle operator’s
manual for complete instructions. Each
such vehicle must be equipped with an
operator’s manual containing the
complete instructions appropriate for
the mechanism installed.
S10.18.4 Horizontal adjustmentvisually aimed headlamp. A visually/
optically aimable headlamp that has a
lower beam must not have a horizontal
adjustment mechanism unless such
mechanism meets the requirements of
this standard for on vehicle aiming as
specified in S10.18.8.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S10.18.5 Optical axis marking.
S10.18.5.1 Optical axis markingvehicle. Each motor vehicle must be
equipped with headlamps or beam
contributors which have a mark or
markings that are visible from the front
of the headlamp when installed on the
vehicle to identify the optical axis of the
headlamp to assure proper horizontal
and vertical alignment of the aiming
screen or optical aiming equipment. The
manufacturer is free to choose the
design of the mark or markings. The
mark or markings may be on the interior
or exterior of the lens or indicated by a
mark or central structure on the interior
or exterior of the headlamp.
S10.18.5.2 Optical axis markinglamp. Each headlamp or beam
contributor that is not visually/optically
aimable in accordance with S10.18.9 of
this standard must be equipped with
fiducial marks, aiming pads, or similar
references of sufficient detail and
accuracy, for determination of an
appropriate vehicle plane to be used
with the photometric procedures of
S14.2.5 for correct alignment with the
photometer axis when being tested for
photometric compliance, and to serve
for the aiming reference when the
headlamp or beam contributor is
installed on a motor vehicle. The
fiducial marks, aiming pads, or similar
references are protrusions, bubble vials,
holes, indentations, ridges, scribed
lines, or other readily identifiable marks
established and described by the vehicle
or headlamp manufacturer.
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis markingvisual/optical aim headlamp. There
must be a mark or markings identifying
the optical axis of the headlamp visible
from the front of the headlamp when
installed on the vehicle, to assure
proper horizontal and vertical alignment
of the aiming screen or optical aiming
equipment with the headlamp being
aimed. The manufacturer is free to
choose the design of the mark or
markings. The mark or markings may be
on the interior or exterior of the lens or
indicated by a mark or central structure
on the interior or exterior of the
headlamp.
S10.18.6 Moveable reflectors. Each
headlamp aimed by moving the reflector
relative to the lens and headlamp
housing, or vice versa, must conform
with the photometric requirements
applicable to it when tested according to
the procedure of S14.2.5 with the lens
at any position relative to the reflector
within the full range of vertical pitch on
the vehicle on which the headlamp
system is installed and a horizontal
range of ± 2.5°. Additionally it must
comply with the aiming adjustment
requirements of S14.6.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S10.18.7 External aiming. Each
headlighting system that is capable of
being mechanically aimed by externally
applied headlamp aiming devices must
be mechanically aimable using the
equipment specified in SAE J602
Headlamp Aiming Device for
Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam
Headlamp Units, October 1980,
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title) without the removal of
any ornamental trim rings, covers,
wipers or other vehicle parts.
S10.18.7.1 Headlamp aiming device
locating plates. Each headlighting
system which is designed to use the
Headlamp Aiming Device Locating
Plates with adjustable legs for the
100×165 mm unit and the 142×200 mm
unit, and which has adjustable length
legs, must meet the following
requirements:
S10.18.7.1.1 The lens must have
three aiming pads which meet the
requirements of Figure 4, Dimensional
Specifications for Location of Aiming
Pads on Replaceable Bulb Headlamp
Units. The aiming pads need not be
centered at the geometric center of the
lens, or on the optical axis. Except as
provided in S10.18.7.1.2, a whole
number, which represents the distance
in tenths of an inch (i.e. 0.3 inch = 3)
from the aiming reference plane to the
respective aiming pads which are not in
contact with that plane, must be
inscribed adjacent to each respective
aiming pad on the lens. The height of
these numbers must be not less than
.157 inch (4 mm). If there is interference
between the plane and the area of the
lens between the aiming pads, the
whole number represents the distance to
a secondary plane. The secondary plane
must be located parallel to the aiming
reference plane and as close to the lens
as possible without causing
interference.
S10.18.7.1.2 If the most forward
aiming pad is the lower inboard aiming
pad, then the dimensions may be placed
anywhere on the lens. The dimension
for the outboard aiming pad (Dimension
F in Figure 4) must be followed by the
letter ‘‘H’’ and the dimension for the
center aiming pad must be followed by
the letter ‘‘V.’’ The dimensions must be
expressed in tenths of an inch.
S10.18.7.2 Nonadjustable headlamp
aiming device locating plates. Each
headlamp may be designed to use the
nonadjustable Headlamp Aiming Device
Locating Plate for the 100×165 mm unit,
the 142×200 mm unit, the 146 mm
diameter unit, or the 178 mm diameter
unit of SAE J602 OCT80, Headlamp
Aiming Device for Mechanically
Aimable Sealed Beam Headlamp Units,
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
PO 00000
Frm 00053
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68285
S5.2 of this title), or the 92×150 mm
Type F unit, and incorporate lensmounted aiming pads as specified for
those units pursuant to Appendix C of
part 564 of this chapter. If so designed,
no additional lens marking is necessary
to designate the type of plate or
dimensions.
S10.18.8 On-vehicle aiming. Each
headlighting system that is capable of
being aimed by equipment installed on
the vehicle must include a Vehicle
Headlamp Aiming Device (VHAD) that
conforms to the following requirements:
S10.18.8.1 Aim. The VHAD must
provide for headlamp aim inspection
and adjustment in both the vertical and
horizontal axes.
S10.18.8.1.1 Vertical aim. The
VHAD must include the necessary
references and scales relative to the
horizontal plane to assure correct
vertical aim for photometry and aiming
purposes. An off vehicle measurement
of the angle of the plane of the ground
is permitted. In addition, an equal
number of graduations from the ‘‘0’’
position representing angular changes in
the axis in the upward and downward
directions must be provided.
S10.18.8.1.1.1 Each graduation must
represent a change in the vertical
position of the mechanical axis not
larger than 0.19° (1 in at 25 ft) to
provide for variations in aim at least
1.2° above and below the horizontal,
and have an accuracy relative to the
zero mark of less than 0.1°.
S10.18.8.1.1.2 The VHAD must be
marked to indicate headlamp aim
movement in the upward and
downward directions.
S10.18.8.1.1.3 Each graduation must
indicate a linear movement of the scale
indicator of not less than 0.05 in (1.27
mm) if a direct reading analog indicator
is used. If a remote reading indicator is
provided, it must represent the actual
aim movement in a clear,
understandable format.
S10.18.8.1.1.4 The vertical indicator
must perform through a minimum range
of ± 1.2°.
S10.18.8.1.1.5 Means must be
provided in the VHAD for compensating
for deviations in floor slope less than
1.2° from the horizontal that would
affect the correct positioning of the
headlamp for vertical aim.
S10.18.8.1.1.6 The graduations must
be legible under an illumination level
not greater than 30 foot candles,
measured at the top of the graduation,
by an observer having 20/20 vision
(Snellen), and must permit aim
adjustment to within 0.19° (1 in at 25 ft).
S10.18.8.1.2 Horizontal aim. The
VHAD must include references and
scales relative to the longitudinal axis of
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68286
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
the vehicle necessary to assure correct
horizontal aim for photometry and
aiming purposes. An ‘‘0’’ mark must be
used to indicate alignment of the
headlamps relative to the longitudinal
axis of the vehicle. In addition, an equal
number of graduations from the ‘‘0’’
position representing equal angular
changes in the axis relative to the
vehicle axis must be provided.
S10.18.8.1.2.1 Each graduation must
represent a change in the horizontal
position of the mechanical axis not
greater than 0.38° (2 in at 25 ft) to
provide for variations in aim at least
0.76° (4 in at 25 ft) to the left and right
of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle,
and must have an accuracy relative to
the zero mark of less than 0.1°.
S10.18.8.1.2.2 The VHAD must be
marked to indicate headlamp aim
movement in the left and right
directions.
S10.18.8.1.2.3 The graduations must
be legible under an illumination level
not greater than 30 foot candles,
measured at the top of the graduation,
by an observer having 20/20 vision
(Snellen), and must permit aim
adjustment to within 0.38° (2 in at 25 ft).
S10.18.8.1.2.4 The horizontal
indicator must perform through a
minimum range of ± 0.76° (4 in at 25 ft);
however, the indicator itself must be
capable of recalibration over a
movement of ± 2.5° relative to the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle to
accommodate any adjustment necessary
for recalibrating the indicator after
vehicle repair from accident damage.
S10.18.8.2 Aiming instructions.
S10.18.8.2.1 The instructions for
properly aiming the headlighting system
using the VHAD must be provided on a
label permanently affixed to the vehicle
adjacent to the VHAD, or in the vehicle
operator’s manual. The instructions
must advise that the headlighting
system is properly aimed if the
appropriate vertical plane (as defined by
the vehicle manufacturer) is
perpendicular to both the longitudinal
axis of the vehicle, and a horizontal
plane when the vehicle is on a
horizontal surface, and the VHAD is set
at ‘‘0’’ vertical and ‘‘0’’ horizontal.
S10.18.8.2.2 Should a remote
indicator or a remote indicator and
adjuster be provided, the instructions
must be placed in the operator’s
manual, and may also be placed on a
label adjacent to the VHAD.
S10.18.8.3 Permanent calibration.
Each headlamp equipped with a VHAD
must be manufactured with its
calibration permanently fixed by its
manufacturer. Calibration in this case
means the process of accurately aligning
the geometry of the VHAD devices with
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
the beam pattern for the purposes of
compliance with the standard.
S10.18.8.4 Replacement units. When
tested according to the procedure of
S14.2.5 with any replacement headlamp
unit(s) or light sources intended for use
in the system under test, the VHAD and
headlighting system must be designed to
conform to the photometric performance
requirements applicable for the system
under test.
S10.18.8.5 Physical tests. Each
VHAD must be designed to conform
with the performance requirements of
S14.8.
S10.18.9 Visual/optical aiming.
Each visually/optically aimable
headlamp must be designed to conform
to the following requirements:
S10.18.9.1 Vertical aim, lower beam.
Each lower beam headlamp must have
a cutoff in the beam pattern. It may be
either on the left side or the right side
of the optical axis, but once chosen for
a particular headlamp system’s design,
the side chosen for the cutoff must not
be changed for any headlamps intended
to be used as replacements for those
system’s headlamps.
S10.18.9.1.1 Vertical position of the
cutoff. The headlamp must be aimed
vertically so that the cutoff is on the left
side, at 0.4° down from the H–H line, or
on the right side, at the H–H line.
S10.18.9.1.2 Vertical gradient. The
gradient of the cutoff measured at either
2.5° L or 2.0° R must be not less than
0.13 based on the procedure of
S10.18.9.1.5.
S10.18.9.1.3 Horizontal position of
the cutoff. The width must be not less
than 2°, with not less than 2° of its
actual width centered at either 2.5° L, or
2.0° R.
S10.18.9.1.4 Maximum inclination
of the cutoff. The vertical location of the
highest gradient at the ends of the
minimum width must be within ± 0.2°
of the vertical location of the maximum
gradient measured at the appropriate
vertical line (at either 2.5° L for a left
side cutoff, or 2.0° R for a right side
cutoff).
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff
parameter.
S10.18.9.1.5.1 The headlamp is
mounted on a headlamp test fixture
which simulates its actual design
location on any vehicle for which the
headlamp is intended. The fixture, with
the headlamp installed, is attached to
the goniometer table in such a way that
the fixture alignment axes are
coincident with the goniometer axes.
The headlamp is energized at the
specified test voltage. The cutoff
parameter must be measured at a
distance of 10 m from a photosensor
with a 10 mm diameter.
PO 00000
Frm 00054
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S10.18.9.1.5.2 The headlamp beam
pattern is aimed with the cutoff at the
H–H axis. There is no adjustment,
shimming, or modification of the
horizontal axis of the headlamp or test
fixture, unless the headlamp is
equipped with a VHAD. In this case the
VHAD is adjusted to zero.
S10.18.9.1.5.3 A vertical scan of the
beam pattern is conducted for a
headlamp with a left side gradient by
aligning the goniometer on a vertical
line at 2.5° L and scanning from 1.5° U
to 1.5° D. For a headlamp with a right
side gradient, a vertical scan of the beam
pattern is conducted by aligning the
goniometer on a vertical line at 2.0° R
and scanning from 1.5° U to 1.5° D.
S10.18.9.1.5.4 Determine the
maximum gradient within the range of
the scan by using the formula: G = log
E(a)¥logE(a + 0.1), where ‘‘G’’ is the
gradient, ‘‘E’’ is illumination and ‘‘a’’ is
vertical angular position. The maximum
value of the gradient ‘‘G’’ determines the
vertical angular location of the cutoff.
Perform vertical scans at 1.0° L and R
of the measurement point of the
maximum gradient to determine the
inclination.
S10.18.9.2 Horizontal aim, lower
beam. There is no adjustment of
horizontal aim unless the headlamp is
equipped with a horizontal VHAD. If
the headlamp has a VHAD, it is set to
zero.
S10.18.9.3 Vertical aim, upper
beam.
S10.18.9.3.1 If the upper beam is
combined in a headlamp with a lower
beam, the vertical aim of the upper
beam must not be changed from the aim
set using the procedures of S10.18.9.1
and S10.18.9.2 used for the lower beam.
S10.18.9.3.2 If the upper beam is not
combined in a headlamp with a lower
beam, the vertical aim of the upper
beam is adjusted so that the maximum
beam intensity is located on the H–H
axis.
S10.18.9.4 Horizontal aim, upper
beam.
S10.18.9.4.1 If the upper beam is
combined in a headlamp with a lower
beam, the horizontal aim of the upper
beam must not be changed from the aim
set using the procedures of S10.18.9.1
and S10.18.9.2 used for the lower beam.
S10.18.9.4.2 If the upper beam is not
combined in a headlamp with the lower
beam and has fixed horizontal aim or
has a horizontal VHAD, then the
headlamp is mounted on a headlamp
test fixture which simulates its actual
design location on any vehicle for
which the headlamp is intended. The
fixture, with the headlamp installed, is
attached to the goniometer table in such
a way that the fixture alignment axes are
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
coincident with the goniometer axes.
The headlamp must be energized at 12.8
± 0.20 mV. There is no adjustment,
shimming, or modification of the
horizontal axis of the headlamp or test
fixture, unless the headlamp is
equipped with a VHAD. In this case the
VHAD is adjusted to zero.
S10.18.9.4.3 If the upper beam is not
combined in a headlamp with a lower
beam, and it does not have a VHAD, the
horizontal aim of the upper beam is
adjusted so that the maximum beam
intensity is located on the V–V axis.
S10.18.9.5 Photometry. When tested
according to the procedure of S14.2.5, a
visually/optically aimable headlamp
must be designed to conform to the
lower beam requirements of columns;
LB1V or LB2V of Table XIX–a, or LB3V
of Table XIX–b, or LB4V of Table XIX–
c.
S10.18.9.6 Visual/optical aiming
identification marking. Each letter used
in marking according to this paragraph
must be not less than 3 mm high.
S10.18.9.6.1 The lens of a lower
beam headlamp must be marked ‘‘VOL’’
if the headlamp is intended to be
visually/optically aimed using the left
side of the lower beam pattern. The lens
of a lower beam headlamp must be
marked ‘‘VOR’’ if the headlamp is
intended to be visually/optically aimed
using the right side of the lower beam
pattern. The lens of a headlamp that is
solely an upper beam headlamp and
intended to be visually/optically aimed
using the upper beam must be marked
‘‘VO’’.
S10.18.9.6.2 The lens of each sealed
beam or integral beam headlamp must
be marked ‘‘VOR’’ if the headlamp is of
a type that was manufactured before
May 1, 1997, and if such headlamp type
has been redesigned since then to be
visually/optically aimable.
S11 Replaceable light source
requirements. Each replaceable light
source must be designed to conform to
the dimensions and electrical
specifications furnished with respect to
it pursuant to part 564 of this chapter,
on file in Docket No. NHTSA 98–3397,
and must conform to the following
requirements:
S11.1 Markings. If other than an HB
Type, the light source must be marked
with the bulb marking designation
specified for it in compliance with
Appendix A or Appendix B of part 564
of this chapter. The base of each HB
Type must be marked with its HB Type
designation. Each replaceable light
source must also be marked with the
symbol DOT and with a name or
trademark in accordance with S6.5.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S11.2 Ballast markings. If a ballast is
required for operation, each ballast must
bear the following permanent markings:
(a) Name or logo of ballast
manufacturer;
(b) Ballast part number or unique
identification;
(c) Part number or other unique
identification of the light source for
which the ballast is designed;
(d) Rated laboratory life of the light
source/ballast combination, if the
information for the light source has been
filed in Appendix B of part 564 of this
chapter;
(e) A warning that ballast output
voltage presents the potential for severe
electrical shock that could lead to
permanent injury or death;
(f) Ballast output power in watts and
output voltage in rms volts AC or DC;
and
(g) The symbol ‘DOT’.
S11.3 Gas discharge laboratory life.
For light sources that use excited gas
mixtures as a filament or discharge arc,
the ‘‘rated laboratory life’’ is determined
in accordance with sections 4.3 and 4.9
of SAE Recommended Practice J2009
FEB93, Forward Discharge Lighting
Systems (incorporated by reference, see
571.108 S5.2 of this title).
S11.4 Physical tests.
S11.4.1 Each replaceable light
source must be designed to conform
with the performance requirements of
the deflection test and pressure test
requirements of S14.7.
S11.4.2 Replaceable light sources
must be designed to conform with the
requirements of section VII of Appendix
A of part 564 of this chapter, or section
IV of Appendix B of part 564 of this
chapter, for maximum power and
luminous flux when test by the
procedure of S14.7.3.
S12 Headlamp concealment device
requirements.
S12.1 While the headlamp is
illuminated, its fully opened headlamp
concealment device must remain fully
opened should any loss of power to or
within the headlamp concealment
device occur.
S12.2 Whenever any malfunction
occurs in a component that controls or
conducts power for the actuation of the
concealment device, each closed
headlamp concealment device must be
capable of being fully opened by a
means not requiring the use of any tools.
Thereafter, the headlamp concealment
device must remain fully opened until
intentionally closed.
S12.3 Except for malfunctions
covered by S12.2, each headlamp
concealment device must be capable of
being fully opened and the headlamps
illuminated by actuation of a single
PO 00000
Frm 00055
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68287
switch, lever, or similar mechanism,
including a mechanism that is
automatically actuated by a change in
ambient light conditions.
S12.4 Each headlamp concealment
device must be installed so that the
headlamp may be mounted, aimed, and
adjusted without removing any
component of the device, other than
components of the headlamp assembly.
S12.5 Except for cases of
malfunction covered by S12.2, each
headlamp concealment device must,
within an ambient temperature range of
¥20 °F to +120 °F, be capable of being
fully opened in not more than 3 seconds
after the actuation of a driver-operated
control.
S12.6 As an alternative to complying
with the requirements of S12.1 through
S12.5, a vehicle with headlamps
incorporating VHAD or visual/optical
aiming in accordance with this standard
may meet the requirements for
Concealable lamps in paragraph 5.14 of
the following version of the Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation 48
‘‘Uniform Provisions Concerning the
Approval of Vehicles With Regard to the
Installation of Lighting and LightSignaling Devices’’: E/ECE/324–E/ECE/
TRANS/505, Rev.1/Add.47/Rev.1/
Corr.2, 26 February 1996 (page 17)
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), in the English
language version.
S12.7 Certification election.
Manufacturers of vehicles with
headlamps incorporating VHAD or
visual/optical aiming must elect to
certify to S12.1 through S12.5 or to
S12.6 prior to, or at the time of
certification of the vehicle, pursuant to
49 CFR Part 567. The selection is
irrevocable.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens
requirements.
S13.1 A replacement lens for a
replaceable bulb headlamp or integral
beam headlamp that is not required to
have a bonded lens must be provided
with a replacement seal in a package
that includes instructions for the
removal and replacement of the lens,
the cleaning of the reflector, and the
sealing of the replacement lens to the
reflector assembly.
S13.2 Each replacement headlamp
lens with seal, when installed according
to the lens manufacturer’s instructions
on an integral beam or replaceable bulb
headlamp, must not cause the headlamp
to fail to comply with any of the
requirements of this standard.
S13.3 Each replacement headlamp
lens must be marked with the symbol
‘‘DOT’’ either horizontally or vertically,
to constitute certification. Each
replacement headlamp lens must also be
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68288
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
marked with manufacturer and the part
or trade number of the headlamp for
which it is intended, and with the name
and/or trademark of the lens
manufacturer or importer that is
registered with the U.S. Patent and
Trademark Office. Nothing in this
standard authorizes the marking of any
such name and/or trademark by one
who is not the owner, unless the owner
has consented to it.
S14 Physical and photometry test
procedures and performance
requirements.
S14.1 General test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.1.1 Each lamp, reflective device,
item of conspicuity treatment, and item
of associated equipment required or
permitted by this standard must be
designed to conform to all applicable
physical test performance requirements
specified for it.
S14.1.2 Plastic optical materials. All
plastic materials used for optical parts
such as lenses and reflectors on lamps
or reflective devices required or allowed
by this standard must conform to the
material test requirements of S14.4.2.
S14.1.3 All coatings used on optical
materials must have added to their
formulations an optical brightener,
whose presence is detectable by
ultraviolet light, to aid in testing for
their presence. Other equivalent
industry accepted methods may be used
as an alternative.
S14.1.4 Samples.
S14.1.4.1 Samples submitted for
laboratory test must be new, unused,
manufactured from production tooling
and assembled by production processes,
and representative of the devices as
regularly manufactured and marketed.
S14.1.4.2 Each test sample must
include not only the device but also
accessory equipment necessary to
operate in its intended manner. Where
necessary a mounting bracket shall be
provided so that the device may be
rigidly bolted in its operating position
on the various test equipment.
S14.1.4.3 Dust and photometric tests
may be made on a second set of
mounted samples, if desired, to expedite
completion of the tests.
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities. The
laboratory must be equipped to test the
sample in accordance with the
requirements of the specific device.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Each lamp and reflective device
required or permitted by this standard
must be designed to conform to the
applicable photometric requirements.
S14.2.1 Photometry measurements
for all lamps except license plate lamps,
headlamps, and DRLs.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.2.1.1 Mounting. Photometry
measurements are made with the
sample lamp mounted in its normal
operating position.
S14.2.1.2 School bus signal lamp
aiming. A school bus signal lamp must
be aimed with its aiming plane normal
to the photometer axis and may be
reaimed for photometry by ± 1⁄2°
vertically and ± 1° horizontally.
S14.2.1.3 Measurement distance.
Photometric measurements are made at
a distance between the light source and
the point of measurement of at least 1.2
m for side marker lamps, clearance
lamps, identification lamps, and parking
lamps, and at least 3 m for turn signal
lamps, stop lamps, taillamps, backup
lamps, and school bus signal lamps.
S14.2.1.4 Location of test points.
Test point location must comply with
the following nomenclature:
(a) The line formed by the intersection
of a vertical plane through the light
source of the lamp and normal to the
test screen is designated ‘‘V’’.
(b) The line formed by the
intersection of a horizontal plane
through the light source and normal to
the test screen is designated ‘‘H’’.
(c) The point of intersection of these
two lines is designated ‘‘H-V’’.
(d) Other test points on the test screen
are measured in terms of angles from the
H and V lines.
(e) Angles to the right (R) and to the
left (L) are regarded as being to the right
and left of the V line when the observer
stands behind the lamp and looks in the
direction of its light beam when it is
properly aimed for photometry.
Similarly, the upward angles designated
as U and the downward angles
designated as D, refer to light directed
at angles above and below the H line,
respectively.
S14.2.1.5 Multiple compartment and
multiple lamp photometry of turn signal
lamps, stop lamps, and taillamps.
S14.2.1.5.1 When compartments of
lamps or arrangements of multiple
lamps are photometered together, the
H–V axis intersects the midpoint
between the optical axes.
S14.2.1.5.2 Luminous intensity
measurements of multiple compartment
lamp or multiple lamp arrangements are
made either by:
(a) Measuring all compartments
together, provided that a line from the
optical axis of each compartment or
lamp to the center of the photometer
sensing device does not make an angle
more than 0.6° with the H–V axis, or
(b) Measuring each compartment or
lamp separately by aligning its optical
axis with the photometer and adding the
value at each test point.
PO 00000
Frm 00056
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.2.1.5.3 Multiple compartment
turn signal lamps or stop lamps or
multiple lamp arrangements of these
lamps installed on multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, or
buses 2032 mm or more in overall width
must use the method of S14.2.1.5.2(b)
only.
S14.2.1.6 Bulbs. Except for a lamp
having a sealed-in bulb, a lamp must
meet the applicable requirements of this
standard when tested with a bulb whose
filament is positioned within ± .010 in
of the nominal design position specified
in SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and Sealed
Units, December 1968, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
or specified by the bulb manufacturer
and operated at the bulb’s rated mean
spherical candela.
S14.2.1.6.1 Each lamp designed to
use a type of bulb that has not been
assigned a mean spherical candela
rating by its manufacturer and is not
listed in SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and
Sealed Units, December 1968
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), must meet the
applicable requirements of this standard
when used with any bulb of the type
specified by the lamp manufacturer,
operated at the bulb’s design voltage. A
lamp that contains a sealed-in bulb must
meet these requirements with the bulb
operated at the bulb’s design voltage.
S14.2.1.6.2 A bulb that is not listed
in SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs and Sealed
Units, December 1968, (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title)
is not required to use a socket that
conforms to the requirements of SAE
J567b, Bulb Sockets, April 1964
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title).
S14.2.2 License plate lamp
photometry. Photometry compliance of
license plate lamps is determined by
measurement of the illumination falling
upon test stations located on a test plate.
S14.2.2.1 Illumination surface. All
illumination measurements are made on
a rectangular test plate of clean, white
blotting paper mounted on the license
plate holder in the position normally
taken by the license plate. The face of
the test plate must be 1.5 mm from the
face of the license plate holder.
S14.2.2.2 Test stations. Test stations
must be located on the face of the test
plate as shown in Figure 19 according
to the type of vehicle on which the
license plate lamps are installed.
S14.2.2.3 Bulb requirements of
S14.2.1.6 apply to license plate lamp
photometry.
S14.2.3 Reflex reflector and
retroreflective sheeting photometry.
S14.2.3.1 Mounting. Each reflex
reflector is mounted for photometry
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
with the center of the reflex area at the
center of goniometer rotation and at the
same horizontal level as the source of
illumination.
S14.2.3.2 Illumination source. The
source of illumination is a lamp with a
50 mm effective diameter and with a
filament operating at 2856 °K.
S14.2.3.3 Measurement distance.
The test distance is 30.5 m [100ft].
S14.2.3.4 Test setup The observation
point is located directly above the
source of illumination. The H–V axis of
reflex reflectors is taken as parallel to
the longitudinal axis of the vehicle for
rear reflectors and perpendicular to a
vertical plane passing through the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle for side
reflectors.
S14.2.3.5 Photodetector. The
photodetector has an opening of not
more than 13 mm vertically and 25 mm
horizontally.
S14.2.3.6 Photometry surface. Reflex
reflectors may have any linear or area
dimensions but must have no more than
7740 sq mm projected area contained
within a 254 mm diameter circle
exposed for photometry.
S14.2.3.7 Procedure. Photometric
measurements of reflex reflectors and
retroreflective sheeting must be made at
various observation and entrance angles
as shown in Table XVI.
S14.2.3.7.1 The observation angle is
the angle formed by a line from the
observation point to the center of the
reflector and a second line from the
center of the reflector to the source of
illumination.
S14.2.3.7.2 The entrance angle is the
angle between the axis of the reflex
reflector and a line from the center of
the reflector to the source of
illumination.
S14.2.3.7.3 The entrance angle is
designated left, right, up, and down in
accordance with the position of the
source of illumination with respect to
the axis of the reflex reflector as viewed
from behind the reflector.
S14.2.3.7.4 Measurements are made
of the luminous intensity which the
reflex reflector is projecting toward the
observation point and the illumination
on the reflex reflector from the source of
illumination.
S14.2.3.8 Measurements.
S14.2.3.8.1 Reflex reflectors. The
required measurement for reflex
reflectors at each test point as shown in
Table XVI is the quotient of the
projected luminous intensity divided by
the illumination expressed as
millicandela per lux or candela per
footcandle.
S14.2.3.8.2 Retroreflective sheeting.
The required measurement for
retroreflective sheeting reflectors at each
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
test point as shown in Table XVI is
candela per lux per square meter of area.
S14.2.3.8.3 Reflex reflector
photometry measurement adjustments.
S14.2.3.8.3.1 Reflex reflectors,
which do not have a fixed rotational
position on the vehicle, are rotated
about their axis through 360° to find the
minimum photometric value which
must be reported for each test point. If
the output falls below the minimum
requirement at any test point, the
reflector is rotated ±5° about its axis
from the angle where the minimum
output occurred, and the maximum
value within this angle is reported as a
tolerance value.
S14.2.3.8.3.2 Reflex reflectors,
which by their design or construction,
permit mounting on a vehicle in a fixed
rotational position, are tested in this
position. A visual locator, such as the
word TOP is not considered adequate to
establish a fixed rotational position on
the vehicle.
S14.2.3.8.3.3 If uncolored reflections
from the front surface interfere with
photometric readings at any test point,
additional readings are taken 1° above,
below, right, and left of the test point,
and the lowest of these readings and its
location is reported provided the
minimum test point requirement for the
test point is met.
S14.2.4 Daytime running lamp (DRL)
photometry measurements.
S14.2.4.1 Each DRL is tested to the
procedure of S14.2.5 when a test voltage
of 12.8 v ± 20 mv is applied to the input
terminals of the lamp switch module or
voltage-reducing equipment, whichever
is closer to the electrical source on the
vehicle.
S14.2.4.2 The test distance from the
lamp to the photometer is not less than
18.3 m if the lamp is optically combined
with a headlamp, or is a separate lamp,
and not less than 3 m if the lamp is
optically combined with a lamp, other
than a headlamp, that is required by this
standard.
S14.2.4.3 Bulb requirements of
S14.2.1.6 apply to DRL photometry.
S14.2.5 Headlamp photometry
measurements.
S14.2.5.1 Mounting. Photometry
measurements at the applicable test
points are made with the sample
headlamp mounted in its normal
operating position.
S14.2.5.2 Test points in the area
from 10° U to 90° U must be measured
from the normally exposed surface of
the lens face.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
Photometric measurements are made at
a distance between the light source and
the photometer sensor of at least 18.3 m.
PO 00000
Frm 00057
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68289
S14.2.5.4 Seasoning and test
voltage. All sealed beam headlamps,
integral beam headlamps, beam
contributors, and replaceable light
sources are seasoned at design voltage
for 1% of its average design life or 10
hours, whichever is less prior to a
photometry test. A headlamp is tested at
12.8 v. ± 20 mv, D.C. as measured at the
terminals of the lamp.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming. Each headlamp is
aimed prior to a photometry test in
accordance with the procedure
appropriate to its aiming system. A 1⁄4°
reaim is permitted in any direction at
any test point to allow for variations in
readings between laboratories for all
headlamps except a Type F upper beam
unit not equipped with a VHAD.
S14.2.5.5.1 Mechanically aimable
headlamps using an external aimer. The
headlamp is aimed mechanically with
the aiming plane at the design angle(s)
to the photometer axis and the
mechanical axis of the headlamp on the
photometer axis.
S14.2.5.5.2 Mechanically aimable
headlamps equipped with a VHAD. The
headlamp is aimed mechanically using
the VHAD in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions as provided
with the vehicle on which the headlamp
is intended to be used.
S14.2.5.5.3 Visually aimable lower
beam headlamps-vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.3.1 A VOL cutoff
headlamp must have the location of the
cutoff maximum gradient, as
determined by the method of this
standard, positioned at 0.4° down from
the H–H line.
S14.2.5.5.3.2 A VOR cutoff
headlamp must have the location of the
cutoff maximum gradient, as
determined by the method of this
standard, positioned at the H–H line.
S14.2.5.5.4 Visually aimable lower
beam headlamps-horizontal aim. There
must be no adjustment of horizontal aim
unless the headlamp is equipped with a
horizontal VHAD. If the headlamp has
a VHAD, it must be set to zero.
S14.2.5.5.5 Visually aimable upper
beam headlamps-vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.5.1 A headlamp whose
upper beam is combined with a lower
beam must not have its vertical aim
changed from that set for the lower
beam.
S14.2.5.5.5.2 A headlamp whose
upper beam is not combined with a
lower beam must have its maximum
beam intensity positioned on the H–H
axis.
S14.2.5.5.6 Visually aimable upper
beam headlamps-horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.5.6.1 A headlamp whose
upper beam is combined with a lower
beam must not have its horizontal aim
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68290
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
changed from that set for the lower
beam.
S14.2.5.5.6.2 A headlamp whose
upper beam is not combined with a
lower beam and has a fixed horizontal
aim or has a horizontal VHAD must be
mounted in its normal operating
position on a goniometer such that the
mounting fixture alignment axes are
coincident with the goniometer axes
and must be energized at 12.8 v ± 20 mv.
There must be no adjustment,
shimming, or modification of the
horizontal axis of the headlamp or test
fixture, unless the headlamp is
equipped with a VHAD, in which case
the VHAD must be adjusted to zero.
S14.2.5.5.6.3 A headlamp whose
upper beam is not combined with a
lower beam and is not equipped with a
horizontal VHAD, the horizontal aim
must be adjusted so that the maximum
beam intensity is positioned on the V–
V axis.
S14.2.5.5.7 Simultaneous aim Type
F sealed beam headlamps and beam
contributor integral beam headlamps.
S14.2.5.5.7.1 A headlamp system
permitted to use simultaneous aim of
lower beams and upper beams must be
aimed mechanically for lower beam
photometry by centering the lower beam
unit or the geometric center of all lower
beam contributors on the photometer
axis and aligning the aiming plane,
aiming reference plane, or other
appropriate vertical plane defined by
the manufacturer perpendicular to the
photometer axis.
S14.2.5.5.7.2 The headlamp must be
aimed for upper beam photometry by
moving the assembly in a plane parallel
to the established lower beam aiming
plane until the upper beam unit or the
geometric center of all upper beam
contributors is centered in the
photometric axis.
S14.2.5.5.8 Motorcycle headlampupper beam headlamps designed to
comply with Table XX. The upper beam
of a multiple beam headlamp designed
to comply with the requirements of
Table XX must be aimed
photoelectrically so that the center of
the zone of highest intensity falls 0.4°
vertically below the lamp axis and is
centered laterally. The center of the
zone of highest intensity must be
established by the intersection of a
horizontal plane passing through the
point of maximum intensity, and the
vertical plane established by balancing
the photometric values at 3°L and 3°R.
S14.2.5.5.9 Motorcycle headlamplower beam headlamps designed to
comply with Table XX. The beam from
a single beam headlamp designed to
comply with the requirements of Table
XX must be aimed straight ahead with
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
the top of the beam aimed vertically to
obtain 2000 cd at H–V.
S14.2.5.6 Positioner. The goniometer
configuration, used to position the
sample headlamp when making
photometric measurements at specific
angular test points, is horizontal
rotation over elevation. The vertical axis
of the goniometer must correspond to
the design position vertical axis of the
sample headlamp which is vertical and
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the vehicle.
S14.2.5.7 Photometer.
S14.2.5.7.1 The photometer must be
capable of measuring the luminous
intensity of the sample headlamp
throughout its illumination range.
S14.2.5.7.2 Sensor.
S14.2.5.7.2.1 The maximum
effective area of the photometric sensor
must fit within a circle whose diameter
is equal to 0.009 times the actual test
distance from the light source of the
sample headlamp to the sensor.
S14.2.5.7.2.2 The sensor effective
area is defined as the actual area of
intercepted light striking the detector
surface of the photometer. Sensor
systems incorporating lens(es) that
change the diameter of the intercepted
light beam before it reaches the actual
detector surface, the maximum size
requirements must apply to the total
area of the light actually intercepted by
the lens surface.
S14.2.5.7.2.3 The sensor must be
capable of intercepting all direct
illumination from the largest
illuminated dimension of the sample
lamp at the test distance.
S14.2.5.7.3 The color response of the
photometer must be corrected to that of
the 1931 International Commission on
Illumination (C.I.E.) Standard Observer
(2-degree) Photopic Response Curve, as
shown in the C.I.E. 1931 Chromaticity
Diagram (incorporated by reference, see
571.108 S5.2 of this title).
S14.2.5.8 Location of test points.
S14.2.5.8.1 Test point positions are
defined by the positioner. The following
nomenclature applies:
S14.2.5.8.1.1 The letters ‘‘V’’ and
‘‘H’’ designate the vertical and
horizontal planes intersecting both the
headlamp light source and the
photometer axis. ‘‘H–V’’ designates the
zero test point angle at the intersection
of the H and V planes. This intersection
is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle.
S14.2.5.8.1.2 The letters ‘‘U’’, ‘‘D’’,
‘‘L’’, and ‘‘R’’, indicating up, down, left
and right, respectively, designate the
angular position from the H and V
planes to the photometer as viewed
from the headlamp.
PO 00000
Frm 00058
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.2.5.8.1.3 Horizontal angles
designated L and R are defined as the
plan view angle between the vertical
plane and the projection of the light ray
from the headlamp onto the horizontal
plane.
S14.2.5.8.1.4 Vertical angles
designated U and D are defined as the
true angle between the horizontal plane
and the light ray from the headlamp.
S14.2.5.9 Beam contributor
photometry measurements. In a
headlighting system where there is more
than one beam contributor providing a
lower beam, and/or more than one beam
contributor providing an upper beam,
each beam contributor must be designed
to meet only the applicable photometric
performance requirements based upon
the following mathematical expression:
conforming test point value = 2(test
point value)/total number of lower or
upper beam contributors for the vehicle,
as appropriate.
S14.2.5.10 Moveable reflector aimed
headlamp photometry measurements.
S14.2.5.10.1 A headlamp aimed by
moving the reflector relative to the lens
and headlamp housing, or vice versa,
must conform to the photometry
requirements applicable to it with the
lens at any position relative to the
reflector.
S14.2.5.10.2 These positions include
not less than the full range of vertical
pitch of the vehicle on which the
headlamp is installed and not less than
± 2.5° from the nominal horizontal aim
position for the vehicle on which the
headlamp is installed unless the
headlamp is visually/optically aimed
with a fixed horizontal aim.
S14.3 Motorcycle headlamp out of
focus test procedure and performance
requirements.
S14.3.1 Procedure. The sample
device must be tested for photometry
using bulbs having each of four out-offocus filament positions. Where
conventional bulbs with two pin
bayonet bases are used, tests must be
made with the light source 0.060 in
above, below, ahead, and behind the
designated position. If prefocused bulbs
are used, the limiting positions at which
tests are made must be 0.020 in above,
below, ahead, and behind the
designated position. The sample device
may be re-aimed for each of the out-offocus positions of the light source.
S14.3.2 Performance requirements.
The minimum photometric values for
the out-of-design position must be 80%
of the in-design position.
S14.4 General test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.4.1 Color test. The requirement
applies to the overall effective color of
light emitted by the device and not to
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
the color of the light from a small area
of the lens. It does not apply to any
pilot, indicator, or tell-tale lights. The
color of the sample device must comply
when tested by either the Visual Method
or the Tristimulus Method.
S14.4.1.1 Samples. A test sample for
a reflex reflector may be either the reflex
reflector or a disc of the same material,
technique of fabrication, and dye
formulation as the reflex reflector. If a
disc is used, the thickness must be twice
the thickness of the reflector as
measured from the face of the lens to the
apexes of the reflecting elements.
S14.4.1.2 General procedure.
S14.4.1.2.1 The device must be
operated at design voltage.
S14.4.1.2.2 Components (bulbs,
caps, lenses, and the like) must be tested
in a fixture or manner simulating the
intended application.
S14.4.1.2.3 The lamp shall be
allowed to reach operating temperature
before measurements are made.
S14.4.1.2.4 The entire light emitting
surface of the sample must be visible
from any point on the entrance window
of the test instrument.
S14.4.1.2.5 The distance between
the test instrument and the sample must
be large enough so that further increases
in distance will not affect the results.
S14.4.1.3 Visual method.
S14.4.1.3.1 Visual method
procedure. The color of light from the
sample device must be compared
visually with the color of the light from
a standard. The standard may consist of
a filter or limit glass. In the case of
white, CIE Source A is used only as a
color reference. The chromaticity
coordinates of the color standards must
be as close as possible to the limits
listed. The color of the standard filters
is determined spectro-photometrically.
S14.4.1.3.2 Visual method
performance requirements. The color
must comply with the applicable
requirement.
S14.4.1.3.2.1 Red. Red is not
acceptable if it is less saturated (paler),
yellower, or bluer than the limit
standards.
S14.4.1.3.2.2 Yellow (Amber).
Yellow is not acceptable if it is less
saturated (paler), greener, or redder than
the limit standards.
S14.4.1.3.2.3 White. White is not
acceptable if its color differs materially
from that of CIE Source A.
S14.4.1.4 Tristimulus method.
S14.4.1.4.1 Tristimulus method
procedure.
S14.4.1.4.1.1 The color of light from
the H–V point of a sample device must
be measured by photoelectric receivers
with spectral responses that
approximate CIE standard spectral
tristimulus valves.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.4.1.4.1.2 A sphere may be used
to integrate light from a colored source
provided that the color shift that results
from the spectral selectivity of the
sphere paint be corrected by the use of
a filter, correction factor, or an
appropriate calibration.
S14.4.1.4.1.3 Where the sample
device does not have uniform spectral
characteristics in all useful directions,
color measurements must be made at as
many directions of view as are required
to evaluate the color for those directions
that apply to the end use of the device.
S14.4.1.4.2 Tristimulus method
performance requirements. The color
must comply with the applicable
requirement.
S14.4.1.4.2.1 Red. The color of light
emitted must fall within the following
boundaries:
y = 0.33 (yellow boundary)
y = 0.98 ¥ x (purple boundary)
S14.4.1.4.2.2 Yellow (Amber). The
color of light emitted must fall within
the following boundaries:
y = 0.39 (red boundary)
y = 0.79 ¥ 0.67x (white boundary)
y = x ¥ 0.12 (green boundary)
S14.4.1.4.2.3 White (achromatic).
The color of light emitted must fall
within the following boundaries:
x = 0.31 (blue boundary)
y = 0.44 (green boundary)
x = 0.50 (yellow boundary)
y = 0.15 + 0.64x (green boundary)
y = 0.38 (red boundary)
y = 0.05 + 0.75x (purple boundary)
S14.4.2 Plastic optical materials
tests. Accelerated weathering
procedures are not permitted.
S14.4.2.1 Samples.
S14.4.2.1.1 Samples of materials
shall be injection molded into polished
metal molds to produce test specimens
with two flat and parallel faces.
Alternative techniques may be used to
produce equivalent specimens.
S14.4.2.1.2 Test specimens shape
may vary, but each exposed surface
must contain a minimum uninterrupted
area of 32 sq cm.
S14.4.2.1.3 Samples must be
furnished in thicknesses of 1.6 ± 0.25
mm, 2.3 ± 0.25 mm, 3.2 ± 0.25 mm, and
6.4 ± 0.25 mm.
S14.4.2.1.4 All samples must
conform to the applicable color test
requirement of this standard prior to
testing.
S14.4.2.1.5 A control sample, kept
properly protected from influences
which may change its appearance and
properties of each thickness, must be
retained.
S14.4.2.2 Outdoor exposure test.
S14.4.2.2.1 Outdoor exposure tests
of 3 years in duration must be made on
PO 00000
Frm 00059
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68291
samples of all materials, including
coated and uncoated versions, used for
optical parts of devices covered by this
standard. Tests are to be conducted in
Florida and Arizona.
S14.4.2.2.2 Concentrations of
polymer components and additives used
in plastic materials may be changed
without outdoor exposure testing
provided the changes are within the
limits of composition represented by
higher and lower concentrations of
these polymer components and
additives previously tested to this
section and found to meet its
requirements.
S14.4.2.2.3 Procedure.
S14.4.2.2.3.1 One sample of each
thickness of each material must be
mounted at each exposure site so that at
least a minimum uninterrupted area of
32 sq cm of the exposed upper surface
of the sample is at an angle of 45° to the
horizontal facing south. The sample
must be mounted in the open no closer
than 30 cm (11.8 in) to its background.
S14.4.2.2.3.2 During the exposure
time the samples must be cleaned once
every three months by washing with
mild soap or detergent and water, and
then rinsing with distilled water.
Rubbing must be avoided.
S14.4.2.2.4 Performance
requirements. Plastic lenses, other than
those incorporating reflex reflectors,
used for inner lenses or those covered
by another material and not exposed
directly to sunlight must meet the
optical material test requirements when
covered by the outer lens or other
material.
S14.4.2.2.4.1 After completion of the
outdoor exposure test the haze and loss
of surface luster as measured by ASTM
1003–92, Haze and Luminous
Transmittance of Transparent Plastic,
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title) must not be greater
than:
(a) 30% for materials used for outer
lenses, other than those incorporating
reflex reflectors;
(b) 7% for materials used for reflex
reflectors and lenses used in front of
reflex reflectors.
S14.4.2.2.4.2 After completion of the
outdoor exposure test materials used for
headlamp lenses must show no
deterioration.
S14.4.2.2.4.3 After completion of the
outdoor exposure test all materials,
when compared with the unexposed
control samples, must not show
physical changes affecting performance
such as color bleeding, delamination,
crazing, or cracking. Additionally
materials used for reflex reflectors and
lenses used in front of reflex reflectors
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68292
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
must not show surface deterioration or
dimensional changes.
S14.4.2.2.4.4 After completion of the
outdoor exposure test all materials,
when compared with the unexposed
control samples, must not have their
luminous transmittance changed by
more than 25% when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 308–66
(1973), Spectrophotmetry and
Description of Color in CIE 1931 System
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title) using CIE Illuminant
A (2856K).
S14.4.2.2.4.5 After completion of the
outdoor exposure test all materials must
conform to the color test of this standard
in the range of thickness stated by the
material manufacturer.
S14.4.2.3 Heat test.
S14.4.2.3.1 Procedure. Two samples
of each thickness of each material must
be supported at the bottom, with at least
51 mm of the sample above the support,
in the vertical position in such a manner
that, on each side, the minimum
uninterrupted area of exposed surface is
not less than 3225 sq mm. The samples
are placed in a circulating air oven at 79
± 3 °C for two hours.
S14.4.2.3.2 Performance
requirements. After completion of the
heat exposure and cooling to room
ambient temperature, a test specimen
must show no change in shape and
general appearance discernable to the
naked eye when compared with an
unexposed specimen and continue to
conform to the applicable color test
requirement of this standard.
S14.5 Signal lamp and reflective
device physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.5.1 Vibration test.
S14.5.1.1 Procedure. The sample
device, as mounted on the support
supplied, must be bolted to the anvil
end of the table of the vibration test
machine of Figure 21 and vibrated
approximately 750 cpm through a
distance of 1⁄8 in. The table must be
spring mounted at one end and fitted
with steel calks on the underside of the
other end. The calks are to make contact
with the steel anvil once during each
cycle at the completion of the fall. The
rack must be operated under a spring
tension of 60 to 70 lb. The test must be
continued for 1 hour.
S14.5.1.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the vibration test a
device showing evidence of material
physical weakness, lens or reflector
rotation, displacement or rupture of
parts except bulb failures, must be
considered to have failed, providing that
the rotation of lens or reflector must not
be considered as a failure when tests
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
show compliance with specifications
despite such rotation.
S14.5.2 Moisture test.
S14.5.2.1 Procedure. The sample
device must be mounted in its normal
operating position with all drain holes
open and subjected to a precipitation of
0.1 in of water per minute, delivered at
an angle of 45° from a nozzle with a
solid cone spray. During the test the
device must revolve about its vertical
axis at a rate of 4 rpm for a period of
12 hours followed by a one hour drain
period where the device does not rotate
and the spray stops. After completion of
the moisture test the device must be
examined for moisture accumulation.
S14.5.2.2 Performance requirements.
Accumulation of moisture in excess of
2 cc or any visible moisture in a sealed
reflex unit must constitute a failure.
S14.5.3 Dust test.
S14.5.3.1 Samples. A sealed unit is
not required to meet the requirements of
this test.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure. The sample
device with any drain hole closed must
be mounted in its normal operating
position, at least 6 in from the wall in
a cubical box with inside measurements
of 3 ft on each side containing 10 lb of
fine powered cement in accordance
with ASTM C 150–56, Standard
Specification for Portland Cement
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title). At intervals of 15
minutes during a test period of 5 hours,
the dust must be agitated by compressed
air or fan blower by projecting blasts of
air for a 2 second period in a downward
direction into the dust in such a way
that the dust is completely and
uniformly diffused throughout the
entire cube and allowed to settle. After
the completion of the dust test the
exterior surface of the device must be
cleaned.
S14.5.3.3 Performance requirements.
If after a photometry test the maximum
photometric intensity of the device is
not more than 10% less than the
maximum photometric intensity of the
same device after being cleaned both
inside and outside, the device is
considered to have met the
requirements of the dust test.
S14.5.4 Corrosion test.
S14.5.4.1 Procedure. The sample
device must be subjected to a salt spray
(fog) test in accordance with the latest
version of ASTM B117–73, Method of
Salt Spray (Fog) Testing (incorporated
by reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this
title), for a period of 50 hours,
consisting of two periods of 24 hour
exposure followed by a 1 hr drying time.
S14.5.4.2 Performance requirements.
After the completion of the corrosion
test there must be no evidence of
PO 00000
Frm 00060
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
excessive corrosion which would affect
the proper function of the device.
S14.6 Headlamp physical test
procedures and performance
requirements.
S14.6.1 Abrasion test.
S14.6.1.1 Procedure.
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad. A new,
unused abrading pad constructed of
0000 steel wool not less than 2.5 ± .1 cm
wide, rubber cemented to a rigid base
shaped to the same vertical contour of
the lens, is used for each test. The
abrading pad support is equal in size to
the pad and the center of the support
surface is within ± 2 mm of parallel to
the lens surface. The ‘‘grain’’ of the pad
is oriented perpendicular to the
direction of motion. The density of the
pad is such that when the pad is resting
unweighted on the lens, the base of the
pad is no closer than 3.2 mm to the lens
at its closest point.
S14.6.1.1.2 Abrading pad alignment.
A sample headlamp is mounted in the
abrasion test fixture of Figure 5 with the
lens facing upward. When mounted on
its support and resting on the lens of the
test headlamp, the abrading pad is then
weighted such that a pad pressure of 14
± 1 KPa. exists at the center and
perpendicular to the face of the lens.
S14.6.1.1.3 Abrasion test procedure.
The pad is cycled back and forth (1
cycle) for 11 cycles at 4 ± 0.8 in (10 ±
2 cm) per second over at least 80% of
the lens surface, including all the area
between the upper and lower aiming
pads, but not including lens trim rings
and edges. A pivot must be used if it is
required to follow the contour of the
lens.
S14.6.1.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the abrasion test the
sample headlamp must meet the
requirements of the applicable
photometry tests of Table XIX and Table
XVIII. A 1⁄4° reaim is permitted in any
direction at any test point.
S14.6.2 Chemical resistance test.
S14.6.2.1 Procedure.
S14.6.2.1.1 Test fluids. The five test
fluids used in the chemical resistance
test include:
(a) ASTM Reference Fuel C, which is
composed of Isooctane 50% volume and
Toluene 50% volume. Isooctane must
conform to A2.7 in Annex 2 of the
Motor Fuels Section of the 1985 Annual
Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 05.04
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), and Toluene must
conform to ASTM specification D362–
84, Standard Specification for Industrial
Grade Toluene (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title).
ASTM Reference Fuel C must be used
as specified in: Paragraph A2.3.2 and
A2.3.3 of Annex 2 to Motor Fuels;
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Section 1 in the 1985 Annual Book of
ASTM Standards, Vol. 05.04
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title); and OSHA Standard
29 CFR 1910.106—Handling Storage
and Use of Flammable Combustible
Liquids;
(b) Tar remover (consisting by volume
of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum base
mineral spirits);
(c) Power steering fluid (as specified
by the vehicle manufacturer for use in
the motor vehicle on which the
headlamp is intended to be installed);
(d) Windshield washer fluid
consisting of 0.5% monoethanolamine
with the remainder 50% concentration
of methanol/distilled water by volume;
and
(e) Antifreeze (50% concentration of
ethylene glycol/distilled water by
volume).
S14.6.2.1.2 Fluid application. The
entire exterior lens surface of the sample
headlamp mounted in the headlamp test
fixture and top surface of the lensreflector joint is wiped once to the left
and once to the right with a 6 inch
square soft cotton cloth (with pressure
equally applied) which has been
saturated once in a container with 2
ounces of five different test fluids listed
above. The lamp is wiped within 5
seconds after removal of the cloth from
the test fluid. A new lamp sample may
be used with each fluid.
S14.6.2.1.3 Test duration. After the
headlamp sample has been wiped with
the test fluid, it must be stored in its
designed operating attitude for 48 hours
at a temperature of 23°C ± 4°C and a
relative humidity of 30% ± 10%. At the
end of the 48-hour period, the headlamp
is wiped clean with a soft dry cotton
cloth and visually inspected.
S14.6.2.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the chemical
resistance test, the sample headlamp
must have no surface deterioration,
coating delamination, fractures,
deterioration of bonding or sealing
materials, color bleeding, or color
pickup visible without magnification
and the headlamp must meet the
requirements of the applicable
photometry tests of Table XIX and Table
XVIII. A 1⁄4° reaim is permitted in any
direction at any test point.
S14.6.3 Corrosion test.
S14.6.3.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp, mounted on a headlamp test
fixture in designed operating position
and including all accessory equipment
necessary to operate in its normal
manner, is subjected to a salt spray (fog)
test in accordance with ASTM B117–73,
Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), for 50 total hours,
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
consisting of two periods of 24 hours
exposure followed by a 1 hour drying
period. If a portion of the device is
completely protected in service, that
portion is covered to prevent salt fog
entry during exposure. After removal
from the salt spray and the final 1 hour
drying period the sample headlamp is
examined for corrosion that affect any
other applicable tests contained in
S14.6. If such corrosion is found, the
affected test(s) must be performed on
the corrosion sample and the results
recorded.
S14.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the corrosion test,
the sample headlamp must not have any
observed corrosion which would result
in the failure of any other applicable
tests contained in S14.6 and no
corrosion of the headlamp mounting
and aiming mechanism that would
result in the failure of the aiming
adjustment tests, inward force test, or
torque deflection test of S14.6.
S14.6.4 Corrosion-connector test.
S14.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.4.1.1 A headlamp connector
test must be performed on each filament
circuit of the sample headlamp prior to
the test in S14.6.4.1.2 according to
Figure 4 and S14.6.15. The power
source is set to provide 12.8 volts and
the resistance must be set to produce 10
amperes.
S14.6.4.1.2 The headlamp, with
connector attached to the terminals,
unfixtured and in its designed operating
attitude with all drain holes, breathing
devices or other designed openings in
their normal operating positions, is
subjected to a salt spray (fog) test in
accordance with ASTM B117–73,
Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
(incorporated by reference, see 571.108
S5.2 of this title), for 240 hours,
consisting of ten successive 24-hour
periods.
S14.6.4.1.3 During each period, the
headlamp is mounted in the middle of
the chamber and exposed for 23 hours
to the salt spray. The spray is not
activated during the 24th hour. The bulb
is removed from the headlamp and from
the test chamber during the one hour of
salt spray deactivation and reinserted
for the start of the next test period, at
the end of the first and last three 23hour periods of salt spray exposure, and
at the end of any two of the fourth
through seventh 23-hour periods of saltspray exposure.
S14.6.4.1.4 The test chamber is
closed at all times except for a
maximum of 2 minutes which is
allowed for removal or replacement of a
bulb during each period.
S14.6.4.1.5 After the ten periods, the
lens-reflector unit without the bulb
PO 00000
Frm 00061
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68293
must be immersed in deionized water
for 5 minutes, then secured and allowed
to dry by natural convection only.
S14.6.4.1.6 Using the voltage,
resistance and pre-test set up of
S14.6.4.1.1 the current in each filament
circuit must be measured after the test
conducted in S14.6.4.1.2.
S14.6.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.4.2.1 After the completion of
the corrosion-connector test, the sample
headlamp must show no evidence of
external or internal corrosion or rust
visible without magnification.
S14.6.4.2.2 Loss of adhesion of any
applied coating must not occur more
than 3.2 mm from any sharp edge on the
inside or out.
S14.6.4.2.3 Corrosion may occur on
terminals only if the test current
produced during the test of S14.6.4.1.6
is not less than 9.7 amperes.
S14.6.5 Dust test.
S14.6.5.1 Procedure.
S14.6.5.1.1 A sample headlamp,
mounted on a headlamp test fixture,
with all drain holes, breathing devices
or other designed openings in their
normal operating positions, is
positioned within a cubical box, with
inside measurements of 900 mm on
each side or larger if required for
adequate wall clearance (i.e., a distance
of at least 150 mm between the
headlamp and any wall of the box).
S14.6.5.1.2 The box contains 4.5 kg
of fine powdered cement which
conforms to the ASTM C150–77,
Standard Specification for Portland
Cement (incorporated by reference, see
571.108 S5.2 of this title). Every 15
minutes, the cement is agitated by
compressed air or fan blower(s) by
projecting blasts of air for a two-second
period in a downward direction so that
the cement is diffused as uniformly as
possible throughout the entire box.
S14.6.5.1.3 This test is continued for
five hours after which the exterior
surfaces of the headlamp are wiped
clean.
S14.6.5.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the dust test, the
sample headlamp must meet the
requirements of the applicable
photometry tests of Table XIX and Table
XVIII. A 1⁄4° reaim is permitted in any
direction at any test point.
S14.6.6 Temperature cycle test and
internal heat test.
S14.6.6.1 Samples. A sample
headlamp with one or more replaceable
light sources is tested according to the
procedures of this section for a
temperature cycle test and an internal
heat test. The same sample headlamp is
used in the temperature cycle test and
then in the internal heat test.
S14.6.6.2 General procedure.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68294
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.6.6.2.1 Tests are made with all
filaments lighted at design voltage that
are intended to be used simultaneously
in the headlamp and which in
combination draw the highest total
wattage. These include but are not
limited to filaments used for turn signal
lamps, fog lamps, parking lamps, and
headlamp lower beams lighted with
upper beams when the wiring harness is
so connected on the vehicle.
S14.6.6.2.2 If a turn signal is
included in the headlamp assembly, it
is operated at 90 flashes a minute with
a 75% ± 2% current ‘‘on time.’’
S14.6.6.2.3 If the lamp produces
both the upper and lower beam, it is
tested in both the upper beam mode and
the lower beam mode under the
conditions above described, except for a
headlamp with a single type HB1 or
type HB2 light source.
S14.6.6.3 Temperature cycle test.
S14.6.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.3.1.1 A sample headlamp,
mounted on a headlamp test fixture, is
subjected to 10 complete consecutive
cycles having the thermal cycle profile
shown in Figure 6.
S14.6.6.3.1.2 During the hot cycle,
the lamp, is energized commencing at
point ‘‘A’’ of Figure 6 and de-energized
at point ‘‘B.’’
S14.6.6.3.1.3 Separate or single test
chambers may be used to generate the
environment of Figure 6.
S14.6.6.3.1.4 All drain holes,
breathing devices or other openings or
vents of the headlamps are set in their
normal operating positions.
S14.6.6.3.2 Performance
requirements. After completion of the
temperature cycle test, the sample
headlamp must:
(a) show no evidence of delamination,
fractures, entry of moisture, or
deterioration of bonding material, color
bleeding, warp or deformation visible
without magnification;
(b) show no lens warpage greater than
3 mm when measured parallel to the
optical axis at the point of intersection
of the axis of each light source with the
exterior surface of the lens; and
(c) meet the requirements of the
applicable photometry tests of Table
XIX and Table XVIII. A 1⁄4° reaim is
permitted in any direction at any test
point.
S14.6.6.4 Internal heat test.
S14.6.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.4.1.1 A sample headlamp
lens surface that would normally be
exposed to road dirt is uniformly
sprayed with any appropriate mixture of
dust and water or other materials to
reduce the photometric output at the H–
V test point of the upper beam (or the
1⁄2°D–11⁄2°R test point of the lower beam
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
as applicable) to 25% ± 2% of the
output originally measured in the
applicable photometric compliance test.
S14.6.6.4.1.2 A headlamp with a
single type HB1 or type HB2 light
source is tested on the upper beam only.
S14.6.6.4.1.3 Such reduction is
determined under the same conditions
as that of the original photometric
measurement.
S14.6.6.4.1.4 After the photometric
output of the lamp has been reduced as
specified above, the sample lamp and its
mounting hardware must be mounted in
an environmental chamber in a manner
similar to that indicated in Figure 7
‘‘Dirt/Ambient Test Setup.’’
S14.6.6.4.1.5 The headlamp is
soaked for one hour at a temperature of
35° + 4° ¥ 0 °C) and then the lamp is
energized according to the procedure of
this section for one hour in a still air
condition, allowing the temperature to
rise from the soak temperature.
S14.6.6.4.1.6 At the end of one hour
the sample lamp is returned to a room
ambient temperature of 23° + 4° ¥ 0 °C
and a relative humidity of 30% ± 10%
and allowed to stabilize to the room
ambient temperature. The lens is then
cleaned.
S14.6.6.4.2 Performance
requirements. After completion of the
temperature cycle test and meeting its
requirements, and completion of the
internal heat test, the sample headlamp
must:
(a) have no lens warpage greater than
3 mm when measured parallel to the
optical axis at the point of intersection
of the axis of each light source with the
exterior surface of the lens, and
(b) meet the requirements of the
applicable photometry tests of Table
XIX and Table XVIII. A 1⁄4° reaim is
permitted in any direction at any test
point.
S14.6.7 Humidity test.
S14.6.7.1 Procedure.
S14.6.7.1.1 The test fixture consists
of a horizontal steel plate to which three
threaded steel or aluminum rods of 1⁄2
inch diameter are screwed vertically
behind the headlamp.
S14.6.7.1.2 The sample headlamp
assembly is clamped to the vertical rods,
which are behind the headlamp. All
attachments to the headlamp assembly
are made behind the lens and vents or
openings, and are not within 2 inches
laterally of a vent inlet or outlet.
S14.6.7.1.3 The mounted headlamp
assembly is oriented in its design
operating position, and is placed in a
controlled environment at a temperature
of 100° + 7°¥0° F (38° + 4°¥0° C) with
a relative humidity of not less than
90%. All drain holes, breathing devices,
and other openings are set in their
PO 00000
Frm 00062
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
normal operation positions for all
phases of the humidity test.
S14.6.7.1.4 The headlamp is
subjected to 24 consecutive 3-hour test
cycles. In each cycle, the headlamp is
energized for 1 hour at design voltage
with the highest combination of
filament wattages that are intended to be
used, and then de-energized for 2 hours.
If the headlamp incorporates a turn
signal then the turn signal flashes at 90
flashes per minute with a 75% ± 2%
current ‘‘on-time.’’
S14.6.7.1.5 Within 3 minutes after
the completion of the 24th cycle, the air
flow test will begin. The following
procedure shall occur: the mounted
assembly is removed, placed in an
insulating box and covered with foam
material so that there is no visible air
space around the assembly; the box is
closed, taken to the air flow test
chamber, and placed within it. Inside
the chamber, the assembly with respect
to the air flow, is oriented in its design
operating position. The assembly is
positioned in the chamber so that the
center of the lens is in the center of the
opening of the air flow entry duct
during the test. The headlamp has at
least 3 inches clearance on all sides, and
at least 4 inches to the entry and exit
ducts at the closest points. If vent tubes
are used which extend below the lamp
body, the 3 inches are measured from
the bottom of the vent tube or its
protection. The temperature of the
chamber is 73° + 7° ¥ 0 °F (23° + 4°
¥ 0 °C) with a relative humidity of 30%
+ 10% ¥ 0%. The headlamp is not
energized.
S14.6.7.1.6 Before the test specified
in paragraph S14.6.7.1.7 of this section,
the uniformity of the air flow in the
empty test chamber at a plane 4 inches
downstream of the air entry duct is
measured over a 4 inch square grid. The
uniformity of air flow at each grid point
is ± 10% of the average air flow
specified in paragraph S14.6.7.1.7 of
this section.
S14.6.7.1.7 The mounted assembly
in the chamber is exposed, for one hour,
to an average air flow of 330 +0 ¥30 ft/
min as measured with an air velocity
measuring probe having an accuracy of
± 3% in the 330 ft/min range. The
average air flow is the average of the
velocity recorded at six points around
the perimeter of the lens. The six points
are determined as follows: At the center
of the lens, construct a horizontal plane.
The first two points are located in the
plane, 1 inch outward from the
intersection of the plane and each edge
of the lens. Then, trisect the distance
between these two points and construct
longitudinal vertical planes at the two
intermediate locations formed by the
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
trisection. The four remaining points are
located in the vertical planes, one inch
above the top edge of the lens, and one
inch below the bottom edge of the lens.
S14.6.7.1.8 After one hour, the
headlamp is removed and inspected for
moisture.
S14.6.7.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the humidity test,
the sample headlamp must show no
evidence of interior delamination or
moisture, fogging or condensation
visible without magnification.
S14.6.8 Vibration test.
S14.6.8.1 Samples. The mounting
bracket with a sample headlamp
installed must not have a resonant
frequency in the 10–55 Hz. range.
S14.6.8.2 Procedure. The mounted
sample headlamp is bolted to the anvil
end of the table of the vibration test
machine of Figure 21 and vibrated 750
cpm through a distance of 1/8 in. The
table is spring mounted at one end and
fitted with steel calks on the underside
of the other end. The table is of
sufficient size to completely contain the
test fixture base with no overhang. The
calks are to make contact with the steel
anvil once during each cycle at the
completion of the fall. The rack is
operated under a spring tension of 60 to
70 lb. The vibration is applied in the
vertical axis of the headlamp as
mounted on the vehicle. Bulb filaments
are not energized during the test. The
test is continued for 1 hour.
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
After completion of the vibration test,
there must be no evidence of loose or
broken parts, other than filaments,
visible without magnification.
S14.6.9 Sealing test.
S14.6.9.1 Procedure.
S14.6.9.1.1 An unfixtured sample
headlamp in its design mounting
position is placed in water at a
temperature of 176° ± 5° F (60° ± 3° C)
for one hour. The headlamp is energized
in its highest wattage mode, with the
test voltage at 12.8 ± 0.1V during
immersion.
S14.6.9.1.2 The lamp is then deenergized and immediately submerged
in its design mounting position into
water at 32° +5° ¥0° F (0° +3° ¥0° C).
The water is in a pressurized vessel, and
the pressure is increased to 10 psi (70
kPa), upon placing the lamp in the
water. The lamp must remain in the
pressurized vessel for a period of thirty
minutes.
S14.6.9.1.3 This entire procedure is
repeated for four cycles.
S14.6.9.1.4 Then the lamp is
inspected for any signs of water on its
interior. During the high temperature
portion of the cycles, the lamp is
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
observed for signs of air escaping from
its interior.
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the sealing test, a
sample headlamp confirmed to be
sealed need not meet the corrosion test,
dust test, or humidity test of this
Section. If any water is on the interior
or air escapes, the lamp is not a sealed
lamp.
S14.6.10 Chemical resistance test of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps
test.
S14.6.10.1 Procedure.
S14.6.10.1.1 Test fluids. The three
test fluids used in the chemical
resistance test include;
(a) Tar remover (consisting by volume
of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum base
mineral spirits);
(b) Mineral spirits; and
(c) Fluids other than water contained
in the manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning the reflector.
S14.6.10.1.2 Fluid application. With
a sample headlamp in the headlamp test
fixture and the lens removed, the entire
surface of the reflector that receives
light from a headlamp light source is
wiped once to the left and once to the
right with a 6-inch square soft cotton
cloth (with pressure equally applied)
which has been saturated once in a
container with 2 ounces of one of the
test fluids listed in S14.6.10.1.1. The
lamp is wiped within 5 seconds after
removal of the cloth from the test fluid.
S14.6.10.1.3 Test duration. After the
headlamp has been wiped with the test
fluid, it is stored in its designed
operating attitude for 48 hours at a
temperature of 73° ± 7° F (23° ± 4° C)
and a relative humidity of 30% ± 10%.
At the end of the 48-hour period, the
headlamp is wiped clean with a soft dry
cotton cloth and visually inspected.
S14.6.10.2 Performance
requirements. After completion of the
chemical resistance test, the sample
headlamp must have no surface
deterioration, coating delamination,
fractures, deterioration of bonding or
sealing materials, color bleeding or color
pickup visible without magnification
and the headlamp must meet the
requirements of the applicable
photometry tests of Table XIX and Table
XVIII. A 1⁄4° re-aim is permitted in any
direction at any test point.
S14.6.11 Corrosion resistance test of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps
test.
S14.6.11.1 Procedure.
S14.6.11.1.1 A sample headlamp
with the lens removed, unfixtured and
in its designed operating attitude with
all drain holes, breathing devices or
other designed openings in their normal
operating positions, must be subjected
PO 00000
Frm 00063
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68295
to a salt spray (fog) test in accordance
with ASTM B117–73, Method of Salt
Spray (Fog) Testing (incorporated by
reference, see 571.108 S5.2 of this title),
for 24 hours, while mounted in the
middle of the chamber.
S14.6.11.1.2 Afterwards, the
headlamp must be stored in its designed
operating attitude for 48 hours at a
temperature of 73° ± 7° F (23° ± 4° C)
and a relative humidity of 30% ± 10%
and allowed to dry by natural
convection only. At the end of the 48hour period, the reflector must be
cleaned according to the instructions
supplied with the headlamp
manufacturer’s replacement lens, and
inspected. The lens and seal must then
be attached according to these
instructions and the headlamp tested for
photometric performance.
S14.6.11.2 Performance
requirements. After the completion of
the corrosion test, the sample headlamp
must show no evidence of corrosion or
rust visible without magnification on
any part of the headlamp reflector that
receives light from a headlamp light
source, on any metal light or heat shield
assembly, or on a metal reflector of any
other lamp. The sample headlamp with
the replacement lens installed must
meet the requirements of the applicable
photometry tests of Table XIX and Table
XVIII. A 1⁄4° re-aim is permitted in any
direction at any test point.
S14.6.12 Inward force test.
S14.6.12.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp mechanism, including the
aiming adjusters, must be subjected to
an inward force of 222 N directed
normal to the headlamp aiming plane
and symmetrically about the center of
the headlamp lens face.
S14.6.12.2 Performance
requirements. After the completion of
the inward force test, a sample
headlamp must not permanently recede
by more than 2.5 mm. The aim of the
headlamp must not permanently deviate
by more than 3.2 mm at a distance of 7.6
m. The aim of any headlamp that is
capable of being mechanically aimed by
externally applied aiming devices must
not change by more than 0.30°.
S14.6.13 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.13.1 Procedure.
S14.6.13.1.1 The sample headlamp
assembly is mounted in designed
vehicle position and set at nominal aim
(H=0, V=0).
S14.6.13.1.2 A sealed beam
headlamp, except Type G and Type H,
is removed from its mounting and
replaced by the applicable
deflectometer. (Type C and Type DFigure 18, Type A and Type E-Figure
16, Type B-Figure 17, and Type F-Figure
14).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68296
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.6.13.1.3 Sealed beam headlamps
Type G and Type H have the adapter of
Figure 15 and the deflectometer of
Figure 14 attached to the headlamp.
S14.6.13.1.4 A torque of 2.25 Nm
must be applied to the headlamp
assembly through the deflectometer and
a reading on the thumbwheel is taken.
The torque must be removed and a
second reading on the thumbwheel is
taken.
S14.6.13.1.5 Headlamps other than
sealed beam headlamps must have the
downward force used to create the
torque applied parallel to the aiming
reference plane, through the aiming
pads, and displaced forward using a
lever arm such that the force is applied
on an axis that is perpendicular to the
aiming reference plane and originates at
the center of the aiming pad pattern (see
Figure 3).
S14.6.13.1.6 For headlamps using
the aiming pad locations of Group I, the
distance between the point of
application of force and the aiming
reference plane is not less than 168.3
mm plus the distance from the aiming
reference plane to the secondary plane,
if used.
S14.6.13.1.7 For headlamps using
the aiming pad locations of Group II, the
distance between the point of
application of force and the aiming
reference plane is not less than 167.9
mm plus the distance to the secondary
plane, if used.
S14.6.13.1.8 For headlamps using
the nonadjustable Headlamp Aiming
Device Locating Plates for the 146 mm
diameter, the 176 mm diameter, and the
92x150 mm sealed beam, the distance
between the point of application of force
and the aiming plane is not,
respectively, less than 177.4 mm, 176.2
mm, and 193.7 mm.
S14.6.13.2 Performance
requirements. The aim of each sample
headlamp must not deviate more than
0.30° when the downward torque is
removed.
S14.6.14 Retaining ring test.
S14.6.14.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp with the minimum flange
thickness of: Type A–31.5 mm, Type B–
10.1 mm, Type C–11.8 mm, Type D–
11.8 mm, Type E–31.5 mm, and Type F–
8.6 mm, is secured between the
appropriate mounting ring and retaining
ring (mounting ring and aiming ring for
Type F).
S14.6.14.2 Performance
requirements. The sample headlamp
when secured per the procedure must
be held tight enough that it will not
rattle.
S14.6.15 Headlamp connector test.
S14.6.15.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp connected into the test circuit
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
of Figure 4 has the power supply
adjusted until 10 amperes DC are
flowing through the circuit. The test is
repeated for each filament circuit of the
headlamp.
S14.6.15.2 Performance
requirements. The voltage drop, as
measured in the test circuit of Figure 4,
must not exceed 40 mv DC in any
applicable filament circuit of the sample
headlamp.
S14.6.16 Headlamp wattage test.
S14.6.16.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp that has been seasoned is
energized so as to have 12.8v ± 20 mv
DC applied across each filament circuit
and the current flowing in each circuit
is measured.
S14.6.16.2 Performance
requirements. The wattage of each
filament circuit of the sample headlamp
must not exceed the applicable value for
that type of headlamp as shown in Table
II.
S14.6.17 Aiming adjustment testlaboratory.
S14.6.17.1 Procedure. A sample
headlamp is mounted in design position
at nominal (H = 0, V = 0) aim with an
accurate measuring device such as a
spot projector or other equally accurate
means attached. The headlamp is
adjusted to the extremes of travel in
each horizontal and vertical direction.
S14.6.17.2 Performance
requirements. Visually aimed lower
beam headlamps without a VHAD are
required not to have a horizontal
adjustment mechanism and horizontal
aim range requirements do not apply.
S14.6.17.2.1 A sample sealed beam
headlamp, other than a Type F, tested
per the procedure must provide a
minimum of ± 4.0° adjustment range in
both the vertical and horizontal planes
and if equipped with independent
vertical and horizontal aiming screws,
the adjustment must be such that
neither the vertical nor horizontal aim
must deviate more than 100 mm from
horizontal or vertical planes,
respectively, at a distance of 7.6 m
through an angle of ± 4.0°.
S14.6.17.2.2 A sample Type F sealed
beam, integral beam, replaceable bulb,
or combination headlamp tested per the
procedure must provide a minimum of
± 4.0° adjustment range in the vertical
plane and ± 2.5° in the horizontal plane
and if equipped with independent
vertical and horizontal aiming screws,
the adjustment must be such that
neither the vertical nor horizontal aim
must deviate more than 100 mm from
horizontal or vertical planes,
respectively, at a distance of 7.6 m
through an angle of ± 2.5° and ± 4.0°,
respectively.
PO 00000
Frm 00064
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.6.17.2.3 A sample headlamp
that is aimed by moving the reflector
relative to the lens and headlamp
housing, and vice versa must provide a
minimum adjustment range in the
vertical plane not less than the full
range of the pitch on the vehicle on
which it is installed and ± 2.5° in the
horizontal plane.
S14.6.18 Aiming adjustment test-on
vehicle.
S14.6.18.1 Procedure.
S14.6.18.1.1 A sample headlamp is
mounted on the vehicle at nominal (H
= 0, V = 0) aim with an accurate
measuring device such as a spot
projector or other equally accurate
means attached.
S14.6.18.1.2 The installed range of
static pitch angle is, at a minimum,
determined from unloaded vehicle
weight to gross vehicle weight rating,
and incorporates pitch angle effects
from maximum trailer or trunk loadings,
the full range of tire intermix sizes and
suspensions recommended and/or
installed by the vehicle manufacturer,
and the anticipated effects of variable
passenger loading.
S14.6.18.1.3 The headlamp is
adjusted to the extremes of travel in
each horizontal and vertical direction.
S14.6.18.2 Performance
requirements.
S14.6.18.2.1 A sample headlamp
tested per the procedure must provide a
minimum vertical adjustment range not
less than the full range of pitch of the
vehicle on which it is installed.
S14.6.18.2.2 The vertical aim
mechanism must be continuously
variable over the full range.
S14.6.18.2.3 The adjustment of one
aim axis through its full on-vehicle
range must not cause the aim of the
other axis to deviate more than ± 0.76°.
If this performance is not achievable,
the requirements of S10.18.3.1 apply,
except that if the aiming mechanism is
not a VHAD, the requirements specific
to VHADs are not applicable, and the
instruction must be specific to the
aiming mechanism installed.
S14.7 Replaceable light source
physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.7.1 Deflection test for
replaceable light sources.
S14.7.1.1 Procedure.
S14.7.1.1.1 With the sample light
source rigidly mounted in a fixture in a
manner indicated in Figure 8, a force 4.0
± 0.1 pounds (17.8 ± 0.4N) is applied at
a distance ‘‘A’’ from the reference plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the glass capsule and parallel to the
smallest dimension of the pressed glass
capsule seal.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.7.1.1.2 The force is applied
(using a rod with a hard rubber tip with
a minimum spherical radius of .039 in
[1 mm]) radially to the surface of the
glass capsule in four locations in a plane
parallel to the reference plane and
spaced at a distance ‘‘A’’ from that
plane. These force applications are
spaced 90° apart starting at the point
perpendicular to the smallest dimension
of the pressed seal of the glass capsule.
S14.7.1.1.3. The bulb deflection is
measured at the glass capsule surface at
180° opposite to the force application.
Distance ‘‘A’’ for a replaceable light
source other than an HB Type is the
dimension provided in accordance with
Appendix A of part 564 of this chapter,
section I.A.1 if the light source has a
lower beam filament, or as specified in
section I.B.1 if the light source has only
an upper beam filament.
S14.7.1.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the deflection test,
a sample light source must have no
permanent deflection of the glass
envelope exceeding 0.13 mm in the
direction of applied force.
S14.7.2 Pressure test for replaceable
light sources.
S14.7.2.1 Procedure.
S14.7.2.1.1 The capsule, lead wires
and/or terminals, and seal on each
sample Type HB1, Type HB3, Type
HB4, and Type HB5 light source, and on
any other replaceable light source which
uses a seal, is installed in a pressure
chamber as shown in Figure 10 so as to
provide an airtight seal. The diameter of
the aperture in Figure 10 on a
replaceable light source (other than an
HB Type) must be that dimension
furnished for such light source in
compliance with Appendix A or
Appendix B of part 564 of this chapter.
S14.7.2.1.2 The light source is
immersed in water for one minute while
inserted in a cylindrical aperture
specified for the light source, and
subjected to an air pressure of 70 KPa
(10 psig) on the glass capsule side.
S14.7.2.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the pressure test,
the sample light source with an airtight
seal on the low pressure (connector
side) must show no evidence of air
bubbles on that side.
S14.7.3 Replaceable light source
power and flux measurement procedure.
The measurement of maximum power
and luminous flux that is submitted in
compliance with section VII of
Appendix A of part 564 of this chapter,
or section IV of Appendix B of part 564
of this chapter, is made in accordance
with this paragraph.
S14.7.3.1 Seasoning. The filament or
discharge arc is seasoned before
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
measurement of either maximum power
and luminous flux.
S14.7.3.1.1 Resistive filament
source. Seasoning of a light source with
a resistive element type filament is
made in accordance with this S14.2.5.4
of this standard.
S14.7.3.1.2 Discharge source. For a
light source using excited gas mixtures
as a filament or discharge arc, seasoning
of the light source system, including any
ballast required for its operation, is
made in accordance with section 4.0 of
SAE Recommended Practice J2009
FEB93, Discharge Forward Lighting
Systems.
S14.7.3.2 Test voltage.
Measurements are made with a direct
current test voltage of 12.8 v regulated
within one quarter of one percent.
S14.7.3.3 Luminous flux
measurement. The measurement of
luminous flux is made in accordance
with the Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America, LM 45; IES
Approved Method for Electrical and
Photometric Measurements of General
Service Incandescent Filament Lamps
(April 1980) (incorporated by reference,
see 571.108 S5.2 of this title).
S14.7.3.3.1 Resistive filament light
source setup. Luminous flux
measurements are made with the black
cap installed on Type HB1, Type HB2,
Type HB4, and Type HB5, and on any
other replaceable light source so
designed; and is with the electrical
conductor and light source base
shrouded with an opaque white cover,
except for the portion normally located
within the interior of the lamp housing.
The measurement of luminous flux for
the Types HB3 and HB4 is made with
the base covered with a white cover as
shown in the drawings for Types HB3
and HB4 filed in Docket No. NHTSA
98–3397. The white covers are used to
eliminate the likelihood of incorrect
lumen measurement that will occur
should the reflectance of the light
source base and electrical connector be
low.
S14.7.3.3.2 Discharge light source
setup. With the test voltage applied to
the ballast input terminals, the
measurement of luminous flux is made
with the black cap installed, if so
designed, and is made with an opaque
white colored cover, except for the
portion normally located within the
interior of the lamp housing.
S14.8 Vehicle headlamp aiming
devices (VHAD) physical test
procedures and performance
requirements.
S14.8.1 Samples. The same VHAD
and associated headlamp(s) or
headlamp assembly must be rigidly
mounted in a headlamp test fixture with
PO 00000
Frm 00065
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68297
the aiming plane horizontal and vertical
and with the scale on the device set at
0.
S14.8.2 Scale graduation test.
S14.8.2.1 Procedure. Check each
graduation on the horizontal and
vertical aim scales.
S14.8.2.2 Performance requirements.
Scale graduation from correct aim must
not exceed ± 0.2° horizontally and ± 0.1°
vertically.
S14.8.3 Cold scale graduation test.
S14.8.3.1 Procedure. The VHAD and
an unlighted headlamp assembly must
then be stabilized at ¥7° ± 3°C in a
circulating air environmental test
chamber for a 30 minute temperature
soak.
S14.8.3.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of a 30 minute
temperature soak the variation from
correct aim shown by the sample VHAD
must not exceed ± 0.2° horizontally and
± 0.1° vertically.
S14.8.4 Hot scale graduation test.
S14.8.4.1 Procedure. The VHAD and
the headlamp assembly with its highest
wattage filament, or combination of
filaments intended to be used
simultaneously, energized at its design
voltage, is then stabilized at 38° ± 3 °C
in a circulating air environmental test
chamber for a 30 minute temperature
soak.
S14.8.4.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of a 30 minute
temperature soak the variation from
correct aim shown by the sample VHAD
must not exceed ± 0.2° horizontally and
± 0.1° vertically.
S14.8.5 Thermal cycle test.
S14.8.5.1 Procedure. The VHAD and
an unlighted headlamp assembly are
then placed in a circulating air
environmental test chamber and
exposed to a temperature of 60° ± 3°C
for 24 hours, followed by a temperature
of ¥40° ± 3°C for 24 hours, and are then
permitted to return to room
temperature.
S14.8.5.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the thermal cycle
test the variation from correct aim
shown by the sample VHAD must not
exceed ± 0.2° horizontally and ± 0.1°
vertically and the VHAD and headlamp
assembly must show no damage which
would impair its ability to perform as
specified in this standard.
S14.8.6 Corrosion test.
S14.8.6.1 Procedure. The VHAD and
headlamp assembly are then tested
according to the headlamp corrosion
test of S14.6.3.
S14.8.6.2 Performance requirements.
After completion of the corrosion test
the sample VHAD and headlamp must
not have any observed corrosion that
would result in the failure of any other
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68298
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
applicable tests contained in this
section.
S14.8.7 Photometry test.
S14.8.7.1 Procedure. The VHAD and
headlamp assembly are then tested for
photometric compliance according to
the procedure of S14.2.5 and for
replacement units per S10.18.8.4.
S14.8.7.2 Performance requirements.
The sample headlamp must comply
with the applicable photometric
requirements of Table XIX and Table
XVIII and with replacement units
installed per S10.18.8.4.
S14.9 Associated equipment
physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.9.1 Turn signal operating unit
durability test.
S14.9.1.1 Power supply
specifications. During the test, the unit
is operated at 6.4 volts for 6 volt systems
or 12.8 volts for 12 volt systems from a
power supply meeting the following
requirements:
(a) An output current that is at least
10 times the load current;
(b) Voltage regulation that allows a
voltage change of less than 5%;
(c) Ripple voltage of not more than
5%;
(d) A response time of not more than
25 milliseconds rise time from 0 to rated
current at rated voltage in a pure
resistance circuit; and
(e) An output impedance of not more
than 0.005 ohms dc.
S14.9.1.2 Procedure.
S14.9.1.2.1 The sample unit is
operated with the maximum bulb load
it will experience on the vehicle on
which it will be installed. Bulbs that fail
during the test are replaced. The turn
signal flasher is not to be included in
the test circuit. When the unit includes
a self-canceling means, the test
equipment is arranged so that the unit
will be turned ‘‘off’’ in its normal
operating manner.
S14.9.1.2.2 The test is conducted at
a rate not to exceed 15 complete cycles
per minute. One complete cycle consists
of the following sequence: Off, left turn,
off, right turn, and return to off.
S14.9.1.2.3 The voltage drop from
the input terminal of the device to each
lamp output terminal, including 3 in of
16 or 18 gage wire, is measured at the
start of the test, at intervals of not more
than 25,000 cycles during the test, and
at the completion of the test.
S14.9.1.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.1.3.1 A turn signal operating
unit is considered to have met the
requirements of the durability test if it
remains operational after completing at
least 100,000 cycles, and the voltage
drop between the input contact and any
output contact, including required
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
length of wire, does not exceed 0.25
volts.
S14.9.1.3.2 A turn signal operating
unit is considered to have met the
requirements of the durability test if it
remains operational after completing at
least 175,000 cycles for a unit installed
on a multipurpose passenger vehicle,
truck, or bus 2032 mm or more in
overall width, and the voltage drop
between the input contact and any
output contact, including required
length of wire, does not exceed 0.25
volts.
S14.9.1.3.3 If stop signals also
operate through the turn signal
operating unit, the voltage drop of any
additional switch contacts must meet
the same requirements as the turn signal
contacts.
S14.9.2 Vehicular hazard warning
signal operating unit durability test.
S14.9.2.1 Procedure.
S14.9.2.1.1 The sample unit is
operated at its rated voltage with the
maximum bulb load it will experience
on the vehicle on which it will be
installed. Bulbs that fail during the test
are replaced. The hazard warning signal
flasher is not to be included in the test
circuit.
S14.9.2.1.2 The unit is turned ‘‘on’’
and ‘‘off’’ in its normal operating
manner at a rate not to exceed 15
complete cycles per minute. One
complete cycle consists of the sequence:
Off, on, and return to off. The test
consists of 10,000 cycles at an ambient
temperature of 75° ± 10 °F followed by
1 hour constant ‘‘on’’ at the same
temperature.
S14.9.2.1.3 The voltage drop from
the input terminal of the device to each
lamp output terminal, including 3 in of
16 or 18 gage wire, is measured at the
start of the test and at the completion of
the test.
S14.9.2.2 Performance requirements.
A hazard warning signal operating unit
is considered to have met the
requirements of the durability test if it
remains operational after completing
10,000 cycles and the 1 hour constant
‘‘on’’ and the voltage drop between the
input contact and any output contact,
including required length of wire, does
not exceed 0.3 volts for either 6.4 or
12.8 line voltage both at the start and
completion of the test.
S14.9.3 Turn signal flasher and
vehicular hazard warning signal flasher
tests.
S14.9.3.1 Standard test circuit. All
turn signal flasher and vehicular hazard
warning signal flasher tests use the
standard test circuit of Figure 22.
S14.9.3.1.1 Test circuit setup.
S14.9.3.1.1.1 The effective series
resistance in the total circuit between
PO 00000
Frm 00066
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the power supply and the bulb sockets
(excluding the flasher and bulb load(s)
using shorting bars) is 0.10 ± 0.01 ohm.
S14.9.3.1.1.2 The circuit resistance
at A–B of Figure 22 is measured with
flasher and bulb load(s) each shorted
out with an effective shunt resistance
not to exceed 0.005 ohms.
S14.9.3.1.1.3 The voltage to the
bulbs at C–D of Figure 22 is adjusted to
12.8 volts (or 6.4 volts) with the flasher
shorted out by an effective shunt
resistance not to exceed 0.005 ohms.
The load current is adjusted by
simultaneously adjusting trimmer
resistors, R.
S14.9.3.1.1.4 For testing fixed-load
flashers at other required voltages,
adjust the power supply to provide
required voltages, at the required
temperatures, at C–D of Figure 22,
without readjustment of trimming
resistors, R.
S14.9.3.1.1.5 For variable-load
flashers, the circuit is first adjusted for
12.8 volts (or 6.4 volts) at C–D of Figure
22, with the minimum required load,
and the power supply is adjusted to
provide other required test voltages, at
required temperatures, at C–D of Figure
22, without readjustment of trimming
resistors, R (each such required voltage
being set with the minimum required
load in place). The required voltage tests
with the maximum load are conducted
without readjusting each corresponding
power supply voltage, previously set
with minimum bulb load.
S14.9.3.1.1.6 A suitable high
impedance measuring device connected
to points X–Y in Figure 22 is used for
measuring flash rate, percent current
‘‘on’’ time, and voltage drop across the
flasher. The measurement of these
quantities does not affect the circuit.
S14.9.3.2 Power supply
specifications.
S14.9.3.2.1 Starting time, voltage
drop, and flash rate and percent current
‘‘on’’ time tests. The power supply used
in the standard test circuit for
conducting the starting time, the voltage
drop, and the flash rate and percent
current ‘‘on’’ time tests must comply
with the following specifications:
(a) Must not generate any adverse
transients not present in motor vehicles;
(b) Be capable of supplying 11–16 vdc
for 12 volt flashers and 5–9 vdc for 6
volt flashers to the input terminals of
the standard test circuit;
(c) Be capable of supplying required
design current(s) continuously and
inrush currents as required by the
design bulb load complement;
(d) Be capable of supplying an output
voltage that does not deviate more than
2% with changes in the static load from
0 to maximum (not including inrush
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
current) nor for static input line voltage
variations;
(e) Be capable of supplying an output
voltage that does not deviate more than
1.0 vdc from 0 to maximum load
(including inrush current) and must
recover 63% of its maximum excursion
within 100 µsec; and
(f) Have a ripple voltage of 75mv,
peak to peak.
S14.9.3.2.2 Durability tests. The
power supply used in the standard test
circuit for conducting durability tests
must comply with the following
specifications:
(a) Must not generate any adverse
transients not present in motor vehicles;
(b) Be capable of supplying 13 vdc
and 14 vdc for 12 volt flashers and 6.5
vdc and 7 vdc for 6 volt flashers to the
input terminals of the standard test
circuit;
(c) Be capable of supplying a
continuous output current of the design
load for one flasher times the number of
flashers and inrush currents as required
by the design bulb load complement;
(d) Be capable of supplying an output
voltage that does not deviate more than
2% with changes in the static load from
0 to maximum (not including inrush
current) and means must be provided to
compensate for static input line voltage
variations;
(e) Be capable of supplying an output
voltage that does not deviate more than
1.0 vdc from 0 to maximum load
(including inrush current) and must
recover 63% of its maximum excursion
within 5 µsec; and
(f) Have a ripple voltage of 300 mv,
peak to peak.
S14.9.3.3 Turn signal flasher
starting time test.
S14.9.3.3.1 Samples. Twenty sample
flashers chosen from random from fifty
representative samples are subjected to
a starting time test using the standard
test circuit.
S14.9.3.3.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.3.2.1 The test is conducted
in an ambient temperature of 75 ± 10 °F
with the design load (variable load
flashers are tested with their minimum
and their maximum design load)
connected and the power source for the
test circuit adjusted to apply design
voltage at the bulbs.
S14.9.3.3.2.2 The time measurement
starts when the voltage is initially
applied. Compliance is based on an
average of three starts for each sample
separated by a cooling interval of 5
minutes.
S14.9.3.3.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
starting time test are considered to have
been met if 17 of 20 samples comply
with the following:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
(a) A flasher having normally closed
contacts must open (turn off) within 1.0
second for a device designed to operate
two signal lamps, or within 1.25
seconds for a device designed to operate
more than two lamps, or
(b) A flasher having normally open
contacts must complete the first cycle
(close the contacts and then open the
contacts) within 1.5 seconds.
S14.9.3.4 Turn signal flasher voltage
drop test.
S14.9.3.4.1 Samples. The same
twenty sample flashers used in the
starting time test are subjected to a
voltage drop test using the standard test
circuit.
S14.9.3.4.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.4.2.1 The test is conducted
in an ambient temperature of 75 ± 10 °F
with the design load (variable load
flashers are tested with their maximum
design load) connected and the power
source for the standard test circuit
adjusted to apply 12.8 volts or 6.4 volts
at the bulbs according to the flasher
rating.
S14.9.3.4.2.2 The voltage drop is
measured between the input and load
terminals of the flasher during the ‘‘on’’
period after the flashers have completed
at least five consecutive cycles.
S14.9.3.4.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
voltage drop test are considered to have
been met if 17 of 20 samples comply
with the lowest voltage drop across any
flasher not exceeding 0.80 volt.
S14.9.3.5 Turn signal flasher flash
rate and percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
S14.9.3.5.1 Samples. The same
twenty sample flashers used in the
voltage drop test are subjected to a flash
rate and percent of current ‘‘on’’ time
test.
S14.9.3.5.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.5.2.1 The test is conducted
using the standard test circuit with the
design load (variable load flashers are
tested with their minimum and their
maximum design load) connected and
design voltage applied to the bulbs.
S14.9.3.5.2.2 Compliance is
determined using the following
combinations of ambient temperature
and bulb voltage:
(a) 12.8 volts (or 6.4 volts) and 75° ±
10 °F,
(b) 12.0 volts (or 6.0 volts) and 0° ±
5 °F,
(c) 15.0 volts (or 7.5 volts) and 0° ±
5 °F,
(d) 11.0 volts (or 5.5 volts) and 125°
± 5 °F, and
(e) 14.0 volts (or 7.0 volts) and 125°
± 5 °F.
S14.9.3.5.2.3 Flash rate and percent
current ‘‘on’’ time are measured after the
flashers have completed five
PO 00000
Frm 00067
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68299
consecutive cycles and are determined
by an average of at least three
consecutive cycles.
S14.9.3.5.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’ time
test are considered to have been met if
17 of 20 samples comply with the
following:
(a) The performance of a normally
closed type flasher must be within the
unshaded portion of the polygon shown
in Figure 2, or
(b) The performance of a normally
open type flasher must be within the
entire rectangle including the shaded
areas shown in Figure 2.
S14.9.3.6 Turn signal flasher
durability test.
S14.9.3.6.1 Samples. Twenty sample
flashers chosen from random from the
thirty samples not used in the previous
tests are subjected to a durability test.
S14.9.3.6.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.6.2.1 Conformance of the
samples to the starting time, voltage
drop, and flash rate and percent of
current ‘‘on’’ time tests (limited to the
12.8 volts or 6.4 volts and 75° ± 10° F
test condition only) is established.
S14.9.3.6.2.2 The test is conducted
on each sample with the design load
(variable load flashers are tested with
their maximum design load) connected
and 14 volts or 7.0 volts, according to
the flasher rating, applied to the input
terminals of the standard test circuit.
S14.9.3.6.2.3 The test cycle consists
of 15 seconds on followed by 15
seconds off for a total time of 200 hours
in an ambient temperature of 75° ± 10°
F.
S14.9.3.6.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
durability test are considered to have
been met if, after completion, 17 of 20
samples comply with the performance
requirements of the starting time,
voltage drop, and flash rate and percent
of current ‘‘on’’ time tests (limited to the
12.8 volts or 6.4 volts and 75° ± 10° F
test condition only) when tested in the
standard test circuit with design load
and 12.8 volts (or 6.4 volts) applied to
the bulbs.
S14.9.3.7 Vehicular hazard warning
signal flasher starting time test.
S14.9.3.7.1 Samples. Twenty sample
flashers chosen from random from fifty
representative samples are subjected to
a starting time test using the standard
test circuit.
S14.9.3.7.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.7.2.1 The test is conducted
test in an ambient temperature of 75° ±
10° F with the minimum and maximum
load connected and the power source
for the test circuit adjusted to apply
design voltage at the bulbs.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68300
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.9.3.7.2.2 The time measurement
starts when the voltage is initially
applied.
S14.9.3.7.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
starting time test are considered to have
been met if 17 of 20 samples comply
with the following:
(a) A flasher having normally closed
contacts must open (turn off) within 1.5
seconds after the voltage is applied, or
(b) A flasher having normally open
contacts must complete the first cycle
(close the contacts and then open the
contacts) within 1.5 seconds after the
voltage is applied.
S14.9.3.8 Vehicular hazard warning
signal flasher voltage drop test.
S14.9.3.8.1 Samples. The same
twenty sample flashers used in the
starting time test are subjected to a
voltage drop test using the standard test
circuit.
S14.9.3.8.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.8.2.1 The test is conducted
in an ambient temperature of 75° ± 10°
F with the maximum design load
connected and the power source for the
test circuit adjusted to apply design
voltage at the bulbs.
S14.9.3.8.2.2 The voltage drop is
measured between the input and load
terminals of the flasher during the ‘‘on’’
period after the flashers have completed
at least five consecutive cycles.
S14.9.3.8.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
voltage drop test are considered to have
been met if 17 of 20 samples comply
with the lowest voltage drop across any
flasher must not exceed 0.8 volt.
S14.9.3.9 Vehicular hazard warning
signal flasher flash rate and percent
‘‘on’’ time test.
S14.9.3.9.1 Samples. The same
twenty sample flashers used in the
voltage drop test are subjected to a flash
rate and percent of current ‘‘on’’ time
test.
S14.9.3.9.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.9.2.1 The test is conducted
using the standard test circuit by and
applying loads of from two signal lamps
to the maximum design loading
including pilot indicator.
S14.9.3.9.2.2 Compliance is
determined using the following
combinations of ambient temperature
and bulb voltage:
(a) 12.8 volts (or 6.4 volts) and 75° ±
10° F,
(b) 11.0 volts (or 5.5 volts) and 125°
± 5° F,
(c) 11.0 volts (or 5.5 volts) and 0° ±
5° F,
(d) 13.0 volts (or 6.5 volts) and 125°
± 5° F, and
(e) 13.0 volts (or 6.5 volts) and 0° ±
5° F.
S14.9.3.9.2.3 Flash rate and percent
current ‘‘on’’ time are measured after the
flashers have completed five
consecutive cycles and are determined
by an average of at least three
consecutive cycles.
S14.9.3.9.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’ time
test are considered to have been met if
17 of 20 samples comply with the
following:
(a) The performance of a normally
closed type flasher must be within the
unshaded portion of the polygon shown
in Figure 2, or
(b) The performance of a normally
open type flasher must be within the
entire rectangle including the shaded
areas shown in Figure 2.
S14.9.3.10 Vehicular hazard
warning signal flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.10.1 Samples. Twenty
sample flashers chosen from random
from the thirty samples not used in the
previous tests are subjected to a
durability test.
S14.9.3.10.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.10.2.1 Conformance of the
samples to the starting time, voltage
drop, and flash rate and percent of
current ‘‘on’’ time tests (limited to the
12.8 volts or 6.4 volts and 75° ± 10° F
test condition only) is established.
S14.9.3.10.2.2 The test is conducted
on each sample with the maximum
design load connected and 13.0 volts (or
6.5 volts) applied to the input terminals
of the standard test circuit.
S14.9.3.10.2.3 The flasher is
subjected to continuous flashing for a
total time of 36 hours in an ambient
temperature of 75° ± 10° F.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Test position
(degrees)
H
H
H
H
H
H
1D
1U
Dim
(cd at 100 ft)
V .................................................................................
2L ...............................................................................
4L ...............................................................................
6L ...............................................................................
2R ...............................................................................
5R ...............................................................................
V ...............................................................................
V ...............................................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.9.3.10.3 Performance
requirements. The requirements of the
durability test are considered to have
been met if, after completion, 17 of 20
samples comply with the performance
requirements of the starting time,
voltage drop, and flash rate and percent
of current ‘‘on’’ time tests (limited to the
12.8 volts or 6.4 volts and 75° ± 10° F
test condition only) when tested in the
standard test circuit with the power
source adjusted to provide design
voltage to the bulbs and with a
minimum load of two signal lamp bulbs
and the maximum design load,
including pilot lamps, as specified by
the manufacturer at an ambient
temperature of 75° ± 10° F.
S14.9.3.11 Semiautomatic headlamp
beam switching device tests.
S14.9.3.11.1 Test conditions. All
tests are conducted with 13 volts input
to the device unless otherwise specified.
S14.9.3.11.2 Sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.2.1 Samples. The sample
device is mounted in and operated in
the laboratory in the same environment
as that encountered on the vehicle, that
is tinted glass, grille work, etc.
S14.9.3.11.2.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.1 The sample device
is adjusted for sensitivity in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. It
is exposed to a light source capable of
providing a variable intensity of at least
1.5 cd to 150 cd at 100 feet from the
sample device.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.2 The device is
switched to the lower beam mode in
accordance with the ‘‘dim’’ limits
specified and switched back to the
upper beam mode in accordance with
the ‘‘hold’’ limits specified for the
specified test positions.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.3 To provide more
complete information on sensitivity
throughout the required vertical and
horizontal angles, a set of constant
footcandle curves are made at ‘‘dim’’
sensitivities of 17, 25, and 100 cd at 100
ft.
S14.9.3.11.2.3 Performance
requirements.
S14.9.3.11.2.3.1 Operating limits.
PO 00000
Hold
(cd at 100 ft)
Adjust to 15 .........................................................................
25 max ................................................................................
40 max ................................................................................
75 max ................................................................................
25 max .................................................................................
150 max to 40 min ..............................................................
30 max .................................................................................
30 max .................................................................................
Frm 00068
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
min to 3.75 max.
min.
min.
min.
min.
min.
min.
min.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.9.3.11.2.3.2 There must be no
sensitivity voids shown in the constant
footcandle curves within the area
limited by the test positions.
S14.9.3.11.3 Voltage regulation test.
S14.9.3.11.3.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.3.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.3.1.2 The ‘‘dim’’
sensitivity is measured at the H–V test
position at 11 volts input to the device
and at 15 volts input to the device.
S14.9.3.11.3.2 Performance
requirements. The device must switch
to the lower beam mode at between 8
(cd at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft) with
the input voltage at 11 volts and at 15
volts.
S14.9.3.11.4 Manual override test.
S14.9.3.11.4.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.2 The device is
exposed to a test light that causes it to
switch to the lower beam mode.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.3 The manufacturer’s
instructions are followed to cause the
device to override the test light and
switch to upper beam.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.4 In a similar manner,
the test light is extinguished to cause
the device to switch to the upper beam
mode.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.5 Again the
manufacturer’s instructions are followed
to cause the device to switch to lower
beam.
S14.9.3.11.4.2 Performance
requirements. The device, when
operated in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions, must
switch to the opposite beam with the
test light energized and with the test
light extinguished.
S14.9.3.11.5 Warmup test.
S14.9.3.11.5.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.5.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test and
the test lamp extinguished.
S14.9.3.11.5.1.2 The test lamp will
then be energized at a level of 25 (cd at
100 ft) at the H–V position of the device
and the time for the device to switch to
lower beam is measured.
S14.9.3.11.5.2 Performance
requirements. If the warmup time of the
device exceeds 10 seconds it shall
maintain the headlamps on lower beam
during warmup.
S14.9.3.11.6 Temperature test.
S14.9.3.11.6.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.1 The sample device
is exposed for 1 hour in a temperature
corresponding to that at the device
mounting location.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.2 For a device
mounted in the passenger compartment
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
or the engine compartment, the
temperature is 210° F, mounted
elsewhere, the temperature is 150° F.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.3 After this exposure
the H–V ‘‘dim’’ sensitivity of the sample
device is measured over the temperature
range of ¥30° F to +100° F.
S14.9.3.11.6.2 Performance
requirements. The device must switch
to the lower beam mode between 8 (cd
at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft) over the
temperature range of ¥30° F to +100° F.
S14.9.3.11.7 Dust test.
S14.9.3.11.7.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.2 The device is then
subjected to the dust test of S14.5.3.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.3 At the conclusion of
the dust exposure the lens of the device
must be wiped clean and the H–V
‘‘dim’’ sensitivity of the sample device
is measured.
S14.9.3.11.7.2 Performance
requirements. The device must switch
to the lower beam mode between 8 (cd
at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft).
S14.9.3.11.8 Corrosion test.
S14.9.3.11.8.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.2 All system
components located outside the
passenger compartment must be
subjected to the corrosion test of S14.5.4
with the device not operating.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.3 Water is not
permitted to accumulate on any
connector socket.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.4 At the conclusion of
the test the H–V ‘‘dim’’ sensitivity of the
sample device must be measured.
S14.9.3.11.8.2 Performance
requirements. The sample device must
switch to the lower beam mode between
8 (cd at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft).
S14.9.3.11.9 Vibration test.
S14.9.3.11.9.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test and
the mechanical aim of the photounit
determined.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.2 The sample device
must be mounted in proper vehicle
position and subjected to vibration of 5g
constant acceleration for 1⁄2 hour in each
of three directions: vertical; horizontal
and parallel to the vehicle longitudinal
axis; and horizontal and normal to the
vehicle longitudinal axis.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.3 The vibration
frequency must be varied from 30 to 200
and back to 30 cycles per second over
a period of approximately 1 minute.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.4 The device must be
operating during the test.
PO 00000
Frm 00069
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68301
S14.9.3.11.9.1.5 At the conclusion of
the test the H–V ‘‘dim’’ sensitivity of the
sample device and the mechanical aim
of the photounit must be measured.
S14.9.3.11.9.2 Performance
requirements.
S14.9.3.11.9.2.1 The sample device
must switch to the lower beam mode
between 8 (cd at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at
100 ft).
S14.9.3.11.9.2.2 The mechanical aim
of the device photounit must not have
changed by more than 0.25° from the
initial value.
S14.9.3.11.10 Sunlight test.
S14.9.3.11.10.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.10.1.1 The sample device
must be exposed for 1 hour in bright
noonday sunlight (5000 fc minimum
illumination with a clear sky) with the
photounit aimed as it would be in
service and facing an unobstructed
portion of the horizon in the direction
of the sun.
S14.9.3.11.10.1.2 The device must
then be rested for 1 hour in normal
room light at room temperature and the
H–V ‘‘dim’’ sensitivity of the sample
device is measured.
S14.9.3.11.10.2 Performance
requirements. The sample device must
switch to the lower beam mode between
8 (cd at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft).
S14.9.3.11.11 Durability test.
S14.9.3.11.11.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.2 The device
photounit operated at a 13.0 input
voltage on a cycle of 90 minutes on and
30 minutes off must be activated by a 60
cd light source at 100 ft, or equivalent,
which is cycled on and off 4 times per
minute for a period of 200 hours.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.3 The device must
then rest for 2 hours in a lighted area of
50 to 150 fc after which the H–V ‘‘dim’’
sensitivity must be measured.
S14.9.3.11.11.2 Performance
requirements. The sample device must
switch to the lower beam mode between
8 (cd at 100 ft) and 25 (cd at 100 ft).
S14.9.3.11.12 Return to upper beam
test.
S14.9.3.11.12.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.12.1.1 The sensitivity of
the sample device is adjusted so that it
complies with the sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.12.1.2 The lens of the
photounit must be exposed to light of
100 fc for 10 seconds.
S14.9.3.11.12.2 Performance
requirements. The sample device must
switch to upper beam mode within 2
seconds after the 100 fc light is
extinguished.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68302
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE I.–a—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting
location
Mounting height
Device activation
All Passenger Cars, Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Trucks, and Buses
Lower Beam Headlamps
White, of a headlighting
system listed in Table
II.
On the front, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
Upper Beam Headlamps
White, of a headlighting
system listed in Table
II.
Turn Signal Lamps ........
2 Amber ........................
On the front, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
At or near the front, at
the same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
2 Amber or red Truck
tractor exception, see
S6.1.1.3.
2 Red ............................
Stop Lamps ....................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Taillamps ........................
2 Red ............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
Frm 00070
Fmt 4701
Not less than 55.9 cm
nor more than 137.2
cm.
The wiring harness or
connector assembly
of each headlighting
system must be designed so that only
those light sources intended for meeting
lower beam
photometrics are energized when the
beam selector switch
is in the lower beam
position, and that only
those light sources intended for meeting
upper beam
photometrics are energized when the
beam selector switch
is in the upper beam
position, except for
certain systems listed
in Table II.
Steady burning, except
that may be flashed
for signaling purposes.
Not less than 55.9 cm
nor more than 137.2
cm.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 83
inches.
Flash when the turn signal flasher is
actuated by the turn signal operating unit.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 72
inches.
Steady burning. Must be activated
when the headlamps are activated
in a steady burning state or the
parking lamps on passenger cars
and MPVs, trucks, and buses less
than 80 inches in overall width are
activated.
May be activated when the
headlamps are activated at less
than full intensity as Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 72
inches.
Steady burning. Must be activated
upon application of the service
brakes. When optically combined
with a turn signal lamp, the circuit
must be such that the stop signal
cannot be activated if the turn signal lamp is flashing.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68303
TABLE I.–a—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting
location
Mounting height
Device activation
May also be activated by a device
designed to retard the motion of
the vehicle.
Side Marker Lamps .......
On each side as far to
the front as practicable.
2 Red (not required on
truck tractor).
Reflex Reflectors ...........
2 Amber
On each side as far to
the rear as practicable.
2 Amber ........................
On each side as far to
the front as practicable.
2 Red (not required on
truck tractor).
2 Red ............................
Backup Lamp .................
1 White. Additional
lamps permitted to
meet requirements.
License Plate Lamp .......
1 White. Additional
lamps permitted to
meet requirements.
Not less than 15 inches.
Steady burning except may be
flashed for signaling purposes.
Must be activated when the
headlamps are activated in a
steady burning state or the parking lamps on passenger cars and
MPVs, trucks, and buses less
than 80 inches in overall width are
activated.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 60
inches.
Not applicable.
On each side as far to
the rear as practicable.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
On a truck tractor may
be mounted on the
back of the cab not
less than 4 inches
above the height of
the rear tires.
On the rear.
No requirement.
On the rear to illuminate
license plate from top
or sides.
No requirement.
Steady burning.
Must be activated when the ignition
switch is energized and reverse
gear is engaged.
Must not be energized when the vehicle is in forward motion.
Steady burning.
Must be activated when the
headlamps are activated in a
steady burning state or when the
parking lamps on passenger cars
and MPVs, trucks, and buses less
than 80 inches in overall width are
activated.
Additional Lamps Required on All Passenger Cars, and on Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Trucks, and Buses, Less Than
2032 MM in Overall Width
Parking lamps ................
2 Amber or white.
On the front, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 72
inches.
Steady burning. Must be activated
when the headlamps are activated
in a steady burning state.
Additional Lamp(s) Required on All Passenger Cars, and on Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Trucks, and Buses, Less Than
2032 MM in Overall Width and With a GVWR of 10,000 LBS or Less
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
High mounted stop lamp
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1 Red, or 2 red where
exceptions apply. See
Section 6.1.1.2.
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
On the rear including
glazing, with the lamp
center on the vertical
centerline as viewed
from the rear.
Frm 00071
Fmt 4701
Not less than 34 inches
except for passenger
cars. See Section
6.1.4.1.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
Steady burning. Must only be activated upon application of the service brakes or by a device designed to retard the motion of the
vehicle.
04DER2
68304
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE I.–a—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting
location
Mounting height
Device activation
Additional Lamps and Reflective Devices Required on All Passenger Cars, Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Trucks, and Buses,
30 Feet or Longer
Intermediate side marker
lamps.
2 Amber ........................
On each side located at
or near the midpoint
between the front and
rear side marker
lamps.
Not less than 15 inches.
Intermediate side reflex
reflectors.
2 Amber ........................
On each side located at
or near the midpoint
between the front and
rear side reflex reflectors.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 60
inches.
Steady burning except may be
flashed for signaling purposes.
Must be activated when the
headlamps are activated in a
steady burning state or when the
parking lamps on passenger cars
and MPVs, trucks, and buses less
than 80 inches in overall width are
activated.
Not applicable.
Additional Lamps Required on All Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Truck, and Buses, 2032 MM or More in Overall Width
Clearance lamps ............
2 Amber ........................
.......................................
2 Red (not required on
truck tractor).
On the front to indicate
the overall width of
the vehicle, or width
of cab on truck tractor, at the same
height, symmetrically
about the vertical centerline.
May be located at a location other than the
front if necessary to
indicate the overall
width of the vehicle,
or for protection from
damage during normal operation of the
vehicle.
On the rear to indicate
the overall width of
the vehicle, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline.
May be located at a location other than the
rear if necessary to
indicate the overall
width of the vehicle,
or for protection from
damage during normal operation of the
vehicle.
As near the top as practicable.
Steady burning.
As near the top as practicable, except where
the rear identification
lamps are mounted at
the extreme height of
the vehicle.
Practicability of locating
lamps on the vehicle
header is presumed
when the header extends at least 25 mm
(1 inch) above the
rear doors.
Steady burning.
Additional Lamps Required on All Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Truck, and Buses, 2032 MM or More in Overall Width
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Identification lamps ........
VerDate Aug<31>2005
3 Amber ........................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
On the front, at the
same height, as close
as practicable to the
vertical centerline,
with lamp centers
spaced not less than
6 inches or more than
12 inches apart.
Frm 00072
Fmt 4701
As near the top of the
vehicle or top of the
cab as practicable.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
Steady burning.
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68305
TABLE I.–a—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
3 Red (not required on
truck tractor).
Mounting
location
Mounting height
On the rear, at the
same height, as close
as practicable to the
vertical centerline,
with lamp centers
spaced not less than
6 inches or more than
12 inches apart.
As near the top as practicable. Practicability
of locating lamps on
the vehicle header is
presumed when the
header extends at
least 25 mm (1 inch)
above the rear doors.
Device activation
Steady burning.
Additional Lamps Required on All School Buses Except Multifunction School Activity Buses
Flashing alternately between 60 to
120 cycles per minute, with an activation period sufficient to allow
the lamp to reach full brightness,
when actuated by a manual
switch.
Amber lamps, when installed, may
only be activated by manual or
foot operation, and must be automatically deactivated and the red
lamps must be automatically activated when the bus entrance door
is opened.
2 Red plus 2 amber op- On the rear cab as far
As high as practicable
Flashing alternately between 60 to
tional.
apart as practicable,
but at least above the
120 cycles per minute, with an acbut in no case shall
top of any side wintivation period sufficient to allow
the spacing between
dow opening.
the lamp to reach full brightness,
lamps be less than 40
when actuated by a manual
inches.
switch.
Amber lamps, when inAmber lamps, when installed, may
stalled, at the same
only be activated by manual or
height as and just infoot operation, and must be autoboard of the red lamp.
matically deactivated and the red
lamps must be automatically activated when the bus entrance door
is opened.
Daytime Running Lamps Permitted But Not Required on Passenger Cars, Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles (MPV), Trucks, and Buses
2 Red plus 2 amber optional.
On the front of the cab
As high as practicable
as far apart as pracbut at least above the
ticable, but in no case
windshield.
shall the spacing between lamps be less
than 40 inches.
Amber lamps, when installed, at the same
height as and just inboard of the red lamp..
Daytime running lamp
(DRL).
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Signal warning lamps ....
2 identically colored either white, white to
yellow, white to selective yellow, selective
yellow, or yellow.
On the front, symmetrically disposed about
the vertical centerline
if not a pair of lamps
required by this standard or if not optically
combined with a pair
of lamps required by
this standard.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00073
Fmt 4701
Not more than 1.067
meters above the
road surface if not a
pair of lamps required
by this standard or if
not optically combined
with a pair of lamps
required by this standard.
See S7.10.13(b) for additional height limitation.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
Steady burning. Automatically activated as determined by the vehicle manufacturer and automatically
deactivated
when
the
headlamp control is in any ‘‘on’’
position.
Each DRL optically combined with a
turn signal lamp must be automatically deactivated as a DRL
when the turn signal lamp or hazard warning lamp is activated, and
automatically reactivated as a
DRL when the turn signal lamp or
hazard warning lamp is deactivated.
See S7.10.10.1(c) for additional activation requirements when mounted close to, or combined with, a
turn signal lamp.
04DER2
68306
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE I–b.—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting location
Mounting height
Device activation
All Trailers
2 Red or amber ............
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 83
inches.
Flash when the turn signal flasher is
actuated by the turn signal operating unit.
Taillamps ........................
2 Red or 1 red on trailers less than 30
inches wide.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable. When a single
lamp is installed it
must be mounted at
or near the vertical
centerline.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 72
inches.
Steady burning.
Stop Lamps ....................
2 Red, or 1 red on trailers less than 30
inches wide.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable. When a single
lamp is installed it
must be mounted at
or near the vertical
centerline.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 72
inches.
Steady burning. Must be activated
upon application of the service
brakes.
When optically combined with a turn
signal lamp, the circuit must be
such that the stop signal cannot
be activated if the turn signal lamp
is flashing.
May also be activated by a device
designed to retard the motion of
the vehicle.
Side Marker Lamps .......
2 Amber. None required
on trailers less than
1829 mm [6 ft] in
overall length including the trailer tongue.
2 Red ............................
On each side as far to
the front as practicable exclusive of
the trailer tongue.
Not less than 15 inches.
Steady burning except may be
flashed for signaling purposes.
Reflex Reflectors. A trailer equipped with a
conspicuity treatment
in conformance with
S8.2 of this standard
need not be equipped
with reflex reflectors if
the conspicuity material is placed at the locations of the required
reflex reflectors.
2 Amber. None required
on trailers less than
1829 mm [6 ft] in
overall length including the trailer tongue.
2 Red ............................
On each side as far to
the front as practicable exclusive of
the trailer tongue.
License Plate Lamp .......
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Turn Signal Lamps ........
1 White ..........................
Additional lamps permitted to meet requirements.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
2 Red or 1 red on trailers less than 30
inches wide
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
On each side as far to
Not less than 15 inches.
the rear as practicable.
Not more than 60
inches on trailers
2032 mm or more in
overall width.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 60
inches.
Not applicable.
No requirement .............
Steady burning.
On each side as far to
the rear as practicable.
On the rear, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, as
far apart as practicable.
When a single reflector
is installed it must be
mounted at or near
the vertical centerline.
On the rear to illuminate
license plate from top
or sides.
Frm 00074
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68307
TABLE I–b.—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting location
Mounting height
Device activation
Additional Lamps and Reflective Devices Required on all Trailers 30 Feet or Longer
Intermediate side marker
lamps.
2 Amber ........................
On each side located at
or near the midpoint
between the front and
rear side marker
lamps.
Not less than 15 inches
Steady burning except may be
flashed for signaling purposes.
Intermediate side reflex
reflectors. A trailer
equipped with a conspicuity treatment in
conformance with S8.2
of this standard need
not be equipped with
reflex reflectors if the
conspicuity material is
placed at the locations
of the required reflex
reflectors.
2 Amber ........................
On each side located at
or near the midpoint
between the front and
rear side reflex reflectors.
Not less than 15 inches,
nor more than 60
inches.
Not applicable.
Additional Lamps Required on all Trailers 2032 MM or More in Overall Width
Clearance lamps ............
2 Amber ........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
2 Red ............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
On the front to indicate
the overall width of
the vehicle, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline.
May be located at a location other than the
front if necessary to
indicate the overall
width of the vehicle,
or for protection from
damage during normal operation of the
vehicle.
On the rear to indicate
the overall width of
the vehicle, at the
same height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline.
May be located at a location other than the
rear if necessary to
indicate the overall
width of the vehicle,
or for protection from
damage during normal operation of the
vehicle.
Frm 00075
Fmt 4701
As near the top as practicable.
Steady burning.
As near the top as practicable, except where
the rear identification
lamps are mounted at
the extreme height of
the vehicle. Practicability of locating lamps
on the vehicle header
is presumed when the
header extends at
least 25 mm (1 inch)
above the rear doors.
Steady burning.
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68308
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE I–b.—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting height
2 Amber to front and
red to rear.
Identification lamps ........
Mounting location
Device activation
On a boat trailer the requirement for front
and rear clearance
lamps may be met by
installation at or near
the midpoint on each
side of a dual facing
lamp so as to indicate
the extreme width.
May be located at a
location other than the
front and the rear if
necessary to indicate
the overall width of
the vehicle, or for protection from damage
during normal operation of the vehicle.
As near the top as practicable.
Steady burning.
3 Red ............................
On the rear, at the
same height, as close
as practicable to the
vertical centerline,
with lamp centers
spaced not less than
6 inches or more than
12 inches apart.
As near the top as practicable. Practicability
of locating lamps on
the vehicle header is
presumed when the
header extends at
least 25 mm (1 inch)
above the rear doors.
Steady burning.
TABLE I–c.—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting location
Mounting height
Device activation
The wiring harness or connector
assembly of each headlighting
system must be designed so
that only those light sources intended for meeting lower beam
photometrics are energized
when the beam selector switch
is in the lower beam position,
and that only those light
sources intended for meeting
upper beam photometrics are
energized when the beam selector switch is in the upper
beam position, except for certain systems listed in Table II.
Steady burning, except that may
be flashed for signaling purposes.
The upper beam or the lower
beam, but not both, may be
wired to modulate from a higher intensity to a lower intensity
in accordance with S10.17.5.
All Motorcycles
White, of a
headlighting system
listed in S10.17.
On the front, at the same height,
symmetrically about the vertical
centerline, as far apart as practicable. See additional requirements
in
S6.1.4.2.1.3,
S10.17.1.1, S10.17.1.2, and
S10.17.1.3.
Not less than 55.9 cm
nor more than 137.2
cm
Upper Beam
Headlamps.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Lower Beam
Headlamps.
White, of a
headlighting system
listed in S10.17.
On the front, at the same height,
symmetrically about the vertical
centerline, as far apart as practicable.
Not less than 55.9 cm
nor more than 137.2
cm.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00076
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68309
TABLE I–c.—REQUIRED LAMPS AND REFLECTIVE DEVICES—Continued
Lighting device
Number and color
Mounting location
Turn Signal Lamps ....
2 Amber. None required on a motor
driven cycle whose
speed attainable in
1 mile is 30 mph or
less.
At or near the front, at the same
height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, and having
a minimum horizontal separation distance (centerline of
lamps) of 16 inches. Minimum
edge to edge separation distance between a turn signal
lamp and headlamp is 4
inches.
At or near the rear, at the same
height, symmetrically about the
vertical centerline, and having
a minimum horizontal separation distance (centerline to centerline of lamps) of 9 inches.
Minimum edge to edge separation distance the turn signal
lamp and the taillamp or stop
lamp is 4 inches, when a single
stop and taillamp is installed on
the vertical centerline and the
turn signal lamps are red.
Not less than 15
inches, nor more
than 83 inches.
Flash when the turn signal flasher
is actuated by the turn signal
operating unit.
2 Amber or red. None
required on a motor
driven cycle whose
speed attainable in
1 mile is 30 mph or
less.
Mounting height
Device activation
Taillamps ....................
1 Red .........................
On the rear, on the vertical centerline except that if two are
used, they must be symmetrically disposed about the
vertical centerline.
Not less than 15
inches, nor more
than 72 inches.
Steady burning.
Must be activated when the
headlamps are activated in a
steady burning state.
Stop Lamps ................
1 Red .........................
On the rear, on the vertical centerline except that if two are
used, they must be symmetrically disposed about the
vertical centerline.
Not less than 15
inches, nor more
than 72 inches.
Reflex Reflectors .......
2 Amber .....................
On each side as far to the front
as practicable.
Not less than 15
inches, nor more
than 60 inches.
Steady burning.
Must be activated upon application of the service brakes.
When optically combined with a
turn signal lamp, the circuit
must be such that the stop signal cannot be activated if the
turn signal lamp is flashing.
May also be activated by a device designed to retard the motion of the vehicle.
Not applicable.
2 Red .........................
On each side as far to the rear
as practicable.
On the rear, on the vertical centerline except that, if two are
used on the rear, they must be
symmetrically disposed about
the vertical centerline.
On the rear to illuminate license
plate.
1 Red .........................
License Plate Lamp ...
1 White. Additional
lamps permitted to
meet requirements.
No requirement.
Steady burning. Must be activated when the headlamps are
activated in a steady burning
state.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4910–59–P
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00077
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00078
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.000
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68310
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68311
TABLE II–b.—HEADLIGHTING SYSTEMS—COMBINATION
Photometry requirements reference
System designation
Table XVIII
System composition
Tables XIX–a, XIX–b, XIX–c
Upper beam mechanical and visual aim
2 LAMP SYSTEM ........
4 LAMP SYSTEM ........
A
COMBINATION OF TWO DIFFERENT
HEADLAMPS CHOSEN FROM; TYPE F, AN
INTEGRAL BEAM HEADLAMP, OR A REPLACEABLE BULB HEADLAMP.
ANY COMBINATION OF FOUR DIFFERENT
HEADLAMPS CHOSEN FROM; TYPE F, AN
INTEGRAL BEAM HEADLAMP (3), OR A REPLACEABLE BULB HEADLAMP.
Lower beam mech aim
Lower beam visual aim
UB2 (1) ..........................
LB2M (1) .......................
LB2V (1)
UB1 ..............................
LB1M (2) .......................
LB1V (2)
(1) Headlamps designed to conform to the photometry requirements of UB2 and LB2M or LB2V may allow the lower beam light source(s) to remain activated when an upper beam light source is activated if the lower beam light source(s) contribute to upper beam photometric compliance.
(2) Lower beams may remain activated when upper beams are activated.
(3) Beam contributor photometric allocation formula of S14.2.5.9 may apply.
TABLE II–c.—HEADLIGHTING SYSTEMS—INTEGRAL BEAMS
Photometry requirements reference
System designation
Table XVIII
Beam composition
Tables XIX–a, XIX–b, XIX–c
Upper beam mechanical and visual aim
Lower beam mech aim
Lower beam visual aim
LB2V (1) OR
LB3V
N.A.
LB2V
N.A.
LB1V (2)
N.A.
LB4V (3)
LB1V (2)(4)
2 LAMP SYSTEM ........
UPPER BEAM & LOWER BEAM ......................
UB2 (1) OR UB3 ...........
LB2M (1) OR LB3M ......
4 LAMP SYSTEM ........
UPPER BEAM ...................................................
UPPER BEAM & LOWER BEAM ......................
UPPER BEAM (U) .............................................
LOWER BEAM (L) .............................................
UPPER BEAM ...................................................
LOWER BEAM ..................................................
UPPER BEAM & LOWER BEAM ......................
UB4 ..............................
UB5 ..............................
UB1 ..............................
N.A.(2) ..........................
UB6 ..............................
N.A.(3) ..........................
UB1 (4) ..........................
N.A. ..............................
LB4M ...........................
N.A. ..............................
LB1M (2) .......................
N.A. ..............................
LB5M (3) .......................
LB1M (2)(4) ....................
4 LAMP SYSTEM ........
4 LAMP SYSTEM ........
BEAM CONTRIBUTOR
(1) Headlamps designed to conform to the photometry requirements of UB2 and LB2M or LB2V may allow the lower beam light source(s) to remain activated when an upper beam light source is activated if the lower beam light source(s) contribute to upper beam photometric compliance.
(2) Lower beams may remain activated when upper beams are activated.
(3) Lower beams must remain activated when upper beams are activated.
(4) Beam contributor photometric allocation formula of S14.2.5.9 applies.
TABLE II–d.—HEADLIGHTING SYSTEMS—REPLACEABLE BULB
Photometry requirements reference
System designation
Table XVIII
Light source composition
Tables XIX–a, XIX–b, XIX–c
Upper beam mechanical and visual aim
2 LAMP SYSTEM ......
2 LAMP SYSTEM ......
4 LAMP SYSTEM ......
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
4 LAMP SYSTEM ......
ANY DUAL FILAMENT TYPE, OTHER
THAN HB2, USED ALONE OR WITH ANOTHER DUAL FILAMENT TYPE OTHER
THAN HB2.
HB2 OR ANY SINGLE FILAMENT TYPE
USED ALONE OR WITH ANY OTHER
SINGLE OR DUAL FILAMENT TYPE.
ANY DUAL FILAMENT TYPE, OTHER
THAN HB2, USED ALONE OR WITH ANOTHER DUAL FILAMENT TYPE OTHER
THAN HB2.
HB2 OR ANY SINGLE FILAMENT TYPE
USED ALONE OR WITH ANY OTHER
SINGLE OR DUAL FILAMENT TYPE. (U
& L).
Lower beam mech
aim
Lower beam visual
aim
UB2 (1) OR UB3 .........
LB2M (1) OR LB3M ....
LB2V (1) OR LB3V
UB2 (1) OR UB3 .........
LB2M (1) ......................
LB2V (1)
UB1 (2) OR UB3 .........
LB1M (2) OR LB3M ....
LB1V (2) OR LB3V
UB1 (2) ........................
LB1M (2) ......................
LB1V (2)
(1) Headlamps designed to conform to the photometry requirements of UB2 and LB2M or LB2V may allow the lower beam light source(s) to remain activated when an upper beam light source is activated if the lower beam light source(s) contribute to upper beam photometric compliance.
(2) Lower beams may remain activated when upper beams are activated.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00079
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68312
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE III.—MARKING REQUIREMENTS LOCATION
Lamp, reflective device, or other component
Marking
Marking location
Headlamps, Beam Contributors, or Headlamp
Replaceable Lens.
‘‘DOT’’ ...............................................................
Optical axis marking .........................................
Manufacturer name and/or trademark .............
Voltage .............................................................
Part number or trade number ..........................
Manufacturer identification ...............................
Headlamp identification ....................................
‘‘U’’ or ‘‘L’’ (4 lamp system) ..............................
Replaceable bulb type .....................................
‘‘Sealed Beam’’ ................................................
Type designation ..............................................
‘‘U’’ or ‘‘L’’ (4 lamp system) ..............................
‘‘motorcycle’’ .....................................................
‘‘VOR’’ or ‘‘VOL’’ or ‘‘VO’’ ................................
Aim pad location & ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘V’’ .........................
Aiming scale(s) .................................................
‘‘DOT’’ ...............................................................
Replaceable light source designation ..............
Manufacturer name and/or trademark .............
Manufacturer name or logo ..............................
Part number.
Light source identification.
Rated laboratory life.
High voltage warning.
Output in watts and volts.
‘‘DOT’’.
‘‘DOT’’ ...............................................................
Lens .........................................
See requirement ......................
Lens .........................................
See requirement ......................
See requirement ......................
Lens .........................................
S6.5.1
S10.18.5
S6.5.3
S6.5.3
S6.5.3
S13.3
Lens .........................................
Lens .........................................
Lens .........................................
S10.15.4
S6.5.4.3
S6.5.3.3
Lens .........................................
Lens .........................................
Lens .........................................
Lens .........................................
See requirement ......................
See requirement ......................
See requirement.
See requirement.
See requirement ......................
S10.14.4
S10.17.2
S10.18.9.6
S10.18.7.1
S10.18.8
S11.1
See requirement ......................
S6.5.1.2
‘‘DRL’’ ...............................................................
‘‘DOT–C’’ ..........................................................
‘‘DOT–C2’’ or ‘‘DOT–C3’’ or ‘‘DOT–C4’’ ..........
Lens .........................................
Exposed surface .....................
Exposed surface .....................
S6.5.2
S8.2.2.1
S8.2.1.3
Headlamp Replaceable Lens ............................
Replaceable Bulb Headlamps ...........................
Sealed Beam Headlamps .................................
Integral Beam Headlamps .................................
Motorcycle Headlamps ......................................
Visually/Optically Aimed Headlamps .................
Externally Aimed Headlamps ............................
Vehicle Headlamp Aiming Devices (VHAD) .....
(Headlamp) Replaceable Light Sources ...........
Replaceable Light Source Ballasts ...................
Lamps (Other Than Headlamps), Reflective
Devices, and Associated Equipment.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ........................
Conspicuity Reflex Reflectors ...........................
Retroreflective Sheeting ....................................
Requirement
S11.2
TABLE IV–a.—EFFECTIVE PROJECTED LUMINOUS LENS AREA REQUIREMENTS
Passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, trailers, and buses of less than 2032
MM in overall width—Minimum effective projected
luminous lens area (sq mm)
Multiple compartment lamp or
multiple lamps
Lighting device
Single compartment lamp
Front turn signal lamp ..........................................................
Rear turn signal lamp ..........................................................
Stop lamp .............................................................................
Each compartment or lamp
Combined
compartments
or lamps
—
2200
2200
Multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks,
trailers, and
buses 2032
MM or more in
overall width—
Minimum effective projected luminous lens area
each lamp (sq
mm)
Motorcycles—
Minimum effective projected luminous lens area
(sq mm)
7500
7500
7500
2258
2258
(1)5000
2200
5000
5000
2200
5000
5000
(1) A motor driven cycle whose speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or less may be equipped with a stop lamp whose minimum effective projected luminous lens area is not less than 2258 sq mm.
TABLE IV–b.—EFFECTIVE PROJECTED LUMINOUS LENS AREA REQUIREMENTS
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Lighting device
Passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, trucks,
and buses of less than 2032
MM in overall width and with a
GVWR of 10,000 lbs or less
using a single lamp—Minimum
effective projected luminous
lens area (sq mm)
Multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses of less
than 2032 MM in overall width
and with a GVWR of 10,000
lbs or less using dual lamps of
identical size and shape—Minimum effective projected luminous lens area each lamp ( sq
mm)
High-mounted stop lamp .....................................................................................
2903
1452
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00080
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68313
TABLE IV–c.—EFFECTIVE PROJECTED LUMINOUS LENS AREA REQUIREMENTS
Lighting device
School bus—Minimum effective projected luminous lens
area each lamp (sq mm)
School bus signal lamp .............................................................................................................................................
12,258
TABLE V–a.—VISIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLED LIGHTING DEVICES
Lighting device
Required visibility
Backup lamp .............................................................................
Lamps must be mounted so that the optical center of at least one lamp is visible
from any eye point elevation from at least 1828 mm to 610 mm above the horizontal plane on which the vehicle is standing; and from any position in the
area, rearward of a vertical plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, 914 mm to the rear of the vehicle and extending 914 mm beyond each
side of the vehicle.
Signal must be visible to the rear through a horizontal angle from 45° to the left
to 45° to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. (Single lamp or two
lamps together where required by S6.1.1.2 of this standard)
Signal of front lamps to the front and rear lamps to the rear must be unobstructed within area bounded by 5° up to 10° down and 30° left to 30° right.
High-mounted stop lamp ..........................................................
School bus signal lamp ............................................................
TABLE V–b.—VISIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLED LIGHTING DEVICES—LENS AREA VISIBILITY OPTION
Corner points (1) (2)
Lighting device
Turn signal lamp (3) ........................
Stop lamp .......................................
Taillamp .........................................
Parking lamp ..................................
15°UP–45° IB ...............................
15° DOWN–45° IB ........................
15° UP–45° IB ..............................
15° DOWN–45° IB ........................
15° UP–45° IB ..............................
15° DOWN–45° IB ........................
15° UP–45° IB ..............................
15° DOWN–45° IB ........................
Required visibility
15 UP–45° OB ..............................
15° DOWN—45° OB ....................
15° UP–45° OB ............................
15° DOWN–45° OB ......................
15° UP–45° OB ............................
15° DOWN–45° OB ......................
15° UP–45° OB ............................
15° DOWN–45° OB ......................
Unobstructed minimum effective
projected luminous lens area of
1250 sq mm in any direction
throughout the pattern defined
by the specified corner points.
(1) IB
indicates an inboard direction (toward the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline) and OB indicates an outboard direction.
a lamp is mounted with its axis of reference less than 750 mm above the road surface, the vertical test point angles located below
the horizontal plane subject to visibility requirements may be reduced to 5° down.
(3) Where more than one lamp or optical area is lighted at the front on each side of a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, trailer, or bus, of
2032 mm or more overall width, only one such area need comply.
(2) Where
TABLE V–c.—VISIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLED LIGHTING DEVICES—LUMINOUS INTENSITY VISIBILITY OPTION
Corner points (1) (2)
Lighting device
Turn signal lamp ............................
Stop lamp .......................................
Taillamp (3) .....................................
Parking lamp ..................................
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
UP–45° IB ..............................
DOWN–45° IB ........................
UP–45° IB ..............................
DOWN–45° IB ........................
UP–45° IB ..............................
DOWN–45° IB ........................
UP–45° IB ..............................
DOWN–45° IB ........................
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
15°
Required visibility—Minimum
luminous intensity in any direction
throughout the pattern defined by
the specified corner points.
Candela
UP–80° OB
DOWN–80°
UP–45° OB
DOWN–45°
UP–80° OB
DOWN–80°
UP–80° OB
DOWN–80°
............................
OB.
............................
OB.
............................
OB.
............................
OB.
0.3
0.3
0.05
0.05
(1) IB
indicates an inboard direction (toward the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline) and OB indicates an outboard direction.
a lamp is mounted with its axis of reference less than 750 mm above the road surface, the vertical test point angles located below
the horizontal plane subject to visibility requirements may be reduced to 5° down.
(3) Inboard and outboard corner points are 80° for a single taillamp installed on a motorcycle.
(2) Where
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
TABLE V–d.—VISIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLED LIGHTING DEVICES (LEGACY VISIBILITY ALTERNATIVE)
Lighting device
Required visibility 1
Turn signal lamp:
All passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks,
buses, motorcycles, and trailers of less than 2032 mm overall
width.
Unobstructed minimum effective projected luminous lens area of 1250
sq mm through horizontal angle of H–V to H–45° OB.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00081
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68314
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE V–d.—VISIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLED LIGHTING DEVICES (LEGACY VISIBILITY ALTERNATIVE)—Continued
Required visibility 1
Lighting device
All multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, buses, and trailers of
2032 mm or more overall width.
Stop lamp .................................................................................................
Taillamp ....................................................................................................
(1) IB
Unobstructed minimum effective projected luminous lens area of 1300
sq mm through horizontal angle of H–V to H–45° OB. Where more
than one lamp or optical area is lighted on each side of the vehicle,
only one such area on each side need comply.
Unobstructed minimum effective projected luminous lens area of 1250
sq mm through horizontal angle of H–45° IB to H–45° OB. Where
more than one lamp or optical area is lighted on each side of the vehicle, only one such area on each side need comply.
Unobstructed minimum effective projected luminous lens area of 2 sq
in through horizontal angle of H–45° IB to H–45° OB. Where more
than one lamp or optical area is lighted on each side of the vehicle,
only one such area on each side need comply.
indicates an inboard direction (toward the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline) and OB indicates an outboard direction.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4910–59–P
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00082
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00083
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68315
ER04DE07.001
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00084
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.002
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68316
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00085
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68317
ER04DE07.003
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00086
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.004
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68318
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00087
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68319
ER04DE07.005
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68320
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE X.—SIDE MARKER LAMP PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2)
red lamps
Test point
(degrees)
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2)
amber lamps
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.62
0.62
0.62
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.62
0.62
0.62
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.62
0.62
0.62
10U:
45L (1) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (1) ...........................................................................................................
H:
45L (1) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (1) ...........................................................................................................
10D: (3)
45L (1) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (1) ...........................................................................................................
(1) Where a side marker lamp installed on a motor vehicle less than 30 feet in overall length and less than 80 inches (2 m) in overall width has
the lateral angle nearest the other required side marker lamp on the same side of the vehicle reduced from 45° by design as specified by
S7.4.13.2, the photometric intensity measurement may be met at the lesser angle.
(2) The photometric intensity values between test points must not be less than the lower specified minimum value of the two closest adjacent
test points on a horizontal or vertical line.
(3) Where side marker lamps are mounted with their axis of reference less than 750 mm above the road surface, photometry requirements
below 5° down may be met at 5° down rather than at the specified required downward angle.
TABLE XI.—CLEARANCE AND IDENTIFICATION LAMPS PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2)
red lamps
Test point
(degrees)
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2)
amber lamps
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.62
0.62
0.62
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.62
0.62
0.62
0.25
0.25
0.25
15
0.62
0.62
0.62
10U:
45L (4) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (4) ...........................................................................................................
H:
45L (4) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (4) ...........................................................................................................
10D: (1)
45L (4) ............................................................................................................
V ...................................................................................................................
45R (4) ...........................................................................................................
Maximum photometric intensity (3) (cd) red lamps ..............................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
(1) Where clearance lamps or identification lamps are mounted with their axis of reference less than 750mm above the road surface, photometry requirements below 5° down may be met at 5° down rather than at the specified required downward angle.
(2) The photometric intensity values between test points must not be less than the lower specified minimum value of the two closest adjacent
test points on a horizontal or vertical line.
(3) When optically combined with a stop lamp or turn signal lamp, this maximum applies on or above the horizontal.
(4) Where clearance lamps are installed at locations other than on the front and rear due to the necessity to indicate the overall width of the vehicle, or for protection from damage during normal operation of the vehicle, they need not meet the photometric intensity requirement at any test
point that is 45° inboard.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00088
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00089
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68321
ER04DE07.007
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00090
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.008
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68322
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00091
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68323
ER04DE07.009
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00092
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.010
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68324
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00093
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68325
ER04DE07.011
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68326
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE XVI–a.—REFLEX REFLECTOR PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS
Minimum performance
Observation angle
(degrees)
Red reflectors
Entrance angle
(degrees)
0.2 ..............................................................................
1.5 ..............................................................................
(cd/incident ftc)
0 .......................................
10U ..................................
10D (1) ..............................
20L ...................................
20R ..................................
0 .......................................
10U ..................................
10D (1) ..............................
20L ...................................
20R ..................................
Amber reflectors
(cd/incident ftc)
(mcd/
lux)
4.5
3.0
3.0
1.5
1.5
0.07
0.05
0.05
0.03
0.03
420
280
280
140
140
6
5
5
3
3
11.25
7.5
7.5
3.75
3.75
0.175
0.125
0.125
0.075
0.075
White reflectors
(cd/incident ftc)
(mcd/
lux)
1050
700
700
350
350
15
12.5
12.5
7.5
7.5
18
12
12
6
6
0.28
0.2
0.2
0.12
0.12
(mcd/
lux)
1680
1120
1120
560
560
24
20
20
12
12
(1) Where reflex reflectors are mounted with their axis of reference less than 750 mm above the road surface, photometry requirements below
5° down may be met at 5° down rather than at the required specified downward angle.
TABLE XVI–b.—ADDITIONAL PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSPICUITY REFLEX REFLECTORS
Minimum performance
Observation angle
(degrees)
Entrance angle
(degrees)
0.2 ...............................................................................
0 .......................................
20L TO 20R .....................
30L TO 30R .....................
45L TO 45R .....................
10U TO 10D .....................
Red
(mcd/lux)
White horizontal
orientation
(mcd/lux)
White vertical orientation
(mcd/lux)
300
..............................
300
75
..............................
1250
..............................
1250
300
..............................
1680
560
..............................
..............................
1120
TABLE XVI–c.—RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS
Minimum performance
Entrance
angle
(degrees)
Observation angle
(degrees)
0.2 ....................................................................................................................
0.5 ....................................................................................................................
¥4
30
45
¥4
30
45
Grade dot-C2
Grade dot-C3
Grade dot-C4
White
Red
White
Red
White
Red
(cd/lux/
sq m)
(cd/lux/
sq m)
(cd/lux/
sq m)
(cd/lux/
sq m)
(cd/lux/
sq m)
(cd/lux/
sq m)
250
250
60
65
65
15
60
60
15
15
15
4
165
165
40
43
43
10
40
40
10
10
10
3
125
125
30
33
33
8
30
30
8
8
8
2
TABLE XVII.—SCHOOL BUS SIGNAL LAMP PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2) red lamps
Test point
(degrees)
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) amber lamps
5U:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
20L ........................................................................................................................................................
10L ........................................................................................................................................................
5L ..........................................................................................................................................................
V ...........................................................................................................................................................
5R .........................................................................................................................................................
10R .......................................................................................................................................................
20R .......................................................................................................................................................
150
300
300
300
300
300
150
375
750
750
750
750
750
375
30L ........................................................................................................................................................
20L ........................................................................................................................................................
10L ........................................................................................................................................................
5L ..........................................................................................................................................................
30
180
400
500
75
450
1000
1250
H:
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00094
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68327
TABLE XVII.—SCHOOL BUS SIGNAL LAMP PHOTOMETRY REQUIREMENTS—Continued
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) (2) red lamps
Test point
(degrees)
Minimum photometric intensity
(cd) amber lamps
V ...........................................................................................................................................................
5R .........................................................................................................................................................
10R .......................................................................................................................................................
20R .......................................................................................................................................................
30R .......................................................................................................................................................
600
500
400
180
30
1500
1250
1000
450
75
30L ........................................................................................................................................................
20L ........................................................................................................................................................
10L ........................................................................................................................................................
5L ..........................................................................................................................................................
V ...........................................................................................................................................................
5R .........................................................................................................................................................
10R .......................................................................................................................................................
20R .......................................................................................................................................................
30R .......................................................................................................................................................
30
200
300
450
450
450
300
200
30
75
500
750
1125
1125
1125
750
500
75
10D: (1)
5L ..........................................................................................................................................................
V ...........................................................................................................................................................
5R .........................................................................................................................................................
40
40
40
100
100
100
5D:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
(1) Where school bus signal lamps are mounted with their axis of reference less than 750 mm above the road surface, photometry requirements below 5° down may be met at 5° down rather than at the specified required downward angle.
(2) The photometric intensity values between test points must not be less than the lower specified minimum value of the two closest adjacent
test points on a horizontal or vertical line.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00095
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00096
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.012
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68328
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00097
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68329
ER04DE07.013
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00098
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.014
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68330
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00099
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68331
ER04DE07.015
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00100
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.016
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68332
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00101
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68333
ER04DE07.017
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00102
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.018
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68334
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00103
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68335
ER04DE07.019
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00104
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.020
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68336
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00105
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68337
ER04DE07.021
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00106
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.022
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68338
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00107
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68339
ER04DE07.023
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00108
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.024
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68340
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00109
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68341
ER04DE07.025
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00110
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.026
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68342
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00111
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68343
ER04DE07.027
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00112
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.028
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68344
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00113
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68345
ER04DE07.029
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00114
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.030
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68346
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00115
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68347
ER04DE07.031
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00116
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.032
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68348
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00117
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68349
ER04DE07.033
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00118
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.034
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68350
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00119
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68351
ER04DE07.035
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00120
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.036
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68352
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00121
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68353
ER04DE07.037
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
VerDate Aug<31>2005
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00122
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
ER04DE07.038
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68354
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00123
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4725
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68355
ER04DE07.039
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68356
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Appendix to § 571.108: Table of
Contents
Sec.
571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps,
reflective devices, and associated
equipment.
S1 Scope.
S2 Purpose.
S3 Application.
S4 Definitions.
S5 References to SAE publications.
S5.2 Incorporation by reference.
S6 Vehicle requirements.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems.
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamps.
S6.1.1.3 Truck tractor rear turn signal
lamps.
S6.1.1.4 Daytime running lamps.
S6.1.2 Color.
S6.1.3 Mounting location.
S6.1.3.3 License plate lamp.
S6.1.3.4 High-mounted stop lamp.
S6.1.3.4.1 Interior mounting.
S6.1.3.4.2 Accessibility.
S6.1.3.5 Headlamp beam mounting.
S6.1.3.5.1 Vertical headlamp arrangement.
S6.1.3.5.2 Horizontal headlamp
arrangement.
S6.1.3.6 Auxiliary lamps mounted near
identification lamps.
S6.1.4 Mounting height.
S6.1.4.1 High-mounted stop lamps.
S6.1.5 Activation.
S6.1.5.1 Hazard warning signal.
S6.1.5.2 Simultaneous beam activation.
S6.2 Impairment.
S6.2.3 Headlamp obstructions.
S6.3 Equipment combinations.
S6.4 Lens area, visibility and school bus
signal lamp aiming.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens
area requirements.
S6.4.2 Visibility.
S6.4.3 Visibility options.
S6.4.3(a) Lens area option.
S6.4.3(b) Luminous intensity option.
S6.4.4 Legacy visibility alternative.
S6.4.5 School bus signal lamp aiming.
S6.5 Marking.
S6.5.1 DOT marking.
S6.5.2 DRL marking.
S6.5.3 Headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.1 Trademark.
S6.5.3.2 Voltage and trade number.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp
markings.
S6.5.3.5 Additional headlamp markings.
S6.6 Associated equipment.
S6.6.3 License plate holder.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7.1 General.
S6.7.2 Version of this standard.
S7 Signal lamp requirements.
S7.1 Turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1.1 Number.
S7.1.1.2 Color of light.
S7.1.1.3 Mounting location.
S7.1.1.4 Mounting height.
S7.1.1.5 Activation.
S7.1.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S7.1.1.7 Visibility.
S7.1.1.8 Indicator.
S7.1.1.9 Markings.
S7.1.1.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.1.1.10.2 Spacing measurement for nonreflector lamps.
S7.1.1.10.3 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.1.10.4 Spacing based photometric
multipliers.
S7.1.1.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.1.1.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles
2032 mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.1.12 Ratio to parking lamps and
clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.13 Photometry.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.2 Rear turn signal lamps.
S7.1.2.1 Number.
S7.1.2.2 Color of light.
S7.1.2.3 Mounting location.
S7.1.2.4 Mounting height.
S7.1.2.5 Activation.
S7.1.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.1.2.7 Visibility.
S7.1.2.8 Indicator.
S7.1.2.9 Markings.
S7.1.2.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.1.2.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.1.2.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles
2032 mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.2.12 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.13 Photometry.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.2 Taillamps.
S7.2.1 Number.
S7.2.2 Color of light.
S7.2.3 Mounting location.
S7.2.4 Mounting height.
S7.2.5 Activation.
S7.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.2.7 Visibility.
S7.2.8 Indicator.
S7.2.9 Markings.
S7.2.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.2.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.2.11.4 Taillamps installed on vehicles
2032 mm or more in overall width.
S7.2.12 Ratio.
S7.2.13 Photometry.
S7.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.3 Stop lamps.
S7.3.1 Number.
S7.3.2 Color of light.
S7.3.3 Mounting location.
S7.3.4 Mounting height.
S7.3.5 Activation.
S7.3.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.3.7 Visibility.
S7.3.8 Indicator.
S7.3.9 Markings.
S7.3.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.3.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.3.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.3.12 Ratio to taillamps.
S7.3.13 Photometry.
PO 00000
Frm 00124
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.15 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.4 Side marker lamps.
S7.4.1 Number.
S7.4.2 Color of light.
S7.4.3 Mounting location.
S7.4.4 Mounting height.
S7.4.5 Activation.
S7.4.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.4.7 Visibility.
S7.4.8 Indicator.
S7.4.9 Markings.
S7.4.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.4.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.4.12 Ratio.
S7.4.13 Photometry.
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry.
S7.4.14 Physical tests.
S7.5 Clearance and identification lamps.
S7.5.1 Number.
S7.5.2 Color of light.
S7.5.3 Mounting location.
S7.5.4 Mounting height.
S7.5.5 Activation.
S7.5.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.5.7 Visibility.
S7.5.8 Indicator.
S7.5.9 Markings.
S7.5.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.5.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.5.12 Ratio.
S7.5.12.1 Clearance lamps.
S7.5.12.2 Identification lamps.
S7.5.13 Photometry.
S7.5.14 Physical tests.
S7.6 Backup lamps.
S7.6.1 Number.
S7.6.2 Color of light.
S7.6.3 Mounting location.
S7.6.4 Mounting height.
S7.6.5 Activation.
S7.6.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.6.7 Visibility.
S7.6.8 Indicator.
S7.6.9 Markings.
S7.6.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.6.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.6.12 Ratio.
S7.6.13 Photometry.
S7.6.14 Physical tests.
S7.7 License plate lamps.
S7.7.1 Number.
S7.7.2 Color of light.
S7.7.3 Mounting location.
S7.7.4 Mounting height.
S7.7.5 Activation.
S7.7.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.7.7 Visibility.
S7.7.8 Indicator.
S7.7.9 Markings.
S7.7.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.7.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.7.12 Ratio.
S7.7.13 Photometry.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.15 Installation.
S7.7.15.4 Incident light from single lamp.
S7.7.15.5 Incident light from multiple
lamps.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S7.8 Parking lamps.
S7.8.1 Number.
S7.8.2 Color of light.
S7.8.3 Mounting location.
S7.8.4 Mounting height.
S7.8.5 Activation.
S7.8.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.8.7 Visibility.
S7.8.8 Indicator.
S7.8.9 Markings.
S7.8.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.8.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.8.12 Ratio.
S7.8.13 Photometry.
S7.8.14 Physical tests.
S7.9 High-mounted stop lamps.
S7.9.1 Number.
S7.9.2 Color of light.
S7.9.3 Mounting location.
S7.9.4 Mounting height.
S7.9.5 Activation.
S7.9.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.9.7 Visibility.
S7.9.8 Indicator.
S7.9.9 Markings.
S7.9.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.9.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.9.12 Ratio.
S7.9.13 Photometry.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.10 Daytime running lamps (DRLs).
S7.10.1 Number.
S7.10.2 Color of light.
S7.10.3 Mounting location.
S7.10.4 Mounting height.
S7.10.5 Activation.
S7.10.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.10.7 Visibility.
S7.10.8 Indicator.
S7.10.9 Markings.
S7.10.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.10.10.1 Spacing to turn signal lamps.
S7.10.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.10.12 Ratio.
S7.10.13 Photometry.
S7.10.14 Physical tests.
S7.11 School bus signal lamps.
S7.11.1 Number.
S7.11.2 Color of light.
S7.11.3 Mounting location.
S7.11.4 Mounting height.
S7.11.5 Activation.
S7.11.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S7.11.7 Visibility.
S7.11.8 Indicator.
S7.11.9 Markings.
S7.11.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.11.11 Multiple compartments and
multiple lamps.
S7.11.12 Ratio.
S7.11.13 Photometry.
S7.11.14 Physical tests.
S8 Reflective device requirements.
S8.1 Reflex reflectors.
S8.1.1 Number.
S8.1.2 Color.
S8.1.3 Mounting location.
S8.1.4 Mounting height.
S8.1.5 Activation.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S8.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S8.1.7 Visibility.
S8.1.8 Indicator.
S8.1.9 Markings.
S8.1.10 Spacing to other lamps or reflective
devices.
S8.1.11 Photometry.
S8.1.12 Physical tests.
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex reflector
material.
S8.2 Conspicuity systems.
S8.2.1 Retroreflective sheeting.
S8.2.1.2 Retroreflective sheeting material.
S8.2.1.3 Certification marking.
S8.2.1.4 Application pattern.
S8.2.1.4.1 Alternating red and white
materials.
S8.2.1.5 Application location.
S8.2.1.6 Application spacing.
S8.2.1.7 Photometry.
S8.2.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
S8.2.2.1 Certification marking.
S8.2.2.2 Application pattern.
S8.2.2.2.1 Alternating red and white
materials.
S8.2.2.2.2 White material.
S8.2.2.3 Photometry.
S8.2.3 Conspicuity system installation on
trailers.
S8.2.3.1 Trailer rear.
S8.2.3.1.1 Element 1-alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.3.1.2 Element 2-white.
S8.2.3.1.3 Element 3-alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.3.2 Trailer side-alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.4 Conspicuity system installation on
truck tractors.
S8.2.4.1 Element 1-alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.4.2 Element 2-white.
S9 Associated equipment requirements.
S9.1 Turn signal operating unit.
S9.1.2 Physical tests.
S9.2 Turn signal flasher.
S9.2.2 Physical tests.
S9.3 Turn signal pilot indicator.
S9.3.4 Indicator size and color.
S9.3.6 Turn signal lamp failure.
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching device.
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S9.4.1.1 Operating instructions.
S9.4.1.2 Manual override.
S9.4.1.3 Fail safe operation.
S9.4.1.4 Automatic dimming indicator.
S9.4.1.5 Lens accessibility.
S9.4.1.6 Mounting height.
S9.4.1.7 Physical tests.
S9.5 Upper beam headlamp indicator.
S9.5.1 Indicator size and location.
S9.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit.
S9.6.2 Operating unit switch.
S9.6.3 Physical tests.
S9.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher.
S9.7.2 Physical tests.
S9.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S9.8.4 Indicator size and color.
S10 Headlighting system requirements.
S10.1 Vehicle headlighting systems.
S10.2 Aiming.
PO 00000
Frm 00125
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68357
S10.3 Number.
S10.4 Color of light.
S10.5 Mounting location.
S10.6 Mounting height.
S10.7 Activation.
S10.8 Effective projected luminous lens
area.
S10.9 Visibility.
S10.10 Indicator.
S10.11 Markings.
S10.12 Spacing to other lamps.
S10.13 Sealed beam headlighting systems.
S10.13.1 Installation.
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S10.13.4 Physical tests.
S10.14 Integral beam headlighting systems.
S10.14.1 Installation.
S10.14.2 Aimability.
S10.14.3 Simultaneous aim.
S10.14.4 Markings.
S10.14.5 Additional light sources.
S10.14.6 Photometry.
S10.14.7 Physical tests.
S10.15 Replaceable bulb headlighting
systems.
S10.15.1 Installation.
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions.
S10.15.3 Replacement lens reflector units.
S10.15.4 Markings.
S10.15.5 Additional light sources.
S10.15.6 Photometry.
S10.15.7 Physical tests.
S10.16 Combination headlighting systems.
S10.16.1 Installation.
S10.16.2 Photometry.
S10.16.3 Physical tests.
S10.17 Motorcycle headlighting systems.
S10.17.1 Installation.
S10.17.1.1 Single headlamp.
S10.17.1.2 Two headlamps with both
beams.
S10.17.1.3 Two headlamps, upper beam
and lower beam.
S10.17.2 Motorcycle replaceable bulb
headlamp marking.
S10.17.3 Photometry.
S10.17.4 Physical tests.
S10.17.5 Motorcycle headlamp modulation
system.
S10.17.5.1. Modulation.
S10.17.5.2 Replacement modulators.
S10.17.5.2.1 Replacement performance.
S10.17.5.2.2 Replacement instructions.
S10.18 Headlamp aimability performance
requirements.
S10.18.1 Headlamp mounting and aiming.
S10.18.2 Headlamp aiming systems.
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment interaction.
S10.18.4 Horizontal adjustment-visually
aimed headlamp.
S10.18.5 Optical axis marking.
S10.18.5.1 Optical axis marking-vehicle.
S10.18.5.2 Optical axis marking-lamp.
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis marking-visual aim
headlamp.
S10.18.6 Moveable reflectors.
S10.18.7 External aiming.
S10.18.7.1 Headlamp aiming device
locating plates.
S10.18.7.2 Nonadjustable headlamp aiming
device locating plates.
S10.18.8 On-vehicle aiming.
S10.18.8.1 Aim.
S10.18.8.1.1 Vertical aim.
S10.18.8.1.2 Horizontal aim.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
68358
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S10.18.8.2 Aiming instructions.
S10.18.8.3 Permanent calibration.
S10.18.8.4 Replacement units.
S10.18.8.5 Physical tests.
S10.18.9 Visual/optical aiming.
S10.18.9.1 Vertical aim, lower beam.
S10.18.9.1.1 Vertical position of the cutoff.
S10.18.9.1.2 Vertical gradient.
S10.18.9.1.3 Horizontal position of the
cutoff.
S10.18.9.1.4 Maximum inclination of the
cutoff.
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff
parameter.
S10.18.9.2 Horizontal aim, lower beam.
S10.18.9.3 Vertical aim, upper beam.
S10.18.9.4 Horizontal aim, upper beam.
S10.18.9.5 Photometry.
S10.18.9.6 Visual/optical identification
marking.
S11 Replaceable light source requirements.
S11.1 Markings.
S11.2 Ballast markings.
S11.3 Gas discharge laboratory life.
S11.4 Physical tests.
S12 Headlamp concealment device
requirements.
S12.7 Certification election.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens
requirements.
S14 Physical and photometry test
procedures and performance
requirements.
S14.1 General test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.1.2 Plastic optical materials.
S14.1.4 Samples.
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2.1 Photometry measurements for all
lamps except license lamps, headlamps,
and DRLs.
S14.2.1.1 Mounting.
S14.2.1.2 School bus signal lamp aiming.
S14.2.1.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.1.4 Location of test points.
S14.2.1.5 Multiple compartment and
multiple lamp photometry of turn signal
lamps, stop lamps, and taillamps.
S14.2.1.6 Bulbs.
S14.2.2 License plate lamp photometry.
S14.2.2.1 Illumination surface.
S14.2.2.2 Test stations.
S14.2.3 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry.
S14.2.3.1 Mounting.
S14.2.3.2 Illumination source.
S14.2.3.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.3.4 Test setup.
S14.2.3.5 Photodetector .
S14.2.3.6 Photometry surface.
S14.2.3.7 Procedure.
S14.2.3.8 Measurements.
S14.2.3.8.1 Reflex reflectors.
S14.2.3.8.2 Retroreflective sheeting.
S14.2.3.8.3 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S14.2.4 Daytime running lamp (DRL)
photometry measurements.
S14.2.5 Headlamp photometry
measurements.
S14.2.5.1 Mounting.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.5.4 Seasoning and test voltage.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming.
S14.2.5.5.1 Mechanically aimable
headlamps using an external aimer.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.2.5.5.2 Mechanically aimable
headlamps equipped with a VHAD.
S14.2.5.5.3 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps-vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.4 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps-horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.5.5 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps-vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.6 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps-horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.5.7 Simultaneous aim Type F
sealed beam headlamps and beam
contributor integral beam headlamps.
S14.2.5.5.8 Motorcycle headlamp-upper
beam headlamps designed to comply
with Table XX.
S14.2.5.5.9 Motorcycle headlamp-lower
beam headlamps designed to comply
with Table XX.
S14.2.5.6 Positioner.
S14.2.5.7 Photometer.
S14.2.5.7.2 Sensor.
S14.2.5.8 Location of test points.
S14.2.5.9 Beam contributor photometry
measurements.
S14.2.5.10 Moveable reflector aimed
headlamp photometry measurements.
S14.3 Motorcycle headlamp out of focus
test procedure and performance
requirements.
S14.3.1 Procedure.
S14.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4 General test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.4.1 Color test.
S14.4.1.1 Samples.
S14.4.1.2 General procedure.
S14.4.1.3 Visual method.
S14.4.1.3.1 Visual method procedure.
S14.4.1.3.2 Visual method performance
requirements.
S14.4.1.3.2.1 Red.
S14.4.1.3.2.2 Yellow (Amber).
S14.4.1.3.2.3 White.
S14.4.1.4 Tristimulus method.
S14.4.1.4.1 Tristimulus method procedure.
S14.4.1.4.2 Tristimulus method
performance requirements.
S14.4.1.4.2.1 Red.
S14.4.1.4.2.2 Yellow (Amber).
S14.4.1.4.2.3 White (achromatic).
S14.4.2 Plastic optical materials tests.
S14.4.2.1 Samples.
S14.4.2.2 Outdoor exposure test.
S14.4.2.2.3 Procedure.
S14.4.2.2.4 Performance requirements.
S14.4.2.3 Heat test.
S14.4.2.3.1 Procedure.
S14.4.2.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5 Signal lamp and reflective device
physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.5.1 Vibration test.
S14.5.1.1 Procedure.
S14.5.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.2 Moisture test.
S14.5.2.1 Procedure.
S14.5.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.3 Dust test.
S14.5.3.1 Samples.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure.
S14.5.3.3 Performance requirements.
S14.5.4 Corrosion test.
S14.5.4.1 Procedure.
S14.5.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6 Headlamp physical test procedures
and performance requirements.
PO 00000
Frm 00126
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.6.1 Abrasion test.
S14.6.1.1 Procedure.
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad.
S14.6.1.1.2 Abrading pad alignment.
S14.6.1.1.3 Abrasion test procedure.
S14.6.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.2 Chemical resistance test.
S14.6.2.1 Procedure.
S14.6.2.1.1 Test fluids.
S14.6.2.1.2 Fluid application.
S14.6.2.1.3 Test duration.
S14.6.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.3 Corrosion test.
S14.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.4 Corrosion-connector test.
S14.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.5 Dust test.
S14.6.5.1 Procedure.
S14.6.5.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.6 Temperature cycle test and internal
heat test.
S14.6.6.1 Samples.
S14.6.6.2 General procedure.
S14.6.6.3 Temperature cycle test.
S14.6.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.6.4 Internal heat test.
S14.6.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.7 Humidity test.
S14.6.7.1 Procedure.
S14.6.7.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.8 Vibration test.
S14.6.8.1 Samples.
S14.6.8.2 Procedure.
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
S14.6.9 Sealing test.
S14.6.9.1 Procedure.
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.10 Chemical resistance test of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S14.6.10.1 Procedure.
S14.6.10.1.1 Test fluids.
S14.6.10.1.2 Fluid application.
S14.6.10.1.3 Test duration.
S14.6.10.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.11 Corrosion resistance test of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S14.6.11.1 Procedure.
S14.6.11.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.12 Inward force test.
S14.6.12.1 Procedure.
S14.6.12.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.13 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.13.1 Procedure.
S14.6.13.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.14 Retaining ring test.
S14.6.14.1 Procedure.
S14.6.14.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.15 Headlamp connector test.
S14.6.15.1 Procedure.
S14.6.15.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.16 Headlamp wattage test.
S14.6.16.1 Procedure.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.17 Aiming adjustment test-laboratory.
S14.6.17.1 Procedure.
S14.6.17.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.18 Aiming adjustment test-on vehicle.
S14.6.18.1 Procedure.
S14.6.18.2 Performance requirements.
S14.7 Replaceable light source physical test
procedures and performance
requirements.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
S14.7.1 Deflection test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.1.1 Procedure.
S14.7.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.7.2 Pressure test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.2.1 Procedure.
S14.7.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.7.3 Replaceable light source power and
flux measurement procedure.
S14.7.3.1 Seasoning.
S14.7.3.1.1 Resistive filament source.
S14.7.3.1.2 Discharge source.
S14.7.3.2 Test voltage.
S14.7.3.3 Luminous flux measurement.
S14.7.3.3.3.2 Discharge light source setup.
S14.8 Vehicle headlamp aiming devices
(VHAD) physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.8.1 Samples.
S14.8.2 Scale graduation test.
S14.8.2.1 Procedure.
S14.8.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.3 Cold scale graduation test.
S14.8.3.1 Procedure.
S14.8.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.4 Hot scale graduation test.
S14.8.4.1 Procedure.
S14.8.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.5 Thermal cycle test.
S14.8.5.1 Procedure.
S14.8.5.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.6 Corrosion test.
S14.8.6.1 Procedure.
S14.8.6.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.7 Photometry test.
S14.8.7.1 Procedure.
S14.8.7.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9 Associated equipment physical test
procedures and performance
requirements.
S14.9.1 Turn signal operating unit
durability test.
S14.9.1.1 Power supply specifications.
S14.9.1.2 Procedure.
S14.9.1.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.2 Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test.
S14.9.2.1 Procedure.
S14.9.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3 Turn signal flasher and vehicular
hazard warning flasher tests.
S14.9.3.1 Standard test circuit.
S14.9.3.1.1 Test circuit setup.
S14.9.3.2 Power supply specifications.
S14.9.3.2.1 Starting time, voltage drop, and
flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’ time
tests.
S14.9.3.2.2 Durability tests.
S14.9.3.3 Turn signal flasher starting time
test.
S14.9.3.3.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.3.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.3.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.4 Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test.
S14.9.3.4.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.4.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.4.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.5 Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
S14.9.3.5.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.5.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.5.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.6 Turn signal flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.6.1 Samples.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.9.3.6.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.6.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test.
S14.9.3.7.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.7.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.7.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test.
S14.9.3.8.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.8.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.8.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.9 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent ‘‘on’’ time
test.
S14.9.3.9.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.9.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.9.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.10 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.10.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.10.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.10.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11 Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests.
S14.9.3.11.1 Test conditions.
S14.9.3.11.2 Sensitivity test.
S14.9.3.11.2.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.11.2.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.2.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.2.3.1 Operating limits.
S14.9.3.11.3 Voltage regulation test.
S14.9.3.11.3.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.4 Manual override test.
S14.9.3.11.4.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.5 Warmup test.
S14.9.3.11.5.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.5.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.6 Temperature test.
S14.9.3.11.6.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.6.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.7 Dust test.
S14.9.3.11.7.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.7.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.8 Corrosion test.
S14.9.3.11.8.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.8.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.9 Vibration test.
S14.9.3.11.9.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.9.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.10 Sunlight test.
S14.9.3.11.10.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.10.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.11 Durability test.
S14.9.3.11.11.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.11.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.12 Return to upper beam test.
S14.9.3.11.12.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.12.2 Performance requirements.
Table I–a Required lamps and reflective
devices—All passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles (MPV),
trucks, and buses
Table I–b Required lamps and reflective
devices—All trailers
Table I–c Required lamps and reflective
devices—All motorcycles
Table II–a Headlighting systems—Sealed
beams
Table II–b Headlighting systems—
Combination
Table II–c Headlighting systems—Integral
beams
Table II–d Headlighting systems—
Replaceable bulb
PO 00000
Frm 00127
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
68359
Table III Marking requirements location
Table IV–a Effective projected luminous
lens area requirements
Table IV–b Effective projected luminous
lens area requirements
Table IV–c Effective projected luminous
lens area requirements
Table V–a Visibility requirements of
installed lighting devices
Table V–b Visibility requirements of
installed lighting devices—Lens area
visibility option
Table V–c Visibility requirements of
installed lighting devices—Luminous
intensity visibility option
Table V–d Visibility requirements of
installed lighting devices (Legacy
visibility alternative)
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp
photometry requirements
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp
photometry requirements
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp photometry
requirements
Table VIII Taillamp photometry
requirements
Table IX Stop lamp photometry
requirements
Table X Side marker lamp photometry
requirements
Table XI Clearance and identification
lamps photometry requirements
Table XII Backup lamp photometry
requirements
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp
alternative photometry requirements
Table XIII–b Motor driven cycle stop lamp
alternative photometry requirements
Table XIV Parking lamp photometry
requirements
Table XV High-mounted stop lamp
photometry requirements
Table XVI–a Reflex reflector photometry
requirements
Table XVI–b Additional photometry
requirements for conspicuity reflex
reflectors
Table XVI–c Retroreflective sheeting
photometry requirements
Table XVII School bus signal lamp
photometry requirements
Table XVIII Headlamp upper beam
photometry requirements
Table XIX–a Headlamp lower beam
photometry requirements
Table XIX–b Headlamp lower beam
photometry requirements
Table XIX–c Headlamp lower beam
photometry requirements
Table XX Motorcycle and motor driven
cycle headlamp photometry
requirements
Figure 1 Chromaticity diagram
Figure 2 Flasher performance chart
Figure 3 Replaceable bulb headlamp aim
pads
Figure 4 Headlamp connector test setup
Figure 5 Headlamp abrasion test fixture
Figure 6 Thermal cycle test profile
Figure 7 Dirt/Ambient test setup
Figure 8 Replaceable light source deflection
test setup
Figure 9 Environmental test profile
Figure 10 Replaceable light source pressure
test setup
Figure 11 Trailer conspicuity treatment
examples
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68360
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
Figure 12–1 Trailer conspicuity detail I
Figure 12–2 Trailer conspicuity detail II
Figure 13 Tractor conspicuity treatment
examples
Figure 14 92x150 Headlamp aim deflection
test setup
Figure 15 Types G and H headlamp aim
deflection test setup
Figure 16 Types A and E headlamp aim
deflection test setup
Figure 17 Type B headlamp aim deflection
test setup
Figure 18 Types C and D headlamp aim
deflection test setup
Figure 19 License plate lamp target
locations
Figure 20 License plate lamp measurement
of incident light angle
Figure 21 Vibration test machine
Figure 22 Flasher standard test circuit
Issued: August 8, 2007.
Nicole R. Nason,
Administrator.
Editorial Note: This document was
received at the Office of the Federal Register
on Thursday, November 8, 2007.
Note: The following appendixes will not
appear in the Code of Federal Regulations.
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S1
S2
S3
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
Scope ...........................................................
Purpose ........................................................
Application (except section citation) .............
Definitions .....................................................
Definitions—Aiming reference plane ............
Definitions—Axis of reference ......................
Definitions—Beam contributor ......................
Definitions—Cargo lamp ..............................
Definitions—Cutoff ........................................
Definitions—Direct reading indicator ............
Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Filament ...................................
S4 Definitions—Flash ........................................
S4 Definitions—Fully opened ............................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S1
S2
S3
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
Scope ..........................................................
Purpose ......................................................
Application ..................................................
Definitions ...................................................
Definitions—Aiming reference plane ..........
Definitions—Axis of reference ....................
Definitions—Beam contributor ....................
Definitions—Cargo lamp .............................
Definitions—Cutoff ......................................
Definitions—Direct reading indicator ..........
Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker exemption ...
S5.1.1.4 Alternative side reflex material ............
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Filament ..................................
S4 Definitions—Flash .......................................
S4 Definitions—Fully opened ...........................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp test fixture .............
S4 Definitions—Integral beam headlamp ........
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp ....
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement ....
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator .......
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp ..
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source ........
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.1.1.3 Truck tractor rear turn signal lamps ..
Table I Number and color ................................
Table VII footnote 6 .........................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
Table I Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
S7.4.1.1 Inboard photometry ...........................
S7.10.1.1 Alternative side reflex reflectors ......
S5.1.1.4
S5.1.1.4
S5.1.1.4
S5.1.1.5
S5.1.1.6
S5.1.1.6
S5.1.1.6
S5.1.1.6
S5.1.1.7
S5.1.1.7
Alternative side reflex material ............
Alternative side reflex material ............
Alternative side reflex material ............
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
S7.14.1 Turn signal operating unit ...................
Table VIII footnote 2 ........................................
Table XIV footnote 2 ........................................
S7.2.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp test fixture ...............
S4 Definitions—Integral beam headlamp ..........
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp ......
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement ......
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator .........
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp ....
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source .........
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S5.1.1 .................................................................
S5.1.1 .................................................................
S5.1.1 .................................................................
S5.1.1.1 Truck tractor exemption—TS ..............
S5.1.1.1 Truck tractor exemption—TS ..............
S5.1.1.1 Truck tractor exemption—TS ..............
S5.1.1.2 Truck tractor exemption ......................
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker exemption ...
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker exemption ...
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00128
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S1 Scope.
S2 Purpose.
S3 Application.
S4 Definitions.
S4 Definitions—Aiming reference plane.
S4 Definitions—Axis of reference.
S4 Definitions—Beam contributor.
S4 Definitions—Cargo lamp.
S4 Definitions—Cutoff.
S4 Definitions—Direct reading indicator.
S4 Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface.
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Filament.
S4 Definitions—Flash.
S4 Definitions—Fully opened.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp test fixture.
S4 Definitions—Integral beam headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp.
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement.
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator.
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source.
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.6.1 All except trailers.
S6.6.2 All except trailers and motorcycles.
S6.1.1.3.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table VII footnote 6.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I–a Number and color—Intermediate
side marker lamps.
Table I–b Number and color—Intermediate
side marker lamps.
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry.
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex reflector material.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–b Lighting device.
Table I–c Lighting device.
S9.1.1 Canceling.
Table VIII footnote 2.
Table XIV footnote 2.
S7.2.13 Photometry.
S7.8.13 Photometry.
S7.1.2.13.2 Motorcycle alternative.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—
Group photometry.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—
Photometric ratio.
S7.1.1.13 Photometry.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68361
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
Motorcycle turn signal lamp ................
Inboard photometry .............................
Inboard photometry .............................
Boat trailer exemption .........................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.4.1.1 Inboard photometry ...........................
Table X footnote 1 ...........................................
Table I Number and color—Clearance lamp ...
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.1.1.12 ............................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S7.1.1.13.1.
S7.1.1.13.2.
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry.
Table X footnote 1.
Table I–b Number and color—Clearance
lamp.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I–b Number and color.
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I–c Number and color.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined.
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I–a Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps.
S7.1.1.3.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.2.2.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.3.1.1.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
S6.8.5.2.1 Bulbs without MSCD ......................
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII footnote 4 .........................................
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—performance requirements.
Table I Number and color ................................
S7.1.1.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.2.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.3.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S14.9.1.3.1 Voltage drop (<2032 mm wide).
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV footnote 1 ..........................................
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV footnote 1.
Table IX Motor driven cycle stop lamp zone
photometry.
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table XIII–b Motor driven cycle stop lamp—
Group photometry.
S7.3.13.2 Motor driven cycle alternative.
Table IX footnote 5 ..........................................
Table XIII–b footnote 3.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S5.1.1.7
S5.1.1.7
S5.1.1.8
S5.1.1.8
S5.1.1.9
S5.1.1.12 ............................................................
S5.1.1.12 ............................................................
S5.1.1.13 ............................................................
S5.1.1.13 ............................................................
S5.1.1.14
S5.1.1.15
S5.1.1.16
S5.1.1.17
S5.1.1.17
S5.1.1.17
S5.1.1.18
Trailer exemption—rear .....................
Trailer exemption—front ....................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
Backup lamp photometry ..................
S5.1.1.18 Backup lamp photometry ..................
S5.1.1.18 Backup lamp photometry ..................
S5.1.1.19 Variable load turn signal flasher .......
S5.1.1.19 Variable load turn signal flasher .......
S5.1.1.19 Variable load turn signal flasher .......
S5.1.1.20 Flasher voltage drop .........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.1.1.20 Flasher voltage drop .........................
S5.1.1.21 Motor driven cycle turn signal exemption.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.25 Motor cycle turn signal lamp EPLLA
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00129
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.9.1.3 Performance requirements.
Table I–b Number and color.
Table I–b Number and color.
S14.2.1.6.1 Bulbs without MSCD.
S14.2.1.6 Bulbs.
S14.2.2.3 Bulbs.
S14.2.4.3 Bulbs.
Table XII Single lamp system—Individual
point photometry.
Table XII Two lamp systems Each lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XII footnote 4.
S14.9.3.3.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.4.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.5.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.4.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.8.3 Performance requirements.
Table I–c Number and color.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68362
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.1.1.25 Motor cycle turn signal lamp EPLLA
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V HMSL—Visibility .................................
S7.9.3 Photometry ...........................................
S7.9.3 Photometry ...........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.1 High mounted stop lamp design ..........
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V HMSL—Visibility .................................
Table XV footnote 3 .........................................
S7.9.1 High mounted stop lamp design ..........
S6.1.1.1.1 Conspicuity and reflex ....................
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp.
Table I–a Lighting device.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV–b High mounted stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table V–a HMSL—Visibility.
S7.9.13 Photometry.
S7.9.13 Photometry.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1 External mount.
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount.
S6.1.4.1.3 Accessibility.
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp.
Table I–a Lighting device.
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
Table IV–b High mounted stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table V–a HMSL—Visibility.
Table XV footnote 3.
S6.1.4.1.3 Accessibility.
Table I–b Reflex reflectors.
S6.8.4 Plastic optical materials ........................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.2.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.4.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.5.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.6.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.8.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.10.2 Physical tests ......................................
S7.11.3 Physical tests ......................................
S7.13.2 Physical test requirements .................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
S14.1.2 Plastic optical materials.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.4.14 Physical tests.
S7.5.14 Physical tests.
S7.6.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.8.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1 External mount.
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount.
S8.1.12 Physical tests.
S7.10.14 Physical tests.
S7.11.14 Physical tests.
S10.13.4.3 Material test.
S10.14.7.8 Material test.
S10.15.7.7 Material test.
S14.4.2.2.4 Performance requirements.
S5.1.1.25 Motor cycle turn signal lamp EPLLA
S5.1.1.26(a) .......................................................
S5.1.1.26(a) .......................................................
S5.1.1.26(a) .......................................................
S5.1.1.26(b) .......................................................
S5.1.1.26(b) .......................................................
S5.1.1.26(b) .......................................................
S5.1.1.27(a) .......................................................
S5.1.1.27(a) .......................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(1) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(1) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(2) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(3) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(3) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(4) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(4) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(4) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(a)(5) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b) .......................................................
S5.1.1.27(b) .......................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(1) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(1) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(1) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(2) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(3) ...................................................
S5.1.1.27(b)(4) ...................................................
S5.1.1.29 Conspicuity system replace reflex on
trailers.
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2 Plastic optical materials ..........................
S5.1.2(a) ............................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.1.2(b) ............................................................
S5.1.2(b) ............................................................
S5.1.2(c) .............................................................
S5.1.2(c) .............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00130
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.4.2.2.4.1(a) Except reflex.
S14.4.2.2.4.1 Haze.
S14.4.2.2.4.1 Haze.
S14.4.2.2.4.1(b) Reflex.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68363
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S5.1.2(c) .............................................................
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
Table I Additional Lamps Required on All
School Buses except Multifunction School
Activity Buses.
Table I Number and color—School bus signal
lamps.
Table XVII Amber lamp photometry ................
Table I Number and color—School bus signal
lamps.
Table I Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
S5.1.2(d) ............................................................
S5.1.2(e) ............................................................
S5.1.2(e) ............................................................
S5.1.2(f) .............................................................
S5.1.2(f) .............................................................
S5.1.2(g) ............................................................
S5.1.3 Impairment ..............................................
S5.1.4 School bus signal lamps ........................
S5.1.4(a) ............................................................
S5.1.4(b) ............................................................
S5.1.4(b)(i) .........................................................
S5.1.4(b)(ii) ........................................................
S5.1.4(b) ............................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
S5.2.1 .................................................................
S5.2.2 .................................................................
S5.3 Location .....................................................
S5.3 Location .....................................................
S5.3.1.2 Truck tractor rear reflex .......................
S7.13.1 Photometry .........................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.2.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.4.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.5.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.6.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.8.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.10.2 Physical tests ......................................
S7.11.3 Physical tests ......................................
S7.13.2 Physical test requirements .................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
S5.1 SAE Publications .....................................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
Table I Mounting location—Reflex reflectors ...
S5.3.1.3 Trailer front reflex and side marker .....
Table I Mounting location—Reflex reflectors ...
S5.3.1.3 Trailer front reflex and side marker .....
Table I Mounting location—Side marker lamps
S5.3.1.4 Rear clearance lamp mounting ...........
S5.3.1.4 Rear clearance lamp mounting ...........
S5.3.1.6 Truck tractor clearance lamps .............
Table I Mounting height—Clearance lamps ....
Table I Mounting height—Clearance lamps ....
Table I Mounting location—Clearance lamps ..
S5.3.1.7 Turn signal spacing .............................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
S7.1.1.2.3 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
Table I Mounting location—High mounted stop
lamp.
S6.1.3.2.1 High mounted stop lamp mounting
S7.9.2 Interior mounting ...................................
S5.1.5 Color .......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.3.1.7 Turn signal spacing .............................
S5.3.1.7 Turn signal spacing .............................
S5.3.1.8(a)(1) .....................................................
S5.3.1.8(a)(2) .....................................................
S5.3.1.8(a)(3) .....................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00131
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.4.2.2.4.3 Physical changes.
S14.4.2.1.3 Thickness.
S14.4.2.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.2.3 Heat test.
S14.4.2.3 Heat test.
S14.4.2.3.1 Procedure.
S14.4.2.2.1 Location and duration.
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
Table I–a Additional Lamps Required on All
School Buses except Multifunction School
Activity Buses.
Table I–a Number and color—School bus signal lamps.
Table XVII Amber lamp photometry.
Table I–a Number and color—School bus signal lamps.
Table I–a Activation—School bus signal
lamps.
S7.11.13 Photometry.
S6.1.2 Color.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.4.14 Physical tests.
S7.5.14 Physical tests.
S7.6.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.8.14 Physical tests.
S8.1.12 Physical tests.
S7.10.14 Physical tests.
S7.11.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1 External mount.
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount.
S10.13.4.3 Color test.
S10.14.7.8 Color test.
S10.15.7.7 Color test.
S14.4.1.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.1.4.2 Performance requirements.
S5.1 SAE Publications.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.1.3.1.
S6.1.3.2.
Table I–a Mounting location—Reflex reflectors.
Table I–b Mounting location—Reflex reflectors.
Table I–b Mounting location—Side marker
lamps.
Table I–a Mounting height—Clearance lamps.
Table I–b Mounting height—Clearance lamps.
Table I–a Mounting location—Clearance
lamps.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
S7.1.1.10.4 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
Table I–a Mounting location—High-mounted
stop lamp.
S6.1.4.1.1 High-mounted stop lamp mounting.
S6.1.4.1.2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68364
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.3.1.8(a)(3) .....................................................
S5.3.2(b) ............................................................
S5.3.2(b)(1) ........................................................
S5.3.2(b)(1) ........................................................
S5.3.2(b)(2) ........................................................
S5.3.2(b)(2) ........................................................
S5.3.2(c) .............................................................
S5.3.2(c) .............................................................
S5.3.2(d) ............................................................
S5.3.2(d) ............................................................
S5.3.2(e) ............................................................
S5.3.2(e) ............................................................
S5.3.2.1 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.2.2. High mounted stop lamp reflections.
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.4.3 Visibility options ....................................
S6.4.3(a) Lens area option ..............................
Table V Lens area visibility ..............................
S6.4.3(b) Luminous intensity option ................
Table V Luminous intensity visibility ................
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
Table V High mounted stop lamp visibility ......
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
Table V High mounted stop lamp visibility ......
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
Table V Backup lamp visibility .........................
Table I Mounting location—Clearance lamps ..
S5.3.2.1 ..............................................................
Table I Mounting location—Clearance lamps ..
S5.3.2.1 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.2 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.3 ..............................................................
S5.3.2.4 ..............................................................
S5.4 Equipment combinations ...........................
S5.4(a) ...............................................................
Upper beam indicator .............................
Upper beam indicator .............................
.................................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
Table XI footnote 4 ..........................................
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed ...
Table V footnote 2 ...........................................
Table VI footnote 3 ..........................................
Table VII footnote 3 .........................................
Table VIII footnote 3 ........................................
Table IX footnote 4 ..........................................
Table X footnote 3 ...........................................
Table XI footnote 1 ..........................................
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table XIV footnote 3 ........................................
Table XVI footnote 1 ........................................
Table XVII footnote 1 .......................................
S6.4.4 SAE visibility alternative to S6.4.3 .......
S6.3 Equipment combinations .........................
S6.3.1 High mounted stop lamp and cargo
lamp.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S6.3.2 Optically combined HSML and cargo
lamp prohibition.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S6.3.3. Clearance lamp and taillamp ...............
S7.14.4 Headlamp beam switching device ......
S7.14.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S7.14.5 Upper beam headlamp indicator ........
S7.14.5.1 Indicator size and location ...............
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—High mounted stop lamps
S5.5.4 .................................................................
S5.5.4 .................................................................
S5.5.4 .................................................................
S5.5.5 .................................................................
S5.5.5 .................................................................
S5.5.6 .................................................................
S5.5.6 .................................................................
S5.5.6 .................................................................
S5.5.6 .................................................................
S5.5.6 .................................................................
S5.5.7 .................................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(a) ............................................................
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
S6.1.1.4 Hazard warning lamps .......................
S7.14.6.1 Operating unit switch .......................
S7.14.3.2 Turn signal lamp failure ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Table I Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
S6.1.4.1.2. High-mounted stop lamp reflections.
S6.1.1.2.1 High-mounted stop lamp.
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.4.3 Visibility requirement options.
S6.4.3(a) Lens area option.
Table V–c Lens area visibility.
S6.4.3(b) Luminous intensity option.
Table V–d Luminous intensity visibility.
S6.4.2 Visibility.
Table V–a High mounted stop lamp visibility.
S6.4.2 Visibility.
Table V–a High mounted stop lamp visibility.
S6.4.2 Visibility.
Table V–a Backup lamp visibility.
Table I–a Mounting location—Clearance
lamps.
Table I–b Mounting location—Clearance
lamps.
Table XI footnote 4.
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed.
Table V footnote 2.
Table VI footnote 3.
Table VII footnote 3.
Table VIII footnote 3.
Table IX footnote 4.
Table X footnote 3.
Table XI footnote 1.
Table XIII–a footnote 4.
Table XIV footnote 3.
Table XVI–a footnote 1.
Table XVII footnote 1.
S6.4.4 Legacy visibility option.
S6.3 Equipment combinations.
S6.3.1 High-mounted stop lamp and cargo
lamp.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined.
S6.3.2 Optically combined HSML and cargo
lamp prohibition.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined.
S6.3.3. Clearance lamp and taillamp.
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching device.
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S9.5 Upper beam headlamp indicator.
S9.5.1 Indicator size, location, and color.
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I–a Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–c Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–a Activation—High mounted stop
lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps.
S6.1.5.1 Hazard warning signal.
S9.6.2 Operation.
S9.3.6 Turn signal lamp failure.
S9.3 Turn signal pilot indicator.
S9.3.1 TS lamps not visible.
S9.3.2 Indicator light(s).
S9.3.3 Function.
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I–a Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–a Activation—License plate lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Parking lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–c Activation—License plate lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–a Activation—License plate lamps.
S5.3.1.8(b) .........................................................
S5.3.2(a) ............................................................
S5.4(b) ...............................................................
S5.4(b) ...............................................................
S5.4(c) ................................................................
S5.4(c) ................................................................
S5.5.1 Headlamp beam switching .....................
S5.5.1 Headlamp beam switching .....................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.5.2
S5.5.2
S5.5.3
S5.5.3
S5.5.3
S5.5.4
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00132
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68365
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
S5.5.7(b) ............................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.8 .................................................................
S5.5.9 .................................................................
S5.5.9 .................................................................
S5.5.9 .................................................................
S5.5.10(a) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(a) ..........................................................
Table I Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table II footnote 1 ............................................
Table II footnote 3 ............................................
Table II footnote 4 ............................................
Table II footnote 5 ............................................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table I Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
Table I Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
S5.5.10(a)
S5.5.10(a)
S5.5.10(a)
S5.5.10(b)
S5.5.10(b)
S5.5.10(b)
S5.5.10(b)
S5.5.10(b)
S5.5.10(c)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
S5.5.10(d)
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
...........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
Table I Activation—Turn signals ......................
Table I Activation—Turn signals ......................
Table I Activation—Turn signals ......................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
Table I Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—Backup lamps ...................
Table I Activation—Clearance lamps ...............
Table I Activation—DRL ...................................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table I Activation—High mounted stop lamps
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.10(d) ..........................................................
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL) .........
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL) .........
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL) .........
S5.5.11(a)(1) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(1)(i) ...................................................
S5.5.11(a)(1)(ii) ..................................................
S5.5.11(a)(2) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(3) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(3) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(3) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(4) ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(4)(i) ...................................................
Table I Activation—Identification lamps ...........
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Table I Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—Clearance lamps ...............
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Taillamps ..........................
Table I Activation—Headlamp .........................
Table I Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
S6.2.4 Daytime running lamps (DRL) ..............
Table I Activation—DRL ...................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
S7.11.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.11.1(a) .........................................................
S7.11.1(b) .........................................................
S6.5.2 DRL marking .........................................
S7.11.3 Physical tests ......................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Number and color ................................
S7.11.2 Spacing to turn signal lamps ..............
S7.11.2.2(a) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
S7.11.2.2(b) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
S7.11.2.2(c) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
Table I Activation—DRL ...................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ..........................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ..........................
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table I–a Activation—Parking lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–c Activation—License plate lamps.
S6.1.5.2.1.
S6.1.5.2.2.
Table I–a Activation—Headlamp.
Table II footnote 1.
Table II footnote 3.
Table II footnote 4.
Table II footnote 5.
Table I–a Activation—Headlamp.
Table I–c Activation—Headlamp.
Table I–c Activation—Motorcycle headlamps.
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I–a Activation—School bus signal
lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Turn signals.
Table I–b Activation—Turn signals.
Table I–c Activation—Turn signals.
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I–a Activation—Headlamp.
Table I–a Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Motorcycle headlamps.
Table I–c Activation—Motorcycle headlamps.
S6.1.5 Activation.
Table I–a Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–a Activation—Backup lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Clearance lamps.
Table I–a Activation—DRL.
Table I–a Activation—Headlamp.
Table I–a Activation—High mounted stop
lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Identification lamps.
Table I–a Activation—License plate lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Parking lamps.
Table I–a Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–b Activation—Clearance lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Side marker lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Taillamps.
Table I–c Activation—Headlamp.
Table I–c Activation—License plate lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps.
S6.1.1.4 Daytime running lamps (DRL).
Table I–a Activation—DRL.
Table I–a Lighting device.
S7.10.13 Photometry.
S7.10.13(a).
S7.10.13(b).
S6.5.2 DRL marking.
S7.10.14 Physical tests.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–a Number and color.
S7.10.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.10.10.1(a).
S5.5.11(a)(4)(iii) .................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.5.11(a)(4)(iv) .................................................
S5.5.11(a)(5) ......................................................
S5.5.11(b) ..........................................................
S5.5.11(b) ..........................................................
S5.7 Conspicuity systems ..................................
S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting ..........................
S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting ..........................
S5.7.1.1 Construction ........................................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00133
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.10.10.1(b).
S7.10.10.1(c).
Table I–a Activation—DRL.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–a Mounting height.
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems.
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems.
S8.2.1 Retroreflective sheeting.
S8.2.1.1 Construction.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68366
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers ..................................
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers ..................................
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers ..................................
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S7.12.1.2 Photometry ......................................
Table XVI Red C2 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C3 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C4 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI White C2 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C3 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C4 sheeting photometry .......
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
Table III Application location—Retroreflective
sheeting.
Table III Application spacing—Retroreflective
sheeting.
Table III Application spacing—Retroreflective
sheeting.
Table III Trailer rear .........................................
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White ........
Table III Trailer rear—Element 3—Alternating
S5.7.1.4.1(a) ......................................................
Table III Trailer rear—Element 1—Alternating
S5.7.1.4.1(b) ......................................................
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White—requirement.
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White—requirement.
Table III Trailer rear—Element 3—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating ....................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S5.7.1.3 Sheeting pattern, dimensions, and relative coefficients of retroreflection.
S5.7.1.3(b) .........................................................
S5.7.1.3(c) ..........................................................
S5.7.1.3(d) .........................................................
S5.7.1.4(a) .........................................................
S5.7.1.4(b) .........................................................
S5.7.1.4(c) ..........................................................
S5.7.1.4.1(b) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.1(c) .......................................................
S5.7.1.4.2 Side of trailers ..................................
S5.7.1.4.2(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.2(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.2(b) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors .......................
S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors .......................
S5.7.1.4.3(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(a) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(b) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(b) ......................................................
S5.7.1.4.3(b) ......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S5.7.1.4.3(b) ......................................................
S5.7.1.5 Certification ..........................................
S5.7.1.5 Certification ..........................................
S5.7.2 Reflex reflectors .....................................
S5.7.2 Reflex reflectors .....................................
S5.7.2.1 ..............................................................
S5.7.2.1(a) .........................................................
S5.7.2.1(a) .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor .......................................
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White ......
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
S6.5.1.1 DOT marking—conspicuity sheeting
S7.12.1.1 Certification marking ........................
S7.12.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors ...............
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
PO 00000
Frm 00134
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.2.3.8.2 Retroreflective sheeting.
S8.2.1.7 Photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C2 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C3 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C4 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C2 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C3 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C4 sheeting photometry.
S8.2.1.2 Performance requirements.
S8.2.1.4.1 Alternating red and white materials.
S8.2.1.4.1.1 Segments.
S8.2.1.4.1.2 Proportion.
S8.2.1.2 Performance requirements.
S8.2.1.5 Application location.
S8.2.1.6 Application spacing.
S8.2.1.6 Application spacing.
S8.2.3.1 Trailer rear.
S8.2.3.1.2 Element 2—white & Exceptions.
S8.2.3.1.3 Element 3—alternating red and
white materials & Exceptions.
S8.2.3.1.1 Element 1—alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.3.1.2.1 Upper corners.
S8.2.3.1.2.2 Non rectangular body.
S8.2.3.1.3.2 Underride device.
S8.2.3.2 Trailer side—alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.3.2.1 Horizontal strip.
S8.2.3.2.2 Non-continuous.
S8.2.3.2.3 Obstructions.
S8.2.4 Conspicuity system installation on
truck tractors.
S8.2.4.1 Element 1—alternating red and white
materials.
S8.2.4.1.1 Lower horizontal.
S8.2.4.1.2 Mudflap mounting.
S8.2.4.1.3 Mounting alternatives.
S8.2.4.1.4 Obstruction.
S8.2.4.2 Element 2—white.
S8.2.4.2.1 Obstruction.
S8.2.4.2.2 Symmetrical relocation.
S8.2.4.2.3 Window mounting.
S6.5.1.1 DOT marking—conspicuity sheeting.
S8.2.1.3 Certification marking.
S8.2.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
S14.2.3.8.1 Reflex reflectors.
S8.2.2.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S8.2.2.3.1 Red reflectors.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68367
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.7.2.1(a) .........................................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S5.7.2.1(a) .........................................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S5.7.2.1(b) .........................................................
S5.7.2.1(b) .........................................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
Table XVI Red conspicuity reflex reflector
photometry.
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S8.2.2.3.2 White reflectors—horizontal orientation.
S8.2.2.3.3 White reflectors—vertical orientation.
S8.2.2.3.1 Red reflectors.
Table XVI–b Red conspicuity reflex reflector
photometry.
S8.2.2.3.2 White reflectors—horizontal orientation.
Table XVI–b White horizontal conspicuity reflex reflector photometry.
S8.2.2.3.3 White reflectors—vertical orientation.
Table XVI–b White vertical conspicuity reflex
reflector photometry.
S8.2.2.2 Application pattern.
S8.2.2.2.1 Alternating red and white materials.
S5.7.2.1(c) ..........................................................
S5.7.2.1(c) ..........................................................
S5.7.2.1(d) .........................................................
S5.7.2.1(d) .........................................................
S5.7.2.2 ..............................................................
S5.7.2.2(a) .........................................................
S5.7.2.2(b) .........................................................
S5.7.2.3 Certification ..........................................
S5.7.3 Combination of sheeting and reflectors
S5.8 Replacement equipment ...........................
S5.8.1 .................................................................
S5.8.2 .................................................................
S5.8.3 .................................................................
S5.8.4 .................................................................
S5.8.5 .................................................................
S5.8.6 .................................................................
S5.8.7 .................................................................
S5.8.8 .................................................................
S5.8.9 .................................................................
S5.8.10 ...............................................................
S5.8.11 ...............................................................
S6 Subreferenced SAE Standards and Recommended Practices.
S6.1 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.2 ....................................................................
S6.3 ....................................................................
Table XVI White horizontal conspicuity reflex
reflector photometry.
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
Table XVI White vertical conspicuity reflex reflector photometry.
Table III Application pattern .............................
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
Table III Application pattern—White—Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
S7.12.2.1 Certification marking ........................
S7.12 Conspicuity systems ..............................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7.1 General requirements ...........................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.5.1.2 DOT marking—except headlamps ....
S18 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S5 References to SAE publications .................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7 Headlighting requirements ...........................
S7.1 ....................................................................
S7.2(a) ...............................................................
S7.2(b) ...............................................................
S7.2(c) ................................................................
S7.2(d) ...............................................................
S7.2(d) ...............................................................
S7.2(e) ...............................................................
S7.2(e) ...............................................................
S5.1 Recommended=mandatory .....................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.2.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.4.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.5.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.6.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.8.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.10.2 Physical tests ......................................
S7.11.3 Physical tests ......................................
S7.13.2 Physical test requirements .................
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S8 Headlighting system requirements .............
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ........................................
S17.1 Trademark .............................................
S17.2 Voltage and trade number .....................
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ........................................
S18 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S7.3 Sealed beam headlighting system ............
S7.3 ....................................................................
S7.3 ....................................................................
S7.3.1 .................................................................
S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system ...................
S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system ...................
S9 Sealed beam headlamp requirements .......
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type A .......
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00135
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S8.2.2.2.2 White material.
S8.2.2.1 Certification marking.
S8.2 Conspicuity systems.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7.1 General requirements.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.5.1.2 DOT marking—except headlamps.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements.
S5 References to SAE publications.
S5.1 Recommended=mandatory.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.4.14 Physical tests.
S7.5.14 Physical tests.
S7.6.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.8.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1 External mount.
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount.
S8.1.12 Physical tests.
S7.10.14 Physical tests.
S7.11.14 Physical tests.
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S10 Headlighting system requirements.
S10.1.1 Vehicles ex motorcycles & trailers.
S6.5.1 DOT marking.
S6.5.3.1 Trademark.
S6.5.3.2 Voltage and trade number.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming.
S14.2.5.2 Glare area.
S6.5.1 DOT marking.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements.
S10.13 Sealed beam headlighting system.
Redundant—eliminated.
Redundant—eliminated.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type A.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68368
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.3.2(a)(3) ........................................................
S7.3.2(a)(3) ........................................................
S7.3.2(b) ............................................................
S7.3.2(c) .............................................................
S7.3.2(c) .............................................................
S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system ..................
S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system ..................
S7.3.8(b) ............................................................
S7.3.8(b) ............................................................
S7.3.8(c)(1) ........................................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test ..............
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—performance requirements.
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type B .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type C .......
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type D .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type E .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type F .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring (type F sealed
beam).
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Retaining ring test—procedure .....
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—performance requirements.
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type G .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(c)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.8(d) ............................................................
Table XXIII Torque deflection test ...................
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S7.3.2(d) ............................................................
S7.3.2(d) ............................................................
S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system ...................
S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system ...................
S7.3.3(a) ............................................................
S7.3.3(a) ............................................................
S7.3.3(b) ............................................................
S7.3.3(b) ............................................................
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system ...................
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system ...................
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system ...................
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system ...................
S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system ...................
S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system ...................
S7.3.5(a) ............................................................
S7.3.5(a) ............................................................
S7.3.5(b) ............................................................
S7.3.5(b) ............................................................
S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system ...................
S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system ...................
S7.3.6(a) ............................................................
S7.3.6(a) ............................................................
S7.3.6(b) ............................................................
S7.3.6(b) ............................................................
S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system ...................
S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system ...................
S7.3.7(b) ............................................................
S7.3.7(b) ............................................................
S7.3.7(b) ............................................................
S7.3.7(d) ............................................................
S7.3.7(e)(1) ........................................................
S7.3.7(e)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.7(e)(5) ........................................................
S7.3.7(e)(7) ........................................................
S7.3.7(f) .............................................................
S7.3.7(g) ............................................................
S7.3.7(g) ............................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.3.7(h) ............................................................
S7.3.7(h)(1) ........................................................
S7.3.7(h)(1) ........................................................
S7.3.7(h)(2) ........................................................
S7.3.7(i) ..............................................................
S7.3.7(i) ..............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00136
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.6.15 Headlamp connector test.
S10.13.4.1 Vibration.
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type B.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.1 Installation.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type C.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type D.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type E.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type F.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring (type F sealed
beam).
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral beam, and combination.
S14.6.14.1 Procedure.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim.
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim.
S10.13.4.1 Vibration.
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type G.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.4.2 Retaining ring test ex types G &
H.
S14.6.13 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.13.1 Procedure.
S14.6.13.1.1 Mounting.
S14.6.13.1.2 Deflectometers.
S14.6.13.1.3 Deflectometer adapters.
S14.6.13.1.4 Torque.
S10.13.4.1 Vibration.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68369
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.3.8(d) ............................................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—performance requirements.
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S9.1 Installation ................................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type H .......
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S10 Integral beam headlamp requirements ....
S10.1 Installation ..............................................
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S10.1 Installation ..............................................
S10.6 Photometry ............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system.
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system—simultaneous activation.
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #5M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #4V photometry .........
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system U & L.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—2 lamp
system.
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5.6.6 Beam contributor photometry .........
S7.3.8(e) ............................................................
S7.3.8(e) ............................................................
S7.3.8(f) .............................................................
S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system ...................
S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system ...................
S7.3.9(a) ............................................................
S7.3.9(a) ............................................................
S7.3.9(b) ............................................................
S7.3.9(b) ............................................................
S7.3.9(c) .............................................................
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System ..........
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System ..........
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System ..........
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System ..........
S7.4(a) ...............................................................
S7.4(a) ...............................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(i) ........................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(i) ........................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(iii) ......................................................
S7.4(a)(1)(iii) ......................................................
S7.4(a)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(a)(2)(i) ........................................................
S7.4(a)(2)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(a)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(a)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(a)(3) ...........................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.4(a)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(a)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(b) ...............................................................
S7.4(b) ...............................................................
S7.4(c)(1) ...........................................................
S7.4(c)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(d) ...............................................................
S7.4(d) ...............................................................
S7.4(e) ...............................................................
S7.4(f)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
S7.4(g)
................................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
S7.4(h)(1) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(1) ...........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table II Integral beam headlamps—beam
contributor system.
Table II footnote 6 ............................................
Omitted .............................................................
S8.1.3 Vertical headlamp arrangement ...........
S8.1.4 Horizontal headlamp arrangement .......
S10.4 Markings ................................................
S10.4 Markings ................................................
S10.3 Simultaneous aim ..................................
Table II footnote 2 ............................................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S10.2 Aimability ...............................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Sealing test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
PO 00000
Frm 00137
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S10.13.1 Installation.
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type H.
S10.13.3 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.13.4.1 Wattage.
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S10.14 Integral beam headlighting.
S10.14.1 Installation.
Redundant—eliminated.
Redundant—eliminated.
S10.14.1 Installation.
S10.14.6 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system.
S6.1.5.2.3.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system—simultaneous activation.
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry.
Table XIX–b Lower beam #5M photometry.
Table XIX–c Lower beam #4V photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system U & L.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—2 lamp
system.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2.5.9 Beam contributor photometry measurements.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—beam
contributor system.
Table II footnote 6.
Table II footnote 7.
S6.1.3.5.1 Vertical headlamp arrangement.
S6.1.3.5.2 Horizontal headlamp arrangement.
S10.14.4 Markings.
S10.14.4 Markings.
S10.14.3 Simultaneous aim.
Table II footnote 2.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S10.14.2 Aimability.
S10.14.7.1 Corrosion test.
S10.14.7.2 Sealing test.
S10.14.7.2 Dust test.
S10.14.7.2 Humidity test.
S10.14.7.3 Abrasion test.
S10.14.7.4 Chemical resistance test.
S10.14.7.5 Internal heat test.
S10.15.7.1 Corrosion test.
S10.15.7.1 Dust test.
S10.15.7.1 Humidity test.
S10.15.7.2 Abrasion test.
S10.15.7.3 Chemical resistance test.
S10.15.7.4 Internal heat test.
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.3 Abrasion test.
S10.15.7.2 Abrasion test.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68370
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.4(h)(1); S8.1 .................................................
Table XXIII Abrasion test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Corrosion-connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion-connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion-connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion-connector test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Dust test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Internal heat test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Humidity test—performance requirements.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—performance requirements.
S10.5 Additional light sources .........................
S11 Replaceable bulb headlamp requirements
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S11.1 Installation ..............................................
S11.6 Photometry ............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S8.1.3 Vertical headlamp arrangement ...........
S8.1.4 Horizontal headlamp arrangement .......
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—without HB2.
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Omitted .............................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
Omitted .............................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—with HB2.
S7.4(h)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(2) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(2); S8.1 .................................................
S7.4(h)(2); S8.1 .................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(3); S8.1 .................................................
S7.4(h)(4) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(4) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(4); S8.1 .................................................
S7.4(h)(5)(i) ........................................................
S7.4(h)(5)(i) ........................................................
S7.4(h)(5)(i); S8.1 ..............................................
S7.4(h)(5)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(h)(5)(ii) .......................................................
S7.4(h)(5)(ii); S8.1 .............................................
S7.4(h)(6) ...........................................................
S7.4(h)(6)
S7.4(h)(6)
S7.4(h)(7)
S7.4(h)(7)
S7.4(h)(7)
...........................................................
...........................................................
...........................................................
...........................................................
...........................................................
S7.4(i) .................................................................
S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlighting system .....
S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlighting system .....
S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlighting system .....
S7.5(a) ...............................................................
S7.5(b) ...............................................................
S7.5(b) ...............................................................
S7.5(c) ................................................................
S7.5(d) ...............................................................
S7.5(d) ...............................................................
S7.5(d) ...............................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.5(d) ...............................................................
S7.5(d)(1) ...........................................................
S7.5(d)(2) ...........................................................
S7.5(d)(3)(i)(A) ...................................................
S7.5(d)(3)(i)(B) ...................................................
S7.5(d)(3)(ii)(A) ..................................................
S7.5(d)(3)(ii)(B) ..................................................
S7.5(e) ...............................................................
S7.5(e) ...............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00138
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.6.1.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.6 Chemical resistance—reflector.
S10.15.7.5 Chemical resistance—reflector.
S10.14.7.4 Chemical resistance test.
S10.15.7.3 Chemical resistance test.
S14.6.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.10.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.6 Corrosion resistance—reflector.
S10.15.7.5 Corrosion resistance—reflector.
S14.6.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.4.2.1 Corrosion.
S14.6.4.2.2 Adhesion.
S14.6.4.2.3 Terminal corrosion.
S10.14.7.1 Corrosion test.
S10.15.7.1 Corrosion test.
S14.6.11.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.2 Dust test.
S10.15.7.1 Dust test.
S14.6.5.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.1 Temperature cycle test.
S10.15.7.1 Temperature cycle test.
S14.6.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.5 Internal heat test.
S10.15.7.4 Internal heat test.
S14.6.6.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.7.2 Performance requirements.
S10.14.7.2 Humidity test.
S10.15.7.1 Humidity test.
S10.14.7.1 Vibration test.
S10.15.7.1 Vibration test.
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements.
S10.14.5 Additional light sources.
S10.15 Replaceable bulb headlighting system.
Redundant—eliminated.
Redundant—eliminated.
S10.15.1 Installation.
S10.15.6 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S6.1.3.5.1 Vertical headlamp arrangement.
S6.1.3.5.2 Horizontal headlamp arrangement.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—without HB2.
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.15.4.1.1 Exception.
S10.15.4.1 U & L.
S10.15.4.1.1 Exception.
S10.15.4.1 U & L.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—with HB2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68371
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.5(e)(1) ...........................................................
S7.5(e)(2) ...........................................................
S7.5(e)(3)(i) ........................................................
S7.5(e)(3)(ii) .......................................................
S7.5(f) ................................................................
S7.5(g) ...............................................................
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.4 Replacement equipment ........................
S17.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp markings ..
S7.5(h) ...............................................................
S7.5(i) .................................................................
S7.5(i) .................................................................
S7.7 Replaceable light sources .........................
S7.7(a) ...............................................................
S7.7(b) ...............................................................
S7.7(b) ...............................................................
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Sealing test—performance requirements.
S11.3 Additional light sources .........................
S12 Combination headlamps ...........................
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S12.1 Installation ..............................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Combination headlamps—2 lamp system.
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
Table II Combination headlamps—4 lamp system.
S15 Replaceable light sources ........................
S15.1 Markings ................................................
S15.2 Power and flux measurement ...............
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.15.4.1 U & L.
S10.15.4.1 U & L.
S10.15.3 Replacement equipment.
S6.5.3.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp markings.
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions.
S10.15.7 Physical tests.
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements.
S7.7(b)
S7.7(b)
S7.7(b)
S7.7(b)
S7.7(b)
S7.7(b)
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S7.5(j) .................................................................
S7.6 Combination Headlighting System ............
S7.6 Combination Headlighting System ............
S7.6 Combination Headlighting System ............
S7.6.1 .................................................................
S7.6.2 .................................................................
S7.6.2 .................................................................
S7.6.2 .................................................................
S7.6.2 .................................................................
S7.6.2.1 ..............................................................
S7.6.2.1 ..............................................................
S7.6.2.2 ..............................................................
S7.6.2.2 ..............................................................
S7.6.3 .................................................................
S7.6.3 .................................................................
S7.6.3 .................................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
S7.7(b) ...............................................................
S7.7(c) ................................................................
S7.7(c) ................................................................
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
S7.7(d) ...............................................................
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
S15.6 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—performance requirements.
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S7.7(d)
S7.7(d)
S7.7(e)
S7.7(f)
S7.7(g)
S7.7(g)
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
................................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
S15.3 Power and flux measurement ...............
S15.4 Ballast markings ....................................
S15.5 Gas discharge laboratory life ................
S15.6 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle
S7.7(c) ................................................................
S7.7(c) ................................................................
S7.7(c) ................................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.7(c) ................................................................
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements ......
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements ......
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
Frm 00139
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S10.15.5. Additional light sources.
S10.16 Combination headlighting system.
Redundant—eliminated.
Redundant—eliminated.
S10.16.1 Installation.
S10.16.2 Photometry.
S10.16.3.1 Type F sealed beam.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–b Combination headlamps—2 lamp
system.
S10.16.2 Photometry.
S10.16.3.2 Integral beam.
S10.16.2 Photometry.
S10.16.3.3 Replaceable bulb.
S10.16.2 Photometry.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
Table II–b Combination headlamps—4 lamp
system.
S11 Replaceable light sources.
S11.1 Markings.
S11.4.2 Power & Luminous flux tests.
S14.7.3 Replaceable light source power and
flux measurement procedure.
S14.7.3.1 Seasoning.
S14.7.3.1.1 Resistive filament source.
S14.7.3.1.2 Discharge source.
S14.7.3.2 Test voltage.
S14.7.3.3 Luminous flux measurement.
S14.7.3.3.1 Resistive filament light source
setup.
S14.7.3.3.2 Discharge light source setup.
S11.4.1 Pressure test.
S14.7.2 Pressure test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.2.1 Procedure.
S14.7.2.1.1 Force application.
S14.7.2.1.2 Application sequence.
S14.7.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.7.3 Replaceable light source power and
flux measurement procedure.
S14.7.3.1 Seasoning.
S14.7.3.1.1 Resistive filament source.
S14.7.3.1.2 Discharge source.
S14.7.3.2 Test voltage.
S14.7.3.3 Luminous flux measurement.
S14.7.3.3.1 Resistive filament light source
setup.
S14.7.3.3.2 Discharge light source setup.
S11.4.2 Power & Luminous flux tests.
S11.2 Ballast markings.
S11.3 Gas discharge laboratory life.
S11.4.1 Deflection test.
S14.7.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.17 Aiming adjustment test—laboratory.
S14.6.18 Aiming adjustment test—on vehicle.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68372
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements ......
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
S14.6 Optical axis marking ..............................
S14.6.2 Optical axis marking—lamp ................
S14.6.1 Optical axis marking—vehicle ............
S14.6.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S14.1 Headlamp mounting and aiming ...........
S14.4 Aim adjustment interaction ....................
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
S14.4 Aim adjustment interaction ....................
S14.5 Horizontal adjustment—visually aimed
headlamp.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
S14.7 Moveable reflectors ...............................
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
S14.7 Moveable reflectors ...............................
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S10.2 Aimability ...............................................
S14.3 Headlamp aiming systems ....................
S14.8 External aiming ......................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Torque deflection test ...................
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Inward force test ...........................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Inward force test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion test—procedure ............
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—procedure
S7.8.1 .................................................................
S7.8.1(a) ............................................................
S7.8.1(b) ............................................................
S7.8.1(c) .............................................................
S7.8.2 .................................................................
S7.8.2.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.2.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.2.1(b) .........................................................
S7.8.2.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.2.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.2.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.2.2(a) .........................................................
S7.8.2.2(a) .........................................................
S7.8.2.2(b) .........................................................
S7.8.2.2(b) .........................................................
S7.8.2.2(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.2.2(d) .........................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.3 .................................................................
S7.8.4 .................................................................
S7.8.4 .................................................................
S7.8.4 .................................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.8.5 .................................................................
S7.8.5 .................................................................
S7.8.5 .................................................................
S7.8.5 .................................................................
S7.8.5 .................................................................
S7.8.5.1 External aiming ....................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(a) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(b)
S7.8.5.1(b)
S7.8.5.1(b)
S7.8.5.1(b)
.........................................................
.........................................................
.........................................................
.........................................................
S7.8.5.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.5.1(c) ..........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00140
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.6.18.2 Performance requirements.
S10.18.5 Optical axis marking.
S10.18.5.2 Optical axis marking—lamp.
S10.18.5.1 Optical axis marking—vehicle.
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S10.18.1 Headlamp mounting and aiming.
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment interaction.
S14.6.18.2.3 Aim interaction.
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment interaction.
S10.18.4
Horizontal
adjustment—visually
aimed headlamp.
S14.6.18.2.3 Aim interaction.
S14.6.17.2 Performance requirements.
S10.18.6 Moveable reflector requirements.
S14.6.17.2.3 Moveable reflector.
S10.18.6 Moveable reflector requirements.
S14.2.5.10.1.
S14.6.17.2.3 Moveable reflector.
S14.6.17.2 Performance requirements.
S14.2.5.10.2.
S14.6.18.1.2 Vehicle pitch.
S14.6.18.2.1 Vertical range.
S14.6.18.2.2 Continuous vertical adjustment.
S14.6.17.2.1 Sealed beam except Type F.
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral beam, and combination.
S14.2.5.10.3.
S14.6.17.2.1 Sealed beam except Type F.
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral beam, and combination.
S6.2.3 Headlamp Obstructions.
S6.2.3.1 Coverings.
S6.2.3.2 Wipers.
S10.2 Aiming.
S10.18.2 Headlamp aiming systems.
S10.18.7 External aiming.
S10.14.7.7 Torque deflection test.
S10.15.7.6 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.13 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.13.1 Procedure.
S14.6.13.1.1 Mounting.
S14.6.13.1.2 Deflectometers.
S14.6.13.1.3 Deflectometer adapters.
S14.6.13.1.4 Torque.
S14.6.13.1.5 Torque application.
S14.6.13.1.6 Group I aiming pads.
S14.6.13.1.7 Group II aiming pads.
S14.6.13.1.8 Non-adjustable locating plates.
S14.6.13.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.12 Inward force test.
S10.14.7.1 Inward force test.
S10.15.7.1 Inward force test.
S14.6.12.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.8.6.1 Procedure.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68373
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.8.5.1(c) ..........................................................
Table XXIII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—performance requirements.
S14.8.1 Headlamp aiming device locating
plates.
S14.8.1.1 Aiming pads .....................................
S14.8.1.2 Aiming dimension marking ..............
S14.8.2 Nonadjustable headlamp aiming device locating plates.
S14.9 On-vehicle aiming ..................................
S14.9.1 Aim ......................................................
S14.9.1.1 Vertical aim ......................................
S14.9.1.1.1 Graduations ..................................
S14.9.1.1.2 VHAD markings ............................
S14.9.1.1.3 Graduation scale ..........................
S14.9.1.1.4 Vertical indicator range .................
S14.9.1.1.5 Floor slope compensation ............
S14.9.1.1.6 Graduation legibility ......................
S14.9.1.2 Horizontal aim ..................................
S14.9.1.2.1 Graduation scale ..........................
S14.9.1.2.2 Horizontal markings ......................
S14.9.1.2.3 Graduation legibility ......................
S14.9.1.2.4 Horizontal indicator range ............
S14.9.2 Aiming instructions .............................
S14.9.2.1 Aiming instruction location and content.
S14.9.2.2 Remote indicator instructions ..........
S14.4.1 Excess aim interaction .......................
S14.9.3 Permanent calibrations .......................
S14.9.5 Physical tests ......................................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.2(b) Aiming—VHAD ...........................
S7.8.5.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.5.1(d) .........................................................
S7.8.5.1(d)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.1(d)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.1(e) .........................................................
S7.8.5.2 On-vehicle aiming ................................
S7.8.5.2(a) Aim ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1) Vertical axis ................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(ii) .................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(iii) ................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(iv) ................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(v) .................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(vi) ................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(2) Horizontal aim .............................
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(ii) .................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(iii) ................................................
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(iv) ................................................
S7.8.5.2(b) Aiming instructions ..........................
S7.8.5.2(b)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(b)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(b)(3) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(c) ..........................................................
S7.8.5.2(d) Testing the VHAD ...........................
S7.8.5.2(d)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii) .................................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(D) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E) ............................................
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E) ............................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E) ............................................
S7.8.5.3 Visual/optical aiming ............................
S7.8.5.3(a) Vertical aim, lower beam ................
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) Vertical position of cutoff ............
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) Vertical position of cutoff ............
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) Vertical position of cutoff ............
S7.8.5.3(a)(2) Vertical gradient ..........................
S7.8.5.3(a)(3) Horizontal position of the cutoff ..
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S14.9.4 Replacement units ..............................
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test .........
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII .......................................................
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation test ..
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation
test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation
test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test ...
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test—
procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test—
performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test ...............
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test .....................
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test ..................
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test—performance requirements.
S14.10 Visual/optical aiming ............................
S14.10.1 Vertical aim, lower beam ..................
S14.10.1.1 Vertical position of the cutoff .........
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S14.10.1.2 Vertical gradient .............................
S14.10.1.3 Horizontal position of the cutoff .....
PO 00000
Frm 00141
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.6.2 Performance requirements.
S10.18.7.1 Headlamp aiming device locating
plates.
S10.18.7.1.1 Aiming pads.
S10.18.7.1.2 Aiming dimension marking.
S10.18.7.2 Nonadjustable headlamp aiming
device locating plates.
S10.18.8 On-vehicle aiming.
S10.18.8.1 Aim.
S10.18.8.1.1 Vertical aim.
S10.18.8.1.1.1 Graduations.
S10.18.8.1.1.2 VHAD markings.
S10.18.8.1.1.3 Graduation scale.
S10.18.8.1.1.4 Vertical indicator range.
S10.18.8.1.1.5 Floor slope compensation.
S10.18.8.1.1.6 Graduation legibility.
S10.18.8.1.2 Horizontal aim.
S10.18.8.1.2.1 Graduation scale.
S10.18.8.1.2.2 Horizontal markings.
S10.18.8.1.2.3 Graduation legibility.
S10.18.8.1.2.4 Horizontal indicator range.
S10.18.8.2 Aiming instructions.
S10.18.8.2.1 Aiming instruction location and
content.
S10.18.8.2.2 Remote indicator instructions.
S10.18.3.1 Excess aim interaction.
S10.18.8.3 Permanent calibration.
S10.18.8.5 Physical tests.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming.
S14.2.5.5.2 Mechanically aimable headlamps
equipped with a VHAD.
S10.18.8.4 Replacement units.
S14.8.2 Scale graduation test.
S14.8.2.1 Procedure.
S14.8.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.1 Samples.
S14.8.3 Cold scale graduation test.
S14.8.3.1 Procedure.
S14.8.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.4 Hot scale graduation test.
S14.8.4.1 Procedure.
S14.8.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.5 Thermal cycle test.
S14.8.5.1 Procedure.
S14.8.5.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.6 Corrosion test.
S14.8.7 Photometry test.
S14.8.7.1 Procedure.
S14.8.7.2 Performance requirements.
S10.18.9 Visual/optical aiming.
S10.18.9.1 Vertical aim, lower beam.
S10.18.9.1.1 Vertical position of the cutoff.
S14.2.5.5.3.1 VOL.
S14.2.5.5.3.2 VOR.
S10.18.9.1.2 Vertical gradient.
S10.18.9.1.3 Horizontal position of the cutoff.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68374
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.8.5.3(a)(4) Maximum inclination of cutoff .....
S14.10.1.4 Maximum inclination of the cutoff ..
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(i) ..................................................
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(ii) .................................................
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(iii) ................................................
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(iv) ................................................
S7.8.5.3(b) Horizontal aim, lower beam ............
S7.8.5.3(b) Horizontal aim, lower beam ............
S14.10.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ....
S14.10.1.5.1 Test position ...............................
S14.10.1.5.2 Headlamp aiming ........................
S14.10.1.5.3 Beam scanning ...........................
S14.10.1.5.4 Gradient calculation ....................
S14.10.2 Horizontal aim, lower beam ..............
S6.8.5.6.2(d) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(c) Vertical aim, upper beam ................
S7.8.5.3(c)(1) .....................................................
S14.10.3 Vertical aim, upper beam .................
S14.10.3.1 Combined upper and lower beams
S7.8.5.3(c)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(c)(2) .....................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S14.10.3.2 Upper beam without lower beam ..
S7.8.5.3(c)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(d) Horizontal aim, upper beam ...........
S7.8.5.3(d)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(d)(1) .....................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S14.10.4 Horizontal aim, upper beam .............
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S14.10.4.1 Combined upper and lower beams
S7.8.5.3(d)(2) .....................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(d)(2) .....................................................
S14.10.4.2 Upper beam without lower beam ..
S7.8.5.3(d)(3) .....................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(d)(3) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(iv) .................................................
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(v) ..................................................
S14.10.4.3 Upper beam without lower beam
of VHAD.
S14.10.5 Photometric measurements ..............
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S14.6.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6.2 VOR/VO markings on sealed
beams.
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6 Visual/optical identification marking
S7.9.1(b) ............................................................
S7.9.2 .................................................................
S7.9.2 .................................................................
S7.9.2(a) ............................................................
S7.9.2(b) ............................................................
S7.9.3 .................................................................
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S13 Motorcycle headlamp requirements .........
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S13.2 Photometry ............................................
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S6.8.5.6.2(i) Aiming—Motorcycle UB ..............
S7.9.4.1 ..............................................................
S13.5 Motorcycle headlamp modulation system.
S13.5.1(a) Rate ................................................
S13.5.1(b) Maximum power .............................
S13.5.1(c) Minimum intensity ...........................
S13.5.1(d) Wiring .............................................
S13.5.1(e) Failure mode ..................................
S13.5.1(f) Sensor .............................................
S13.5.1(g) Voltage drop ...................................
S13.5.1(h) Full voltage operation .....................
S13.5.2 Replacement modulators ....................
S13.5.2.1 Replacement performance ..............
S13.5.2.2 Replacement instructions ................
S13.4 Motorcycle replaceable bulb headlamp
marking.
S13.1 Installation ..............................................
S13.1.1 Single headlamp .................................
S13.1.2 Two headlamps with both beams ......
S10.18.9.1.4 Maximum inclination of the cutoff.
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter.
S10.18.9.1.5.1 Test position.
S10.18.9.1.5.2 Headlamp aiming.
S10.18.9.1.5.3 Beam scanning.
S10.18.9.1.5.4 Gradient calculation.
S10.18.9.2 Horizontal aim, lower beam.
S14.2.5.5.4 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps—horizontal aim.
S10.18.9.3 Vertical aim, upper beam.
S10.18.9.3.1 Combined upper and lower
beams.
S14.2.5.5.5.1 Combined UB & LB.
S10.18.9.3.2 Upper beam without lower
beam.
S14.2.5.5.5.2 Non-combined UB & LB.
S10.18.9.4 Horizontal aim, upper beam.
S14.2.5.5.6.1 Combined UB & LB.
S10.18.9.4.1 Combined upper and lower
beams.
S14.2.5.5.6.2 Non-combined UB & LB with
VHAD.
S10.18.9.4.2 Upper beam without lower
beam.
S14.2.5.5.6.3 Non-combined UB & LB without
VHAD.
S10.18.9.4.3 Upper beam without lower beam
of VHAD.
S10.18.9.5 Photometry.
S14.2.5.5 Aiming.
S14.2.5.5.3.1 VOL.
S14.2.5.5.3.2 VOR.
S14.2.5.5.5.1 Combined UB &LB.
S14.2.5.5.5.2 Non-combined UB & LB.
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings.
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings.
S10.18.9.6.2 VOR/VO markings on sealed
beams.
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings.
S10.18.9.6 Visual/optical identification marking.
S6.1.3.5.3 Motorcycle headlamp arrangement.
S10.17 Motorcycle headlighting system.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S10.17.3 Photometry.
S10.1.2 Motorcycles.
S14.2.5.5.8 Motorcycle headlamp—upper
beam headlamps designed to comply with
Table XX.
S10.17.5 Motorcycle headlamp modulation
system.
S10.17.5.1(a) Rate.
S10.17.5.1(b) Maximum power.
S10.17.5.1(c) Minimum intensity.
S10.17.5.1(d) Wiring.
S10.17.5.1(e) Failure mode.
S10.17.5.1(f) Sensor.
S10.17.5.1(g) Voltage drop.
S10.17.5.1(h) Full voltage operation.
S10.17.5.2 Replacement modulators.
S10.17.5.2.1 Replacement performance.
S10.17.5.2.2 Replacement instructions.
S10.17.2
Motorcycle
replaceable
bulb
headlamp marking.
S10.17.1 Installation.
S10.17.1.1 Single headlamp.
S10.17.1.2 Two headlamps with both beams.
S7.8.5.3(e)(1) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(e)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(e)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(e)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(e)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(e)(2) .....................................................
S7.8.5.3(f)(1) ......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(i) ...................................................
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(ii) ..................................................
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(iii) .................................................
S7.9.4.1(a) .........................................................
S7.9.4.1(b) .........................................................
S7.9.4.1(c) ..........................................................
S7.9.4.1(d) .........................................................
S7.9.4.1(e) .........................................................
S7.9.4.1(f) ..........................................................
S7.9.4.1(g) .........................................................
S7.9.4.1(h) .........................................................
S7.9.4.2(a) .........................................................
S7.9.4.2(a) .........................................................
S7.9.4.2(b) .........................................................
S7.9.5 .................................................................
S7.9.6.1 ..............................................................
S7.9.6.2(a) .........................................................
S7.9.6.2(b) .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00142
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68375
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.9.6.2(c) ..........................................................
S13.1.3 Two headlamps, upper beam and
lower beam.
Table XXIII Abrasion test .................................
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test ...............
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test ............
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (a).
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure (c).
Table XXIII Dust test ........................................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII .......................................................
S10.17.1.3 Two headlamps, upper beam and
lower beam.
S14.6.1 Abrasion test.
S14.6.1.1 Procedure.
S14.6.1.1.2 Abrading pad alignment.
S14.6.1.1.3 Abrasion test procedure.
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad.
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad.
S14.6.1.1.2 Abrading pad alignment.
S14.6.1.1.3 Abrasion test procedure.
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad.
S14.6.2 Chemical resistance test.
S14.6.2.1 Procedure.
S8.2 Abrasion ....................................................
S8.2 Abrasion ....................................................
S8.2(a) ...............................................................
S8.2(b) ...............................................................
S8.2(c)(1) ...........................................................
S8.2(c)(3) ...........................................................
S8.2(c)(4) ...........................................................
S8.2(d) ...............................................................
S8.2(e) ...............................................................
S8.3 Chemical resistance ..................................
S8.3 Chemical resistance ..................................
S8.3(a) ...............................................................
S8.3(b) ...............................................................
S8.3(c) ................................................................
S8.4 Corrosion ...................................................
S8.4 Corrosion ...................................................
S8.4(a) ...............................................................
S8.4(a) ...............................................................
S8.4(a) ...............................................................
S8.4(b) ...............................................................
S8.4(b) ...............................................................
S8.4(b) ...............................................................
S8.4(b) ...............................................................
S8.4(c) ................................................................
S8.5
S8.5
S8.5
S8.5
S8.5
S8.6
Dust ...........................................................
Dust ...........................................................
Dust ...........................................................
Dust ...........................................................
Dust ...........................................................
Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test ...........
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle ..................................
S8.6.2 Internal heat test ....................................
S8.6.2 Internal heat test ....................................
S8.6.2(a) ............................................................
S8.6.2(a) ............................................................
S8.6.2(a) ............................................................
S8.6.2(b) ............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test .................
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Internal heat test ...........................
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
PO 00000
Frm 00143
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.6.2.1.2 Fluid application.
S14.6.2.1.1 Test fluids.
S14.6.2.1.3 Test duration.
S14.6.4 Corrosion—connector test.
S14.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.4.1.1 Connector test.
S10.14.7.2 Connector—corrosion test.
S10.15.7.1 Corrosion—connector test.
S14.6.4.1.2 Salt spray.
S14.6.4.1.3 Cycle.
S14.6.4.1.4 Chamber.
S14.6.4.1.5 Wash.
S14.6.4.1.6 Connector test.
S14.6.5 Dust test.
S14.6.5.1 Procedure.
S14.6.5.1.1 Setup.
S14.6.5.1.2 Cycle.
S14.6.5.1.3 Test duration.
S14.6.6 Temperature cycle test and internal
heat test.
S14.6.6.1 Samples.
S14.6.6.2 General procedure.
S14.6.6.2.1 General activation.
S14.6.6.2.2 Turn signal activation.
S14.6.6.2.3 Headlamp beam activation.
S14.6.6.3 Temperature cycle test.
S14.6.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.3.1.1 Cycle.
S14.6.6.3.1.2 Activation.
S14.6.6.3.1.3 Test chamber(s).
S14.6.6.3.1.4 Vents and drains.
S14.6.6.4 Internal heat test.
S14.6.6.4.1 Procedure.
S14.6.6.4.1.1 Photometric output reduction.
S14.6.6.4.1.2 HB1 or HB2 light sources.
S14.6.6.4.1.3 Photometric measurements.
S14.6.6.4.1.4 Setup.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68376
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S8.6.2(b) ............................................................
S8.6.2(c) .............................................................
S8.7(a) ...............................................................
S8.7(a) ...............................................................
S8.7(b) ...............................................................
S8.7(b) ...............................................................
S8.7(c) ................................................................
S8.7(d) ...............................................................
S8.7(e) ...............................................................
S8.7(f) ................................................................
S8.8 Vibration ....................................................
S8.8 Vibration ....................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
S8.9 Sealing .......................................................
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(a) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(a) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(b) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(b) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(c) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(d) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(e) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(f) ..........
Table XXIII Vibration test .................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Sealing test ...................................
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.2(g) Aiming—Simultaneous aim ........
S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resistance of reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resistance of reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S8.10.1 Chemical resistance .............................
S8.10.1(a) ..........................................................
S8.10.1(b) ..........................................................
S8.10.1(c) ...........................................................
S8.10.2 Corrosion ..............................................
S8.10.2(a) ..........................................................
S8.10.2(b) ..........................................................
S9 Deflection test for replaceable light sources
S9 Deflection test for replaceable light sources
S9 Deflection test for replaceable light sources
S9 Deflection test for replaceable light sources
S9 Deflection test for replaceable light sources
S10(a) ................................................................
S10(a) ................................................................
S10(b) ................................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S10(b) ................................................................
S11 Photometric Test ........................................
S11 Photometric Test ........................................
S12 Headlamp concealment devices ................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.2(g) Aiming—Simultaneous aim ........
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S16 Headlamp concealment device requirements.
PO 00000
Frm 00144
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.6.6.4.1.5 Cycle.
S14.6.6.4.1.6 Cleaning.
S14.6.7.1.1 Test fixture.
S14.6.7.1.2 Headlamp mounting.
S14.6.7.1.3 Setup.
S14.6.7.1.4 Cycle.
S14.6.7.1.5 Air flow test setup.
S14.6.7.1.6 Air flow uniformity.
S14.6.7.1.7 Air flow procedure.
S14.6.7.1.8 Inspection.
S14.6.8 Vibration test.
S14.6.8.2 Procedure.
S14.6.9 Sealing test.
S14.6.9.1 Procedure.
S14.6.9.1.1 Immersion.
S14.6.9.1.2 Pressurized immersion.
S14.6.9.1.3 Cycle.
S14.6.9.1.4 Inspection.
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.10 Chemical resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test.
S14.6.11 Corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test.
S14.6.10.1 Procedure.
S14.6.10.1.2 Fluid application.
S14.6.10.1.1 Test fluids.
S14.6.10.1.3 Test duration.
S14.6.11.1 Procedure.
S14.6.11.1.1 Salt spray.
S14.6.11.1.2 Drying and cleaning.
S14.7.1 Deflection test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.1.1 Procedure.
S14.7.1.1.1 Force application.
S14.7.1.1.2 Application sequence.
S14.7.1.1.3 Measurement.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.5.5.7 Simultaneous aim Type F sealed
beam headlamps and beam contributor integral beam headlamps.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.5.5.7 Simultaneous aim Type F sealed
beam headlamps and beam contributor integral beam headlamps.
S14.2.4.1.
S14.2.4.2.
S12 Headlamp concealment device requirements.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68377
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S12.1
S12.2
S12.3
S12.4
S12.5
..................................................................
..................................................................
..................................................................
..................................................................
..................................................................
S12.6 ..................................................................
S12.7 Certification election ................................
Figure 1a ............................................................
Figure 1a ............................................................
Figure 1a ............................................................
Figure 1a ............................................................
Figure 1a ............................................................
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1a
1b
1b
1b
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
Figure 1b ............................................................
Figure 1b ............................................................
Figure 1b ............................................................
Figure 1b, footnote 1 .........................................
Figure 1b, footnote 2 .........................................
Figure 1c ............................................................
Figure 1c ............................................................
Figure 1c ............................................................
Figure 1c ............................................................
Figure 1c ............................................................
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1c ............................................................
2 ..............................................................
2, footnote 1 ...........................................
2, footnote 1 ...........................................
2, footnote 1 ...........................................
Figure 2, footnote 1 ...........................................
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
4–1 ..........................................................
4–2 ..........................................................
4–3 ..........................................................
4–4 ..........................................................
5 ..............................................................
6 ..............................................................
7 ..............................................................
8 ..............................................................
9 ..............................................................
10 ............................................................
10 ............................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Figure 10 ............................................................
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
10, footnote 1 .........................................
10, footnote 2 .........................................
11 ............................................................
12 ............................................................
13 ............................................................
14 ............................................................
15–1 ........................................................
15–1 ........................................................
15–1 ........................................................
15–1 ........................................................
15–2 ........................................................
15–2 ........................................................
15–2 ........................................................
15–2 ........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S16.1 Power loss during headlamp use ..........
S16.2 Manual device actuation ........................
S16.3 Single step actuation .............................
S16.4 Headlamp aiming and replacement ......
S16.5 Operational temperature range and
time limitation.
S16.6 ECE compliance alternative ..................
S16.7 Certification election ..............................
S7.2.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Zone photometry ....
S7.2.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Zone photometry ....
Table VIII Taillamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
S7.2.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Zone photometry ....
S7.6.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table XII footnote 2 .........................................
Table XII footnote 3 .........................................
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Zone
photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Zone
photometry.
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 5 ............................................................
Figure 6 ............................................................
Figure 7 ............................................................
Figure 8 ............................................................
Figure 9 ............................................................
S7.9.3 Photometry ...........................................
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Individual
point photometry.
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Zone
photometry.
Table XV footnote 4 .........................................
Table XV footnote 2 .........................................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Table XIX Lower beam #1M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #5M photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #1V photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #4V photometry .........
S12.1 Power loss during headlamp use.
S12.2 Manual device actuation.
S12.3 Single step actuation.
S12.4 Headlamp aiming and replacement.
S12.5 Operational temperature range and
time limitation.
S12.6 ECE compliance alternative.
S12.7 Certification election.
S7.2.13 Photometry.
S7.8.13 Photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Group photometry.
S7.2.13 Photometry.
S7.8.13 Photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Group photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
S7.2.13 Photometry.
S7.8.13 Photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Group photometry.
S7.6.13 Photometry.
Table XII footnote 2.
Table XII footnote 3.
Table XII Single lamp system—Group photometry.
Table XII Two lamp system—Each lamp—
Group photometry.
Figure 3.
Figure 3.
Figure 3.
Figure 3.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
S7.9.13 Photometry.
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Individual
point photometry.
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Group
photometry.
Table XV footnote 4.
Table XV footnote 2.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Table XIX–a Lower beam #1M photometry.
Table XIX–b Lower beam #5M photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry.
Table XIX–a Lower beam #1V photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry.
Table XIX–c Lower beam #4V photometry.
PO 00000
Frm 00145
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68378
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
16 ............................................................
17–1 ........................................................
17–1 ........................................................
17–2 ........................................................
17–2 ........................................................
18 ............................................................
19 ............................................................
19, footnote 2 .........................................
20 ............................................................
20, footnote 2 .........................................
21 ............................................................
22 ............................................................
25 ............................................................
26 ............................................................
Figure 26 ............................................................
Figure 26 ............................................................
Figure 26 ............................................................
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
27–1 ........................................................
27–1 ........................................................
27–2 ........................................................
27–2 ........................................................
28–1, Types 1A1, 1C1, and 1G1 ...........
28–1, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1 ...........
28–2, Types 1A1, 1C1, and 1G1 ...........
28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1 and 2G1 ............
28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1 ...........
28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1 ...........
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
29 ............................................................
30–1 ........................................................
30–2 ........................................................
30–3 ........................................................
30–4 ........................................................
31 ............................................................
32 ............................................................
32 ............................................................
Figure 32 ............................................................
Table I ................................................................
Table I ................................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
I ................................................................
II ...............................................................
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
II
II
II
II
II
II
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Figure 14 ..........................................................
Table XIX Lower beam #2M photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #2V photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ..........
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Table V Lens area visibility ..............................
Table V footnote 3 ...........................................
Table V Luminous intensity visibility ................
Table V footnote 4 ...........................................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Figure 15 ..........................................................
Figure 10 ..........................................................
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table XIX Lower beam #3M photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #3V photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #2V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #4M photometry .........
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ..........
S7.12.1.2 Photometry ......................................
Table XVI Red C2 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C3 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C4 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI White C2 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C3 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C4 sheeting photometry .......
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 13 ..........................................................
Table XX Motor driven cycle photometry ........
Table XX Motor driven cycle with single lamp
photometry.
Table XX Motorcycle photometry .....................
S1 Scope ..........................................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S7.14 Associated equipment ...........................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Figure 14.
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2M photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry.
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2V photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Table V–c Lens area visibility.
Table V footnote 3.
Table V–d Luminous intensity visibility.
Table V footnote 4.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Figure 15.
Figure 10.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—without HB2.
Table XIX–b Lower beam #3M photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry.
Table XIX–b Lower beam #3V photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry.
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2V photometry.
Table XIX–b Lower beam #4M photometry.
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry.
S8.2.1.7 Photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C2 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C3 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C4 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C2 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C3 sheeting photometry.
Table XVI–c White C4 sheeting photometry.
Figure 11.
Figure 11.
Figure 11.
Figure 11.
Figure 13.
Table XX Motor driven cycle photometry.
Table XX Motor driven cycle with single lamp
photometry.
Table XX Motorcycle photometry.
S1 Scope.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.1.2 Color.
S6.6.1 All except trailers.
S6.6.2 All except trailers and motorcycles.
S9 Associated equipment requirements.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–b Lighting device.
Table I–a Mounting height.
Table I–b Mounting height.
Table I–a Mounting location.
Table I–b Mounting location.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I–b Number and color.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.1.2 Color.
S6.1.3.1.
S6.1.3.2.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–b Lighting device.
PO 00000
Frm 00146
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68379
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
II ...............................................................
II ...............................................................
II ...............................................................
II ...............................................................
II ...............................................................
II ...............................................................
II heading .................................................
III ..............................................................
III ..............................................................
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
IV
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV ..............................................................
Table IV, footnotes 2 and 3 ...............................
Table IV heading ................................................
Table IV, footnote 1 ...........................................
SAE device documents for photometry distance
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
device documents referencing SAE J575
device documents referencing SAE J575
J186a, Sep 1977, 2.1 ................................
J186a, Sep 1977, 3 ...................................
J186a, Sep 1977, 3 ...................................
J186a, Sep 1977, 3 ...................................
J222, Dec 1970, 2 .....................................
J222, Dec 1970, 3 .....................................
J387, Nov 1987 .........................................
J564a, Apr 1964 ........................................
J564a, Apr 1964 ........................................
J565b, Feb 1969 .......................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J565b, Feb 1969 .......................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969 .......................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 1 ...................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 2 ...................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4 ...................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
S6.1.3.1 Mounting height .................................
S1 Scope ..........................................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S7.14 Associated equipment ...........................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Omitted .............................................................
S6.1.3.1 Mounting height .................................
S4 Definitions—Overall width ..........................
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.1 Physical test requirements ...................
S6.8.5 Photometric tests ..................................
S4 Definitions—High mounted stop lamp ........
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S4 Definitions—Parking lamps ........................
S7.8.2 Physical tests ........................................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S7.14.4 Headlamp beam switching device ......
S7.14.5.1 Indicator size and location ...............
S7.14.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
Table XXI .........................................................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests.
S4 Definitions—Semiautomatic headlamp
beam switching device.
S7.14.4.1.1 Operating instructions ...................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test.
Table I–a Mounting height.
Table I–b Mounting height.
Table I–a Mounting location.
Table I–b Mounting location.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I–b Number and color.
S6.1.4 Mounting height.
S1 Scope.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.1.2 Color.
S6.6.1 All except trailers.
S6.6.2 All except trailers and motorcycles.
S9 Associated equipment requirements.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–b Lighting device.
Table I–c Lighting device.
Table I–a Mounting height.
Table I–b Mounting height.
Table I–c Mounting height.
Table I–a Mounting location.
Table I–b Mounting location.
Table I–c Mounting location.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I–b Number and color.
Table I–c Number and color.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity.
S6.1.2 Color.
S6.1.3.1.
S6.1.3.2.
Table I–a Lighting device.
Table I–b Lighting device.
Table I–c Lighting device.
Table I–a Mounting height.
Table I–b Mounting height.
Table I–c Mounting height.
Table I–a Mounting location.
Table I–b Mounting location.
Table I–c Mounting location.
Table I–a Number and color.
Table I–b Number and color.
Table I–c Number and color.
S14.2.1.6.2 Socket exemption.
S6.1.4 Mounting height.
S4 Definitions—Overall width.
S14.2.1.3 Measurement distance.
PO 00000
Frm 00147
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.1.1 Physical test requirements.
S14.2 Photometric test procedures.
S4 Definitions—High mounted stop lamp.
S7.9.14 Physical tests.
S7.9.14.1 External mount.
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount.
S4 Definitions—Parking lamps.
S7.8.14 Physical tests.
S4 Definitions—Optically combined.
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching device.
S9.5.1 Indicator size, location, and color.
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S9.4.1.7 Physical tests.
S14.9.3.11 Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests.
S4 Definitions—Semiautomatic headlamp
beam switching device.
S9.4.1.1 Operating instructions.
S14.9.3.11.2 Sensitivity test.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68380
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.1 ................................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests—applicable item.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
S7.14.4.1.2 Manual override ............................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
S7.14.4.1.3 Fail safe operation ........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5 ................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.6 ................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00148
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.3.11.2.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.11.2.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.2.3.1 Operating limits.
S14.9.3.11.2.3.2 Sensitivity voids.
S14.9.3.11.2.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.1 Adjustment.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.2 Switching.
S14.9.3.11.2.2.3 Sensitivity curves.
S14.9.3.11.1 Test conditions.
S14.9.3.11.3 Voltage regulation test.
S14.9.3.11.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.3.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.3.1.1 Adjustment.
S14.9.3.11.3.1.2 Measurement.
S9.4.1.2 Manual override.
S14.9.3.11.4 Manual override test.
S14.9.3.11.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.4.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.1 Adjustment.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.2 Exposure.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.3 Override.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.4 Switch to upper beam.
S14.9.3.11.4.1.5 Switch to lower beam.
S14.9.3.11.5 Warmup test.
S14.9.3.11.5.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.5.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.5.1.1 Adjustment.
S14.9.3.11.5.1.2 Measurement.
S9.4.1.3 Fail safe operation.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68381
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9 ................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10 ..............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(a) ..........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(b) ..........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(c) ..........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11 ..............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00149
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.3.11.6 Temperature test.
S14.9.3.11.6.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.6.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.1 Exposure.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.2 Temperature.
S14.9.3.11.6.1.3 Measurement.
S14.9.3.11.7 Dust test.
S14.9.3.11.7.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.7.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.1 Sensitivity.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.2 Dust exposure.
S14.9.3.11.7.1.3 Measurement.
S14.9.3.11.8 Corrosion test.
S14.9.3.11.8.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.8.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.1 Sensitivity.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.2 Applicability.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.3 Sockets.
S14.9.3.11.8.1.4 Measurement.
S14.9.3.11.9 Vibration test.
S14.9.3.11.9.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.9.2.1 Beam switching.
S14.9.3.11.9.2.2 Mechanical aim.
S14.9.3.11.9.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.1 Sensitivity.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.5 Measurement.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.2 Acceleration.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.3 Frequency.
S14.9.3.11.9.1.4 Operation.
S14.9.3.11.10 Sunlight test.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68382
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11 ..............................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
S7.14.4.1.4 Automatic dimming indicator ........
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
S7.14.4.1.5 Lens accessibility ..........................
S7.14.4.1.6 Mounting height ............................
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.2 [fourth sentence] ...................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.3 Laboratory facilities ...............................
Table XXIII Vibration test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion test—procedure ............
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—procedure
S6.8.5.6.3 Positioner ........................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12(a) ..........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12(b) ..........................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.13 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15 ..............................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15 ..............................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J565b, Feb 1969, 4.16 ..............................
J565b, Feb 1969, 4.17 ..............................
J566, Jan 1960, 1 ......................................
J566, Jan 1960, 2 ......................................
J566, Jan 1960, 3 ......................................
J575, Dec 1988, 2.1 ..................................
J575, Dec 1988, 2.3 ..................................
J575, Dec 1988, 2.3 ..................................
J575, Dec 1988, 3 .....................................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.1 ..................................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.4 ..................................
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4 ..................................
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4 ..................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
J575,
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.3 ............................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.3 ............................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.3 ............................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.3 ............................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.3 ............................
J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.4 ............................
J575d, Aug 1967, B ...................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
4.4 ..................................
4.6.2.1 ............................
4.6.2.2 ............................
4.6.2.3 ............................
4.6.2.3.1 .........................
4.6.2.3.1 .........................
4.6.2.3.1 .........................
4.6.2.3.2 .........................
4.6.3 ...............................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00150
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.3.11.10.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.10.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.10.1.1 Exposure.
S14.9.3.11.10.1.2 Rest.
S14.9.3.11.11 Durability test.
S14.9.3.11.11.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.11.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.1 Sensitivity.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.3 Measurement.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.2 Cycle.
S14.9.3.11.11.1.2 Cycle.
S9.4.1.4 Automatic dimming indicator.
S14.9.3.11.12 Return to upper beam test.
S14.9.3.11.12.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.12.1 Procedure.
S14.9.3.11.12.1.1 Sensitivity.
S14.9.3.11.12.1.2 Exposure.
S9.4.1.5 Lens accessibility.
S9.4.1.6 Mounting height.
S10.18.1.1 Adjustments.
S10.18.1.2 Procedure & security.
S10.18.1.2 Procedure & security.
S14.1.4.2 Mounting bracket.
S14.6.8.1 Samples.
S14.1.4.2 Mounting bracket.
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities.
S14.6.8.2 Procedure.
S14.6.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.3.1 Procedure.
S14.8.6.2 Performance requirements.
S14.8.6.1 Procedure.
S14.2.5.6 Positioner.
S14.2.5.7.1 Range.
S14.2.5.7.2 Sensor.
S14.2.5.7.2.1 Effective area.
S14.2.5.7.2.2 Intercepted light.
S14.2.5.7.2.3 Direct illumination.
S14.2.5.7.3 Color response.
S14.2.5.1 Mounting.
S14.2.5.8 Location of test points.
S14.2.5.8.1 Nomenclature.
S14.2.5.8.1.1 ‘‘H–V’’.
S14.2.5.8.1.2 ‘‘U’’ ‘‘D’’ ‘‘L’’ ‘‘R’’.
S14.2.5.8.1.3 Angles.
S14.2.5.4 Seasoning and test voltage.
S14.1.4.3 Second sample set.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68383
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, D ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, E ...................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, E ...................................
S6.8.3 Laboratory facilities ...............................
Table XXII Vibration test ..................................
Table XXII Vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Vibration test—procedure ..............
Table XXII Moisture test ..................................
Table XXII Moisture test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Moisture test—procedure ...............
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test—procedure .....................
Table XXII Corrosion test .................................
Table XXII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Corrosion test—procedure .............
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.5.1.1 Location of test points ....................
Table X footnote 2 ...........................................
Table XI footnote 2 ..........................................
Table XII footnote 1 .........................................
Table XIV footnote 1 ........................................
Table XVII footnote 2 .......................................
Table XVII Red lamp photometry ....................
Table XXII Out of focus test ............................
Table XXII Out of focus test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Out of focus test—procedure .........
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.3 Laboratory facilities ...............................
Table XXII Vibration test ..................................
Table XXII Vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Vibration test—procedure ..............
Table XXII Moisture test ..................................
Table XXII Moisture test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Moisture test—procedure ...............
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test—procedure .....................
Table XXII Corrosion test .................................
Table XXII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Corrosion test—procedure .............
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.5.1.1 Location of test points ....................
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table VI footnote 2 ..........................................
Table VII footnote 2 .........................................
Table VIII footnote 1 ........................................
Table IX footnote 2 ..........................................
Table XV footnote 1 .........................................
S4 Definitions—Material [OUT OF ALPHABETICAL ORDER].
S4 Definitions—Coated materials ....................
S4 Definitions—Exposed .................................
S4 Definitions—Protected ................................
S4 Definitions—Color bleeding ........................
S4 Definitions—Crazing ...................................
S4 Definitions—Cracking .................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, E ...................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, F ...................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, F ...................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
F ...................................
G ..................................
G ..................................
G ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, G ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, G ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, H ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, H ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, H ..................................
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J ...................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
J575d,
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
1967,
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
K
K
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
...................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575d,
J575e,
J575e,
J575e,
J575e,
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
1967,
1970,
1970,
1970,
1970,
K
B
D
E
E
...................................
...................................
..................................
...................................
...................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, E ...................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, F ...................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, F ...................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575e,
J575e,
J575e,
J575e,
Aug
Aug
Aug
Aug
1970,
1970,
1970,
1970,
F ...................................
G ..................................
G ..................................
G ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, G ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, G ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, H ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, H ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, H ..................................
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J575e, Aug 1970, J ...................................
J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.1 .................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J576,
J576,
J576,
J576,
J576,
J576,
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1991,
1991,
1991,
1991,
1991,
1991,
2.2.1.1
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
2.2.3.1
2.2.3.2
2.2.3.3
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00151
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities.
S14.5.1 Vibration test.
S14.5.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.1.1 Procedure.
S14.5.2 Moisture test.
S14.5.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.2.1 Procedure.
S14.5.3 Dust test.
S14.5.3.1 Samples.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure (third sentence).
S14.5.3.3 Dust test—performance requirements.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure.
S14.5.4 Corrosion test.
S14.5.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.4.1 Procedure.
S14.2.1.1 Mounting.
S14.2.1.4 Location of test points.
Table X footnote 2.
Table XI footnote 2.
Table XII footnote 1.
Table XIV footnote 1.
Table XVII footnote 2.
Table XVII Red lamp photometry.
S14.3 Out of focus test.
S14.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.3.1 Procedure.
S14.1.4.3 Second sample set.
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities.
S14.5.1 Vibration test.
S14.5.1.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.1.1 Procedure.
S14.5.2 Moisture test.
S14.5.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.2.1 Procedure.
S14.5.3 Dust test.
S14.5.3.1 Samples.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure (third sentence).
S14.5.3.3 Dust test—performance requirements.
S14.5.3.2 Procedure.
S14.5.4 Corrosion test.
S14.5.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.5.4.1 Procedure.
S14.2.1.1 Mounting.
S14.2.1.4 Location of test points.
Table XIII–a footnote 2.
Table VI footnote 2.
Table VII footnote 2.
Table VIII footnote 1.
Table IX footnote 2.
Table XV footnote 1.
S4 Definitions—Material.
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
Definitions—Coated materials.
Definitions—Exposed.
Definitions—Protected.
Definitions—Color bleeding.
Definitions—Crazing.
Definitions—Cracking.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68384
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.4 ..............................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.5 ..............................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3 .......................................
S4 Definitions—Haze .......................................
S4 Definitions—Delamination ..........................
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
S6.8.4.1 UV tracer ...........................................
SAE J577, Apr 1964, Figure 1 .........................
SAE J577, Apr 1964, Table 1 ..........................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
S4 Definitions—Color .......................................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.1 ....................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2 ....................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2 Note ...........................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.1 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.1 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.2 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3 ....................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.1 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.2 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.3 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.4.1 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.1 ....................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2 ....................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.1 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.2 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.3 .................................
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.4 .................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J576, Jul 1991, 5 .......................................
J577, Apr 1964, Figure 1 ..........................
J577, Apr 1964, Table 1 ............................
J578c, Feb 1977 ........................................
J578c, Feb 1977, 2 ...................................
J578c, Feb 1977, 2.1 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.1 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.2 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.2 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.3 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.3 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3 ...................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3 ...................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1 ................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
J578c,
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
3.1 ................................
3.1 ................................
3.2 ................................
3.2 ................................
3.2 ................................
3.2 ................................
3.2 ................................
A2(b) .............................
A2(c) .............................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00152
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S4 Definitions—Haze.
S4 Definitions—Delamination.
S14.4.2.2.3 Procedure.
S14.4.2.2.2 Material composition.
S14.4.2.1 Samples.
S14.4.2.1.5 Control samples.
S14.4.2.1.1 Molded samples.
S14.4.2.1.2 Exposed area.
S14.4.2.1.3 Thickness.
S14.4.2.2 Outdoor exposure test.
S14.4.2.2.1 Location and duration.
S14.4.2.2.3.1 Mounting.
S14.4.2.2.3.2 Cleaning.
S14.4.2.2.4.4 Luminous transmittance.
S14.4.2.1.4 Color.
S14.4.2.2.4 Performance requirements.
S14.4.2.2.4.4 Luminous transmittance.
S14.4.2.2.4.5 Color test.
S14.4.2.2.4.2 Headlamps.
S14.4.2.2.4.3 Physical changes.
S14.1.3 UV tracer.
Figure 21.
Figure 21.
S14.4.1 Color test.
S4 Definitions—Color.
S14.4.1.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.1.4.2.1 Red.
S14.4.1.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.1.4.2.2 Yellow (Amber).
S14.4.1.4.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.1.4.2.3 White.
S14.4.1.2.1 Design voltage.
S14.4.1.2.2 Components.
S14.4.1.3.2 Performance requirements.
S14.4.1.3.2.1 Red.
S14.4.1.3.2.2 Yellow (Amber).
S14.4.1.3.2.3 White.
S14.4.1.3 Visual method.
S14.4.1.3.1 Procedure.
S14.4.1.4 Tristimulus method.
S14.4.1.4.1 Procedure.
S14.4.1.4.1.1 Receiver spectral response.
S14.4.1.4.1.2 Integrating sphere.
S14.4.1.4.1.3 Non uniform color.
S14.4.1.2.3 Operating temperature.
S14.4.1.2.5 Test distance.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68385
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, A2(d) .............................
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, Figure 1 ........................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 2.1 ..................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Figure 1 ............................................................
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp assembly.
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring .........................
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring .........................
S4 Definitions—Aiming screws ........................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Corrosion test ................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Inward force test—procedure .......
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test—procedure.
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
Table XXIII Corrosion test ................................
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Inward force test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—performance requirements.
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S14.4.1.2.4 Visible surface.
Figure 1.
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp assembly.
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring.
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring.
S4 Definitions—Aiming screws.
S10.13.4.1 Corrosion.
S14.6.3 Corrosion test.
S10.14.7.1 Aiming adjustment tests.
S10.15.7.1 Aiming adjustment tests.
S10.13.4.1 Aiming adjustment test.
S14.6.17.1 Procedure.
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
2.2 ..................................
2.3 ..................................
2.4 ..................................
4.1.2 ...............................
4.1.2 ...............................
4.2 ..................................
4.2 ..................................
4.2 ..................................
4.2 ..................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2 ..................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2 ..................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2 ..................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
1986,
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.4
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
..................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.5 ..................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.1.2 ............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.2.1 ............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.2.1 ............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.2.2 ............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.2.2 ............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.3 ...............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.4 ...............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.5 ...............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6 ...............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6 ...............................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6 ...............................
SAE J584, Apr 1964 ..........................................
Table XXIII Retaining ring test .........................
Table XXIII Retaining ring test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Retaining ring test—procedure .....
Figure 4 ............................................................
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test ..............
Figure 18 ..........................................................
Figure 16 ..........................................................
Figure 17 ..........................................................
S13.3 Physical tests .........................................
S4 Definitions—Motor driven cycle ..................
S4 Definitions—Motorcycle or motor driven
cycle headlamp.
S6.8.5.6.2(j) Aiming—Motorcycle LB ...............
SAE J584, Oct 1993 ..........................................
S6.8.5.6.2(i) Aiming—Motorcycle UB ..............
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 2.1 ................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3 ...................................
S4 Definitions—Taillamps ................................
S7.2.2 Physical tests ........................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J580,
J584,
J584,
J584,
Dec 1986, 5.1.6 ...............................
Dec 1986, Figure 1 ..........................
Dec 1986, Figure 1 ..........................
Dec 1986, Figure 2 ..........................
Dec 1986, Figure 3 ..........................
Dec 1986, Figure 4 ..........................
Apr 1964 ..........................................
Apr 1964 ..........................................
Apr 1964 ..........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00153
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.6.18.1 Procedure.
S14.6.18.1.1 Setup.
S14.6.18.1.3 Adjustments.
S10.14.7.1
S10.15.7.1
S10.13.4.1
S14.6.12.1
S10.14.7.1
S10.14.7.2
S10.15.7.1
S10.15.7.1
S10.13.4.1
S14.6.15.1
Inward force test.
Inward force test.
Inward force test.
Procedure.
Connector test.
Connector—corrosion test.
Connector test.
Corrosion—connector test.
Connector test.
Procedure.
S10.13.4.1 Torque deflection test.
S14.6.3 Corrosion test.
S14.6.17.2.1 Sealed beam except Type F.
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral beam, and combination.
S14.6.17.2.1 Sealed beam except Type F.
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral beam, and combination.
S14.6.12.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.15.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.13.2 Performance requirements.
S10.13.4.2 Retaining ring test ex types G &
H.
S14.6.14 Retaining ring test.
S14.6.14.2 Performance requirements.
S14.6.14.1 Procedure.
Figure 4.
S14.6.15 Headlamp connector test.
Figure 18.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
S10.17.4 Physical tests.
S4 Definitions—Motor driven cycle.
S4 Definitions—Motorcycle or motor driven
cycle headlamp.
S14.2.5.5.9
Motorcycle
headlamp—lower
beam headlamps designed to comply with
Table XX.
S14.2.5.5.8 Motorcycle headlamp—upper
beam headlamps designed to comply with
Table XX.
S4 Definitions—Taillamps.
S7.2.14 Physical tests.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68386
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1 ................................
S7.2.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.11.1.
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
Table V SAE taillamp visibility .........................
Omitted. ............................................................
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps .............................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
Table IX footnote 6 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 7 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 7 ..........................................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
5.3.1 ...............................
5.3.1 ...............................
5.3.1 ...............................
5.4.1 ...............................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
Table
Table
Table
Table
1 ...........................
1, footnote a .........
1, footnote a .........
1, footnote b .........
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
Table V SAE stop lamp visibility ......................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Zone photometry ...........
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table IX footnote 1 ..........................................
Standard note—new table ...............................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J586,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
Feb 1984, Table 1, footnote b .........
Oct 1981, 2 ......................................
Oct 1981, 3 ......................................
Oct 1981, 4 ......................................
Oct 1981, 5 ......................................
Oct 1981, 6.1 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.2 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.3 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.3 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.3 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.3 ...................................
Oct 1981, 6.4 ...................................
Table IX footnote 3 ..........................................
S4 Definitions—License plate lamps ...............
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
S6.6.1 License plate holder .............................
S6.6.1 License plate holder .............................
S6.8.5.3 License plate lamp photometry .........
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S6.1.4 License plate lamp ...............................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1 ................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2 .............................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2(a) .........................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2(b) .........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J585e, Sep 1977, 4 ...................................
J585e, Sep 1977, Table 1, footnote 5 ......
J586, Feb 1984, 2.1 ..................................
J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2.1 .........................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2.2 .........................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5 .....................................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
J586,
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.3
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00154
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.2.11.2.
S7.2.11.3.
S7.2.11.4 Taillamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm. or more in overall width.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together.
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together.
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually.
Table V–b SAE taillamp visibility.
Table VIII footnote 4.
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together.
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together.
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually.
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.11.1.
S7.3.11.2.
S7.3.11.3.
S7.3.12 Ratio to taillamps.
S7.3.12.1.
S7.3.12.2.
S7.3.12.3.
S7.3.12.4.
Table IX footnote 6.
Table IX footnote 5.
Table XIII–a footnote 5, Table XIII–b, footnote
4.
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio.
Table XIII–b Motorcycle stop lamp—Photometric ratio.
S7.3.15 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.3.15.1 Dual filament bulbs.
S7.3.15.2 Socket indexing.
Table V–b SAE stop lamp visibility.
S7.3.13 Photometry.
S7.3.13.1.
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Group photometry.
Table XIII–a footnote 1.
Table IX footnote 1.
Table XIII–a footnote 3, Table XIII–b footnote
1.
Table IX footnote 3.
S4 Definitions—License plate lamps.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S7.7.14 Physical tests.
S6.6.3 License plate holder.
S6.6.3 License plate holder.
S14.2.2 License plate lamp photometry.
S7.7.15.1.
S7.7.15.2.
S7.7.15.3.
S6.1.3.3 License plate lamp.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68387
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
6.5 ...................................
6.6 ...................................
6.7 ...................................
6.8 ...................................
7 ......................................
7 ......................................
S7.7.1.1 Incident light from a single lamp .......
S7.7.1.2 Incident light from multiple lamps ......
S6.8.5.3.1 Illumination surface .........................
S6.8.5.3.2 Test stations ...................................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7 ......................................
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7 ......................................
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7 ......................................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
Table XIII ..........................................................
Table XIII ..........................................................
Not included .....................................................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ...................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 8 .........................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
S7.1.1.2 Spacing to other lamps .....................
S7.1.1.2 Spacing to other lamps .....................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
S7.7.15.4 Incident light from a single lamp.
S7.7.15.5 Incident light from multiple lamps.
S14.2.2.1 Illumination surface.
S14.2.2.2 Test stations.
S7.7.13 Photometry.
S7.7.13. Ratio—motorcycles and motor driven
cycles.
S7.7.13.1.
S7.7.13.2 Illumination.
S7.7.13.3 Ratio except motorcycles and motor
driven cycles.
Figure 19.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together.
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J587,
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
Oct
Oct
Oct
Oct
Oct
Oct
1981,
1981,
1981,
1981,
1981,
1981,
Oct 1981, Figure 1 ..........................
Oct 1981, Figure 2 ..........................
Oct 1981, Figure 3 ..........................
Nov 1984, 2.1 ..................................
Nov 1984, 4 .....................................
Nov 1984, 4 .....................................
Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2.1 .........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2.2 .........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00155
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together.
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually.
S7.1.1.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.11.1.
S7.1.1.11.2.
S7.1.1.11.3.
S7.1.2.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.11.1.
S7.1.2.11.2.
S7.1.2.11.3.
S7.1.1.12 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.12.1.
S7.1.1.12.2.
S7.1.1.12.3.
S7.1.1.12.4.
S7.1.2.12 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.12.1.
S7.1.2.12.2.
S7.1.2.12.3.
S7.1.2.12.4.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 8.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
S7.1.1.10 Spacing to other lamps.
S7.1.1.10.1.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68388
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
S7.1.1.2.1 Spacing measurement for non reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.2.2 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V SAE turn signal lamp visibility ............
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base zone
photometry.
Table VII footnote 5 .........................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
zone photometry.
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table VI footnote 1 ..........................................
Table VII footnote 1 .........................................
Table VII footnote 4 .........................................
S7.1.1.2.3 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
SAE J588e, Sep 1970, 3.4 ..............................
SAE J588e, Sep 1970, 3.9.1 ...........................
Table VII footnote 6 .........................................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal operating unit ......
Table XXI .........................................................
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
S7.1.1.10.2 Spacing measurement for non reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.10.3 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.1.3.1 Dual filament bulbs.
S7.1.3.2 Socket indexing.
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V–b SAE turn signal lamp visibility.
S7.1.1.13 Photometry.
S7.1.1.13.1.
S7.1.1.13.2.
S7.1.2.13 Photometry.
S7.1.2.13.1.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base
group photometry.
Table VII footnote 5.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
group photometry.
Table XIII–a footnote 1.
Table VI footnote 1.
Table VII footnote 1.
Table VII footnote 4.
S7.1.1.10.4 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
S9.3 Turn signal pilot indicator.
S9.3.1 TS lamps not visible.
S9.3.2 Indicator light(s).
S9.3.3 Function.
S9.3.4 Indicator size and color.
S9.3.4.1 Interior mounted.
S9.3.4.2 Exterior mounted.
S9.3.5 Visibility.
S6.1.1.3.1.
S6.1.1.3.
Table VII footnote 6.
S4 Definitions—Turn signal operating unit.
S9.1.2 Physical tests.
S14.9.1 Turn Signal operating unit durability
test.
S14.9.1.3 Performance requirements.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4 ............................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.1 .........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.2 .........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
5.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.2
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
5.4.1 ...............................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1 ...........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
J588,
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
Nov
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
1984,
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
1, footnote a ........
1, footnote a ........
1, footnote a ........
1, footnote b ........
2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3 ...........................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3 ...........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3 ...........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970 .......................................
J588e, Sep 1970, 3.4 ................................
J588e, Sep 1970, 3.9.1 .............................
J588e, Sep 1970, 3.9.1 .............................
J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00156
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68389
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
S4 Definitions—Turn signal flasher .................
S7.14.2 Turn signal flasher ..............................
Table XXI .........................................................
Table XXI Turn signal flasher and vehicular
hazard warning signal flasher tests.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test ....
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
S14.9.1.3.2 Voltage drop (2032 mm or wider).
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964 ..........................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J590b,
J590b,
J590b,
J590b,
Oct
Oct
Oct
Oct
1965
1965
1965
1965
........................................
........................................
........................................
........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965 ........................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2 ....................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00157
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.9.1.3.3 Stop contacts.
S14.9.1.1 Power supply specifications.
S14.9.1.2 Procedure.
S14.9.1.2.1 Circuit.
S14.9.1.2.2 Cycle.
S14.9.1.2.3 Voltage drop.
S4 Definitions—Turn signal flasher.
S9.2.1 Indicator signals.
S9.2.2 Physical tests.
S14.9.3 Turn signal flasher and vehicular hazard warning signal warning flasher tests.
S14.9.3.6 Turn signal flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.6.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.6.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.6.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.6.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.6.2.2 Temperature and voltage.
S14.9.3.6.2.3 Duration.
S14.9.3.5 Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
S14.9.3.3.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.4 Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test.
S14.9.3.4.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.4.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.3 Turn signal flasher starting time
test.
S14.9.3.3.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.3.3(a) Normally closed contacts.
S14.9.3.3.3(b) Normally open contacts.
S14.9.3.3.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.3.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.3.2.2 Measurement.
S14.9.3.4.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.4.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.4.2.2 Measurement.
S14.9.3.5.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.5.3(a) Normally closed contacts.
S14.9.3.5.3(b) Normally open contacts.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68390
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Figure 2 ............................................................
S4 Definitions—Clearance lamps ....................
S4 Definitions—Side marker lamps .................
S4 Definitions—Combination clearance and
side marker lamps.
S4 Definitions—Identification lamps ................
S7.4.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.5.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.4.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.4.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.5.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table X Amber side marker lamp photometry
Table X Red side marker lamp photometry .....
Table XI Amber clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI Red clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI footnote 3 ..........................................
S7.4.1.1 Inboard photometry ...........................
Table X footnote 1 ...........................................
S4 Definitions—Backup lamp ..........................
S7.6.2 Color .....................................................
S7.6.3 Physical tests ........................................
Table I Activation—Backup lamps ...................
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Backup lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
S4 Definitions—Reflex reflectors .....................
S7.10.2 Physical tests ......................................
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3 ....................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J590b,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
Oct 1965, Figure 1 ........................
Jul 1972, 2.1 ..................................
Jul 1972, 2.2 ..................................
Jul 1972, 2.3 ..................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
J592e,
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
1972,
2.4 ..................................
3 .....................................
3 .....................................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
Table 1 ...........................
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1 ...........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1, footnote a ........
J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1, footnote b ........
J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1, footnote b ........
J593c, Feb 1968 ........................................
J593c, Feb 1968 ........................................
J593c, Feb 1968 ........................................
J593c, Feb 1968 ........................................
J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote a .......
SAE J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote b .......
SAE J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote c .......
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 2 .....................................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3 .....................................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
3.1.7
3.1.7
3.1.7
3.1.7
3.1.7
3.1.7
3.1.7
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7 ...............................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.8 ...............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
PO 00000
Frm 00158
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.3.5.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.5.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.5.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.5.2.2 Temperature and voltage.
S14.9.3.5.2.3 Measurement.
Figure 2.
S4 Definitions—Clearance lamps.
S4 Definitions—Side marker lamps.
S4 Definitions—Combination clearance and
side marker lamps.
S4 Definitions—Identification lamps.
S7.4.14 Physical tests.
S7.5.14 Physical tests.
S7.4.13 Photometry.
S7.4.13.1.
S7.5.13 Photometry.
Table X Amber side marker lamp photometry.
Table X Red side marker lamp photometry.
Table XI Amber clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI Red clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI footnote 3.
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry.
Table X footnote 1.
S4 Definitions—Backup lamp.
S7.6.2.2 Incidental light.
S7.6.14 Physical tests.
Table I–a Activation—Backup lamps.
Table XII Single lamp system—Individual
point photometry.
Table XII Two lamp systems Each lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Backup lamp—Maximum photometric intensity any single lamp.
S4 Definitions—Reflex reflectors.
S8.1.12 Physical tests.
S14.2.3 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry.
S14.2.3.1 Mounting.
S14.2.3.2 Illumination source.
S14.2.3.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.3.4 Test setup.
S14.2.3.5 Photodetector.
S14.2.3.6 Photometry surface.
S14.2.3.7 Procedure.
S14.2.3.7.1 Observation angle.
S14.2.3.7.2 Entrance angle.
S14.2.3.7.3 Convention.
S14.2.3.7.4 Luminous intensity and illumination.
S14.2.3.8 Measurements.
S14.2.3.8.3 Reflex reflector photometry measurement adjustments.
S14.2.3.8.3.1 Reflectors with non fixed rotation.
S14.2.3.8.3.2 Reflectors with fixed rotation.
S14.2.3.8.3.3 Additional photometric readings.
S14.4.1.1 Samples.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68391
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1 ..........................
S7.10.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.10.1.1 Alternative side reflex reflectors ......
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1, footnote a ........
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1, footnote a ........
Table XVI Red reflex reflector photometry ......
Table XVI White reflex reflector photometry ....
Table XVI Amber reflex reflector photometry ..
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A ........................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A ........................
S7.10.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.10.1.1 Alternative side reflex reflectors ......
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A ........................
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A, footnote a ......
Table XVI Red reflex reflector photometry ......
Table XVI Amber reflex reflector photometry ..
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A, footnote a ......
J823b, Apr 1968 ........................................
J823b, Apr 1968 ........................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 4 ....................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 5 ....................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 6 ....................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 7 ....................................
Table XVI White reflex reflector photometry ....
SAE J823b, Apr 1968 ......................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968 ......................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 4 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 5 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 6 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 7 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ....................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ....................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ..................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 10 ................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 10 ................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10 and 11 ....................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10(a) ............................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10(b) ............................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10(c) ............................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10(c) ............................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10(d) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11 ................................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11 ................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10 and 11 ....................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(a) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(b) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(c) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(c) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(d) ............................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, Figure 1 .......................
S4 Definitions—School bus signal lamps ........
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
S6.4.6 School bus signal lamp aiming ............
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
S7.13.2 Physical test requirements .................
Table I Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
S8.1.11 Photometry.
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex reflector material.
Table XVI–a Red reflex reflector photometry.
Table XVI–a White reflex reflector photometry.
Table XVI–a Amber reflex reflector photometry.
S8.1.11 Photometry.
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex reflector material.
Table XVI–a Red reflex reflector photometry.
Table XVI–a Amber reflex reflector photometry.
Table XVI–a White reflex reflector photometry.
S14.9.3.1 Standard test circuit.
S14.9.3.1.1 Test circuit setup.
S14.9.3.1.1.1 Series resistance.
S14.9.3.1.1.2 A–B resistance.
S14.9.3.1.1.3 C–D voltage.
S14.9.3.1.1.4 Voltage adjustments—fixed load
flashers.
S14.9.3.1.1.5 Voltage adjustments—variable
load flashers.
S14.9.3.1.1.6 Measurements.
S14.9.3.2.1 Starting time, voltage drop, and
flash rate & percent current ‘‘on’’ time tests.
S14.9.3.2.1(a) Transients.
S14.9.3.2 Power supply specifications.
S14.9.3.2.1(b) Output voltage.
S14.9.3.2.1(c) Output current.
S14.9.3.2.1(d) Static regulation.
S14.9.3.2.1(e) Dynamic regulation.
S14.9.3.2.1(f) Ripple voltage.
S14.9.3.2.2 Durability tests.
S14.9.3.2.2(a) Transients.
S14.9.3.2 Power supply specifications.
S14.9.3.2.2(b) Output voltage.
S14.9.3.2.2(c) Output current.
S14.9.3.2.2(d) Static regulation.
S14.9.3.2.2(e) Dynamic regulation.
S14.9.3.2.2(f) Ripple voltage.
Figure 22.
S4 Definitions—School bus signal lamps.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.2 Visibility.
S6.4.5 School bus signal lamp aiming.
S14.2.1.2 School bus signal lamp aiming.
J823b, Apr 1968, 10 ..................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10 ..................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10(a) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10(b) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10(c) ..............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10(c) ..............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 10(d) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11 ..................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11 ..................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11 ..................................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11(a) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11(b) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11(c) ..............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11(c) ..............................
J823b, Apr 1968, 11(d) .............................
J823b, Apr 1968, Figure 1 ........................
J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964 ...........................................
SAE J887, Jul 1964, Table 1 .............................
SAE J887, Jul 1964, Table 1 .............................
SAE J910, Jan 1966 ..........................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966 ..........................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 1 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(b) .................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(c) .................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(d) .................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(e) .................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table IV School bus signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V School bus signal lamp visibility ........
S7.13.1 Photometry .........................................
Table XVII School bus signal lamp photometry
Table XXI .........................................................
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S7.14.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S7.14.6.1 Operating unit switch .......................
S7.14.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S7.14.6.1 Operating unit switch .......................
PO 00000
Frm 00159
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.11.14 Physical tests.
Table I–a Activation—School bus signal
lamps.
Table IV–c School bus signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V–a School bus signal lamp visibility.
S7.11.13 Photometry.
Table XVII School bus signal lamp photometry.
S9.6.3 Physical tests.
S14.9.2 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit durability test.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S9.6.1 Combinations.
S9.6.2 Operation.
S9.6.1 Combinations.
S9.6.2 Operation.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68392
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4 ......................................
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher.
S7.14.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8.1 Indicator size and color ...................
Table XXI .........................................................
Table XXI Turn signal flasher and vehicular
hazard warning signal flasher tests.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5 ......................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5 ......................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966 .........................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2 .....................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00160
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.2.2 Performance requirements.
S14.9.2.1 Procedure.
S14.9.2.1.1 Circuit.
S14.9.2.1.2 Cycle.
S14.9.2.1.3 Voltage drop.
S9.8.2 Single TS indicators.
S9.8.3 Function.
S9.8.4 Indicator size and color.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher.
S9.7.1 Indicator signals.
S9.8.2 Single TS indicators.
S9.8.3 Function.
S9.8.4 Indicator size and color.
S9.7.2 Physical tests.
S14.9.3 Turn signal flasher and vehicular hazard warning signal warning flasher tests.
S14.9.3.10 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.9 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test.
S14.9.3.9.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test.
S14.9.3.7.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test.
S14.9.3.8.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.8.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.7.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.7.3(a) Normally closed contacts.
S14.9.3.7.3(b) Normally open contacts.
S14.9.3.7.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.7.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.7.2.2 Measurement.
S14.9.3.8.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.8.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.8.2.2 Measurement.
S14.9.3.9.3 Performance requirements.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68393
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Figure 2 ............................................................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp ...............................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp .........
S4 Definitions—Upper beam ...........................
S4 Definitions—Lower beam ...........................
S4
Definitions—Mechanically
aimable
headlamp [OUT OF ALPHABETICAL
ORDER].
S4 Definitions—Aiming plane ..........................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp mechanical axis ....
S4 Definitions—H–V axis .................................
S4 Definitions—Seasoning ..............................
S4 Definitions—Design Voltage .......................
S4 Definitions—Test voltage ............................
S4 Definitions—Rated voltage .........................
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.5.6.2(a) Aiming—mechanical ...................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4 .....................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J945, Feb 1966, Figure 1 ..........................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1 .................................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1.1 ..............................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1.1 ..............................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.2 .................................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.3 .................................
J1383, Apr 1985, 2.4 .................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
2.5 .................................
2.6 .................................
2.7 .................................
2.9 .................................
2.10 ...............................
2.11 ...............................
2.12 ...............................
4.1.4.1 ...........................
4.1.4.2 ...........................
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.3 ...........................
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.3 ...........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.5.1 ..............................
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.7 .................................
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.7 .................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
VerDate Aug<31>2005
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
5.3 .................................
5.3.3 ..............................
5.4.3 ..............................
5.4.4 ..............................
5.4.4.1 ...........................
5.4.4.2 ...........................
5.4.4.3 ...........................
5.4.5 ..............................
Figure 5 ........................
Figure 6 ........................
Figure 7 ........................
Figure 8 ........................
Figure 9 ........................
Figure 10 ......................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test .................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—procedure.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
PO 00000
Frm 00161
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S14.9.3.9.3(a) Normally closed contacts.
S14.9.3.9.3(b) Normally open contacts.
S14.9.3.9.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.9.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.9.2.2 Temperature and voltage.
S14.9.3.9.2.3 Measurement.
S14.9.3.10.3 Performance requirements.
S14.9.3.10.1 Samples.
S14.9.3.10.2 Procedure.
S14.9.3.10.2.1 Setup.
S14.9.3.10.2.2 Temperature and voltage.
S14.9.3.10.2.3 Duration.
Figure 2.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Upper beam.
S4 Definitions—Lower beam.
S4
Definitions—Mechanically
aimable
headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Aiming plane.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp mechanical axis.
S4 Definitions—H–V axis.
S4 Definitions—Seasoning.
S4 Definitions—Design Voltage.
S4 Definitions—Test voltage.
S4 Definitions—Rated voltage.
S14.2.5.4 Seasoning and test voltage.
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance.
S14.2.5.4 Seasoning and test voltage.
S14.2.5.5.1 Mechanically aimable headlamps
using an external aimer.
S14.1.4.1 Representative samples.
S14.6.16 Headlamp wattage test.
S14.6.16.1 Procedure.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68394
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1383,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
Figure 11 ......................
Figure 11 ......................
Figure 12 ......................
Figure 13 ......................
Figure 14 ......................
Figure 15 ......................
2.1 .................................
4 ....................................
4.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.3 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.5 ...........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.6 ...........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
5.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.2
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.3.2 ..............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
5.4.1 ..............................
Table 1 ..........................
Table 1 ..........................
Table 1 ..........................
Table 1 ..........................
Table 1 ..........................
Table 1 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ...................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.3 Multiple compartment/lamp photometry for wide vehicles.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
Table VI footnote 4 ..........................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 7 .........................................
Table VII footnote 8 .........................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 6 .........................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
S7.1.1.2.1 Spacing measurement for non reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.2.2 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table V SAE turn signal lamp visibility ............
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base zone
photometry.
PO 00000
Frm 00162
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C.
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together.
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually.
S14.2.1.5.3 Multiple on 2032 mm or wider.
S7.1.1.12 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.12.1.
S7.1.1.12.2.
S7.1.1.12.3.
S7.1.1.12.4.
Table VI footnote 4.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 7.
Table VII footnote 8.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 6.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
S7.1.1.10.2 Spacing measurement for non reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.10.3 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests.
S7.1.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.1.3.1 Dual filament bulbs.
S7.1.3.2 Socket indexing.
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table V–b SAE turn signal lamp visibility.
S7.1.1.13 Photometry.
S7.1.1.13.1.
S7.1.1.13.2.
S7.1.2.13 Photometry.
S7.1.2.13.1.
S7.1.2.12 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.12.1.
S7.1.2.12.4.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base
group photometry.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68395
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
group photometry.
Table VII footnote 5.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VI footnote 1.
Table VII footnote 1.
Table VII footnote 4.
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together.
SAE J1398, May 1985, Table 1 ........................
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote a ....................
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote a ....................
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote b ....................
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote b ....................
64 FR 16358 ......................................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII footnote 5 .........................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VI footnote 1 ..........................................
Table VII footnote 1 .........................................
Table VII footnote 4 .........................................
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps .............................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.3 Multiple compartment/lamp photometry for wide vehicles.
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
Table IX footnote 6 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 7 ..........................................
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table V SAE stop lamp visibility ......................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Zone photometry ...........
Table IX footnote 1 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 1 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 3 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 3 ..........................................
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
64 FR 16358 ......................................................
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
64 FR 16358 ......................................................
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
64 FR 16358 ......................................................
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
70 FR 65972 ......................................................
Interpretation—Alkire 11/28/89 ..........................
Interpretation—Camp 6/17/97 ............................
Interpretation—Clarke 7/28/05 ...........................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed ...
S4 Definitions—Overall width ..........................
S6.2.5 Auxiliary identification lamps ................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3 ..........................
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3 ..........................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1395,
J1395,
J1395,
J1398,
J1398,
Apr 1985, footnote a ......................
Apr 1985, footnote a ......................
Apr 1985, footnote b ......................
May 1985, 2.1 ................................
May 1985, 4.1.5.2 ..........................
SAE J1398, May 1985, 4.1.5.2 ..........................
SAE J1398, May 1985, 4.1.5.2 ..........................
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
5 ...................................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.1.5.2 ..........................
5.3.1 .............................
5.3.1 .............................
5.3.1 .............................
5.3.2 .............................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
J1398,
May
May
May
May
May
May
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
5.4.1 .............................
Table 1 ........................
Table 1 ........................
Table 1 ........................
Table 1 ........................
Table 1 ........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00163
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually.
S14.2.1.5.3 Multiple on 2032 mm or wider.
S7.3.14 Physical tests.
S7.3.12 Ratio to taillamps.
S7.3.12.1.
S7.3.12.2.
S7.3.12.3.
S7.3.12.4.
Table IX footnote 6.
Table IX footnote 5.
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio.
S7.3.15 Combined lamp bulb indexing.
S7.3.15.1 Dual filament bulbs.
S7.3.15.2 Socket indexing.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table V–b SAE stop lamp visibility.
S7.3.13 Photometry.
S7.3.13 Photometry.
S7.3.13.1.
S7.3.13.1.
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Group photometry.
Table IX footnote 1.
Table IX footnote 1.
Table IX footnote 3.
Table IX footnote 3.
Table
I–a
Mounting
height—Clearance
lamps—rear.
Table I–a Mounting height—Identification
lamps—rear.
Table
I–b
Mounting
height—Clearance
lamps—rear.
Table I–b Mounting height—Identification
lamps—rear.
S6.7 Replacement equipment.
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed.
S4 Definitions—Overall width.
S6.1.3.6 Auxiliary lamp.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68396
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Interpretation—Faber 5/26/00 ............................
Interpretation—Faber 5/26/00 ............................
Interpretation—Faber 5/26/00 ............................
Interpretation—King 7/12/00 ..............................
Interpretation—King 7/12/00 ..............................
Interpretation—Nakaya 6/18/85 .........................
Interpretation—Parkyn 6/1/98 ............................
Interpretation—Spingler 4/6/2000 ......................
Interpretation—Spingler 7/2/99 ..........................
Various ...............................................................
New figure ..........................................................
New figure ..........................................................
New language ....................................................
New reference to other sections ........................
New section .......................................................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3.2.1 High mounted stop lamp mounting
Table IX footnote 5 ..........................................
S14.10.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ....
Table XIX 10° U–90°U Test area ....................
S17 Headlamp marking requirements .............
Figure 12–1 ......................................................
Figure 12–2 ......................................................
Table V footnote 1 ...........................................
S17.5 Additional headlamp markings ..............
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
Table I–a Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps.
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps.
S6.1.3.1.
S6.1.3.2.
S6.1.4.1.1 High mounted stop lamp mounting.
Table XIII–b footnote 3.
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter.
Table XIX 10° U–90°U Test area.
S6.5.3 Headlamp marking requirements.
Figure 12–1.
Figure 12–2.
Table V footnote 1.
S6.5.3.5 Additional headlamp markings.
S7.1.1.1 Number [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.1.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.1.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.1.1.4 Mounting height [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.1.1.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area [New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.1.1.7 Visibility [New section—points to
S6.4].
S7.1.1.8 Indicator [New section—points to
S9.3.
S7.1.1.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.1.2.1 Number [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.2.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.2.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.1.2.4 Mounting height [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.1.2.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area [New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.1.2.7 Visibility [New section—points to
S6.4].
S7.1.2.8 Indicator [New section—points to
S9.3].
S7.1.2.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.1.2.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.2 Taillamps.
S7.2.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.2.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.2.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.2.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.2.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.2.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.2.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4].
S7.2.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00164
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68397
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
S7.2.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.2.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.2.12 Ratio [New section—points to
S7.1.2.12 and 7.3.12].
S7.3 Stop lamps.
S7.3.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.3.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.3.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.3.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.3.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.3.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.3.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4].
S7.3.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.3.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.3.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.4 Side marker lamps.
S7.4.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.4.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.4.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.4.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.4.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.4.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.4.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S7.5 Clearance and identification lamps.
S7.5.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.5.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.5.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.5.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.5.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.5.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.5.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S7.5.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.5.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.5.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.5.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00165
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68398
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
S7.5.12 Ratio.
S7.5.12.1 Clearance lamps [New section—
points to S7.1.1.12 and S7.1.2.12].
S7.5.12.2 Identification lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.6 Backup lamps.
S7.6.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.6.2 Color of light.
S7.6.2.1 [New section—points to Table I].
S7.6.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.6.4 Mounting height [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.6.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.6.7 Visibility [New section—see Table V–
a].
S7.6.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.6.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S7.7 License plate lamps.
S7.7.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I and S6.1.1].
S7.7.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.7.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.7.4 Mounting height [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.7.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.7.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.7.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.15 Installation.
S7.8 Parking lamps.
S7.8.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.8.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.8.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.8.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.8.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.8.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.8.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4].
S7.8.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
section
section
section
section
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
section
section
section
section
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00166
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68399
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
S7.8.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.8.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.8.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.8.12 Ratio [New section—points to
S7.1.1.12].
S7.9 High-mounted lamps.
S7.9.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I and S6.1.1.2].
S7.9.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.9.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.9.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I and S6.1.4.1].
S7.9.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.9.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–b].
S7.9.7 Visibility [New section—points to Table
V–a].
S7.9.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.9.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.9.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.9.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.9.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S7.10 Daytime running lamps (DRLs).
S7.10.1 Number [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.10.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.10.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.10.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I and S7.10.13(b)].
S7.10.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I and S7.10.10.1(c)].
S7.10.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.10.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S7.11 School bus signal lamps.
S7.11.1 Number [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.11.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.11.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.11.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.11.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.11.6 Effective projected luminous lens
area [New section—points to Table IV–c].
S7.11.7 Visibility [New section—points to
Table V–a].
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00167
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68400
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section .......................................................
New section ......................................................
New table ...........................................................
New table .........................................................
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
S6 Vehicle requirements ..................................
New title ...........................................................
New title ...........................................................
S6.2 Impairment ...............................................
S6.4 Visibility, and aiming ................................
S6.5 Marking ....................................................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
New title ...........................................................
S7 Signal lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment requirements.
S7.1 Turn signal lamps ....................................
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps .........................
New title ...........................................................
S7.10 Reflex reflectors .....................................
Table III Application pattern .............................
New title ...........................................................
New title ...........................................................
New title ...........................................................
S7.11.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.11.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S8.1.2 Color [New section—points to Table I].
S8.1.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S8.1.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S8.1.5 Activation [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S8.1.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S8.1.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S10.3 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S10.4 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S10.5 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S10.6 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S10.7 Activation [New section—points to
Table I, Table II, and S6.1.5].
S10.8 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S10.9 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S10.10 Indicator [New section—points to
S9.5].
S10.11 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S10.12 Spacing to other lamps [New section—points to S6.1.3.5].
Table III Marking Requirements Locations
[New Table—points to marking requirements].
S6 Vehicle requirements.
S6.1.3 Mounting location.
S6.1.3.5 Headlamp beam mounting.
S6.2 Impairment.
S6.4 Lens area, visibility, and aiming.
S6.5 Marking.
S6.1.5.2 Simultaneous beam activation.
S6.6 Associated equipment.
S7 Signal lamp requirements.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00168
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.1 Turn signal lamps.
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps.
S7.1.2 Rear turn signal lamps.
S8.1 Reflex reflectors.
S8.2.1.4 Application pattern.
S9.1 Turn signal operating unit.
S9.2 Turn signal flasher.
S9.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68401
APPENDIX A.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
New title ...........................................................
New title ...........................................................
New title .............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
New title ...........................................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
New title ...........................................................
New title ...........................................................
S9.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher.
S9.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot indicator.
S9.8.1 Two TS indicators.
New title .............................................................
New title ...........................................................
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
S6.8.5.6.4 Photometer .....................................
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
New title .............................................................
New title ...........................................................
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
New title ...........................................................
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—application.
Table XXII ........................................................
New title .............................................................
Table XXIII .......................................................
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
New title .............................................................
Table XXIII Humidity test .................................
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure .............
Table XXIII .......................................................
New title .............................................................
Table XXIII .......................................................
New title .............................................................
Table XXI .........................................................
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
title
title
title
title
title
title
title
New title .............................................................
S10.1 Vehicle headlighting systems.
S10.13.4 Physical tests.
S10.14.7 Physical tests.
S10.15.4 Markings.
S10.16.3 Physical tests.
S11.4 Physical tests.
S14 Physical and photometry test procedures
and performance requirements.
S14.1 General test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.2.1 Photometry measurements for all
lamps except license lamps, headlamps,
and DRLs.
S14.2.1.5 Multiple compartment and multiple
lamp photometry of turn signal lamps, stop
lamps, and taillamps.
S14.2.4 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S14.2.5 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S14.2.5.5.3 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps—vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.5 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps—vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.6 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps—horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.7 Photometer.
S14.2.5.10
Moveable
reflector
aimed
headlamp photometry measurements.
S14.4 General test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.4.1.2 General procedure.
S14.4.2 Plastic optical materials tests.
S14.5 Signal lamp and reflective device physical test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.6 Headlamp physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.6.7 Humidity test.
S14.6.7.1 Procedure.
S14.7 Replaceable light source physical test
procedures and performance requirements.
S14.8 Vehicle headlamp aiming device
(VHAD) physical test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.9 Associated equipment physical test procedures and performance requirements.
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S1
S2
S3
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
Scope ...........................................................
Purpose ........................................................
Application ....................................................
Definitions .....................................................
Definitions—Aiming plane ............................
Definitions—Aiming reference plane ............
Definitions—Aiming screws ..........................
Definitions—Axis of reference ......................
Definitions—Backup lamp ............................
Definitions—Beam contributor ......................
Definitions—Cargo lamp ..............................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S1
S2
S3
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
PO 00000
Scope ..........................................................
Purpose ......................................................
Application ..................................................
Definitions ...................................................
Definitions—Aiming plane ..........................
Definitions—Aiming reference plane ..........
Definitions—Aiming screws ........................
Definitions—Axis of reference ....................
Definitions—Backup lamp ..........................
Definitions—Beam contributor ....................
Definitions—Cargo lamp .............................
Frm 00169
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S1; Table I; Table III.
S2 Purpose.
S3 Application (except section citation).
S4 Definitions.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.5.
S4 Definitions—Aiming reference plane.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 2.4.
S4 Definitions—Axis of reference.
SAE J593c, Feb 1968.
S4 Definitions—Beam contributor.
S4 Definitions—Cargo lamp.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68402
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S4 Definitions—Clearance lamps ......................
S4 Definitions—Coated materials ......................
S4 Definitions—Color .........................................
S4 Definitions—Color bleeding ..........................
S4 Definitions—Combination clearance and
side marker lamps.
S4 Definitions—Cracking ...................................
S4 Definitions—Crazing .....................................
S4 Definitions—Cutoff ........................................
S4 Definitions—Delamination ............................
S4 Definitions—Design Voltage .........................
S4 Definitions—Direct reading indicator ............
S4 Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface
S4 Definitions—Clearance lamps ....................
S4 Definitions—Coated materials ....................
S4 Definitions—Color .......................................
S4 Definitions—Color bleeding ........................
S4 Definitions—Combination clearance and
side marker lamps.
S4 Definitions—Cracking .................................
S4 Definitions—Crazing ...................................
S4 Definitions—Cutoff ......................................
S4 Definitions—Delamination ..........................
S4 Definitions—Design Voltage .......................
S4 Definitions—Direct reading indicator ..........
S4 Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Exposed ...................................
S4 Definitions—Filament ...................................
S4 Definitions—Flash ........................................
S4 Definitions—Fully opened ............................
S4 Definitions—Haze .........................................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp .................................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S4 Definitions—Exposed .................................
S4 Definitions—Filament ..................................
S4 Definitions—Flash .......................................
S4 Definitions—Fully opened ...........................
S4 Definitions—Haze .......................................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp ...............................
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp mechanical axis ....
S4 Definitions—Headlamp test fixture .............
S4 Definitions—High mounted stop lamp ........
S4 Definitions—H–V axis .................................
S4 Definitions—Identification lamps ................
S4 Definitions—Integral beam headlamp ........
S4 Definitions—License plate lamps ...............
S4 Definitions—Lower beam ...........................
S4 Definitions—Material [OUT OF ALPHABETICAL ORDER].
S4
Definitions—Mechanically
aimable
headlamp [OUT OF ALPHABETICAL
ORDER].
S4 Definitions—Motor driven cycle ..................
S4 Definitions—Motorcycle or motor driven
cycle headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring .........................
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp ....
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement ....
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined .................
S4 Definitions—Overall width ..........................
S4 Definitions—Overall width ..........................
S4 Definitions—Parking lamps ........................
S4 Definitions—Protected ................................
S4 Definitions—Rated voltage .........................
S4 Definitions—Reflex reflectors .....................
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator .......
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp ..
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source ........
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring .........................
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—School bus signal lamps ........
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp .........
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp assembly.
S4 Definitions—Seasoning ..............................
S4 Definitions—Semiautomatic headlamp
beam switching device.
S4 Definitions—Side marker lamps .................
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
S4
Definitions—Headlamp mechanical axis ......
Definitions—Headlamp test fixture ...............
Definitions—High mounted stop lamp ..........
Definitions—H–V axis ...................................
Definitions—Identification lamps ..................
Definitions—Integral beam headlamp ..........
Definitions—License plate lamps .................
Definitions—Lower beam .............................
Definitions—Material ....................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S4
Definitions—Mechanically
headlamp.
aimable
S4 Definitions—Motor driven cycle ....................
S4 Definitions—Motorcycle or motor driven
cycle headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring ...........................
S4 Definitions—Mounting ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp ......
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement ......
S4 Definitions—Optically combined ...................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined ...................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined ...................
S4 Definitions—Optically combined ...................
S4 Definitions—Overall width ............................
S4 Definitions—Overall width ............................
S4 Definitions—Parking lamps ..........................
S4 Definitions—Protected ..................................
S4 Definitions—Rated voltage ...........................
S4 Definitions—Reflex reflectors .......................
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator .........
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp ....
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source .........
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring ...........................
S4 Definitions—Retaining ring (type F sealed
beam).
S4 Definitions—School bus signal lamps ..........
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp ...........
S4 Definitions—Sealed beam headlamp assembly.
S4 Definitions—Seasoning ................................
S4
Definitions—Semiautomatic
headlamp
beam switching device.
S4 Definitions—Side marker lamps ...................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00170
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J592e, Jul 1972, 2.1.
J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.1.1.
J578c, Feb 1977, 2.
J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.1.
J592e, Jul 1972, 2.3.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.3.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.2.
S4 Definitions—Cutoff.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.5.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.10.
S4 Definitions—Direct reading indicator.
S4 Definitions—Effective light-emitting surface.
S4 Definitions—Effective projected luminous
lens area.
S6.3.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.2.1.
S4 Definitions—Filament.
S4 Definitions—Flash.
S4 Definitions—Fully opened.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.3.4.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp concealment device.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.6.
S4 Definitions—Headlamp test fixture.
SAE J186a, Sep 1977, 2.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.7.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, 2.4.
S4 Definitions—Integral beam headlamp.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 2.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.3.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.4.
SAE J584, Apr 1964.
SAE J584, Apr 1964.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 2.2.
S7.3.7(e)(1).
S4 Definitions—Multiple compartment lamp.
S4 Definitions—Multiple lamp arrangement.
S5.1.1.11.
S5.4(b).
S5.4(c).
SAE J387, Nov 1987.
Interpretation—Camp 6/17/97.
Table IV, footnote 1.
SAE J222, Dec 1970, 2.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 2.2.2.2.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.12.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 2.
S4 Definitions—Remote reading indicator.
S4 Definitions—Replaceable bulb headlamp.
S4 Definitions—Replaceable light source.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 2.3.
S7.3.7(e)(2).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1.1.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 2.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 1.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, 2.2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68403
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps ...............................
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps ...............................
S4 Definitions—Taillamps ..................................
S4 Definitions—Test voltage .............................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal flasher ...................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ....................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ....................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal operating unit ........
S4 Definitions—Upper beam .............................
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S5 References to SAE publications ..................
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps .............................
S4 Definitions—Stop lamps .............................
S4 Definitions—Taillamps ................................
S4 Definitions—Test voltage ............................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal flasher .................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ...................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal lamps ...................
S4 Definitions—Turn signal operating unit ......
S4 Definitions—Upper beam ...........................
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher.
S4 Definitions—Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S5 References to SAE publications .................
SAE J1398, May 1985, 2.1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 2.1.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 2.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.11.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 2.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 2.1.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.2.
S4 Definitions—Vehicle headlamp aiming device or VHAD.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
S5.1 Recommended=mandatory .......................
S5.1 SAE Publications .......................................
S6 Vehicle requirements ....................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S5.1 Recommended=mandatory .....................
S5.1 SAE Publications .....................................
S6 Vehicle requirements ..................................
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1 Required lamps, reflective devices, and
associated equipment by vehicle type.
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ..................................................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ............................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ............................
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamp .....................
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamp .....................
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamp .....................
S6.1.1.2 High-mounted stop lamp .....................
S6.1.1.3 Truck tractor rear double faced turn
signal lamps.
S6.1.1.3.1 ...........................................................
S6.1.1.4 Daytime running lamps (DRL) .............
S6.1.2 Color .......................................................
S6.1.2 Color .......................................................
S6.1.2 Color .......................................................
S6.1.2 Color .......................................................
S6.1.2 Color .......................................................
S6.1.3 Mounting location ...................................
S6.1.3.1 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.1 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.1 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.1 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.2 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.2 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.2 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.2 ..............................................................
S6.1.3.3 License plate lamp ..............................
S6.1.3.5 Headlamp beam mounting ..................
S6.1.3.5.1 Vertical headlamp arrangement .......
S6.1.3.5.2 Horizontal headlamp arrangement ...
S6.1.3.5.3 Motorcycle headlamp arrangement ..
S6.1.3.6 Auxiliary lamp ......................................
S6.1.4 Mounting height ......................................
S6.1.4 Mounting height ......................................
S6.1.4.1.1 High-mounted stop lamp mounting ..
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1 Quantity ................................................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ..........................
S6.1.1.1 Conspicuity systems ..........................
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.1.1.2 High mounted stop lamp ...................
S6.1.1.3 Truck tractor rear turn signal lamps ..
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
SAE J588e, Sep 1970, 3.4 ..............................
S6.2.4 Daytime running lamps (DRL) ..............
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
S6.1.2 Color .....................................................
New title ...........................................................
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.3 Mounting location and height ...............
S6.1.4 License plate lamp ...............................
New title ...........................................................
S8.1.3 Vertical headlamp arrangement ...........
S8.1.4 Horizontal headlamp arrangement .......
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S6.2.5 Auxiliary identification lamps ................
S6.1.3.1 Mounting height .................................
S6.1.3.1 Mounting height .................................
S6.1.3.2.1 High mounted stop lamp mounting
PO 00000
Frm 00171
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 1.
S4
Definitions—Visually/optically
aimable
headlamp.
S6 Subreferenced SAE Standards and Recommended Practices.
S6.1.
S5.2.1.
New title.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.1.1.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.7 Conspicuity systems.
S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting.
S5.1.1.27(a).
S5.1.1.27(b).
S5.1.1.27(b)(1).
S5.3.1.8(b).
S5.1.1.1 Truck tractor exemption; SAE J588e,
Sep 1970, 3.9.1.
SAE J588e, Sep 1970, 3.4.
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL).
S5.1.5.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
New title.
Interpretation—King 7/12/00.
S5.3.
Table II.
Table IV.
Interpretation—King 7/12/00.
S5.3.
Table II.
Table IV.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 6.4.
New title.
S7.4(b); S7.5(d).
S7.4(b); S7.5(d).
S7.9.1(b).
Interpretation—Clarke 7/28/05.
Table II heading.
Table IV heading.
S5.3.1.8(a)(2); Interpretation—Nakaya 6/18/
85.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68404
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S6.1.4.1.2 ...........................................................
S6.1.4.1.2. High-mounted stop lamp reflections
S6.1.4.1.3 Accessibility ......................................
S6.1.4.1.3 Accessibility ......................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S7.9.2 Interior mounting ...................................
S6.1.3.2.2. High mounted stop lamp reflections.
S7.9.1 High mounted stop lamp design ..........
S7.9.1 High mounted stop lamp design ..........
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
S6.1.5 Activation ................................................
S6.1.5.1 Hazard warning signal .........................
S6.1.5.2 Simultaneous beam activation ............
S6.1.5.2.1 ...........................................................
S6.1.5.2.2 ...........................................................
S6.1.5.2.3 ...........................................................
S6.2 Impairment .................................................
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed .....
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed .....
S6.2.3 Headlamp obstructions ...........................
S6.2.3.1 Coverings ............................................
S6.2.3.2 Wipers .................................................
S6.3 Equipment combinations ...........................
S6.3.1 High mounted stop lamp and cargo
lamp.
S6.3.2 Optically combined HSML and cargo
lamp prohibition.
S6.3.3. Clearance lamp and taillamp ................
S6.4 Lens area, visibility, and aiming ................
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.2 Visibility ...................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility ...................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility ...................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility ...................................................
S6.4.3 Visibility requirement options .................
S6.4.3(a) Lens area option ................................
S6.4.3(b) Luminous intensity option ..................
S6.4.4 Legacy visibility option ...........................
S6.4.5 School bus signal lamp aiming ..............
S6.5 Marking ......................................................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ..........................................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ..........................................
S6.5.1.1 DOT marking—conspicuity sheeting ...
S6.5.1.2 DOT marking—except headlamps ......
S6.5.2 DRL marking ..........................................
S6.5.3 Headlamp markings ...............................
S6.5.3.1 Trademark ...........................................
S6.5.3.2 Voltage and trade number ..................
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.5 Activation ..............................................
S6.1.1.4 Hazard warning lamps .......................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S8.2 Simultaneous beam activation ................
S6.2 Impairment ...............................................
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.2.1 Impairment due to additional lamps or
reflective devices.
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed ...
S6.2.2 Lamp or reflective device obstructed ...
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S14.2 Headlamp obstructions ..........................
S6.3 Equipment combinations .........................
S6.3.1 High mounted stop lamp and cargo
lamp.
S6.3.2 Optically combined HSML and cargo
lamp prohibition.
S6.3.3. Clearance lamp and taillamp ...............
S6.4 Visibility, and aiming ................................
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.1 Effective projected luminous lens area
requirements.
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
S6.4.2 Visibility .................................................
S6.4.3 Visibility options ....................................
S6.4.3(a) Lens area option ..............................
S6.4.3(b) Luminous intensity option ................
S6.4.4 SAE visibility alternative to S6.4.3 .......
S6.4.6 School bus signal lamp aiming ............
S6.5 Marking ....................................................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ........................................
S6.5.1 DOT marking ........................................
S6.5.1.1 DOT marking—conspicuity sheeting
S6.5.1.2 DOT marking—except headlamps ....
S6.5.2 DRL marking .........................................
S17 Headlamp marking requirements .............
S17.1 Trademark .............................................
S17.2 Voltage and trade number .....................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00172
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.3.1.8(a)(3).
S5.3.1.8(a)(3).
S5.1.1.27(a)(5).
S5.1.1.27(b)(4).
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.5.10(a).
S5.5.10(b).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.3.
S5.5.7.
S5.5.5.
New title.
S5.5.8.
S5.5.8.
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
New title.
S5.1.3 Impairment.
S5.3.2(a).
Interpretation—Alkire 11/28/89.
S5.3.2.2.
S7.8.5.
S7.8.5.
S7.8.5.
S5.4 Equipment combinations.
S5.4(a).
S5.4(b).
S5.4(c).
New title.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.25 Motorcycle turn signal lamp EPLLA.
S5.1.1.26(a).
S5.1.1.26(b).
S5.1.1.27(a)(1).
S5.1.1.27(b)(1).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
S5.3.2(c).
S5.3.2(d).
S5.3.2(e).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
S5.3.2(b).
S5.3.2(b)(1).
S5.3.2(b)(2).
S5.3.2.4.
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
New title.
S7.2(a).
S7.2(e).
S5.7.1.5 Certification.
S5.8.10.
S5.5.11(a)(2).
Various.
S7.2(b).
S7.2(c).
S5.2.2.
S5.8.2.
S7.3.1.
S7.3.7(f).
S7.3.8(f).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68405
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings ......
S6.5.3.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp markings
S6.5.3.5 Additional headlamp markings ............
S6.6 Associated equipment ...............................
S6.6.1 All except trailers ....................................
S6.6.2 All except trailers and motorcycles ........
S6.6.3 License plate holder ...............................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ...........................
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.3 Sealed beam headlamp markings .........
S17.4 Replaceable bulb headlamp markings ..
S17.5 Additional headlamp markings ..............
New title ...........................................................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.6 Associated equipment .............................
S6.6.1 License plate holder .............................
S6.7 Replacement equipment ..........................
S6.7.1 General requirements .............................
S6.7.1.1(a) .........................................................
S6.7.1.1(b) .........................................................
S6.7.1.2 ..............................................................
S6.7.1.3 ..............................................................
S6.7.2 Version of this Standard .........................
S7 Signal lamp requirements ............................
S6.7.1 General requirements ...........................
S6.7.1.1(a) ........................................................
S6.7.1.1(b) ........................................................
S6.7.1.2 ............................................................
S6.7.1.3 ............................................................
S6.7.2 Version of this Standard .......................
S7 Signal lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment requirements.
S7.1 Turn signal lamps ....................................
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps .........................
New section ......................................................
S7.3.9(c).
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 2.1.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.3.3.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.3.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.4.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.4.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.4.2.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.4.3.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 5.4.5.
S7.5(g).
New reference to other sections.
New title.
S5.1.1; Table I; Table III.
S5.1.1; Table I; Table III.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 6.1 and 6.2.
S5.8.1; S5.8.3; S5.8.4; S5.8.5; S5.8.6; S5.8.7;
S5.8.8; S5.8.9.
70 FR 65972.
70 FR 65972.
70 FR 65972.
70 FR 65972.
70 FR 65972.
70 FR 65972.
New title.
S7.1 Turn signal lamps ......................................
S7.1.1 Front turn signal lamps ..........................
S7.1.1.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.1.1.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.1.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.1.1.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.1.1.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.1.1.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4]
S7.1.1.8 Indicator [New section—points to S9.3
S7.1.1.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.1.1.10 Spacing to other lamps .....................
S7.1.1.10.1 .........................................................
S7.1.1.10.2 Spacing measurement for non-reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.10.3 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.1.10.4 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
S7.1.1.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.11.1 .........................................................
S7.1.1.11.2 .........................................................
S7.1.1.11.3 .........................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.1.1.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.1.12 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.1.12.1 .........................................................
S7.1.1.12.2 .........................................................
S7.1.1.12.3 .........................................................
S7.1.1.12.4 .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
New title.
New title.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section.
S7.1.1.2 Spacing to other lamps .....................
S7.1.1.2 Spacing to other lamps .....................
S7.1.1.2.1 Spacing measurement for non reflector lamps.
S7.1.1.2.2 Spacing measurement for lamps
with reflectors.
S7.1.1.2.3 Spacing based photometric multipliers.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.1.3.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
S7.1.1.3.2 Ratio to parking lamps and clearance lamps.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.1; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, 5.1.5.5.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.2; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, 5.1.5.6.
S5.3.1.7; SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
PO 00000
Frm 00173
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
S5.1.1.12.
SAE J588,
Apr 1985,
SAE J588,
Apr 1985,
SAE J588,
Apr 1985,
SAE J588,
Apr 1985,
SAE J588,
Apr 1985,
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
Nov 1984,
5.1.5.2.
Nov 1984,
5.1.5.2.
Nov 1984,
5.1.5.2.
Nov 1984,
5.1.5.2.
Nov 1984,
5.1.5.2.
04DER2
5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
68406
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.1.1.13 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.13.1 .........................................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.13.2 .........................................................
S7.1.1.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.1.14 Physical tests ....................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.2 Rear turn signal lamps ...........................
S7.1.2.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.1.2.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.2.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.1.2.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.1.2.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.1.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.1.2.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4]
S7.1.2.8 Indicator [New section—points to
S9.3].
S7.1.2.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.1.2.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.1.2.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.11.1 .........................................................
New title ...........................................................
New section ......................................................
S5.1.1.7; SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE
J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
S5.1.1.7; SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE
J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
S5.1.1.7; SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE
J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4;
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.
New title.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
S7.1.2.13 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.1.2.2.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.3 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.13.1 .........................................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.2.13.2 Motorcycle alternative ....................
S7.1.2.14 Physical tests ....................................
S7.1.2.1 Photometry ........................................
S7.1.3 Physical tests ........................................
S7.1.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ................
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.3.1 Dual filament bulbs ..............................
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.1.3.2 Socket indexing ...................................
S7.1.4 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.2 Taillamps ...................................................
S7.2.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.2.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.2.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.2.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4;
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.3.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1395, Apr
1985, 5.3.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1395, Apr
1985, 5.3.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1395, Apr
1985, 5.3.1.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
S7.1.2.11.2 .........................................................
S7.1.2.11.3 .........................................................
S7.1.2.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.1.2.12 Ratio to taillamps and clearance
lamps.
S7.1.2.12.1 .........................................................
S7.1.2.12.2 .........................................................
S7.1.2.12.3 .........................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.1.2.12.4 .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00174
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.2.
S5.1.1.12.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68407
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.2.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.2.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.2.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.2.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4] ..
S7.2.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.2.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.2.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.2.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.11.1 ............................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.2.1.1.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
New section ......................................................
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1.
S7.2.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.2.2 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
S5.1.1.6; Figure 1a; Figure 1b; Figure 1c.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J585e, Sep 1977,
3.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2.
S7.3.11.4 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.3.12 Ratio to taillamps ..................................
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.1.1.1 Lamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm or more in overall width.
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.12.1 ............................................................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.12.2 ............................................................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.12.3 ............................................................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.12.4 ............................................................
S7.3.1.2 Ratio to taillamps ...............................
S7.3.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.13.1 ............................................................
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.2.11.2 ............................................................
S7.2.11.3 ............................................................
S7.2.11.4 Taillamps installed on vehicles 2032
mm. or more in overall width.
S7.2.12 Ratio [New section—points to
S7.1.2.12 and 7.3.12].
S7.2.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.2.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.3 Stop lamps ................................................
S7.3.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.3.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.3.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I and S6.1.3.2].
S7.3.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.3.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.3.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–a].
S7.3.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4] ..
S7.3.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.3.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.3.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.3.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps.
S7.3.11.1 ............................................................
S7.3.11.2 ............................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.3.11.3 ............................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00175
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.1.
New section.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.2.
S5.1.1.12.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3;
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3;
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3;
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3;
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3;
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1;
May 1985, Table 1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1;
May 1985, Table 1.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
SAE J1398,
68408
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.3.13.2 Motor driven cycle alternative ...........
S7.3.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.3.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.3.2 Physical tests ........................................
S7.3.15 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.15.1 Dual filament bulbs ............................
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.3.15.2 Socket indexing .................................
S7.3.3 Combined lamp bulb indexing ..............
S7.4 Side marker lamps ....................................
S7.4.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.4.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.4.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.4.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.4.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.4.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement]
S7.4.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.4.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.4.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.4.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement] ..
S7.4.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.4.13.1 ............................................................
S7.4.13.2 Inboard photometry ...........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5;
SAE J1398, May 1985, 5.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1398, May
1985, 5.3.1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1398, May
1985, 5.3.1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.3.1; SAE J1398, May
1985, 5.3.1.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
S7.4.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.4.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.4.1.1 Inboard photometry ...........................
S7.4.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.5 Clearance and identification lamps ...........
S7.5.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.5.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.5.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.5.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.5.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.5.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.5.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement]
S7.5.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.5.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.5.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.5.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.5.12 Ratio .....................................................
S7.5.12.1 Clearance lamps [New section—
points to S7.1.1.12 and S7.1.2.12].
S7.5.12.2 Identification lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.5.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.5.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.6 Backup lamps ............................................
S7.6.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.6.2 Color of light ...........................................
S7.6.2.1 [New section—points to Table I] .........
S7.6.2.2 Incidental light .....................................
S7.6.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.4.2 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
S5.1.1.3; S5.1.1.8; SAE J592e, Jul 1972,
Table 1, footnote b.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J592e, Jul 1972, 3.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
S7.5.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.5.2 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J592e, Jul 1972, 3.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
S7.6.2 Color .....................................................
New section ......................................................
New
New
SAE
New
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00176
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
section.
section.
J593c, Feb 1968.
section.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68409
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.6.4 Mounting height [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.6.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.6.7 Visibility [New section—see Table V–a]
S7.6.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.6.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.6.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.6.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement] ..
S7.6.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.6.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.7 License plate lamps ..................................
S7.7.1 Number [New section—points to Table I
and S6.1.1].
S7.7.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.7.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.7.4 Mounting height [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.7.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.7.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement]
S7.7.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.7.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.7.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.7.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement] ..
S7.7.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.7.13. Ratio—motorcycles and motor driven
cycles.
S7.7.13.1 ............................................................
S7.7.13.2 Illumination ........................................
S7.7.13.3 Ratio except motorcycles and motor
driven cycles.
S7.7.14 Physical tests .......................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
S7.6.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.6.3 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
Figure 2.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2;SAE J593c, Feb 1968.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
New section.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7.
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
S7.7.2 Photometry requirements .....................
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 7.
S7.7.3 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S7.7.1 Installation .............................................
S7.7.1.1 Incident light from a single lamp .......
S7.7.1.2 Incident light from multiple lamps ......
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2;
4, and 5.
New section.
SAE J587, Oct 1981,
SAE J587, Oct 1981,
SAE J587, Oct 1981,
SAE J587, Oct 1981,
SAE J587, Oct 1981,
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
S7.7.15 Installation ............................................
S7.7.15.1 ............................................................
S7.7.15.2 ............................................................
S7.7.15.3 ............................................................
S7.7.15.4 Incident light from a single lamp .......
S7.7.15.5 Incident light from multiple lamps .....
S7.8 Parking lamps ............................................
S7.8.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.8.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.8.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.8.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.8.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.8.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.8.7 Visibility [New section—points to S6.4] ..
S7.8.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.8.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00177
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 3,
6.3.
6.3.
6.3.
6.5.
6.6.
68410
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.8.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.8.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.8.12 Ratio [New section—points to
S7.1.1.12].
S7.8.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.14 Physical tests .......................................
S7.9 High-mounted lamps .................................
S7.9.1 Number [New section—points to Table I
and S6.1.1.2].
S7.9.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.9.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.9.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I and S6.1.4.1].
S7.9.5 Activation [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.9.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–b].
S7.9.7 Visibility [New section—points to Table
V–a].
S7.9.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.9.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S7.9.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S7.9.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.9.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement] ..
S7.9.13 Photometry ...........................................
S7.9.14 Physical tests .......................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
S7.8.1 Photometry ...........................................
S7.8.2 Physical tests ........................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
S5.1.1.6; Figure 1a; Figure 1b; Figure 1c.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J222, Dec 1970, 3.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
S7.9.3 Photometry ...........................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.14.1 External mount ..................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.9.14.2 Internal mount ...................................
S7.9.4 Physical tests ........................................
S7.10 Daytime running lamps (DRLs) ...............
S7.10.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.10.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.10.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.10.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I and S7.10.13(b)].
S7.10.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I and S7.10.10.1(c)].
S7.10.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S7.10.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.10.10 Spacing to other lamps ......................
S7.10.10.1(a) .....................................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
S5.1.1.27(a)(3) and (b)(3); Figure
S5.1.1.27(a)(4); S5.1.2; S5.1.5;
J186a, Sep 1977, 3.
S5.1.1.27(a)(4); S5.1.2; S5.1.5;
J186a, Sep 1977, 3.
S5.1.1.27(a)(4); S5.1.2; S5.1.5;
J186a, Sep 1977, 3.
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
S7.11.2 Spacing to turn signal lamps ..............
S7.11.2.2(a) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
S7.11.2.2(b) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
S7.11.2.2(c) Not optically combined with turn
signal lamp.
New section ......................................................
S5.5.11(a)(4).
S5.5.11(a)(4)(i).
New section ......................................................
S7.11.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.11.1(a) .........................................................
S7.11.1(b) .........................................................
S7.11.3 Physical tests ......................................
New section.
S5.5.11(a)(1).
S5.5.11(a)(1)(i).
S5.5.11(a)(1)(ii).
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S5.5.11(a)(3); S6.2.
S7.10.10.1(b) .....................................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S7.10.10.1(c) ......................................................
S7.10.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.10.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement]
S7.10.13 Photometry .........................................
S7.10.13(a) ........................................................
S7.10.13(b) ........................................................
S7.10.14 Physical tests .....................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00178
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
10.
S6.2; SAE
S6.2; SAE
S6.2; SAE
S5.5.11(a)(4)(iii).
S5.5.11(a)(4)(iv).
New section.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68411
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S7.11 School bus signal lamps .........................
S7.11.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S7.11.2 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.11.3 Mounting location [New section—
points to Table I].
S7.11.4 Mounting height [New section—points
to Table I].
S7.11.5 Activation [New section—points to
Table I].
S7.11.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—points to Table IV–c].
S7.11.7 Visibility [New section—points to Table
V–a].
S7.11.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.9 Markings [New section—points to
S6.5].
S7.11.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.11 Multiple compartments and multiple
lamps [New section—No requirement].
S7.11.12 Ratio [New section—No requirement]
S7.11.13 Photometry .........................................
S7.11.14 Physical tests .....................................
S8.1 Reflex reflectors ........................................
S8.1.1 Number [New section—points to Table
I].
S8.1.2 Color [New section—points to Table I] ..
S8.1.3 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S8.1.4 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S8.1.5 Activation [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.6 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S8.1.7 Visibility [New section—No requirement]
S8.1.8 Indicator [New section—No requirement].
S8.1.9 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S8.1.10 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
No requirement].
S8.1.11 Photometry ...........................................
S8.1.12 Physical tests .......................................
S8.1.13 Alternative side reflex reflector material
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
S7.13.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.13.2 Physical test requirements .................
S7.10 Reflex reflectors .....................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
S5.1.4(b); SAE J887, Jul 1964, Table 1.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J887, Jul 1964.
New title.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section.
S7.10.1 Photometry .........................................
S7.10.2 Physical tests ......................................
S7.10.1.1 Alternative side reflex reflectors ......
S8.2 Conspicuity systems ..................................
S8.2.1 Retroreflective sheeting ..........................
S8.2.1.1 Construction ........................................
S8.2.1.2 Performance requirements ..................
S8.2.1.3 Certification marking ............................
S8.2.1.4 Application pattern ...............................
S8.2.1.4.1 Alternating red and white materials
S7.12 Conspicuity systems ..............................
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
S7.12.1 Retroreflective sheeting ......................
S7.12.1.1 Certification marking ........................
Table III Application pattern .............................
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Retroreflective sheeting.
Table III Application location—Retroreflective
sheeting.
Table III Application spacing—Retroreflective
sheeting.
S7.12.1.2 Photometry ......................................
S7.12.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors ...............
S7.12.2.1 Certification marking ........................
Table III Application pattern .............................
Table III Application pattern—Alternating—
Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1 and Table 1A.
S5.1.2; S5.1.5; S6.2; SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.
S5.1.1.4 Alternative side reflex material: SAE
J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1 and Table 1A.
S5.7.3 Combination of sheeting and reflectors.
S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting.
S5.7.1.1 Construction.
S5.7.1.2; S5.7.1.3(d).
S5.7.1.5 Certification.
New title.
S5.7.1.3 Sheeting pattern, dimensions, and
relative coefficients of retroreflection.
S5.7.1.3(b).
S8.2.1.4.1.1 Segments ......................................
S8.2.1.4.1.2 Proportion ......................................
S8.2.1.5 Application location .............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S8.2.1.6 Application spacing .............................
S8.2.1.7 Photometry ..........................................
S8.2.2 Conspicuity reflex reflectors ...................
S8.2.2.1 Certification marking ............................
S8.2.2.2 Application pattern ...............................
S8.2.2.2.1 Alternating red and white materials
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00179
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.7.1.3(c).
S5.7.1.4(a).
S5.7.1.4(b) and (c).
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.2 Reflex reflectors.
S5.7.2.3 Certification.
S5.7.2.2.
S5.7.2.2(a).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68412
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S8.2.2.2.2 White material ..................................
Table III Application pattern—White—Conspicuity reflex reflectors.
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
S5.7.2.2(b).
S7.12.2.2 Photometry ......................................
Table III Trailer rear .........................................
S5.7.2.1(a) and (d).
New title.
Table III Trailer rear .........................................
Table III Trailer rear—Element 1—Alternating
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers.
S5.7.1.4.1(a).
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White ........
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White—requirement.
Table III Trailer rear—Element 2—White—requirement.
Table III Trailer rear—Element 3—Alternating
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers.
S5.7.1.4.1(b).
Table III Trailer rear—Element 3—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating ....................
S5.7.1.4.1(c).
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Trailer side—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor .......................................
S5.7.1.4.2(a).
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 1—Alternating—requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White ......
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
Table III Truck tractor—Element 2—White—
requirement.
S7.14 Associated equipment ...........................
New title ...........................................................
S7.14.1 Turn signal operating unit ...................
Table XXI .........................................................
New title ...........................................................
S7.14.2 Turn signal flasher ..............................
Table XXI .........................................................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S7.14.3.2 Turn signal lamp failure ...................
S7.14.4 Headlamp beam switching device ......
S7.14.4 Headlamp beam switching device ......
S7.14.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S7.14.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam
switching device.
S7.14.4.1.1 Operating instructions ...................
S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors.
S8.2.2.3 Photometry ..........................................
S8.2.2.3.1 Red reflectors ...................................
S8.2.2.3.2 White reflectors—horizontal orientation.
S8.2.2.3.3 White reflectors—vertical orientation
S8.2.3 Conspicuity system installation on trailers.
S8.2.3.1 Trailer rear ...........................................
S8.2.3.1.1 Element 1—alternating red and
white materials.
S8.2.3.1.2 Element 2—white & Exceptions. ......
S8.2.3.1.2.1 Upper corners ................................
S8.2.3.1.2.2 Non-rectangular body ....................
S8.2.3.1.3 Element 3—alternating red and
white materials & Exceptions.
S8.2.3.1.3.1 Underride device ...........................
S8.2.3.2 Trailer side—alternating red and white
materials.
S8.2.3.2.1 Horizontal strip .................................
S8.2.3.2.2 Non-continuous ................................
S8.2.3.2.3 Obstructions .....................................
S8.2.4 Conspicuity system installation on truck
tractors.
S8.2.4.1 Element 1—alternating red and white
materials.
S8.2.4.1.1 Lower horizontal ...............................
S8.2.4.1.2 Mudflap mounting .............................
S8.2.4.1.3 Mounting alternatives .......................
S8.2.4.1.4 Obstruction .......................................
S8.2.4.2 Element 2—white ................................
S8.2.4.2.1 Obstruction .......................................
S8.2.4.2.2 Symmetrical relocation .....................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S8.2.4.2.3 Window mounting .............................
S9 Associated equipment requirements ............
S9.1 Turn signal operating unit .........................
S9.1.1 Canceling ................................................
S9.1.2 Physical tests .........................................
S9.2 Turn signal flasher .....................................
S9.2.1 Indicator signals .....................................
S9.2.2 Physical tests .........................................
S9.3 Turn signal pilot indicator ..........................
S9.3.1 TS lamps not visible ...............................
S9.3.2 Indicator light(s) ......................................
S9.3.3 Function ..................................................
S9.3.4 Indicator size and color ..........................
S9.3.4.1 Interior mounted ..................................
S9.3.4.2 Exterior mounted .................................
S9.3.5 Visibility ...................................................
S9.3.6 Turn signal lamp failure ..........................
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching device ............
S9.4 Headlamp beam switching device ............
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam switching device.
S9.4.1 Semi-automatic headlamp beam switching device.
S9.4.1.1 Operating instructions .........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00180
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.7.2.1.
S5.7.2.1(a) and (b).
S5.7.2.1(a) and (c).
S5.7.1.4.1(b).
S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers.
S5.7.1.4.2 Side of trailers.
S5.7.1.4.2(a).
S5.7.1.4.2(b).
S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors.
S5.7.1.4.3(a).
S5.7.1.4.3(a).
S5.7.1.4.3(a).
S5.7.1.4.3(a).
S5.7.1.4.3(b).
S5.7.1.4.3(b).
S5.7.1.4.3(b).
S5.7.1.4.3(b).
Table I and Table III.
New title.
S5.1.1.5.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
New title.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
S5.5.6; SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
S5.5.6; SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
S5.5.6; SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
S5.5.6; SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
SAE J588e, Sep 1970.
S5.5.6.
S5.5.1 Headlamp beam switching.
SAE J564a, Apr 1964.
S5.5.1 Headlamp beam switching.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68413
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S9.4.1.2 Manual override ...................................
S9.4.1.3 Fail safe operation ...............................
S9.4.1.4 Automatic dimming indicator ...............
S9.4.1.5 Lens accessibility ................................
S9.4.1.6 Mounting height ...................................
S9.4.1.7 Physical tests ......................................
S9.5 Upper beam headlamp indicator ...............
S9.5.1 Indicator size, location, and color ..........
S9.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating
unit.
S9.6.1 Combinations ..........................................
S7.14.4.1.2 Manual override ............................
S7.14.4.1.3 Fail safe operation ........................
S7.14.4.1.4 Automatic dimming indicator ........
S7.14.4.1.5 Lens accessibility ..........................
S7.14.4.1.6 Mounting height ............................
Table XXI .........................................................
S7.14.5 Upper beam headlamp indicator ........
S7.14.5.1 Indicator size and location ...............
New title ...........................................................
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.6.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.13.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.16.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.17.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969.
S5.5.2 Upper beam indicator.
S5.5.2; SAE J564a, Apr 1964.
New title.
S7.14.6 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit.
S7.14.6.1 Operating unit switch .......................
Table XXI .........................................................
New title ...........................................................
S7.14.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher.
Table XXI .........................................................
New title ...........................................................
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(b) and (d).
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot
indicator.
S7.14.8.1 Indicator size and color ...................
S8 Headlighting system requirements .............
New title ...........................................................
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S8.1 Headlighting systems ..............................
S10.2 Aimability ...............................................
New section ......................................................
New section ......................................................
New title.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New section ......................................................
New section.
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
S9.6.2 Operation ................................................
S9.6.3 Physical tests .........................................
S9.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal flasher ...
S9.7.1 Indicator signals .....................................
S9.7.2 Physical tests .........................................
S9.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal pilot indicator.
S9.8.1 Two TS indicators ..................................
S9.8.2 Single TS indicators ...............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S9.8.3 Function ..................................................
S9.8.4 Indicator size and color ..........................
S10 Headlighting system requirements .............
S10.1 Vehicle headlighting systems ..................
S10.1.1 Vehicles ex motorcycles & trailers .......
S10.1.2 Motorcycles ..........................................
S10.2 Aiming ......................................................
S10.3 Number [New section—points to Table I]
S10.4 Color of light [New section—points to
Table I].
S10.5 Mounting location [New section—points
to Table I].
S10.6 Mounting height [New section—points to
Table I].
S10.7 Activation [New section—points to Table
I, Table II, and S6.1.5].
S10.8 Effective projected luminous lens area
[New section—No requirement].
S10.9 Visibility [New section—No requirement]
S10.10 Indicator [New section—points to S9.5]
S10.11 Markings [New section—points to S6.5]
S10.12 Spacing to other lamps [New section—
points to S6.1.4.2].
S10.13 Sealed beam headlighting system ........
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim ...............................
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim ...............................
S10.13.2 Simultaneous aim ...............................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.13.4 Physical tests .....................................
S10.13.4.1 Aiming adjustment test ....................
S10.13.4.1 Connector test .................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
section
section
section
section
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
S9 Sealed beam headlamp requirements .......
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.1 Installation ................................................
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S9.2 Simultaneous aim ....................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.3 Photometry ..............................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
PO 00000
Frm 00181
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.5.5; SAE J910, Jan 1966, 3(c) and (e).
SAE J910, Jan 1966.
New title.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
New title.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5; SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5; SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 5; SAE J945, Feb 1966.
S7 Headlighting requirements.
New title.
S7.1.
S7.9.2(b).
S7.8.5.
New section.
New section.
section.
section.
section.
section.
S7.3 Sealed beam headlighting system.
S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system.
S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system.
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system.
S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system.
S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system.
S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system.
S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system.
S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system.
S7.3.7(h).
S7.3.7(h)(1).
S7.3.7(h)(2).
S7.3.2(a)(3).
S7.3.3(a).
S7.3.4.
S7.3.5(a).
S7.3.6(a).
S7.3.7(b).
S7.3.8(b).
S7.3.9(a).
New title.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68414
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S10.13.4.1
S10.13.4.1
S10.13.4.1
S10.13.4.1
S10.13.4.1
Corrosion .........................................
Inward force test ..............................
Torque deflection test ......................
Vibration ..........................................
Wattage ...........................................
S10.13.4.2 Retaining ring test ex types G & H
S10.13.4.3 Color test .........................................
S10.13.4.3 Material test .....................................
S10.14 Integral beam headlighting ....................
S10.14.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.14.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.14.2 Aimability ............................................
S10.14.3 Simultaneous aim ...............................
S10.14.4 Markings .............................................
S10.14.5 Additional light sources ......................
S10.14.6 Photometry .........................................
S10.14.7 Physical tests .....................................
S10.14.7.1 Aiming adjustment tests ..................
S10.14.7.1 Connector test .................................
S10.14.7.1 Corrosion test ..................................
S10.14.7.1 Inward force test ..............................
S10.14.7.1 Temperature cycle test ....................
S10.14.7.1 Vibration test ...................................
S10.14.7.2 Connector—corrosion test ...............
S10.14.7.2 Dust test ..........................................
S10.14.7.2 Humidity test ....................................
S10.14.7.2 Sealing test ......................................
S10.14.7.3 Abrasion test ...................................
S10.14.7.4 Chemical resistance test .................
S10.14.7.5 Internal heat test .............................
S10.14.7.6 Chemical resistance—reflector .......
S10.14.7.6 Corrosion resistance—reflector .......
S10.14.7.7 Torque deflection test ......................
S10.14.7.8 Color test .........................................
S10.14.7.8 Material test .....................................
S10.15 Replaceable bulb headlighting system
S10.15.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions ..............................
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions ..............................
S10.15.2 Aiming restrictions ..............................
S10.15.3 Replacement equipment ....................
S10.15.4 Markings .............................................
S10.15.4.1 U & L ...............................................
S10.15.4.1 U & L ...............................................
S10.15.4.1 U & L ...............................................
S10.15.4.1 U & L ...............................................
S10.15.4.1.1 Exception ......................................
S10.15.4.1.1 Exception ......................................
S10.15.5. Additional light sources .....................
S10.15.6 Photometry .........................................
S10.15.7 Physical tests .....................................
S10.15.7.1 Aiming adjustment tests ..................
S10.15.7.1 Connector test .................................
S10.15.7.1 Corrosion test ..................................
S10.15.7.1 Corrosion—connector test ...............
S10.15.7.1 Dust test ..........................................
S10.15.7.1 Humidity test ....................................
S10.15.7.1 Inward force test ..............................
S10.15.7.1 Temperature cycle test ....................
S10.15.7.1 Vibration test ...................................
S10.15.7.2 Abrasion test ...................................
S10.15.7.3 Chemical resistance test .................
S10.15.7.4 Internal heat test .............................
S10.15.7.5 Chemical resistance—reflector .......
S10.15.7.5 Corrosion resistance—reflector .......
S10.15.7.6 Torque deflection test ......................
S10.15.7.7 Color test .........................................
S10.15.7.7 Material test .....................................
S10.16 Combination headlighting system .........
S10.16.1 Installation ..........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S9.4
S9.4
S9.4
S9.4
S9.4
Physical
Physical
Physical
Physical
Physical
tests
tests
tests
tests
tests
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S9.4 Physical tests ...........................................
S10 Integral beam headlamp requirements ....
S10.1 Installation ..............................................
S10.1 Installation ..............................................
S10.2 Aimability ...............................................
S10.3 Simultaneous aim ..................................
S10.4 Markings ................................................
S10.5 Additional light sources .........................
S10.6 Photometry ............................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S10.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11 Replaceable bulb headlamp requirements
S11.1 Installation ..............................................
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S11.2 Aiming restrictions .................................
S11.4 Replacement equipment ........................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
S11.5 Markings ................................................
Omitted .............................................................
Omitted .............................................................
S11.3 Additional light sources .........................
S11.6 Photometry ............................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S11.7 Physical tests .........................................
S12 Combination headlamps ...........................
S12.1 Installation ..............................................
PO 00000
Frm 00182
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.1.2.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.3.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.5.
S7.3.2(c); S7.3.7(i); S7.3.8(d).
S7.3.2(d); S7.3.3(b); S7.3.5(b); S7.3.6(b);
S7.3.7(g); S7.3.8(e); S7.3.9(b).
S7.3.8(c) (1); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6.
S5.1.5.
S5.1.2.
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System.
S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting System.
S7.4(a).
S7.4(f).
S7.4(d).
S7.4(c)(1); S7.4(c)(2).
S7.4(i).
S7.4(a).
New title.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
S7.4(h)(3); S7.4(g).
S7.8.5.1(b); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.3.
S7.4(h)(5)(i).
S7.4(h)(7).
S8.4(a); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
S7.4(h)(4); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(6); S7.4(g).
S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(1); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(2); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(5)(ii); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(2).
S7.4(h)(3).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S5.1.5.
S5.1.2.
S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlighting system.
S7.5(a).
S7.5(d)(1).
S7.5(e)(1).
S7.5(h).
S7.5(f).
New title.
S7.5(d)(3)(i)(B).
S7.5(d)(3)(ii)(B).
S7.5(e)(3)(i).
S7.5(e)(3)(ii).
S7.5(d)(3)(i)(A).
S7.5(d)(3)(ii)(A).
S7.5(j).
S7.5(b).
S7.5(i).
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
S7.4(h)(3); S7.4(g).
S8.4(a); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
S7.4(h)(4); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(6); S7.4(g).
S7.8.5.1(b); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.3.
S7.4(h)(5)(i).
S7.4(h)(7).
S7.4(h)(1); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(2); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(5)(ii); S7.4(g).
S7.4(h)(2).
S7.4(h)(3).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S5.1.5.
S5.1.2.
S7.6 Combination Headlighting System.
S7.6.1.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68415
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S10.16.2 Photometry .........................................
S10.16.2 Photometry .........................................
S10.16.2 Photometry .........................................
S10.16.2 Photometry .........................................
S10.16.3 Physical tests .....................................
S10.16.3.1 Type F sealed beam .......................
S10.16.3.2 Integral beam ..................................
S10.16.3.3 Replaceable bulb .............................
S10.17 Motorcycle headlighting system ............
S10.17.1 Installation ..........................................
S10.17.1.1 Single headlamp ..............................
S10.17.1.2 Two headlamps with both beams ...
S10.17.1.3 Two headlamps, upper beam and
lower beam.
S10.17.2
Motorcycle
replaceable
bulb
headlamp marking.
S10.17.3 Photometry .........................................
S10.17.4 Physical tests .....................................
S10.17.5 Motorcycle headlamp modulation system.
S10.17.5.1(a) Rate .............................................
S10.17.5.1(b) Maximum power ..........................
S10.17.5.1(c) Minimum intensity .......................
S10.17.5.1(d) Wiring ..........................................
S10.17.5.1(e) Failure mode ...............................
S10.17.5.1(f) Sensor ..........................................
S10.17.5.1(g) Voltage drop ................................
S10.17.5.1(h) Full voltage operation .................
S10.17.5.2 Replacement modulators ................
S10.17.5.2.1 Replacement performance ...........
S10.17.5.2.2 Replacement instructions .............
S10.18.1 Headlamp mounting and aiming ........
S10.18.1.1 Adjustments .....................................
S10.18.1.2 Procedure & security .......................
S10.18.1.2 Procedure & security .......................
S10.18.2 Headlamp aiming systems .................
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment interaction .................
S10.18.3 Aim adjustment interaction .................
S10.18.3.1 Excess aim interaction ....................
S10.18.4
Horizontal
adjustment—visually
aimed headlamp.
S10.18.5 Optical axis marking ...........................
S10.18.5.1 Optical axis marking—vehicle .........
S10.18.5.2 Optical axis marking—lamp ............
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S10.18.5.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S10.18.6 Moveable reflector requirements ........
S10.18.6 Moveable reflector requirements ........
S10.18.7 External aiming ...................................
S10.18.7.1 Headlamp aiming device locating
plates.
S10.18.7.1.1 Aiming pads ..................................
S10.18.7.1.2 Aiming dimension marking ...........
S10.18.7.2 Nonadjustable headlamp aiming device locating plates.
S10.18.8 On—vehicle aiming ............................
S10.18.8.1 Aim ..................................................
S10.18.8.1.1 Vertical aim ...................................
S10.18.8.1.1.1 Graduations ...............................
S10.18.8.1.1.2 VHAD markings .........................
S10.18.8.1.1.3 Graduation scale .......................
S10.18.8.1.1.4 Vertical indicator range .............
S10.18.8.1.1.5 Floor slope compensation .........
S10.18.8.1.1.6 Graduation legibility ...................
S10.18.8.1.2 Horizontal aim ..............................
S10.18.8.1.2.1 Graduation scale .......................
S10.18.8.1.2.2 Horizontal markings ...................
S10.18.8.1.2.3 Graduation legibility ...................
S10.18.8.1.2.4 Horizontal indicator range .........
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.2 Photometry ............................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S12.3 Physical tests .........................................
S13 Motorcycle headlamp requirements .........
S13.1 Installation ..............................................
S13.1.1 Single headlamp .................................
S13.1.2 Two headlamps with both beams ......
S13.1.3 Two headlamps, upper beam and
lower beam.
S13.4 Motorcycle replaceable bulb headlamp
marking.
S13.2 Photometry ............................................
S13.3 Physical tests .........................................
S13.5 Motorcycle headlamp modulation system.
S13.5.1(a) Rate ................................................
S13.5.1(b) Maximum power .............................
S13.5.1(c) Minimum intensity ...........................
S13.5.1(d) Wiring .............................................
S13.5.1(e) Failure mode ..................................
S13.5.1(f) Sensor .............................................
S13.5.1(g) Voltage drop ...................................
S13.5.1(h) Full voltage operation .....................
S13.5.2 Replacement modulators ....................
S13.5.2.1 Replacement performance ..............
S13.5.2.2 Replacement instructions ................
S14.1 Headlamp mounting and aiming ...........
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S8.1.5 Headlamp adjustments .........................
S14.3 Headlamp aiming systems ....................
S14.4 Aim adjustment interaction ....................
S14.4 Aim adjustment interaction ....................
S14.4.1 Excess aim interaction .......................
S14.5 Horizontal adjustment—visually aimed
headlamp.
S14.6 Optical axis marking ..............................
S14.6.1 Optical axis marking—vehicle ............
S14.6.2 Optical axis marking—lamp ................
S14.6.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S14.6.3 Optical axis marking—visual aim
headlamp.
S14.7 Moveable reflectors ...............................
S14.7 Moveable reflectors ...............................
S14.8 External aiming ......................................
S14.8.1 Headlamp aiming device locating
plates.
S14.8.1.1 Aiming pads .....................................
S14.8.1.2 Aiming dimension marking ..............
S14.8.2 Nonadjustable headlamp aiming device locating plates.
S14.9 On—vehicle aiming ...............................
S14.9.1 Aim ......................................................
S14.9.1.1 Vertical aim ......................................
S14.9.1.1.1 Graduations ..................................
S14.9.1.1.2 VHAD markings ............................
S14.9.1.1.3 Graduation scale ..........................
S14.9.1.1.4 Vertical indicator range .................
S14.9.1.1.5 Floor slope compensation ............
S14.9.1.1.6 Graduation legibility ......................
S14.9.1.2 Horizontal aim ..................................
S14.9.1.2.1 Graduation scale ..........................
S14.9.1.2.2 Horizontal markings ......................
S14.9.1.2.3 Graduation legibility ......................
S14.9.1.2.4 Horizontal indicator range ............
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00183
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.6.2.
S7.6.2.1.
S7.6.2.2.
S7.6.3.
New title.
S7.6.2.
S7.6.2.1.
S7.6.2.2.
S7.9.2.
S7.9.6.1.
S7.9.6.2(a).
S7.9.6.2(b).
S7.9.6.2(c).
S7.9.5.
S7.9.2(a).
SAE J584, Apr 1964.
S7.9.4.1.
S7.9.4.1(a).
S7.9.4.1(b).
S7.9.4.1(c).
S7.9.4.1(d).
S7.9.4.1(e).
S7.9.4.1(f).
S7.9.4.1(g).
S7.9.4.1(h).
S7.9.4.2(a).
S7.9.4.2(a).
S7.9.4.2(b).
S7.8.2.
SAE J566, Jan 1960, 1.
SAE J566, Jan 1960, 2.
SAE J566, Jan 1960, 3.
S7.8.5.
S7.8.2.1(a).
S7.8.2.1(b).
S7.8.5.2(b)(3).
S7.8.2.1(c).
S7.8.1.
S7.8.1(b).
S7.8.1(a).
S7.8.1(c).
S7.8.5.3(f)(1).
S7.8.2.2(a).
S7.8.2.2(b).
S7.8.5.1 External aiming.
S7.8.5.1(d).
S7.8.5.1(d)(1).
S7.8.5.1(d)(2).
S7.8.5.1(e).
S7.8.5.2 On—vehicle aiming.
S7.8.5.2(a) Aim.
S7.8.5.2(a)(1) Vertical axis.
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(i).
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(ii).
S7.8.5.2(a)(1) (iii).
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(iv).
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(v).
S7.8.5.2(a)(1)(vi).
S7.8.5.2(a)(2) Horizontal aim.
S7.8.5.2(a)(2) (i).
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(ii).
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(iii).
S7.8.5.2(a)(2)(iv).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68416
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S10.18.8.2 Aiming instructions ..........................
S10.18.8.2.1 Aiming instruction location and
content.
S10.18.8.2.2 Remote indicator instructions .......
S10.18.8.3 Permanent calibration .....................
S10.18.8.4 Replacement units ...........................
S10.18.8.5 Physical tests ..................................
S10.18.9 Visual/optical aiming ...........................
S10.18.9.1 Vertical aim, lower beam .................
S10.18.9.1.1 Vertical position of the cutoff ........
S10.18.9.1.2 Vertical gradient ...........................
S10.18.9.1.3 Horizontal position of the cutoff ...
S10.18.9.1.4 Maximum inclination of the cutoff
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ...
S10.18.9.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ...
S10.18.9.1.5.1 Test position ..............................
S10.18.9.1.5.2 Headlamp aiming ......................
S10.18.9.1.5.3 Beam scanning ..........................
S10.18.9.1.5.4 Gradient calculation ...................
S10.18.9.2 Horizontal aim, lower beam ............
S10.18.9.3 Vertical aim, upper beam ................
S10.18.9.3.1 Combined upper and lower
beams.
S10.18.9.3.2 Upper beam without lower beam
S10.18.9.4 Horizontal aim, upper beam ............
S10.18.9.4.1 Combined upper and lower
beams.
S10.18.9.4.2 Upper beam without lower beam
S10.18.9.4.3 Upper beam without lower beam
of VHAD.
S10.18.9.5 Photometry ......................................
S10.18.9.6 Visual/optical identification marking
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings ................
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings ................
S10.18.9.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings ................
S10.18.9.6.2 VOR/VO markings on sealed
beams.
S11 Replaceable light sources ..........................
S11.1 Markings ..................................................
S11.2 Ballast markings ......................................
S11.3 Gas discharge laboratory life ..................
S11.4 Physical tests ..........................................
S11.4.1 Deflection test .......................................
S11.4.1 Pressure test ........................................
S11.4.2 Power & Luminous flux tests ...............
S11.4.2 Power & Luminous flux tests ...............
S12 Headlamp concealment device requirements.
S12.1 Power loss during headlamp use ............
S12.2 Manual device actuation .........................
S12.3 Single step actuation ...............................
S12.4 Headlamp aiming and replacement ........
S12.5 Operational temperature range and time
limitation.
S12.6 ECE compliance alternative ....................
S12.7 Certification election ................................
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S14 Physical and photometry test procedures
and performance requirements.
S14.1 General test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.1.1 Physical test requirements ...................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S14.9.2 Aiming instructions .............................
S14.9.2.1 Aiming instruction location and content.
S14.9.2.2 Remote indicator instructions ..........
S14.9.3 Permanent calibrations .......................
S14.9.4 Replacement units ..............................
S14.9.5 Physical tests ......................................
S14.10 Visual/optical aiming ............................
S14.10.1 Vertical aim, lower beam ..................
S14.10.1.1 Vertical position of the cutoff .........
S14.10.1.2 Vertical gradient .............................
S14.10.1.3 Horizontal position of the cutoff .....
S14.10.1.4 Maximum inclination of the cutoff ..
S14.10.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ....
S14.10.1.5 Measuring the cutoff parameter ....
S14.10.1.5.1 Test position ...............................
S14.10.1.5.2 Headlamp aiming ........................
S14.10.1.5.3 Beam scanning ...........................
S14.10.1.5.4 Gradient calculation ....................
S14.10.2 Horizontal aim, lower beam ..............
S14.10.3 Vertical aim, upper beam .................
S14.10.3.1 Combined upper and lower beams
S7.8.5.2(b) Aiming instructions.
S7.8.5.2(b)(1).
S14.10.3.2 Upper beam without lower beam ..
S14.10.4 Horizontal aim, upper beam .............
S14.10.4.1 Combined upper and lower beams
S7.8.5.3(c)(2).
S7.8.5.3(d) Horizontal aim, upper beam.
S7.8.5.3(d)(1).
S14.10.4.2 Upper beam without lower beam ..
S14.10.4.3 Upper beam without lower beam
of VHAD.
S14.10.5 Photometric measurements ..............
S14.10.6 Visual/optical identification marking
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6.1 VOL/VOR/VO markings .................
S14.10.6.2 VOR/VO markings on sealed
beams.
S15 Replaceable light sources ........................
S15.1 Markings ................................................
S15.4 Ballast markings ....................................
S15.5 Gas discharge laboratory life ................
New title ...........................................................
S15.6 Physical tests .........................................
S15.6 Physical tests .........................................
S15.2 Power and flux measurement ...............
S15.3 Power and flux measurement ...............
S16 Headlamp concealment device requirements.
S16.1 Power loss during headlamp use ..........
S16.2 Manual device actuation ........................
S16.3 Single step actuation .............................
S16.4 Headlamp aiming and replacement ......
S16.5 Operational temperature range and
time limitation.
S16.6 ECE compliance alternative ..................
S16.7 Certification election ..............................
S18 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S18 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
S18 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements
New title ...........................................................
S7.8.5.3(d)(2).
S7.8.5.3(d)(3).
New title ...........................................................
New title.
S6.8.1 Physical test requirements ...................
S14.1.2 Plastic optical materials ........................
S14.1.3 UV tracer ..............................................
S14.1.4.1 Representative samples ....................
S14.1.4.2 Mounting bracket ...............................
S14.1.4.2 Mounting bracket ...............................
S14.1.4.3 Second sample set ............................
S6.8.4 Plastic optical materials ........................
S6.8.4.1 UV tracer ...........................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
SAE device documents referencing
J575.
S5.1.2.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 5.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.5.1.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 2.1.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 2.3.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, B.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00184
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.8.5.2(b)(2).
S7.8.5.2(c).
S7.8.5.2(d)(2).
S7.8.5.2(d) Testing the VHAD.
S7.8.5.3 Visual/optical aiming.
S7.8.5.3(a) Vertical aim, lower beam.
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) Vertical position of cutoff.
S7.8.5.3(a)(2) Vertical gradient.
S7.8.5.3(a)(3) Horizontal position of the cutoff.
S7.8.5.3(a)(4) Maximum inclination of cutoff.
Interpretation—Spingler 4/6/2000.
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(i).
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(i).
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(ii).
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(iii).
S7.8.5.3(a)(5)(iv).
S7.8.5.3(b) Horizontal aim, lower beam.
S7.8.5.3(c) Vertical aim, upper beam.
S7.8.5.3(c)(1).
S7.8.5.3(e)(1).
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(v).
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(i).
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(ii).
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(iv).
S7.8.5.3(f)(2)(iii).
S7.7 Replaceable light sources.
S7.7(a).
S7.7(e).
S7.7(f).
New title.
S7.7(g).
S7.7(c).
S7.7(b).
S7.7(d).
S12 Headlamp concealment devices.
S12.1.
S12.2.
S12.3.
S12.4.
S12.5.
S12.6.
S12.7 Certification election.
S5.8.1.
S5.8.11.
S7.2(e).
New title.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
SAE
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68417
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.1.4.3 Second sample set ............................
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities ..............................
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities ..............................
S14.1.5 Laboratory facilities ..............................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S14.2 Photometric test procedures ...................
S6.8.2
S6.8.3
S6.8.3
S6.8.3
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S6.8.5
S14.2.1 Photometry measurements for all
lamps except license lamps, headlamps, and
DRLs.
S14.2.1.1 Mounting ............................................
S6.8.5.1 Photometry ex headlamp, license
lamp, & DRL.
S14.2.1.2 School bus signal lamp aiming .........
ex headlamp, license
S14.2.1.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.1.4 Location of test points .......................
S14.2.1.5 Multiple compartment and multiple
lamp photometry of turn signal lamps, stop
lamps, and taillamps.
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together ..............
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together ..............
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together ..............
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together ..............
S14.2.1.5.1 All photometered together ..............
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together ....................
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together ....................
S14.2.1.5.2(a) Measuring together ....................
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually ................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually ................
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually ................
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually ................
S14.2.1.5.2(b) Measuring individually ................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Samples for test ...................................
Laboratory facilities ...............................
Laboratory facilities ...............................
Laboratory facilities ...............................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
Photometric tests ..................................
S6.8.5.1 Photometry
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.5.1 Photometry
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.5.1 Photometry
lamp, & DRL.
S6.8.5.1.1 Location of
ex headlamp, license
ex headlamp, license
test points ....................
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2 Multiple compartment & multiple
lamp photometry.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.1 Photometry of all compartments/
lamps together.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
S6.8.5.1.2.2 Photometry of individual compartments/lamps.
PO 00000
Frm 00185
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, B.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 3.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, D.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, D.
S5.7.1.2.
S5.7.2.1(a).
S7.3.2(a)(3).
S7.3.3(a).
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system.
S7.3.5(a).
S7.3.6(a).
S7.3.7(b).
S7.3.7(d).
S7.3.7(h)(1).
S7.3.8(b).
S7.3.9(a).
S7.4(a)(1)(i).
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
S7.4(a)(1)(iii).
S7.4(a)(2)(i).
S7.4(a)(2)(ii).
S7.4(a)(3).
S7.5(b).
S7.5(d)(2).
S7.5(e)(2).
S7.6.2.
S7.6.3.
S7.9.2.
SAE device documents referencing
J575.
New title.
SAE
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J; SAE J575e, Aug
1970, J.
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
SAE device documents for photometry distance.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J; SAE J575e, Aug
1970, J.
New title.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J1398, May 1985, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2(a).
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2.1.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J1398, May 1985, 4.1.5.2.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 3.6.2(b).
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 4.1.5.2.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 4.1.5.2.2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68418
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.2.1.5.3 Multiple on 2032 mm or wider .......
S6.8.5.1.2.3 Multiple compartment/lamp photometry for wide vehicles.
S6.8.5.1.2.3 Multiple compartment/lamp photometry for wide vehicles.
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
S6.8.5.2.1 Bulbs without MSCD ......................
Omitted .............................................................
S6.8.5.3 License plate lamp photometry .........
S6.8.5.3.1 Illumination surface .........................
S6.8.5.3.2 Test stations ...................................
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 4.1.5.2.
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4 Reflex reflector photometry ...............
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.4.1.1 Reflex reflector photometry
measurement adjustments.
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.5 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.2 Bulbs ..................................................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.5 Location of test points ....................
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6 Headlamp photometry measurements.
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.5.6.1 Seasoning and test voltage ............
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
S14.2.1.5.3 Multiple on 2032 mm or wider .......
S14.2.1.6 Bulbs ..................................................
S14.2.1.6.1 Bulbs without MSCD ......................
S14.2.1.6.2 Socket exemption ...........................
S14.2.2 License plate lamp photometry ............
S14.2.2.1 Illumination surface ...........................
S14.2.2.2 Test stations ......................................
S14.2.2.3 Bulbs ..................................................
S14.2.3 Reflex reflector and retroreflective
sheeting photometry.
S14.2.3.1 Mounting ............................................
S14.2.3.2 Illumination source ............................
S14.2.3.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.3.4 Test setup ..........................................
S14.2.3.5 Photodetector ....................................
S14.2.3.6 Photometry surface ...........................
S14.2.3.7 Procedure ..........................................
S14.2.3.7.1 Observation angel ..........................
S14.2.3.7.2 Entrance angle ...............................
S14.2.3.7.3 Convention .....................................
S14.2.3.7.4 Luminous intensity and illumination
S14.2.3.8 Measurements ...................................
S14.2.3.8.1 Reflex reflectors .............................
S14.2.3.8.2 Retroreflective sheeting ..................
S14.2.3.8.3 Reflex reflector photometry measurement adjustments.
S14.2.3.8.3.1 Reflectors with non fixed rotation
S14.2.3.8.3.2 Reflectors with fixed rotation .......
S14.2.3.8.3.3 Additional photometric readings ..
S14.2.4 Daytime running lamp (DRL) photometry measurements.
S14.2.4.1 ............................................................
S14.2.4.2 ............................................................
S14.2.4.3 Bulbs ..................................................
S14.2.5 Headlamp photometry measurements
S14.2.5.1 Mounting ............................................
S14.2.5.2 Glare area .........................................
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.5.3 Measurement distance ......................
S14.2.5.4
S14.2.5.4
S14.2.5.4
S14.2.5.5
Seasoning and test voltage ...............
Seasoning and test voltage ...............
Seasoning and test voltage ...............
Aiming ................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00186
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J1398, May 1985, 4.1.5.2.
S5.1.1.17.
S5.1.1.16.
Table IV footnotes 2 and 3.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 6.3.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 6.7.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, 6.8.
S5.1.1.17.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
J594f,
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
Jan
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
1977,
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
S5.7.2 Reflex reflectors.
S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.7.
New title.
S11 Photometric Test.
S11 Photometric Test.
S5.1.1.17.
New title.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.
S7.2(d).
S10(a).
S10(b).
S7.4(e).
S7.5(c).
S7.8.5.2(d)(1).
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.2.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.1.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.3.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.6.3.4.
S7.2(d).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68419
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.2.5.5 Aiming ................................................
S14.2.5.5 Aiming ................................................
S14.2.5.5 Aiming ................................................
S14.2.5.5.1 Mechanically aimable headlamps
using an external aimer.
S14.2.5.5.2 Mechanically aimable headlamps
equipped with a VHAD.
S14.2.5.5.3 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps—vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.3.1 VOL .............................................
S14.2.5.5.3.2 VOR .............................................
S14.2.5.5.4 Visually aimable lower beam
headlamps—horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.5.5 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps—vertical aim.
S14.2.5.5.5.1 Combined UB & LB .....................
S14.2.5.5.5.2 Non—combined UB & LB ...........
S14.2.5.5.6 Visually aimable upper beam
headlamps—horizontal aim.
S14.2.5.5.6.1 Combined UB & LB .....................
S14.2.5.5.6.2 Non-combined UB & LB with
VHAD.
S14.2.5.5.6.3 Non-combined UB & LB without
VHAD.
S14.2.5.5.7 Simultaneous aim Type F sealed
beam headlamps and beam contributor integral beam headlamps.
S14.2.5.5.8
Motorcycle
headlamp—upper
beam headlamps designed to comply with
Table XX.
S14.2.5.5.9 Motorcycle headlamp—lower beam
headlamps designed to comply with Table
XX.
S14.2.5.6 Positioner ...........................................
S14.2.5.7 Photometer ........................................
S14.2.5.7.1 Range .............................................
S14.2.5.7.2 Sensor ............................................
S14.2.5.7.2.1 Effective area ..............................
S14.2.5.7.2.2 Intercepted light ...........................
S14.2.5.7.2.3 Direct illumination ........................
S14.2.5.7.3 Color response ...............................
S14.2.5.8 Location of test points .......................
S14.2.5.8.1 Nomenclature .................................
S14.2.5.8.1.1 ‘‘H–V’’ ..........................................
S14.2.5.8.1.2 ‘‘U’’ ‘‘D’’ ‘‘L’’ ‘‘R’’ ..........................
S14.2.5.8.1.3 Angles ..........................................
S14.2.5.9 Beam contributor photometry measurements.
S14.2.5.10 Moveable reflector aimed headlamp
photometry measurements.
S14.2.5.10.1 .......................................................
S14.2.5.10.2 .......................................................
S14.2.5.10.3 .......................................................
S14.3 Out of focus test ......................................
S14.3.1 Procedure .............................................
S14.3.2 Performance requirements ...................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.2 Aiming .............................................
S6.8.5.6.2(a) Aiming—mechanical ...................
S7.3.7(b).
S7.8.5.2(d)(1).
S7.8.5.3(e)(2).
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.1.4.3.
S6.8.5.6.2(b) Aiming—VHAD ...........................
S7.8.5.2(d)(1).
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
New title.
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S6.8.5.6.2(c) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR vertical ...
S6.8.5.6.2(d) Aiming—LB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) and (e)(2).
S7.8.5.3(a)(1) and (e)(2).
S7.8.5.3(b) Horizontal aim, lower beam.
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
New title.
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S6.8.5.6.2(e) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR vertical ..
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(c)(1) and (e)(2).
S7.8.5.3(c)(2) and (e)(2).
New title.
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(d)(1).
S7.8.5.3(d)(2).
S6.8.5.6.2(f) Aiming—UB VOL/VOR horizontal
S7.8.5.3(d)(3).
S6.8.5.6.2(g) Aiming—Simultaneous aim ........
S10(a) and (b).
S6.8.5.6.2(i) Aiming—Motorcycle UB ..............
S7.9.3 and SAE J584, Oct 1993.
S6.8.5.6.2(j) Aiming—Motorcycle LB ...............
SAE J584, Apr 1964.
S6.8.5.6.3
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.4
S6.8.5.6.5
S6.8.5.6.5
S6.8.5.6.5
S6.8.5.6.5
S6.8.5.6.5
S6.8.5.6.6
SAE J575,
New title.
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
SAE J575,
S7.4(a)(3).
S14.4 General test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.4.1 Color test ..............................................
S14.4.1.1 Samples .............................................
S14.4.1.2 General procedure ............................
S14.4.1.2.1 Design voltage ................................
S14.4.1.2.2 Components ...................................
S14.4.1.2.3 Operating temperature ...................
S14.4.1.2.4 Visible surface ................................
S14.4.1.2.5 Test distance ..................................
S14.4.1.3 Visual method ....................................
S14.4.1.3.1 Procedure .......................................
S14.4.1.3.2 Performance requirements .............
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Positioner ........................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Photometer .....................................
Location of test points ....................
Location of test points ....................
Location of test points ....................
Location of test points ....................
Location of test points ....................
Beam contributor photometry .........
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Dec 1988, 4.6.2.1.
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
1988,
4.6.2.2.
4.6.2.3.
4.6.2.3.1.
4.6.2.3.1.
4.6.2.3.1.
4.6.2.3.2.
4.6.3.3.
4.6.3.3.
4.6.3.3.
4.6.3.3.
4.6.3.3.
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
New title.
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
S6.8.5.6.2(h) Aiming—Moveable reflector .......
Table XXII Out of focus test ............................
Table XXII Out of focus test—procedure .........
Table XXII Out of focus test—performance requirements.
New title ...........................................................
S7.8.2.2(b).
S7.8.3.
S7.8.4.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, K.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, K.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, K.
Table XXII Color test ........................................
S6.8.2 Samples for test ...................................
New title ...........................................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test ........................................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, 3.1.8.
New title.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, A2(b).
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, A2(d).
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, A2(c).
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
S5.1.5; SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
PO 00000
Frm 00187
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
New title.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68420
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.4.1.3.2.1 Red ..............................................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—procedure ....................
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Color test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—application.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—samples.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests ..........
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—procedure.
Table XXII Plastic optical material tests—performance requirements.
Table XXII ........................................................
S14.4.1.3.2.2 Yellow (Amber) ............................
S14.4.1.3.2.3 White ...........................................
S14.4.1.4 Tristimulus method ............................
S14.4.1.4.1 Procedure .......................................
S14.4.1.4.1.1 Receiver spectral response .........
S14.4.1.4.1.2 Integrating sphere .......................
S14.4.1.4.1.3 Non uniform color ........................
S14.4.1.4.2 Performance requirements .............
S14.4.1.4.2.1 Red ..............................................
S14.4.1.4.2.2 Yellow (Amber) ............................
S14.4.1.4.2.3 White ...........................................
S14.4.2 Plastic optical materials tests ...............
S14.4.2.1 Samples .............................................
S14.4.2.1.1 Molded samples .............................
S14.4.2.1.2 Exposed area .................................
S14.4.2.1.3 Thickness .......................................
S14.4.2.1.4 Color ...............................................
S14.4.2.1.5 Control samples .............................
S14.4.2.2 Outdoor exposure test .......................
S14.4.2.2.1 Location and duration .....................
S14.4.2.2.2 Material composition ......................
S14.4.2.2.3 Procedure .......................................
S14.4.2.2.3.1 Mounting ......................................
S14.4.2.2.3.2 Cleaning ......................................
S14.4.2.2.4 Performance requirements .............
S14.4.2.2.4.1 Haze ............................................
S14.4.2.2.4.1(a) Except reflex ...........................
S14.4.2.2.4.1(b) Reflex ......................................
S14.4.2.2.4.2 Headlamps ..................................
S14.4.2.2.4.3 Physical changes ........................
S14.4.2.2.4.4 Luminous transmittance ..............
S14.4.2.2.4.5 Color test .....................................
S14.4.2.3 Heat test ............................................
S14.4.2.3.1 Procedure .......................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.4.2.3.2 Performance requirements .............
S14.5 Signal lamp and reflective device physical test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.5.1 Vibration test ........................................
S14.5.1.1 Procedure ..........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table XXII Vibration test ..................................
Table XXII Vibration test—procedure ..............
PO 00000
Frm 00188
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.1.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.2.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.2.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.2.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.2.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 3.2.
S5.1.5; SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.1, 2.2, and
2.3.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.1.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.2.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, 2.3.
New title.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.1.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.1.
S5.1.2(d); SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2.2.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.1.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.2 Note.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.
S5.1.2(g); SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.1.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.1.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.2.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.3.3.
S5.1.2(a); SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.
S5.1.2(b); S5.1.2(c).
S5.1.2(b).
S5.1.2(c).
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.3.
S5.1.2(c); SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.4.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 3.4.1 and 4.2.1.
SAE J576, Jul 1991, 4.2.2.
S5.1.2(e) and (f).
S5.1.2(f).
S5.1.2(e).
New title.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, E; SAE J575e, Aug
1970, E.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, E; SAE J575e, Aug
1970, E.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68421
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.5.1.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.5.2 Moisture test .........................................
Table XXII Vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Moisture test ..................................
S14.5.2.1 Procedure ..........................................
Table XXII Moisture test—procedure ...............
S14.5.2.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.5.3 Dust test ...............................................
Table XXII Moisture test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
S14.5.3.1 Samples .............................................
Table XXII Dust test .........................................
S14.5.3.2 Procedure ..........................................
Table XXII Dust test—procedure .....................
S14.5.3.2 Procedure (third sentence) ................
S14.5.3.3 Dust test—performance requirements.
S14.5.4 Corrosion test .......................................
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXII Corrosion test .................................
S14.5.4.1 Procedure ..........................................
Table XXII Corrosion test—procedure .............
S14.5.4.2 Performance requirements ................
Table XXII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII .......................................................
S14.6 Headlamp physical test procedures and
performance requirements.
S14.6.1 Abrasion test ........................................
S14.6.1.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.1.1.1 Abrading pad ..................................
S14.6.1.1.2 Abrading pad alignment .................
S14.6.1.1.3 Abrasion test procedure .................
S14.6.1.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.2 Chemical resistance test ......................
S14.6.2.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.2.1.1 Test fluids .......................................
S14.6.2.1.2 Fluid application .............................
S14.6.2.1.3 Test duration ..................................
S14.6.2.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.3 Corrosion test .......................................
S14.6.3.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.3.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.4 Corrosion—connector test ....................
S14.6.4.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.4.1.1 Connector test ................................
S14.6.4.1.2 Salt spray .......................................
S14.6.4.1.3 Cycle ...............................................
S14.6.4.1.4 Chamber .........................................
S14.6.4.1.5 Wash ..............................................
S14.6.4.1.6 Connector test ................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.6.4.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.4.2.1 Corrosion ........................................
S14.6.4.2.2 Adhesion .........................................
S14.6.4.2.3 Terminal corrosion ..........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table XXIII Abrasion test .................................
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Abrasion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test ...............
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion test ................................
Table XXIII Corrosion test—procedure ............
Table XXIII Corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test ............
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(a).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(b).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—procedure(c).
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion—connector test—performance requirements.
PO 00000
Frm 00189
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J575d,
1970, E.
SAE J575d,
1970, F.
SAE J575d,
1970, F.
SAE J575d,
1970, F.
SAE J575d,
1970, G.
SAE J575d,
1970, G.
SAE J575d,
1970, G.
SAE J575d,
1970, G.
SAE J575d,
1970, G.
SAE J575d,
1970, H.
SAE J575d,
1970, H.
SAE J575d,
1970, H.
New title.
Aug 1967, E; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, F; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, F; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, F; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, G; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, G; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, G; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, G; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, G; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, H; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, H; SAE J575e, Aug
Aug 1967, H; SAE J575e, Aug
S8.2 Abrasion.
S8.2 Abrasion.
S8.2(c)(1) and (3); S8.2(e).
S8.2(a) and (c)(4).
S8.2(b) and (d).
S7.4(h)(1); S8.1.
S8.3 Chemical resistance.
S8.3 Chemical resistance.
S8.3(b).
S8.3(a).
S8.3(c).
S7.4(h)(2); S8.1.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.1.2 and 5.1.1.2.
S7.8.5.1(c); SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4.
S7.8.5.1(c); SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4.
S8.4 Corrosion.
S8.4 Corrosion.
S8.4(a).
S8.4(b).
S8.4(b).
S8.4(b).
S8.4(b).
S8.4(c).
S7.4(h)(3).
S7.4(h)(3).
S7.4(h)(3).
S7.4(h)(3).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68422
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.6.5 Dust test ...............................................
S14.6.5.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.5.1.1 Setup ..............................................
S14.6.5.1.2 Cycle ...............................................
S14.6.5.1.3 Test duration ..................................
S14.6.5.2 Performance requirements ................
Table XXIII Dust test ........................................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—procedure ....................
Table XXIII Dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII .......................................................
S8.5 Dust.
S8.5 Dust.
S8.5 Dust.
S8.5 Dust.
S8.5 Dust.
S7.4(h)(4); S8.1.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test and internal heat test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test .................
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII Temperature cycle test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Internal heat test ...........................
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Internal heat test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Humidity test .................................
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(a) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(a) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(b) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(b) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(c) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(d) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(e) .........
Table XXIII Humidity test—procedure(f) ..........
Table XXIII Humidity test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Vibration test .................................
S6.8.2 [fourth sentence] ...................................
Table XXIII Vibration test—procedure .............
Table XXIII Vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Sealing test ...................................
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—procedure ...............
Table XXIII Sealing test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S14.6.6 Temperature cycle test and internal
heat test.
S14.6.6.1 Samples .............................................
S14.6.6.2 General procedure ............................
S14.6.6.2.1 General activation ..........................
S14.6.6.2.2 Turn signal activation .....................
S14.6.6.2.3 Headlamp beam activation .............
S14.6.6.3 Temperature cycle test ......................
S14.6.6.3.1 Procedure .......................................
S14.6.6.3.1.1 Cycle ............................................
S14.6.6.3.1.2 Activation .....................................
S14.6.6.3.1.3 Test chamber(s) ..........................
S14.6.6.3.1.4 Vents and drains .........................
S14.6.6.3.2 Performance requirements .............
S14.6.6.4 Internal heat test ...............................
S14.6.6.4.1 Procedure .......................................
S14.6.6.4.1.1 Photometric output reduction ......
S14.6.6.4.1.2 HB1 or HB2 light sources ...........
S14.6.6.4.1.3 Photometric measurements ........
S14.6.6.4.1.4 Setup ...........................................
S14.6.6.4.1.5 Cycle ............................................
S14.6.6.4.1.6 Cleaning ......................................
S14.6.6.4.2 Performance requirements .............
S14.6.7 Humidity test .........................................
S14.6.7.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.7.1.1 Test fixture ......................................
S14.6.7.1.2 Headlamp mounting .......................
S14.6.7.1.3 Setup ..............................................
S14.6.7.1.4 Cycle ...............................................
S14.6.7.1.5 Air flow test setup ...........................
S14.6.7.1.6 Air flow uniformity ...........................
S14.6.7.1.7 Air flow procedure ..........................
S14.6.7.1.8 Inspection .......................................
S14.6.7.2 Performance requirements ................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.6.8 Vibration test ........................................
S14.6.8.1 Samples .............................................
S14.6.8.2 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.8.3 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.9 Sealing test ...........................................
S14.6.9.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.6.9.1.1 Immersion .......................................
S14.6.9.1.2 Pressurized immersion ...................
S14.6.9.1.3 Cycle ...............................................
S14.6.9.1.4 Inspection .......................................
S14.6.9.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.6.10 Chemical resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00190
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S8.6 Temperature and internal heat test.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S8.6.1 Temperature cycle.
S7.4(h)(5)(i); S8.1.
S8.6.2 Internal heat test.
S8.6.2 Internal heat test.
S8.6.2(a).
S8.6.2(a).
S8.6.2(a).
S8.6.2(b).
S8.6.2(b).
S8.6.2(c).
S7.4(h)(5)(ii); S8.1.
New title.
New title.
S8.7(a).
S8.7(a).
S8.7(b).
S8.7(b).
S8.7(c).
S8.7(d).
S8.7(e).
S8.7(f).
S7.4(h)(6).
S8.8 Vibration.
SAE J575, Dec 1988, 2.3.
S8.8; SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.1.
S7.3.2(c); S7.3.7(i); S7.3.8(d); S7.4(h)(7).
S8.9 Sealing.
S8.9 Sealing.
S8.9 Sealing.
S8.9 Sealing.
S8.9 Sealing.
S8.9 Sealing.
S7.4(g); S7.5(i); S8.9.
S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resistance of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68423
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.6.10.1 Procedure ........................................
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Chemical resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—procedure.
Table XXIII Corrosion resistance of reflectors
of replaceable lens headlamps test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Inward force test ...........................
Table XXIII Inward force test—procedure .......
Table XXIII Inward force test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Torque deflection test ...................
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—procedure
Table XXIII Torque deflection test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Retaining ring test .........................
Table XXIII Retaining ring test—procedure .....
Table XXIII Retaining ring test—performance
requirements.
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test ..............
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test—procedure.
Table XXIII Headlamp connector test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test .................
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—procedure.
Table XXIII Headlamp wattage test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test laboratory—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle
S14.6.10.1.1 Test fluids .....................................
S14.6.10.1.2 Fluid application ...........................
S14.6.10.1.3 Test duration ................................
S14.6.10.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.11 Corrosion resistance of reflectors of
replaceable lens headlamps test.
S14.6.11.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.11.1.1 Salt spray .....................................
S14.6.11.1.2 Drying and cleaning .....................
S14.6.11.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.12 Inward force test .................................
S14.6.12.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.12.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.13 Torque deflection test .........................
S14.6.13.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.13.1.1 Mounting .......................................
S14.6.13.1.2 Deflectometers .............................
S14.6.13.1.3 Deflectometer adapters ................
S14.6.13.1.4 Torque ..........................................
S14.6.13.1.5 Torque application ........................
S14.6.13.1.6 Group I aiming pads .....................
S14.6.13.1.7 Group II aiming pads ....................
S14.6.13.1.8 Non-adjustable locating plates .....
S14.6.13.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.14 Retaining ring test ..............................
S14.6.14.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.14.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.15 Headlamp connector test ...................
S14.6.15.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.15.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.16 Headlamp wattage test ......................
S14.6.16.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.16.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.17 Aiming adjustment test—laboratory ...
S14.6.17.1 Procedure ........................................
S14.6.17.2 Performance requirements ..............
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.6.17.2.1 Sealed beam except Type F ........
S14.6.17.2.2 Type F, replaceable bulb, integral
beam, and combination.
S14.6.17.2.3 Moveable reflector ........................
S14.6.18 Aiming adjustment test—on vehicle ...
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00191
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S8.10.1 Chemical resistance.
S8.10.1(b).
S8.10.1(a).
S8.10.1(c).
S7.4(h)(2); S8.1.
S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resistance of
reflectors of replaceable lens headlamps.
S8.10.2 Corrosion.
S8.10.2(a).
S8.10.2(b).
S7.4(h)(3); S8.1.
S7.8.5.1(b).
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.3.
S7.8.5.1(b); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.3.
S7.3.8(c) (2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.3.8(c) (2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.3.8(c) (2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.3.8(c)(2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.3.8(c)(2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.3.8(c) (2); S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.8.5.1(a).
S7.8.5.1(a); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.5.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6.
S7.3.7(e)(7); SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.6.
S7.3.2(b); SAE J580, Dec 1986, Figure 1.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.4.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.4.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.7.
SAE J1383, Apr 1985, 4.7.
S7.3.2(d); S7.3.3(b); S7.3.5(b); S7.3.6(b);
S7.3.7(g); S7.3.8(e); S7.3.9(b).
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
S7.8.2.1(c); S7.8.2.2(d).
S7.8.3; S7.8.4; SAE J580, Dec 1986, 5.1.2.1
and 5.1.2.2.
S7.3.7(e)(5); S7.8.3; S7.8.4; SAE J580, Dec
1986, 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2.
S7.8.2.2(a) and (c).
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68424
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.6.18.1 Procedure ........................................
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—procedure.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Aiming adjustment test on vehicle—performance requirements.
Table XXIII .......................................................
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Deflection test for replaceable
light sources—performance requirements.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—procedure.
Table XXIII Pressure test for replaceable light
sources—performance requirements.
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
S9 Deflection
sources.
S9 Deflection
sources.
S9 Deflection
sources.
S9 Deflection
sources.
S9 Deflection
sources.
S7.7(g).
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S15.2;
S7.7(b);
S7.7(b);
S7.7(b);
S7.7(b);
S7.7(b);
S7.7(b);
S14.6.18.1.1 Setup ............................................
S14.6.18.1.2 Vehicle pitch .................................
S14.6.18.1.3 Adjustments ..................................
S14.6.18.2 Performance requirements ..............
S14.6.18.2.1 Vertical range ...............................
S14.6.18.2.2 Continuous vertical adjustment ....
S14.6.18.2.3 Aim interaction ..............................
S14.7 Replaceable light source physical test
procedures and performance requirements.
S14.7.1 Deflection test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.1.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.7.1.1.1 Force application ............................
S14.7.1.1.2 Application sequence .....................
S14.7.1.1.3 Measurement ..................................
S14.7.1.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.7.2 Pressure test for replaceable light
sources.
S14.7.2.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.7.2.1.1 Force application ............................
S14.7.2.1.2 Application sequence .....................
S14.7.2.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.7.3 Replaceable light source power and
flux measurement procedure.
S14.7.3.1 Seasoning ..........................................
S14.7.3.1.1 Resistive filament source ...............
S14.7.3.1.2 Discharge source ...........................
S14.7.3.2 Test voltage .......................................
S14.7.3.3 Luminous flux measurement .............
S14.7.3.3.1 Resistive filament light source
setup.
S14.7.3.3.2 Discharge light source setup ..........
S14.8 Vehicle headlamp aiming device (VHAD)
physical test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.8.1 Samples ................................................
S14.8.2 Scale graduation test ...........................
S14.8.2.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.8.2.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.8.3 Cold scale graduation test ...................
S14.8.3.1 Procedure ..........................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.8.3.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.8.4 Hot scale graduation test .....................
S14.8.4.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.8.4.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.8.5 Thermal cycle test ................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
S15.3
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
S7.8.3.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, 4.2.
S7.8 Aimability Performance Requirements.
S7.8.3.
S7.8.3.
S7.8.2.1(a) and (c).
New title.
test
for
replaceable
light
test
for
replaceable
light
test
for
replaceable
light
test
for
replaceable
light
test
for
replaceable
light
S7.7(c).
S7.7(c).
S7.7(c).
S7.7(c).
S7.7(c).
S7.7(b); S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S7.7(d).
S15.2; S15.3 ....................................................
Table XXIII .......................................................
S7.7(b); S7.7(d).
New title.
Table XXIII .......................................................
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test .........
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD scale graduation test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation test ..
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation
test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD cold scale graduation
test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test ...
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test—
procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD hot scale graduation test—
performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test ...............
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i).
PO 00000
Frm 00192
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(i).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(A).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(B).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68425
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.8.5.1 Procedure ..........................................
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD thermal cycle test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test .....................
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—procedure
Table XXIII VHAD corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test ..................
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test—procedure.
Table XXIII VHAD photometry test—performance requirements.
Table XXI .........................................................
S14.8.5.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.8.6 Corrosion test .......................................
S14.8.6.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.8.6.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.8.7 Photometry test ....................................
S14.8.7.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.8.7.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.9 Associated equipment physical test procedures and performance requirements.
S14.9.1 Turn Signal operating unit durability
test.
S14.9.1.1 Power supply specifications ..............
S14.9.1.2 Procedure ..........................................
S14.9.1.2.1 Circuit .............................................
S14.9.1.2.2 Cycle ...............................................
S14.9.1.2.3 Voltage drop ...................................
S14.9.1.3 Performance requirements ................
S14.9.1.3.1 Voltage drop (<2032 mm wide) ......
S14.9.1.3.2 Voltage drop (2032 mm or wider) ..
S14.9.1.3.3 Stop contacts ..................................
S14.9.2 Vehicular hazard warning signal operating unit durability test.
S14.9.2.1 Procedure ..........................................
S14.9.2.1.1 Circuit .............................................
S14.9.2.1.2 Cycle ...............................................
S14.9.2.1.3 Voltage drop ...................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.2.2 Performance requirements ................
S14.9.3 Turn signal flasher and vehicular hazard warning signal warning flasher tests.
S14.9.3.1 Standard test circuit ..........................
S14.9.3.1.1 Test circuit setup ............................
S14.9.3.1.1.1 Series resistance .........................
S14.9.3.1.1.2 A–B resistance ............................
S14.9.3.1.1.3 C–D voltage .................................
S14.9.3.1.1.4 Voltage adjustments—fixed load
flashers.
S14.9.3.1.1.5 Voltage adjustments—variable
load flashers.
S14.9.3.1.1.6 Measurements .............................
S14.9.3.2 Power supply specifications ..............
S14.9.3.2.1 Starting time, voltage drop, and
flash rate & percent current ‘‘on’’ time tests.
S14.9.3.2.1(a) Transients ..................................
S14.9.3.2.1(b) Output voltage ............................
S14.9.3.2.1(c) Output current ............................
S14.9.3.2.1(d) Static regulation .........................
S14.9.3.2.1(e) Dynamic regulation ....................
S14.9.3.2.1(f) Ripple voltage .............................
S14.9.3.2.2 Durability tests ................................
S14.9.3.2.2(a) Transients ..................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(C).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(D).
S7.8.5.1(c); SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4.
S7.8.5.1(c); SAE J575, Dec 1988, 4.4.
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E).
S7.8.5.2(d)(3)(ii)(E).
New title.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal operating unit durability
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
operating unit durability test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher and vehicular
hazard warning signal flasher tests.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968 ......................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968 ......................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 4 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 5 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 6 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 7 ..................................
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8 ..................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10 and 11 ....................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 10 ................................
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 8.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10 and 11.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, 10.
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
PO 00000
J590b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J590b,
J590b,
Oct
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Oct
Oct
Frm 00193
1965,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1965,
1965,
Fmt 4701
10 ................................
10(a) ............................
10(b) ............................
10(c) ............................
10(c) ............................
10(d) ............................
11 ................................
11 ................................
Sfmt 4700
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
S5.1.1.13; SAE J589, Apr 1964.
S5.1.1.13.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J589, Apr 1964.
SAE J910, Jan 1966.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4.
SAE J910, Jan 1966, 4.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965; SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
04DER2
1968.
1968.
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
4.
5.
6.
7.
10.
10(a).
10(b).
10(c).
10(c).
10(d).
11.
11.
68426
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.9.3.2.2(b) Output voltage ............................
S14.9.3.2.2(c) Output current ............................
S14.9.3.2.2(d) Static regulation .........................
S14.9.3.2.2(e) Dynamic regulation ....................
S14.9.3.2.2(f) Ripple voltage .............................
S14.9.3.3 Turn signal flasher starting time test
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(a) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(b) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(c) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(c) ............................
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 11(d) ............................
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher starting time
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher voltage drop
test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test ....
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
procedure.
Table XXI Turn signal flasher durability test—
performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
S14.9.3.3.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.3.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.3.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.3.2.2 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.3.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.3.3(a) Normally closed contacts ...........
S14.9.3.3.3(b) Normally open contacts .............
S14.9.3.4 Turn signal flasher voltage drop test
S14.9.3.4.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.4.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.4.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.4.2.2 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.4.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.5 Turn signal flasher flash rate and
percent current ‘‘on’’ time test.
S14.9.3.5.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.5.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.5.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.5.2.2 Temperature and voltage ............
S14.9.3.5.2.3 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.5.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.5.3(a) Normally closed contacts ...........
S14.9.3.5.3(b) Normally open contacts .............
S14.9.3.6 Turn signal flasher durability test ......
S14.9.3.6.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.6.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.6.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.6.2.2 Temperature and voltage ............
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.3.6.2.3 Duration .......................................
S14.9.3.6.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.7 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test.
S14.9.3.7.1 Samples ..........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00194
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J823b,
J590b,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Oct
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1968,
1965,
11(a).
11(b).
11(c).
11(c).
11(d).
1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
S5.1.1.19; SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2.
S5.1.1.19; SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 2.
S5.1.1.20; SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
S5.1.1.19; SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, 3.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68427
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.9.3.7.2 Procedure .......................................
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher starting time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test—performance requirements.
S14.9.3.7.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.7.2.2 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.7.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.7.3(a) Normally closed contacts ...........
S14.9.3.7.3(b) Normally open contacts .............
S14.9.3.8 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher voltage drop test.
S14.9.3.8.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.8.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.8.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.8.2.2 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.8.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.9 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher flash rate and percent current ‘‘on’’
time test.
S14.9.3.9.1 Samples ..........................................
S14.9.3.9.2 Procedure .......................................
S14.9.3.9.2.1 Setup ...........................................
S14.9.3.9.2.2 Temperature and voltage ............
S14.9.3.9.2.3 Measurement ...............................
S14.9.3.9.3 Performance requirements .............
S14.9.3.9.3(a) Normally closed contacts ...........
S14.9.3.9.3(b) Normally open contacts .............
S14.9.3.10 Vehicular hazard warning signal
flasher durability test.
S14.9.3.10.1 Samples ........................................
S14.9.3.10.2 Procedure .....................................
S14.9.3.10.2.1 Setup .........................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.3.10.2.2 Temperature and voltage ..........
S14.9.3.10.2.3 Duration .....................................
S14.9.3.10.3 Performance requirements ...........
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00195
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 2.
S5.1.1.20; SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 3.
SAE J945, Feb 1966.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, 4.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68428
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.9.3.11 Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests.
S14.9.3.11.1 Test conditions .............................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device tests—applicable item.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sensitivity test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device voltage regulation test—
performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device manual override test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—procedure.
S14.9.3.11.2 Sensitivity test ..............................
S14.9.3.11.2.1 Samples .....................................
S14.9.3.11.2.2 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.2.2.1 Adjustment ..............................
S14.9.3.11.2.2.2 Switching ................................
S14.9.3.11.2.2.3 Sensitivity curves ....................
S14.9.3.11.2.3 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.2.3.1 Operating limits ......................
S14.9.3.11.2.3.2 Sensitivity voids ......................
S14.9.3.11.3 Voltage regulation test .................
S14.9.3.11.3.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.3.1.1 Adjustment ..............................
S14.9.3.11.3.1.2 Measurement ..........................
S14.9.3.11.3.2 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.4 Manual override test .....................
S14.9.3.11.4.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.4.1.1 Adjustment ..............................
S14.9.3.11.4.1.2 Exposure ................................
S14.9.3.11.4.1.3 Override ..................................
S14.9.3.11.4.1.4 Switch to upper beam ............
S14.9.3.11.4.1.5 Switch to lower beam .............
S14.9.3.11.4.2 Performance requirements ........
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.3.11.5 Warmup test .................................
S14.9.3.11.5.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.5.1.1 Adjustment ..............................
S14.9.3.11.5.1.2 Measurement ..........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00196
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.1.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.2.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.3.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.4.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68429
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.9.3.11.5.2 Performance requirements ........
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device warmup test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device temperature test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device dust test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device corrosion test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device vibration test—performance requirements.
S14.9.3.11.6 Temperature test ..........................
S14.9.3.11.6.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.6.1.1 Exposure ................................
S14.9.3.11.6.1.2 Temperature ...........................
S14.9.3.11.6.1.3 Measurement ..........................
S14.9.3.11.6.2 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.7 Dust test .......................................
S14.9.3.11.7.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.7.1.1 Sensitivity ...............................
S14.9.3.11.7.1.2 Dust exposure ........................
S14.9.3.11.7.1.3 Measurement ..........................
S14.9.3.11.7.2 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.8 Corrosion test ...............................
S14.9.3.11.8.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.8.1.1 Sensitivity ...............................
S14.9.3.11.8.1.2 Applicability .............................
S14.9.3.11.8.1.3 Sockets ...................................
S14.9.3.11.8.1.4 Measurement ..........................
S14.9.3.11.8.2 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.9 Vibration test ................................
S14.9.3.11.9.1 Procedure ..................................
S14.9.3.11.9.1.1 Sensitivity ...............................
S14.9.3.11.9.1.2 Acceleration ............................
S14.9.3.11.9.1.3 Frequency ...............................
S14.9.3.11.9.1.4 Operation ................................
S14.9.3.11.9.1.5 Measurement ..........................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.3.11.9.2 Performance requirements ........
S14.9.3.11.9.2.1 Beam switching ......................
S14.9.3.11.9.2.2 Mechanical aim ......................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00197
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.5.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.7.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.8.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.9.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(a).
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(b).
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10(c).
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.10.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68430
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
S14.9.3.11.10 Sunlight test ................................
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device sunlight test—performance
requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device durability test—performance requirements.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam test.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—procedure.
Table XXI Semiautomatic headlamp beam
switching device return to upper beam
test—performance requirements.
Figure 1 ............................................................
Figure 2 ............................................................
Figure 2 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 3 ............................................................
Figure 4 ............................................................
Figure 5 ............................................................
Figure 6 ............................................................
Figure 7 ............................................................
Figure 8 ............................................................
Figure 9 ............................................................
Figure 10 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 11 ..........................................................
Figure 12–1 ......................................................
Figure 12–2 ......................................................
Figure 13 ..........................................................
Figure 14 ..........................................................
Figure 15 ..........................................................
Figure 16 ..........................................................
Figure 17 ..........................................................
Figure 18 ..........................................................
Table XIII ..........................................................
Not included .....................................................
SAE J577, Apr 1964, Figure 1 and Table 1 ....
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, Figure 1 .......................
Table I Activation Taillamps .............................
Table I Activation Taillamps .............................
Table I Activation Taillamps .............................
S14.9.3.11.10.1 Procedure ................................
S14.9.3.11.10.1.1 Exposure ..............................
S14.9.3.11.10.1.2 Rest ......................................
S14.9.3.11.10.2 Performance requirements ......
S14.9.3.11.11 Durability test ..............................
S14.9.3.11.11.1 Procedure ................................
S14.9.3.11.11.1.1 Sensitivity .............................
S14.9.3.11.11.1.2 Cycle .....................................
S14.9.3.11.11.1.3 Measurement ........................
S14.9.3.11.11.2 Performance requirements ......
S14.9.3.11.12 Return to upper beam test .........
S14.9.3.11.12.1 Procedure ................................
S14.9.3.11.12.1.1 Sensitivity .............................
S14.9.3.11.12.1.2 Exposure ..............................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
S14.9.3.11.12.2 Performance requirements ......
Figure 1 ..............................................................
Figure 2 ..............................................................
Figure 2 ..............................................................
Figure 3 ..............................................................
Figure 3 ..............................................................
Figure 3 ..............................................................
Figure 3 ..............................................................
Figure 4 ..............................................................
Figure 5 ..............................................................
Figure 6 ..............................................................
Figure 7 ..............................................................
Figure 8 ..............................................................
Figure 9 ..............................................................
Figure 10 ............................................................
Figure 11 ............................................................
Figure 11 ............................................................
Figure 11 ............................................................
Figure 11 ............................................................
Figure 12–1 ........................................................
Figure 12–2 ........................................................
Figure 13 ............................................................
Figure 14 ............................................................
Figure 15 ............................................................
Figure 16 ............................................................
Figure 17 ............................................................
Figure 18 ............................................................
Figure 19 ............................................................
Figure 20 ............................................................
Figure 21 ............................................................
Figure 22 ............................................................
Table I–a Activation Taillamps ...........................
Table I–a Activation Taillamps ...........................
Table I–a Activation Taillamps ...........................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00198
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.11.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12(a) and (b).
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.12.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15.
SAE J565b, Feb 1969, 4.15.
SAE J578c, Feb 1977, Figure 1.
SAE J590b, Oct 1965, Figure 1.
SAE J945, Feb 1966, Figure 1.
Figure 4–1.
Figure 4–2.
Figure 4–3.
Figure 4–4.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, Figure 1.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 25.
Figure 30–1.
Figure 30–2.
Figure 30–3.
Figure 30–4.
New.
New.
Figure 31.
Figure 16.
Figure 22.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, Figure 3.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, Figure 4.
SAE J580, Dec 1986, Figure 2.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, Figures 1 & 2.
SAE J587, Oct 1981, Figure 3.
SAE J577, Apr 1964, Figure 1 and Table 1.
SAE J823b, Apr 1968, Figure 1.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.3.
S5.5.7(a).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68431
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
Activation Taillamps ...........................
Activation—Backup lamps .................
Activation—Backup lamps .................
Activation—Clearance lamps ............
Activation—DRL ................................
Activation—DRL ................................
Activation—DRL ................................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—High mounted stop lamps
Activation—Identification lamps .........
Activation—License plate lamps .......
Activation—License plate lamps .......
Activation—License plate lamps .......
Activation—Parking lamps .................
Activation—Parking lamps .................
Activation—Parking lamps .................
Activation—High mounted stop lamps
Activation—School bus signal lamps
Activation—School bus signal lamps
Activation—School bus signal lamps
Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Activation—Stop lamps .....................
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Activation Taillamps .............................
Activation—Backup lamps ...................
Activation—Backup lamps ...................
Activation—Clearance lamps ...............
Activation—DRL ...................................
Activation—DRL ...................................
Activation—DRL ...................................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—High mounted stop lamps
Activation—Identification lamps ...........
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Activation—Parking lamps ...................
Activation—High mounted stop lamps
Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
Activation—School bus signal lamps ..
Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I–a Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Table I–a Activation—Turn signals ....................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Lighting device ...................................
Table I–a Additional Lamps Required on All
School Buses except Multifunction School
Activity Buses.
Table I–a Mounting height .................................
Table I–a Mounting height .................................
Table I–a Mounting height .................................
Table I–a Mounting height .................................
Table I–a Mounting height .................................
Table I–a Mounting height—Clearance lamps ..
Table I–a Mounting height—Clearance lamps—
rear.
Table I–a Mounting height—Identification
lamps—rear.
Table I–a Mounting location ..............................
Table I–a Mounting location ..............................
Table I–a Mounting location ..............................
Table I–a Mounting location ..............................
Table I–a Mounting location—High mounted
stop lamp.
Table I–a Mounting location—Clearance lamps
Table I–a Mounting location—Clearance lamps
Table I–a Mounting location—Reflex reflectors
Table I–a Number and color ..............................
Table I–a Number and color ..............................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Turn signals ......................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Additional Lamps Required on All
School Buses except Multifunction School
Activity Buses.
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting Height—Clearance lamps ....
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I–a
I–a
I–a
I–a
Number
Number
Number
Number
VerDate Aug<31>2005
and
and
and
and
color
color
color
color
..............................
..............................
..............................
..............................
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.5.7(b).
S5.5.10(d).
SAE J593c, Feb 1968.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL).
S5.5.11(a)(5).
S5.5.8.
S5.5.9.
S5.5.10(b).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.7(a).
S5.5.7(b).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.7(a).
S5.5.7(b).
S5.5.4.
S5.1.4(b)(ii).
S5.5.10(a).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
S5.5.10(b).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.7(a).
S5.5.7(b).
Interpretation—Faber 5/26/00.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.5.4.
S5.5.10(a).
S5.1.1.27(a).
S5.1.1.27(b).
S5.1.1.4 Alternative side reflex material.
S5.5.11(a) Daytime running lamps (DRL).
S5.5.11(a)(3).
S5.5.11(b).
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.1.4 School bus signal lamps.
S5.5.11(b).
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.3.1.4 Rear clearance lamp mounting.
64 FR 16358.
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
64 FR 16358.
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location .................................
Table I Mounting location—High mounted stop
lamp.
Table I Mounting location— Clearance lamps
Table I Mounting location— Clearance lamps
Table I Mounting location—Reflex reflectors ...
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.3.1.8(a)(1).
PO 00000
I
I
I
I
Number
Number
Number
Number
Frm 00199
and
and
and
and
color
color
color
color
Fmt 4701
................................
................................
................................
................................
Sfmt 4700
S5.3.1.6 Truck tractor clearance lamps.
S5.3.2.1.
S5.3.1.2 Truck tractor rear reflex.
S5.1.1.1 Truck tractor exemption—TS.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.2 Truck tractor exemption.
S5.5.11(a)(3).
Table I.
Table II.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68432
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Table I–a Number and color ..............................
Table I–a Number and color ..............................
Table I–a Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
Table I–a Number and color—School bus signal lamps.
Table I–a Number and color—School bus signal lamps.
Table I–b Activation Taillamps ...........................
Table I–b Activation—Clearance lamps ............
Table I–b Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Table I–b Activation—Side marker lamps .........
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
Table I Number and color—School bus signal
lamps.
Table I Number and color—School bus signal
lamps.
Table I Activation Taillamps .............................
Table I Activation—Clearance lamps ...............
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Side marker lamps ...........
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker exemption.
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Table I–b Activation—Stop lamps .....................
Table I–b Activation—Turn signals ....................
Table I–b Lighting device ...................................
Table I–b Lighting device ...................................
Table I–b Lighting device ...................................
Table I–b Lighting device ...................................
Table I–b Lighting device ...................................
Table I–b Mounting height .................................
Table I–b Mounting height .................................
Table I–b Mounting height .................................
Table I–b Mounting height .................................
Table I–b Mounting Height—Clearance lamps ..
Table I–b Mounting height—Clearance lamps—
rear.
Table I–b Mounting height—Identification
lamps—rear.
Table I–b Mounting location ..............................
Table I–b Mounting location ..............................
Table I–b Mounting location ..............................
Table I–b Mounting location ..............................
Table I–b Mounting location—Clearance lamps
Table I–b Mounting location—Reflex reflectors
Table I–b Mounting location—Side marker
lamps.
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Turn signals ......................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Lighting device .....................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting height ...................................
Table I Mounting Height—Clearance lamps ....
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(b).
S5.5.10(d).
Interpretation— Faber 5/26/00.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.4.
S5.5.10(a).
S5.1.1.4 Alternative side reflex material.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.3.1.4 Rear clearance lamp mounting.
64 FR 16358.
64 FR 16358 ....................................................
64 FR 16358.
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.3.2.1.
S5.3.1.3 Trailer front reflex and side marker.
S5.3.1.3 Trailer front reflex and side marker.
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color ..............................
Table I–b Number and color—Clearance lamp
Table I–b Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
Table I–b Reflex reflectors .................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color—Clearance lamp ...
Table I Number and color—Intermediate side
marker lamps.
S6.1.1.1.1 Conspicuity and reflex ....................
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
Activation Taillamps ...........................
Activation Taillamps ...........................
Activation Taillamps ...........................
Activation Taillamps ...........................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—Headlamp .......................
Activation—License plate lamps ........
Activation—License plate lamps ........
Activation—License plate lamps ........
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ....
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ....
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ....
Activation—Stop lamps ......................
Activation—Stop lamps ......................
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps ......................
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps ......................
Table I–c Activation—Stop lamps ......................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting
location .................................
location .................................
location .................................
location .................................
location—Clearance lamps ..
location—Reflex reflectors ...
location—Side marker lamps
Table I Number and color ................................
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Activation Taillamps .............................
Activation Taillamps .............................
Activation Taillamps .............................
Activation Taillamps .............................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—Headlamp .........................
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—License plate lamps ..........
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
Activation—Motorcycle headlamps ......
Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
Table I Activation—Stop lamps ........................
PO 00000
Frm 00200
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
S5.1.4(a).
S5.1.4(b)(i).
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.14 Trailer exemption—rear.
S5.1.1.15 Trailer exemption—front.
Table I.
Table II.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.1.1.9 Boat trailer exemption.
S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker exemption.
S5.1.1.29 Conspicuity system replace reflex
on trailers.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.3.
S5.5.7(a).
S5.5.7(b).
S5.5.9.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.7(a).
S5.5.7(b).
S5.5.10(b).
S5.5.10(c).
S5.5.9.
Interpretation—Faber 5/26/00.
S5.1.1.11 Stop lamp and turn signal lamp activation interaction.
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.10(d).
S5.5.4.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68433
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
I–c
Activation—Turn signals ....................
Lighting device ...................................
Lighting device ...................................
Lighting device ...................................
Mounting height .................................
Mounting height .................................
Mounting location ...............................
Mounting location ...............................
Number and color ..............................
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Activation—Turn signals ......................
Lighting device .....................................
Lighting device .....................................
Lighting device .....................................
Mounting height ...................................
Mounting height ...................................
Mounting location .................................
Mounting location .................................
Number and color ................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Table I–c Number and color ..............................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I–c Number and color ..............................
Table I–c Number and color ..............................
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type A .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type B .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type C .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type D .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type E .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type F .....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type G ....
Table II–a Sealed beam headlamps Type H .....
Table II–b Combination headlamps—2 lamp
system.
Table II–b Combination headlamps—4 lamp
system.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—2 lamp
system.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system U & L.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system—simultaneous activation.
Table II–c Integral beam headlamps—beam
contributor system.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—2
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—with HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II–d Replaceable bulb headlamps—4
lamp system—without HB2.
Table II footnote 1 ..............................................
Table II footnote 2 ..............................................
Table II footnote 3 ..............................................
Table II footnote 4 ..............................................
Table II footnote 5 ..............................................
Table II footnote 6 ..............................................
Table II footnote 7 ..............................................
Table III Marking Requirements Locations [New
Table—points to marking requirements].
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table I Number and color ................................
Table I Number and color ................................
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type A .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type B .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type C .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type D .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type E .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type F .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type G .......
Table II Sealed beam headlamps Type H .......
Table II Combination headlamps—2 lamp system.
Table II Combination headlamps—4 lamp system.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—2 lamp
system.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system U & L.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—4 lamp
system—simultaneous activation.
Table II Integral beam headlamps—beam
contributor system.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—2 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—with HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II Replaceable bulb headlamps—4 lamp
system—without HB2.
Table II footnote 1 ............................................
Table II footnote 2 ............................................
Table II footnote 3 ............................................
Table II footnote 4 ............................................
Table II footnote 5 ............................................
Table II footnote 6 ............................................
Omitted .............................................................
New table .........................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Front turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
PO 00000
Frm 00201
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.5.10(a).
S5.1.1.4 Alternative side reflex material.
Table III.
Table IV.
Table III.
Table IV.
Table III.
Table IV.
S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate lamps and
backup lamps.
S5.1.1.21 Motor driven cycle turn signal exemption.
Table III.
Table IV.
S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system.
S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system.
S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system.
S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system.
S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system.
S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system.
S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system.
S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system.
S7.6.2.
S7.6.3.
S7.4(a)(2).
S7.4(a)(1)(i).
S7.4(a)(1)(iii).
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
S7.4(a)(3).
Figure 26.
S7.5(e).
Figure 26.
S7.5(d).
Figure 26.
S7.5(e).
Figure 26.
S7.5(d).
S5.5.8.
S7.4(d).
S5.5.8.
S5.5.8.
S5.5.8.
S7.4(a)(3).
S7.4(a)(3).
New table.
S5.1.1.25 Motor cycle turn
EPLLA.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.3.2.
signal
lamp
signal
lamp
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.3.2.
S5.1.1.25 Motor
EPLLA.
S5.1.1.26(a).
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
cycle
turn
68434
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Rear turn signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–a Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–b High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–b High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV–c School bus signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV footnote 1 ............................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Rear turn signal lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp–Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV Stop lamp—Effective projected luminous lens area.
Table IV High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV High mounted stop lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV School bus signal lamp—Effective
projected luminous lens area.
Table IV footnote 1 ..........................................
Table V–a Backup lamp visibility .......................
Table V–a High mounted stop lamp visibility ....
Table V–a High mounted stop lamp visibility ....
Table V–a HMSL—Visibility ...............................
Table V–a HMSL—Visibility ...............................
Table V–a School bus signal lamp visibility ......
Table V–b SAE stop lamp visibility ....................
Table V–b SAE stop lamp visibility ....................
Table V–b SAE taillamp visibility .......................
Table V–b SAE turn signal lamp visibility ..........
Table V–b SAE turn signal lamp visibility ..........
Table V–c Lens area visibility ............................
Table V–c Lens area visibility ............................
Table V–d Luminous intensity visibility ..............
Table V–d Luminous intensity visibility ..............
Table V footnote 1 .............................................
Table V footnote 2 .............................................
Table V footnote 3 .............................................
Table V footnote 4 .............................................
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base group
photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base group
photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
group photometry.
Table V Backup lamp visibility .........................
Table V High mounted stop lamp visibility ......
Table V High mounted stop lamp visibility ......
Table V HMSL—Visibility .................................
Table V HMSL—Visibility .................................
Table V School bus signal lamp visibility ........
Table V SAE stop lamp visibility ......................
Table V SAE stop lamp visibility ......................
Table V SAE taillamp visibility .........................
Table V SAE turn signal lamp visibility ............
Table V SAE turn signal lamp visibility ............
Table V Lens area visibility ..............................
Table V Lens area visibility ..............................
Table V Luminous intensity visibility ................
Table V Luminous intensity visibility ................
Table V footnote 1 ...........................................
Table V footnote 2 ...........................................
Table V footnote 3 ...........................................
Table V footnote 4 ...........................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base zone
photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base zone
photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—1.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
zone photometry.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00202
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
S5.1.1.26(b).
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.3.2.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.1.1.26(a).
S5.1.1.26(b).
SAE J1398, May 1985, 5.3.2.
S5.1.1.27(a)(1).
S5.1.1.27(b)(1).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
S5.3.2(e).
S5.3.2(c).
S5.3.2(d).
S5.1.1.27(a)(2).
S5.1.1.27(b)(2).
SAE J887, Jul 1964.
SAE J1398, May 1985, 5.4.1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.4.1.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, 4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.4.1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.4.1.
Figure 19.
S5.3.2(b)(1).
Figure 20.
S5.3.2(b)(2).
New language.
S5.3.2.3.
Figure 19, footnote 2.
Figure 20, footnote 2.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68435
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–b Front turn signal lamp—2 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
group photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI–a Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VI footnote 1 ............................................
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2 × base individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
zone photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—2.5 × base
individual point photometry.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VI Front turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VI footnote 1 ..........................................
Table VI footnote 2 ............................................
Table VI footnote 3 ............................................
Table VI footnote 4 ............................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
group photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 1 ...........................................
Table VI footnote 2 ..........................................
Table VI footnote 3 ..........................................
Table VI footnote 4 ..........................................
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Red lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
individual point photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Amber lamp
zone photometry.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII Rear turn signal lamp—Photometric
ratio.
Table VII footnote 1 .........................................
Table VII footnote 2 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 3 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 4 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 2 .........................................
Table VII footnote 3 .........................................
Table VII footnote 4 .........................................
Table VII footnote 5 ...........................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table VII footnote 5 .........................................
Table VII footnote 6 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 6 .........................................
Table VII footnote 7 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 8 ...........................................
Table VII footnote 7 .........................................
Table VII footnote 8 .........................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00203
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
S5.3.1.7 Turn signal spacing.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
S5.3.1.7 Turn signal spacing.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.4.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 2.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1, footnote a;
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, footnote a.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 3.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, Table 1.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1, footnote a;
SAE J1395, Apr 1985 footnote a.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1, footnote b;
SAE J1395, Apr 1985 footnote b.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, Table 1.
S5.1.1.1; SAE J588e, Sep 1970, 3.9.1; SAE
J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.3.
SAE J1395, Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J588, Nov 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1395,
Apr 1985, 5.1.5.2.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68436
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Group photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table VIII footnote 1 ..........................................
Table VIII footnote 2 ..........................................
Table VIII footnote 3 ..........................................
Table VIII footnote 4 ..........................................
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Group photometry ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Group photometry ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio .............
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio .............
Table IX footnote 1 ............................................
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Individual point photometry.
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Zone photometry ............
Table VIII Taillamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table VIII footnote 1 ........................................
Table VIII footnote 2 ........................................
Table VIII footnote 3 ........................................
Omitted .............................................................
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table IX Stop lamp—Zone photometry ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Zone photometry ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
Table IX footnote 1 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 2 ............................................
Table IX footnote 3 ............................................
Table IX footnote 2 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 3 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 4 ............................................
Table IX footnote 5 ............................................
Table IX footnote 4 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 7 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 6 ............................................
Table IX footnote 6 ..........................................
Table X Red side marker lamp photometry ......
Table X Amber side marker lamp photometry ..
Table X footnote 1 .............................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table X Red side marker lamp photometry .....
Table X Amber side marker lamp photometry
Table X footnote 1 ...........................................
Table X footnote 2 .............................................
Table X footnote 3 .............................................
Table XI Red clearance and identification lamp
photometry.
Table XI Amber clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI footnote 1 ............................................
Table XI footnote 2 ............................................
Table XI footnote 3 ............................................
Table XI footnote 4 ............................................
Table XII Single lamp system—Individual point
photometry.
Table XII Single lamp system—Individual point
photometry.
Table XII Single lamp system—Group photometry.
Table XII Two lamp systems—Each lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two lamp systems—Each lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two lamp system—Each lamp—
Group photometry.
Table XII Backup lamp—Maximum photometric
intensity any single lamp.
Table XII footnote 1 ...........................................
Table XII footnote 2 ...........................................
Table XII footnote 3 ...........................................
Table XII footnote 4 ...........................................
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—
Group photometry.
Table XIII–a Motorcycle turn signal lamp—Photometric ratio.
Table X footnote 2 ...........................................
Table X footnote 3 ...........................................
Table XI Red clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI Amber clearance and identification
lamp photometry.
Table XI footnote 1 ..........................................
Table XI footnote 2 ..........................................
Table XI footnote 3 ..........................................
Table XI footnote 4 ..........................................
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Single backup lamp system—Zone
photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Individual point photometry.
Table XII Two backup lamp system—Zone
photometry.
Table XII Backup lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table XII footnote 1 .........................................
Table XII footnote 2 .........................................
Table XII footnote 3 .........................................
Table XII footnote 4 .........................................
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Figure 1a.
Figure 1b.
Figure 1c.
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1a.
1b.
1c.
1b, footnote 1.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
S5.1.1.6.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J585e, Sep 1977, Table 1, footnote 5.
SAE J1398, May 1985, Table 1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1.
SAE J1398, May 1985, Table 1.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1.
SAE J1398, May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1, footnote a;
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote a.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1, footnote b;
SAE J1398, May 1985, footnote b.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1398,
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3; SAE J1398,
May 1985, 5.1.5.2.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
S5.1.1.8; SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1, footnote b.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1.
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
SAE J592e, Jul 1972, Table 1, footnote a.
S5.3.2.1.
S5.1.1.18 Backup lamp photometry.
SAE J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote a.
Figure 2, footnote 1.
S5.1.1.18 Backup lamp photometry.
SAE J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote b.
Figure 2, footnote 1.
SAE J593c, Feb 1968, Table 1, footnote c.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
Figure 2, footnote 1.
Figure 2, footnote 1.
S5.1.1.18 Backup lamp photometry.
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp.
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp.
S7.1.1.1; S7.1.2.1 ............................................
S5.1.1.7 Motorcycle turn signal lamp.
PO 00000
Frm 00204
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68437
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table XIII–b Motorcycle stop lamp—Photometric ratio.
Table XIII–b Motor driven cycle stop lamp—
Group photometry.
Table XIII–a footnote 1 ......................................
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
Table IX Stop lamp—Photometric ratio ...........
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3.
Table IX Motor driven cycle stop lamp zone
photometry.
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table XIII–a footnote 2 ......................................
Table XIII–a footnote 3, Table XIII footnote 1 ...
Table XIII–a footnote 4, Table XIII–b footnote 2
Table XIII–b footnote 3 ......................................
Table XIII–a footnote 5, Table XIII–b footnote 4
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Group photometry ....
Table XIV Parking lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table XIV footnote 1 ..........................................
Table XIV footnote 2 ..........................................
Table XIV footnote 3 ..........................................
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Individual
point photometry.
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Group
photometry.
Table XV footnote 1 ...........................................
Table XV footnote 2 ...........................................
Table XV footnote 3 ...........................................
Table XV footnote 4 ...........................................
Table XVI–a Red reflex reflector photometry ....
Table XVI–a Amber reflex reflector photometry
Table XVI–a Amber reflex reflector photometry
Table XVI–a White reflex reflector photometry
Table XVI–a White reflex reflector photometry
Table XVI–a footnote 1 ......................................
Table XVI–b Red conspicuity reflex reflector
photometry.
Table XVI–b White horizontal conspicuity reflex
reflector photometry.
Table XVI–b White vertical conspicuity reflex
reflector photometry.
Table XVI–c Red C2 sheeting photometry ........
Table XVI–c Red C3 sheeting photometry ........
Table XVI–c Red C4 sheeting photometry ........
Table XVI–c White C2 sheeting photometry .....
Table XVI–c White C3 sheeting photometry .....
Table XVI–c White C4 sheeting photometry .....
Table XVII School bus signal lamp photometry
Table XVII Red lamp photometry ......................
Table XVII Amber lamp photometry ..................
Table XVII footnote 1 .........................................
Table XVII footnote 2 .........................................
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ............
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ............
Table XIX–a Lower beam #1M photometry .......
Table XIX–a Lower beam #1V photometry .......
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2M photometry .......
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2V photometry .......
Table XIX–a Lower beam #2V photometry .......
Table XIX–b Lower beam #3M photometry .......
Table XIX–b Lower beam #3V photometry .......
Table XIX–b Lower beam #4M photometry .......
Standard note—new table ...............................
Standard note—new table ...............................
Standard note—new table ...............................
Table IX footnote 5 ..........................................
Table IX footnote 7 ..........................................
Table XIV Parking lamp—Individual point photometry.
Table XIV Parking lamp—Zone photometry ....
Table XIV Parking lamp—Maximum photometric intensity.
Table XIV footnote 1 ........................................
Table XIV footnote 2 ........................................
Table XIV footnote 3 ........................................
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Individual
point photometry.
Table XV High mounted stop lamp—Zone
photometry.
Table XV footnote 1 .........................................
Table XV footnote 2 .........................................
Table XV footnote 3 .........................................
Table XV footnote 4 .........................................
Table XVI Red reflex reflector photometry ......
Table XVI Amber reflex reflector photometry ..
Table XVI Amber reflex reflector photometry ..
Table XVI White reflex reflector photometry ....
Table XVI White reflex reflector photometry ....
Table XVI footnote 1 ........................................
Table XVI Red conspicuity reflex reflector
photometry.
Table XVI White horizontal conspicuity reflex
reflector photometry.
Table XVI White vertical conspicuity reflex reflector photometry.
Table XVI Red C2 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C3 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI Red C4 sheeting photometry ..........
Table XVI White C2 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C3 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVI White C4 sheeting photometry .......
Table XVII School bus signal lamp photometry
Table XVII Red lamp photometry ....................
Table XVII Amber lamp photometry ................
Table XVII footnote 1 .......................................
Table XVII footnote 2 .......................................
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #1 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #2 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #3 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #4 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #5 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XVIII Upper beam #6 photometry ..........
Table XIX Lower beam #1M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #1V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #2M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #2V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #2V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #3M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #3V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #4M photometry .........
S5.1.1.22 Motor driven cycle stop lamp exemptions.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1, footnote a;
SAE J588, Nov 1984, Table 1 footnote a.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, Table 1, footnote b.
S5.3.2.3.
S5.1.1.22; Interpretation—Parkyn 6/1/98.
SAE J586, Feb 1984, 5.1.5.3.
Figures 1a, 1b, and 1c.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00205
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Figures 1a, 1b, and 1c.
Figure 1b, footnote 2.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
S5.1.1.6.
S5.3.2.3.
Figure 10.
Figure 10.
SAE J575e, Aug 1970, J.
Figure 10, footnote 2.
S5.1.1.27(b)(3).
Figure 10, footnote 1.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Tables 1 and 1A.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1, footnote a.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A, footnote a.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1, footnote a.
SAE J594f, Jan 1977, Table 1A, footnote a
S5.3.2.3.
S5.7.2.1(b).
S5.7.2.1(c).
S5.7.2.1(d).
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
S5.7.1.2; Figure 29.
SAE J887, Jul 1964, Table 1.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
S5.1.4(b).
S5.3.2.3.
SAE J575d, Aug 1967, J.
Figure 15–1.
Figure 15–2.
Figure 17–1.
Figure 17–2.
Figure 27–1.
Figure 27–2.
Figure 28–1, Types 1A1, 1C1, and 1G1.
Figure 28–2, Types 1A1, 1C1, and 1G1.
Figure 28–1, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1.
Figure 28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1.
Figure 15–1.
Figure 15–2.
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
Figure 15–1.
Figure 15–2.
Figure 17–1.
Figure 17–2.
Figure 28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1 and 2G1.
Figure 27–1.
Figure 27–2.
Figure 28–2, Types 2A1, 2C1, and 2G1.
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
68438
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
APPENDIX B.—FMVSS NO. 108 REWRITE CROSS REFERENCE—Continued
Current FMVSS No. 108 or incorporated document citation
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite NPRM citation
Table XIX–c Lower beam #4V photometry .......
Table XIX–c Lower beam #4V photometry .......
Table XIX–b Lower beam #5M photometry .......
Table XIX–b Lower beam #5M photometry .......
Table XIX 10° U–90° U Test area .....................
Table XX Motorcycle photometry ......................
Table XX Motor driven cycle photometry ..........
Table XX Motor driven cycle with single lamp
photometry.
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Redundant—eliminated ......................................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C ...................
Table XIX Lower beam #4V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #4V photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #5M photometry .........
Table XIX Lower beam #5M photometry .........
Table XIX 10° U–90° U Test area ...................
Table XX Motorcycle photometry .....................
Table XX Motor driven cycle photometry ........
Table XX Motor driven cycle with single lamp
photometry.
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.1 Headlighting system type .....................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
S8.1.2 Headlamp category ..............................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
Relocated to Part 564, Appendix C .................
FMVSS No. 108 rewrite final rule citation
Figure 15–2.
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
Figure 15–1.
S7.4(a)(1)(ii).
Interpretation—Spingler 7/2/99.
Figure 32.
Figure 32.
Figure 32.
S7.3.
S7.4.
S7.5.
S7.6.
S7.3.
S7.4.
S7.5.
S7.6.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 18.
Figure 21.
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
SAE J1383,
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
1985,
APPENDIX C.—LIST OF FIGURES
[Current FMVSS No. 108 is 49 CFR 571.108, Oct. 1, 2006]
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
Figure
No.
1 ...........
2 ...........
3 ...........
4 ...........
5 ...........
6 ...........
7 ...........
8 ...........
9 ...........
10 .........
11 .........
12–1 .....
12–2 .....
13 .........
14 .........
15 .........
16 .........
17 .........
18 .........
19 .........
20 .........
21 .........
22 .........
Title
CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM [SAE J578c, FEB 1977, FIGURE 1].
FLASHER PERFORMANCE CHART [SAE J590b, OCT 1965, FIGURE 1].
REPLACEABLE BULB HEADLAMP AIM PADS [CURRRENT FMVSS 108 FIG. 4–1 TO 4–4].
HEADLAMP CONNECTOR TEST SETUP [SAE J580, DEC 1986, FIGURE 1].
HEADLAMP ABRASION TEST FIXTURE [CURRENT FMVSS 108 FIGURE 5].
THERMAL CYCLE TEST PROFILE [CURRENT FMVSS 108 FIGURE 6].
DIRT/AMBIENT TEST SETUP [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 7].
REPLACEABLE LIGHT SOURCE DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [CURRENT FMVSS 108 FIGURE 8].
ENVIROMENTAL TEST PROFILE [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 9].
REPLACEABLE LIGHT SOURCE PRESSURE TEST SETUP [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 25].
TRAILER CONSPICUITY TREATMENT EXAMPLES [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURES 30–1 TO 30–4].
TRAILER CONSPICUITY DETAIL I [NEW].
TRAILER CONSPICUITY DETAIL II [NEW].
TRACTOR CONSPICUITY TREATMENT EXAMPLES [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 31].
92 x 150 HEADLAMP AIM DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 16].
TYPES G AND H HEADLAMP AIM DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 22].
TYPES A AND E HEADLAMP AIM DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [SAE J580, DEC 1986, FIGURE 3].
TYPE B HEADLAMP AIM DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [SAE J580, DEC 1986, FIGURE 4].
TYPES C AND D HEADLAMP AIM DEFLECTION TEST SETUP [SAE J580, DEC 1986, FIGURE 2].
LICENSE PLATE LAMP TARGET LOCATIONS [SAE J587, OCT 1981, FIGURES 1 & 2].
LICENSE PLATE LAMP MEASUREMENT OF INCIDENT LIGHT ANGLE [SAE J587, OCT 1981, FIGURE 3].
VIBRATION TEST MACHINE [SAE J577, APRIL 1964, FIGURE 1 & TABLE 1].
FLASHER STANDARD TEST CIRCUIT [SAE J823b, APRIL 1968, FIGURE 1].
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00206
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
5.3.
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
10.
11.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 / Rules and Regulations
68439
APPENDIX C.—LIST OF FIGURES—Continued
[Current FMVSS No. 108 is 49 CFR 571.108, Oct. 1, 2006]
Figure
No.
Title
FIGURES TO INCORPORATE IN 49 CFR 564 APPENDIX C
LF HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 11] [INCLUDES TYPE F NONADJUSTABLE HEADLAMP
AIMING DEVICE LOCATING PLATE INFORMATION].
UF HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 12].
LF/UF MOUNTING FEATURES [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 13].
LF/UF MOUNTING RING [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 14].
TYPE G & H HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [CURRENT FMVSS 108 FIGURE 18].
TYPE G & H HEADLAMP MOUNTING INFORMATION [CURRENT FMVSS108 FIGURE 21].
TYPE 1A1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 11].
TYPE 2A1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 10] [INCLUDES 100 mm X 165 mm NONADJUSTABLE HEADLAMP AIMING DEVICE LOCATING PLATE INFORMATION].
TYPE 2B1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 13] [INCLUDES 142 mm X 200 mm NONADJUSTABLE HEADLAMP AIMING DEVICE LOCATING PLATE INFORMATION].
TYPE 1C1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 7] [INCLUDES 178 mm DIA. NONADJUSTABLE
HEADLAMP AIMING DEVICE LOCATING PLATE INFORMATION].
TYPE 2C1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 8].
TYPE 2D1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 5] [INCLUDES 146 mm DIA. NONADJUSTABLE
HEADLAMP AIMING DEVICE LOCATING PLATE INFORMATION].
TYPE 2E1 HEADLAMP DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 15].
TYPES 1A1, 2A1, AND 2E1 HEADLAMP MOUNTING RING/LAMP BODY DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE
12].
TYPE 2B1 HEADLAMP MOUNTING RING/LAMP BODY DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 14].
TYPES 1C1 AND 2C1 HEADLAMP MOUNTING RING/LAMP BODY DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 9].
TYPE 2D1 HEADLAMP MOUNTING RING/LAMP BODY DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION [SAE J1383, APR 1985, FIGURE 6].
[FR Doc. 07–5644 Filed 12–3–07; 8:45 am]
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES2
BILLING CODE 4910–59–P
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:58 Dec 03, 2007
Jkt 214001
PO 00000
Frm 00207
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04DER2.SGM
04DER2
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 72, Number 232 (Tuesday, December 4, 2007)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 68234-68439]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 07-5644]
[[Page 68233]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Part II
Department of Transportation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
49 CFR Parts 564 and 571
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards; Lamps, Reflective Devices, and
Associated Equipment; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 72, No. 232 / Tuesday, December 4, 2007 /
Rules and Regulations
[[Page 68234]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
49 CFR Parts 564 and 571
Docket No. NHTSA-2007-28322
RIN 2127-AJ75
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards; Lamps, Reflective
Devices, and Associated Equipment
AGENCY: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
Department of Transportation.
ACTION: Final Rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document amends the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) No. 108 on lamps, reflective devices, and associated equipment
by reorganizing the regulatory text so that it provides a more
straightforward and logical presentation of the applicable regulatory
requirements, which includes the agency's interpretation of the
existing requirements. It also greatly reduces the need to consult
relevant third-party standards by including applicable requirements
directly into the main body of Standard No. 108, rather than
incorporating such provisions by reference. This final rule does not
impose any new substantive requirements on manufacturers.
In addition, this document amends 49 CFR Part 564, Replaceable
Light Source Information, by adding a newly created Appendix C, which
relocates figures addressing sealed beam headlamps that currently
reside in FMVSS No. 108 and a relevant Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) standard there. We believe few lighting manufacturers still
produce sealed beam headlamps, and their diminishing use is unlikely to
draw new manufacturers of this type of lamp. Accordingly, we see no
drawbacks to consolidating the information regarding sealed beam light
sources with other light source information currently located in 49 CFR
Part 564.
DATES: Effective date: The final rule is effective September 1, 2008
with voluntary early compliance permitted immediately. The
incorporation by reference of certain publications listed in the rule
is approved by the Director of the Federal Register as of September 1,
2008. Petitions for reconsideration: Petitions for reconsideration of
this final rule must be received not later than January 18, 2008.
ADDRESSES: Any petitions for reconsideration should refer to the docket
number of this document and be submitted to: Administrator, National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Ground Floor, Docket Room W12-140, Washington, DC 20590.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: For technical issues: David Hines,
Office of Crash Avoidance Standards (NVS-121), NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, DC 20590 (Telephone: (202) 493-
0245) (Fax: (202) 366-7002).
For legal issues: Ari Scott, Office of the Chief Counsel (NCC-112),
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, DC 20590
(Telephone: (202) 366-2992) (Fax: (202) 366-3820).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Table of Contents
I. Executive Summary
II. Background
A. Historical Overview of the Standard
B. The Need for an Administrative Rewrite of the Standard
III. December 2005 Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (NPRM) and Public
Comments
A. The NPRM
B. Discussion of Public Comments Received in Response to the
NPRM and Their Impact on the Final Rule
(a) 49 CFR Part 564
(b) 49 CFR Part 571.108
1. Administrative Considerations
2. Omissions, Typographical Errors, and Inconsistent Language
3. Organization of the Standard
4. Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the Rewrite
5. Suggestions Within the Scope of the Rewrite
IV. The Final Rule
A. 49 CFR Part 564
B. 49 CFR Part 571.108
V. Benefits and Costs
VI. Rulemaking Analyses and Notices
Appendix A: FMVSS No. 108 Rewrite Cross Reference
Appendix B: FMVSS No. 108 Rewrite Cross Reference
Appendix C: List of figures
I. Executive Summary
After carefully considering the public comments on its December
2005 proposal, the agency has decided to adopt a final rule amending
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 108, Lamps,
Reflective Devices, and Associated Equipment, by reorganizing the
regulatory text and directly importing requirements from applicable SAE
standards currently incorporated by reference into the regulatory text.
In doing so, the agency has decided to make some changes from the NPRM,
including modifying the organizational structure of the standard,
relocating test procedures and performance requirements from attached
tables to the regulatory text, and incorporating the substance of
several additional interpretations into the standard. In addition,
three SAE documents that the agency had proposed to continue to be
incorporated by reference in the NPRM have now been integrated into the
regulatory text, and the location of marking requirements within the
standard has been further consolidated.
Consistent with the NPRM, the final rule also establishes an
Appendix C in 49 CFR Part 564, Replaceable Light Source Information, as
a repository for dimensional and electrical information associated with
standardized sealed beam headlamps that currently resides in figures in
FMVSS No. 108.
These modifications have furthered the objective of this rewrite by
increasing clarity as follows: (1) Making requirements easier to find
and comprehend; (2) presenting performance requirements and test
procedures together through the inclusion of relevant provisions of
third-party documents (previously incorporated by reference) directly
into the regulatory text of the standard; and (3) updating Standard No.
108 to reflect significant letters of interpretation. The rewrite of
FMVSS No. 108 is considered administrative in nature because the
standard's existing requirements and obligations are not being
increased, decreased, or substantively modified. Accordingly, costs
associated with manufacturer compliance with Standard No. 108 are not
expected to change as a result of this regulatory action.
II. Background
A. Historical Overview of the Standard
On December 30, 2005, NHTSA published a notice of proposed
rulemaking \1\ (NPRM) to amend FMVSS No. 108, Lamps, Reflective
Devices, and Associated Equipment, by reorganizing the regulatory text
so that it provides a more straight-forward and logical presentation of
the applicable regulatory requirements. The initial version of FMVSS
No. 108 was adopted almost 40 years ago to increase motor vehicle
safety by establishing minimum requirements for vehicle lighting,
reflective devices, and associated equipment. In developing the
standard, NHTSA incorporated requirements from a number of industry
consensus standards, in particular SAE standards. At that time, motor
vehicle technologies were relatively simple, as compared to today's
designs. For example, motor vehicle headlighting systems were limited
to ones consisting of either two
[[Page 68235]]
7-inch or four 5\3/4\-inch round sealed beam units. During the ensuing
years, a number of rectangular sealed beam units, replaceable bulb
headlamps, and integral beam headlamps were developed, and FMVSS No.
108 was amended to permit the use of these new technologies. Later, the
standard was further amended to add requirements for high-mounted stop
lamps, side marker lamps, and side reflex reflectors, to allow for
daytime running lamps, and to address the conspicuity needs of large
vehicles.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 70 Fr 77454, (Dec. 30, 2005) (Docket No. NHTSA-2006-23634-
3).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
However, such amendments were made on an ad hoc basis, which, over
time, resulted in a patchwork organization for FMVSS No. 108.
Furthermore, when regulated parties had questions regarding how FMVSS
No. 108 should be interpreted (in many instances due to rapid advances
in lighting technology not fully anticipated or addressed by the
existing regulatory text), they submitted requests for interpretation
to the agency on specific issues. Since its promulgation, a large
number of interpretation letters have been issued pertaining to
Standard No. 108. Thus, in its current state, FMVSS No. 108 has
requirements that are located directly in its regulatory text, located
in referenced and sub-referenced SAE standards, and elaborated upon in
various agency interpretations. Since its inception, NHTSA has never
completed a thorough reorganization of the entire standard.
B. The Need for an Administrative Rewrite of the Standard
Due to concerns about being able to locate requirements efficiently
and the apparent lack of clarity associated with the standard (as
demonstrated by an abundance of letters of interpretation), we decided
to undertake an administrative rewrite of FMVSS No. 108. The agency has
also received complaints that the current text of FMVSS No. 108
sometimes results in confusion, in part due to the way it is organized.
Regulated parties have stated that the current organization of FMVSS
No. 108 makes it difficult for them, at times, to be fully confident
that all applicable requirements have been identified and satisfied
prior to certification to the standard. Also, numerous interested
parties have stated that the large number of interpretations that have
been issued by the agency regarding Standard No. 108 make it difficult
to locate and identify the agency's position on relevant issues. In
addition, regulated parties have conveyed to the agency in recent years
that some of the older versions of SAE standards incorporated by
reference into FMVSS No. 108 are no longer readily available from SAE
International.
Throughout the past few decades, SAE has published revised,
successor versions, with differing requirements, for many of their
standards incorporated by reference into FMVSS No. 108. This appears to
sometimes cause confusion on the part of regulated parties who,
mistakenly, may believe that the most recent version of a SAE standard
represents the regulatory requirement. The agency believes that
interested parties should have easy access to the requirements of the
standard, and, therefore, we believe there is value in publishing,
without substantive change, applicable requirements that are currently
contained in third-party documents directly within FMVSS No. 108
itself. The same logic applies to our decision to include the results
of relevant legal interpretations in the standard. Furthermore, several
provisions currently in Standard No. 108 refer to regulatory inception
dates that are several years in the past, so the agency is eliminating
text citing such past dates.
For these reasons, we believe that the benefits of an
administrative rewrite of FMVSS No. 108 (e.g., making the standard more
navigable and thereby facilitating compliance with existing
requirements) justify the necessary commitment of agency resources to
accomplish this reorganization of the standard.
III. December 2005 Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (NPRM) and Public
Comments
A. The NPRM
As noted above, NHTSA published a NPRM on December 30, 2005 that
proposed to reorganize FMVSS No. 108 to improve the clarity of the
standard's requirements, thereby increasing its utility for interested
parties. This administrative rewrite attempted to make the standard
more understandable by adopting a simplified numbering scheme, to
improve organization by grouping related materials in a more logical
and consistent sequence, and to reduce reliance on references to third-
party documents. As proposed, the reorganized standard progressed from
vehicle-level requirements to device-level requirements, beginning with
the most common requirements and then proceeding to exceptions.
The NPRM also proposed to move figures addressing sealed beam
headlamps that are currently included in FMVSS No. 108 and SAE J1383
APR85, Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps, into 49
CFR Part 564, Replaceable Light Source Information, as a newly created
Appendix C. This modification would be consistent with the current
practice of placing replaceable light source information in Part 564.
The title of Part 564 would also be changed to ``Replaceable Light
Source and Sealed Beam Headlamp Information'' to reflect the addition
of the sealed beam headlamp content.
Whereas Standard No. 108 currently references approximately 35
different SAE documents in nearly 100 separate instances, the NPRM
proposed reducing that number to eight documents, which were ones
believed not to be routinely used by regulated parties. Accordingly,
the NPRM proposed to incorporate the content of these frequently used
SAE documents directly into the regulatory text and/or attached tables
of Standard No. 108.
The proposed tables included Table I, which listed the required
lamps and reflective devices for the various vehicles regulated by
FMVSS No. 108. The number of required lamps and reflective devices,
their color, their mounting locations and height above the road
surface, and their manner of activation were included in Table I, which
resembles an expanded version of Tables I through IV of the current
FMVSS No. 108. Table II detailed the requirements for the four
different kinds of headlighting systems permitted by the standard.
Table III contained the conspicuity system requirements for large
trucks and trailers, while Tables IV and V provided, respectively,
effective projected luminous lens area requirements and visibility
requirements. Tables VI through XII and XIV through XX listed
photometric requirements for individual lamp types. Table XIII detailed
the target locations for license plate lamp photometry. Table XXI
contained test procedures and performance requirements for all
associated devices. Finally Tables XXII and XXIII contained non-
photometry test procedures and performance requirements for all lamps,
reflective devices, replaceable light sources, and vehicle headlamp
aiming devices (VHAD). In addition, several new figures were included
to clarify some of the application requirements for conspicuity
systems.
From a regulatory perspective, it was the agency's intention, as
expressed in the NPRM, that the administrative rewrite of Standard No.
108 would neither result in any current obligation being diminished,
nor any new obligation being imposed. In other words, the substantive
requirements are identical to those of the current version
[[Page 68236]]
of FMVSS No. 108, including incorporated documents. Therefore, we do
not believe that vehicle manufacturers and lighting manufacturers would
have to make any changes to their respective products or production
processes if the NPRM were made final.
B. Public Comments Received in Response to the NPRM
The agency received comments from twenty seven entities in response
to the December 2005 NPRM, which were submitted by 11 lamp or lamp
component manufacturers, 11 manufacturer or user associations, three
vehicle manufacturers, and two test organizations. Commenters included:
Truck Manufacturers Association (TMA), Motorcycle Industry Council
(MIC), Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd., (Koito), Truck Trailer
Manufacturers Association (TTMA), General Electric Automotive Plastics
(GE-Plastics), General Motors North America (GM), Specialty Equipment
Market Association (SEMA), Grote Industries, L.L.C., (Grote),
Innovative Lighting, Inc., Calcoast Industrial Testing Laboratory
(Calcoast), General Electric Automotive Lighting (GE), Valeo Sylvania,
L.L.C. (VS), Guide Corporation (Guide), Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers (AAM), 3M Traffic Safety Systems (3M), Valeo Lighting
Systems (Valeo), Association of International Automobile Manufacturers
(AIAM), Owner-Operator Independent Drivers Association, Inc. (OOIDA),
Atlas Material Testing Solutions (Atlas), American Trucking
Associations, Inc. (ATA), Honda Motor Co., LTD. (Honda), Nissan North
America, Inc., (Nissan), and Bayer Material Science, L.L.C., (Bayer). A
joint response was submitted by Motor and Equipment Manufacturers
Association (MEMA), Transportation Safety Equipment Institute (TSEI),
and Motor Vehicle Lighting Council (MVLC), collectively the
Associations (ASSN). Several months after the comment closing date the
Associations submitted a supplementary response which was shortly
followed by another supplementary response in conjunction with the
Alliance (AAM/ASSN). All comments are available in Docket No. NHTSA-
2006-23634 and were considered in the promulgation of this final rule.
The comments about the NPRM that we received can be divided into
five general categories: (1) Administrative Considerations; (2)
Omissions, Typographical Errors, and Inconsistent Language; (3)
Organizational Structure; (4) Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the
Rewrite; and (5) Suggestions Within the Scope of the Rewrite. A summary
and analysis of each issue identified is provided below.
(a) 49 CFR Part 564
We received only one substantive comment concerning the relocation
of the sealed beam headlamp figures into a new Appendix C of Part 564
of this chapter. GE requested a separate NPRM for this purpose and that
the drawings that would be filed in Appendix C be made available for
review.
We stated in Summary of the Proposal in the NPRM that the final
rule adopting the rewrite of Standard No. 108 would occur concurrently
with the relocation of the sealed beam figures to Appendix C of Part
564. We also provided, at the end of that notice, a complete listing of
all the figures and where they currently reside in FMVSS No. 108 or SAE
J1383 APR85, which is incorporated by reference in the current version
of FMVSS No. 108, but we did not provide specific regulatory text for
Appendix C in the NPRM. Ample opportunity was provided for public
comment on this issue, so we are making the establishment of Appendix C
of Part 564 of this chapter and the transfer of the identified figures
to it part of the final rule. We believe that it would be beneficial
for the sealed beam drawings to be relocated as part of this
reorganization so that applicable requirements are transferred in an
accurate manner, thereby satisfying our commitment not to change the
existing requirements of the standard.
(b) 49 CFR 571.108
1. Administrative Considerations
Some of the comments submitted in response to the NPRM were not
focused upon the substance of the rewrite but rather addressed
administrative concerns. Several commenters requested statements of
reassurance that ``* * * no substantive changes from existing
requirements are intended,'' and ``* * * state that the existing body
of interpretations is still valid.'' On these points, we clarify as
follows. First we reiterate that the administrative rewrite, as
expressed in this final rule, does not make any substantive changes to
the requirements of Standard No. 108. Furthermore, as stated in the
NPRM, not all letters of interpretation were appropriate for inclusion
into the regulatory language of FMVSS No. 108. Generally, we excluded
those that we concluded did not add value to the regulatory text (i.e.,
one without broad applicability). However, all existing letters of
interpretation, whether or not they are specifically integrated into
the FMVSS No. 108 final rule, continue to reflect the legal opinion of
the agency unless they contradict the explicit regulatory text of the
standard or were overturned by subsequent interpretations.
AAM suggested that the final rule should not be mandatory until
September 1st, one year after publication of the final rule. We have
established September 1, 2008 as the mandatory compliance date, with
voluntary early compliance permitted immediately.
ATA, OOIDA, and TMA all expressed concern about conflicts between
FMVSS No. 108 and the regulations of the Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Administration (FMCSA). They requested that the rewrite of Standard No.
108 reconcile the differences that they perceive between it and the
regulations of the FMCSA.
The FMCSA has established regulations for lamps, reflective
devices, and associated equipment for commercial vehicles in use and a
few specialized types of commercial vehicles at time of manufacture.
The FMCSA made significant revisions to its lighting regulations in
2005 \2\ and some substantive differences do exist between the lighting
regulations of FMCSA and FMVSS No. 108. These differences may have the
potential to cause manufacturers of lamps and reflective devices that
fall under the jurisdiction of both NHTSA and FMCSA to pursue different
design, manufacturing, and compliance processes to satisfy the
regulations of both agencies. However, any attempt at reconciliation
here would be outside the scope of the rewrite process. Recently, FMCSA
issued a final rule \3\ in response to a petition for reconsideration
to its August 15, 2005 final rule, which resolved the differences
between its regulations and FMVSS No. 108, as interpreted in NHTSA's
July 28, 2005 interpretation to Mr. Clarke,\4\ concerning auxiliary
lamps mounted near identification lamps. Regulated parties may want to
consider other approaches to address the remaining differences between
FMVSS No. 108 and 49 CFR Part 393. One such approach could be to submit
rulemaking petitions to NHTSA and FMSCA requesting reconciliation of
the differences between FMVSS No. 108 and 49 CFR Part 393.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ See 49 CFR Part 393, as last revised by 70 FR 48008 August
15, 2005 (Docket No. FMCSA-1997-2364-44).
\3\ 72 CFR 32011 (June 11, 2007) (Docket No. FMCSA 1997-2364).
\4\ https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/GF002551.3.html.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 68237]]
2. Omissions, Typographical Errors, and Inconsistent Language
Given the complexity of the proposed administrative rewrite of
FMVSS No. 108, including the integration of the content of numerous SAE
standards incorporated by reference into the regulatory text, some
omissions and typographical errors occurred. Numerous comments were
received identifying such occurrences. Accordingly, we have amended the
regulatory text of the final rule to correct these errors.
Some respondents have noted instances where they believe that the
language of the regulatory text used in the NPRM was not faithful to
the language and intent of the current FMVSS No. 108. In many instances
where a claim of unfaithful language was made in the comments, the
agency adopted a conservative approach, choosing to revise the language
of the NPRM back to that of the original document in the final rule.
Where such a revision was not made, we have stated our reasons for that
decision.
Two rather significant instances where contradictory regulatory
language was found to exist in the current version of FMVSS No. 108 and
its incorporated documents are discussed here. One has to do with the
appropriate photometric requirement for a specific type of replaceable
bulb headlamp and is discussed in detail in the section devoted to
Table II. The other concerns the ratio between the stop lamp function
and the taillamp function in a lamp where those functions are optically
combined. The discussion related to Table IX contains an explanation of
this issue. Both instances bolster our opinion that regulatory
requirements should be stated once and only once in a document. Neither
instance has ever generated an interpretation request nor did many
respondents raise either issue in their comments to the docket. This
reinforces our belief that, notwithstanding the existence of ambiguous
regulatory language, the intent of the specific requirements was clear.
Because correction of either situation would require a substantive
change to FMVSS No. 108, we have decided to refrain from addressing
these examples now. However, we may issue a notice of correction in the
near future to address what we believe are mistakes and inconsistencies
that have existed for some time in Standard No. 108.
3. Organization of the Standard
The organizational structure of the reorganized standard, as
presented in the NPRM, progressed from vehicle-level requirements to
device-level requirements, beginning with the most common requirements
and then proceeding to exceptions. Requirements in the rewrite of FMVSS
No. 108 are consolidated into dedicated paragraphs. Paragraphs S1
through S4 were organized in the same manner as the present standard.
S4, Definitions, was expanded to incorporate relevant definitions from
the applicable SAE standards previously incorporated as part of
Standard No. 108. Paragraph S5 addressed the remaining references to
SAE standards. Vehicle-level requirements were located in paragraph S6,
including requirements by vehicle type. Following that, requirements
were organized with dedicated sections for each type of lamp and
reflective device, beginning with signal lamps, reflective devices and
associated equipment under paragraph S7, and headlamp and headlighting
requirements under paragraphs S8 through S13, and S16 through S18.
Paragraph S14 addressed aimability performance requirements, while
paragraph S15 contained requirements for replaceable light sources
(including references to Part 564). In order to make requirements
easier to find, a Table of Contents was added as an appendix to the
standard.
The most detailed comments about the organizational structure of
the standard were those in the supplementary response from the ASSN/
AAM, which recommended a significantly different organizational
structure that would divide the content of FMVSS No. 108 into four
sections. Under the ASSN/AAM structure, the first section would contain
general and specific lamp requirements, and the second section would
consist of Tables I, II, III, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI, XII, XIV, XV,
XVI (split into three separate tables), XVII, XVIII, XIX, and XX.
However, there would be some format changes to lamp photometry tables
and the addition of graphical illustrations of photometric test points.
These commenters similarly suggested three new tables that would
graphically illustrate the required photometric test points, lines, and
areas associated with upper beam headlamps, lower beam mechanically
aimed headlamps, and lower beam visually/optically aimed headlamps. The
third section would contain all the figures of the NPRM as well as
Table XIII, License Plate Lamp Target Locations, redesigned as Figure
19. The fourth section would be subdivided into five annexes which
would contain photometric test procedures and the physical test
procedures of Tables XXI, XXII, and XXIII.
ASSN/AAM also suggested dividing Table I into five separate tables:
one for vehicles less than 80 in (2032 mm) in overall width, another
for vehicles 80 in (2032 mm) or more in overall width, one for
trailers, one for motorcycles, and one for school buses. The activation
requirements would be removed from these tables and located in a new
paragraph titled ``Electrical.'' Tables IV and V covering projected
luminous lens area and visibility would be eliminated and their
requirements dispersed to the applicable individual lamp sections.
These individual lamp sections would have a common format divided into
14 subsections representing specific requirements. An additional table
would be created that would contain all marking requirements.
In consideration of the comments submitted by ASSN/AAM, we have
decided to make significant changes to the structure of the standard
presented in the NPRM. These structural changes include: (1) Relocating
test procedures and performance requirements that were primarily
contained in paragraph S6.8 and Tables XXI, XXII, and XXIII of the
proposal, to paragraph S14 of the final rule; (2) expanding and
standardizing the presentation of requirements in individual lamp and
reflective device sections of the final rule beyond that of the
proposal; (3) including the provisions from additional SAE documents,
incorporated by reference in the proposal, in the regulatory text of
the final rule; and (4) further consolidating the location of marking
requirements in the final rule beyond that of the proposal.
We believe there is value in adopting a structure in the final rule
that is easy for regulated parties to navigate. There were some aspects
of the ASSN/AAM recommended structure that we did not adopt due to our
effort to avoid redundancies, streamline the standard, and avoid adding
new material not currently contained in Standard No. 108, including
graphs, which could cause confusion. We believe that our approach in
modifying the structure of the NPRM will collectively provide the most
value to all end-users.
We have decided to adopt the ASSN/AAM recommendation regarding
reorganization of the layout of several photometry requirement tables
for reasons that follow. Standard No. 108 provides two alternative
methods for demonstrating the photometric compliance of turn signal
lamps, taillamps, stop lamps, backup lamps, parking lamps, and high-
mounted stop lamps. For these lamps compliance can
[[Page 68238]]
be demonstrated by achieving a minimum photometric intensity at each of
18 to 22 discrete test points distributed within a pattern about
20[deg] high and 40[deg] wide centered about the H-V axis.\5\
Alternatively, FMVSS No. 108 also permits these specific lamps to
demonstrate compliance by meeting a minimum photometric intensity for
groups of these test points. Individual test points in proximity to
each other are organized into groups consisting of from two to six
points. The minimum photometric intensity requirement of each group is
approximately (but not always exactly) the arithmetic sum of the
minimum photometric intensities of all included points. This allows a
lamp where one or more test point(s) in a group do not meet their
individual minimum values to be compliant provided the remaining test
points in the group exceed their minimum values by enough to allow the
group total to exceed the group requirement.\6\ Turn signal lamps,
taillamps, stop lamps, and parking lamps have five groups of test
points; while backup lamps have six groups, and high-mounted stop lamps
have four groups.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\5\ The pattern is wider for backup lamps and tighter for high
mounted stop lamps.
\6\ No individual test point photometric intensity can fall
below 60% of the point requirement when the group photometric method
is used. In addition, photometric values between adjacent test
points are regulated.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tables VI, VII, VIII, IX, XII, XV, which detail photometry
requirements for those lamps permitted to use both the individual test
point and the grouped test point compliance methods, are formatted such
that test points are organized in group order. Progressing from left to
right horizontally, each test point group is identified by number, and
then the individual test points included within that group are
identified by their vertical and horizontal positions. Next, the
minimum photometric intensity for each individual test point is shown,
and finally, at the right end, the group minimum photometric intensity
is shown.
In contrast, the photometry requirements tables suggested by the
ASSN/AAM, and endorsed by Calcoast, organize the lamp test points in a
vertical, then horizontal, manner that requires the user to search for
each point to include in a group and then consult a sub-table to find
out the minimum photometric requirement for that group. We find this
suggested approach unnecessarily complex and prone to increasing, not
decreasing, the possibility of error in determining photometric
requirements. Therefore, we have decided to retain the format of the
photometric tables as presented in the NPRM with one simplification,
which was to locate the horizontal and vertical test point positions in
the same relative positions in each table.
Calcoast suggested, and we agree, that the horizontal test point
positions and the vertical test point positions should always appear in
the same columns. In our earlier proposal, this was not the case, and
we have made modifications consistent with Calcoast's suggestion. The
final rule designates the horizontal test point positions in a column
to the left of a column that designates the corresponding vertical test
point positions.
Nissan suggested that those lamps that are permitted to demonstrate
photometric compliance by either the individual test point method or
the grouped test point method have the required photometric intensity
values for each individual test point reduced to 60 percent of the
current requirement and only allow use of the grouped test point
method. We did not adopt this suggestion because it would have reduced
the number of compliance methods available to manufacturers, a
substantive change beyond the scope of this administrative rewrite.
The original response from the ASSN, as well as the comments from
Guide, suggested abandoning Tables XVIII and XIX and incorporating
headlamp photometry requirements in a series of tables similar to the
current FMVSS No. 108. We were not persuaded that more headlamp
photometric tables would add value to the standard. Upper beam headlamp
requirements are not related to whether a headlamp is mechanically or
visually/optically aimed and six beam patterns adequately cover all
headlamps. Many photometric test points are common to all lower beam
headlamps. Tables XVIII and XIX present all required beam patterns
(except for certain motorcycle headlamps) in a clear and concise
format. Table II directs the user to the appropriate beam pattern in
Tables XVIII and XIX. We retained this format for headlamp photometry
requirements in the final rule.
Several commenters mentioned inconsistent use of a ``no
requirement'' indicator where a test point appears in a photometry
requirements table but there is no value required at that point. Our
proposal used both a blank space and a N.R. notation. In the final
rule, we have adopted a consistent indicator that there is no
requirement for a test point. A dashed line (-) is used exclusively for
this purpose in photometry requirements tables.
Commenters generally favored the use of tables in the NPRM for
presenting performance requirements. However, Nissan, Grote, and TTMA
all commented that Table I was too lengthy and should be separated into
several sections based on common content. The Alliance suggested
splitting Table XXIII into three separate tables because it contains
tests for three distinctive items: (1) Headlamps, (2) vehicle headlamp
aiming devices (VHAD), and (3) replaceable light sources. The
differentiation of content in Table II of the NPRM was mentioned as
being a particularly appropriate method of providing distinction.
Several commenters, including ASSN/AAM and Grote, noted that tables
containing significant amounts of text, such as the test requirements
in Tables XXI, XXII, and XXIII, would be difficult to use because of
lengthy passages that contain several sentences and express several
unique test conditions or requirements. We agree with these comments.
The tabular format is best suited to displaying quantitative values or
short textual requirements. In the final rule, we moved virtually all
test procedures and performance requirements to S14, the last section
of the standard. Specifically, the content of Table XXI of the NPRM has
been moved to S14.9, Associated Equipment Physical Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements, the content of Table XXII of the NPRM has
been moved to S14.3, Motorcycle Headlamp Out of Focus Test Procedures
and Performance Requirements, S14.4, General Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements (consisting of the color test and plastic
optical materials test), and S14.5, Signal Lamp and Reflective Device
Test Procedures and Performance Requirements. In addition, the content
of Table XXIII of the NPRM has been moved to S14.6, Headlamp Physical
Test Procedures and Performance Requirements, S14.7, Replaceable Light
Source Physical Test Procedures and Performance Requirements, and
S14.8, Vehicle Headlamp Aiming Devices (VHAD) Physical Test Procedures
and Performance Requirements.
General test procedures and performance requirements that were
located in S6.8 of the NPRM have been placed in S14.1 of the final
rule. Similarly, the photometric test procedures of S6.8 of the NPRM
are now in S14.2 of the final rule.
In the final rule, we decided to split several of the tables into
shorter, more distinctive, sections and we completely revised the
content of Table III and Table XIII. Table I, Required Lamps and
[[Page 68239]]
Reflective Devices, is divided into three parts: (1) Table I-a for
passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses of
all widths; (2) Table I-b for trailers, and (3) Table I-c for
motorcycles. We decided upon sectioning Table I in this manner for
several reasons. One is user diversity. Organizations that manufacture
vehicles such as passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,
trucks, and buses typically do not also manufacture trailers or
motorcycles. Likewise, organizations that manufacture trailers
typically do not manufacture self propelled vehicles, and those that
manufacture motorcycles do not produce cars, trucks, or trailers. Some
commenters suggested separate sections for narrow vehicles (less than
2032 mm in width) and wide vehicles (those 2032 mm or wider). However,
several manufacturers produce both narrow and wide vehicles, sometimes
as different optional versions of the same vehicle, such as pickup
trucks.
Another consideration was commonality. Both narrow and wide
vehicles are required to be equipped with a headlighting system, turn
signal lamps, taillamps, stop lamps, side marker lamps, side and rear
reflex reflectors, backup lamps and license plate lamps. Narrow
vehicles are required to have parking lamps and high-mounted stop lamps
while wide vehicles are not. Similarly, wide vehicles must have
clearance and identification lamps which are not required on narrow
vehicles. This same distinction occurs between narrow and wide
trailers, for which common content significantly surpasses
differentiated content. Therefore, we have concluded that it is
unnecessary to section Table I by vehicle width.
We are retaining the title of the three sections of Table I as
Required Lamps and Reflective Devices, even though one of the lamps
listed in Table I-a, Daytime Running Lamp (DRL), is not a required
lamp. The heading above the DRL listing clearly describes it as being
permitted but not required. However, because the DRL, when installed,
is regulated in all attributes listed in Table I, Number and Color,
Mounting Location, Mounting Height, and Device Activation (unlike other
non-required lamps), the agency decided that Table I is the appropriate
location for it.
The three sections of Table IV, Effective Projected Luminous Lens
Area Requirements, are now identified as: (1) Table IV-a covering turn
signal and stop lamps; (2) Table IV-b for high-mounted stop lamps; and
(3) Table IV-c for school bus signal lamps. The four sections of Table
V, Visibility Requirements of Installed Lighting Devices, now include:
(1) Table V-a for backup lamps, high-mounted stop lamps, and school bus
signal lamps; (2) Table V-b which contains the lens area option for
turn signal lamps, stop lamps, taillamps, and parking lamps; (3) Table
V-c which has the luminous intensity option for turn signal lamps, stop
lamps, taillamps, and parking lamps; and (4) Table V-d that has older
alternative requirements for turn signal lamps, stop lamps, and
taillamps.
Table VI, Front Turn Signal Lamp Photometry Requirements, was split
into two sections in the final rule. Table VI-a contains the base front
turn signal lamp photometry requirements and also the values for 2\1/2\
times the base photometry requirements while Table IV-b contains values
for 2 times the base photometry requirements and 1 the base photometry
requirements
New Table XIII consisting of: (1) Table XIII-a, Motorcycle Turn
Signal Lamp Alternative Photometry Requirements, and (2) Table XIII-b,
Motor Driven Cycle Alternative Photometry Requirements, includes the
stop lamp requirements for certain motor driven cycles previously part
of Table IX in the NPRM, as well as alternative turn signal
requirements for motorcycles noted in paragraph S7.1.1.1 and S7.1.2.1
of the NPRM but not previously tabularized. The three sections of Table
XVI are now: (1) Table XVI-a, Reflex Reflector Photometry Requirements,
(2) Table XVI-b, Additional Photometry Requirements for Conspicuity
Reflex Reflectors, and (3) Table XVI-c, Retroreflective Sheeting
Photometry Requirements.
Table XIX has been split into Tables XIX-a, containing photometric
requirements for lower beam patterns LB1M, LB1V, LB2M, and LB2V. Table
XIX-b contains requirements for lower beam patterns LB3M, LB3V, LB4M,
and LB5M while Table XIX-c contains requirements for lower beam pattern
LB4V.
As mentioned previously, the ASSN/AAM response proposed a common,
templated organizational format for the individual lamp sections and
expansion of their content to include 14 subsections representing
specific requirements. The requirements that they suggested be included
in each section include: (1) Number, (2) color of light, (3)
arrangement, (4) position, (5) geometric visibility, (6) orientation,
(7) effective projected luminous lens area, (8) electrical, (9) tell
tale, (10) marking requirements, (11) other provisions, (12) plastic
materials, (13) photometry, and (14) physical tests. Implementing this
request presents a dilemma for several reasons. First, most of the
requirements suggested to be listed in individual lamp sections are
already stated in parts of Table I, Table IV, and Table V. Table I of
the NPRM is an expansion of Tables I, II, III, and IV of the current
version of Standard No. 108, tables which have been part of the
standard for decades. The agency rarely receives questions or
complaints about regulatory content contained in Tables I through IV,
but instead, they are often considered the most useful feature of the
current version. We received no comments, including the ASSN/AAM
submission, which suggested elimination of Table I.
We also believe that the suggestion of ASSN/AAM to remove the
activation requirements from Table I and place them all in a new
section titled ``Electrical'' was without merit. The activation
requirements of the various types of lamps, like the other categories
listed in Table I, are primarily vehicle-level requirements rather than
device-level requirements, and are best presented along with those
other requirements.
Table V of the NPRM is a restatement of Figures 19 and 20 of the
current version of Standard No. 108, which were added in a final rule
\7\ published on August 11, 2004 which promulgated the current
visibility requirements. The agency decided that it would not be
appropriate to disperse the visibility requirements of Table V (and
likewise the effective projected luminous lens area requirements of
Table IV) into individual lamp sections. The primary reason was that in
real world situations, many lamp functions are combined with other lamp
functions, very often optically combined. It is not unusual for a
vehicle to have a combination rear lamp where the taillamp, stop lamp,
and rear turn signal lamp functions are optically combined. The same
holds true for front turn signal lamps and parking lamps. The
presentation of visibility requirements for all regulated lamp
functions together in Table IV allows regulated parties to quickly
determine the appropriate requirements for such combination lamps and
perhaps aid the decision about which visibility alternative to use for
certification.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\7\ 69 FR 48805 (Aug. 11, 2004) (Docket No. 2004-18794-1).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The decision to leave Tables I, IV, and V intact in the final rule
means that adopting the ASSN/AAM template for individual lamp sections
would result in large scale duplication of requirements in Standard No.
108. Duplication of the same requirement in more than one location in a
regulatory document has the potential for
[[Page 68240]]
unintended consequences. We intended to avoid those consequences by
having each discrete requirement only stated once in Standard No.
108.\8\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\8\ See the discussions of Table II and Table IX for
explanations of existing duplicated requirements in the current
version of FMVSS No. 108.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Therefore, to be responsive to the request of ASSN/AAM concerning
the format of individual lamp sections while still maintaining the
integrity of the standard by having only a single statement of each
requirement, we have adopted the use of pointing statements. These
pointing statements appear in those subsections of each lamp section
where a requirement does exist but is stated in another location of the
standard. For instance, in paragraph S7.4 pertaining to side marker
lamps, subsections 7.4.1 Number, 7.4.2 Color of light, 7.4.3 Mounting
location, 7.4.4 Mounting height, and 7.4.5 Activation, all conclude
with the pointing statement ``See Tables I-a, I-b, and I-c.''
Similarly, S7.4.9 Markings points to S6.5 for details of the applicable
marking requirements. S7.4.6 Effective projected luminous lens area,
S7.4.7 Visibility, S7.4.8 Indicator, S7.4.10 Spacing to other lamps,
S7.4.11 Multiple compartment and multiple lamps, and S7.4.12 Ratio all
conclude with the term ``No requirement'' indicating a requirement for
those specific items of lamp performance does not exist in Standard No.
108.
The entire content of Table III of the NPRM, dealing with
conspicuity systems, was moved to paragraph S8.2 of the final rule. A
new Table III was created to serve as a compilation of pointing
statements directed to the locations within the final rule where
marking requirements reside. While some headlamp marking requirements
were relocated to paragraph S6.5 in the final rule, a number of other
marking requirements continue to be dispersed within the document. In
these cases, we have decided that the marking requirements are best
located near the specific items to which they apply. However, these
locations are all identified in Table III and consultation with this
table should lead the user to all applicable marking requirements.
Grote suggested that lengthy paragraphs of regulatory text be
simplified by splitting them into separately numbered sub-paragraphs,
particularly where the requirements were diverse. In a number of
instances, we have been able to create such separation. Regulatory
provisions (including renumbered paragraphs) where this has been done
include: S6.1.3, S6.1.4.2, S6.1.5.2, S6.2.6, S6.5.3.3, S6.5.3.4, S6.6,
S7.1.1.11, S7.1.1.12, S7.1.2.11, S7.1.2.12, S7.1.3, S7.2.11, S7.3.11,
S7.3.12, S7.3.15, S7.7.13, S7.7.15, S7.9.14, S8.2.1, S8.2.2.3, S9.3.4,
S9.8, S10.14.2, S10.17.1.1, S10.17.1.2, S10.17.1.3, S13, S14.1.4,
S14.2.1, S14.2.3, S14.2.4, S14.2.5, S14.4.1, S14.4.2, S14.5, S14.6,
S14.7, and S14.9. We have included the term ``split for clarity'' or
similar language, often parenthetically, numerous places in the
discussion of revisions to note where a section of text from the NPRM
was divided into several smaller sub-sections in the final rule but not
otherwise revised.
Guide submitted numerous suggestions for reorganizing the NPRM by
the reassignment of certain paragraphs within the organizational
framework of the NPRM. In several instances, the agency concluded that
the Guide suggestion proved to be a more appropriate location for a
paragraph than the location proposed in the NPRM. We have noted these
reassignments in our discussion (but without attribution to a Guide
suggestion in some cases). This has caused numerous changes in the
paragraph numbers throughout the regulatory text. Where a requirement
in the final rule was identified differently in the NPRM, we have
indicated the previous paragraph number in the revision summary.
A number of Guide's suggested reassignments were not adopted,
because we decided that the applicable textual provisions were already
situated in the most appropriate location. Again, we did not mention
every such rejection of Guide's suggested ordering or our reasoning for
such decisions. While we believe that the final rule's organizational
structure is the optimal choice, we recognize that it is not the only
choice. Often, some of the requirements of Standard No. 108 intermix
several attributes of lamps. Such an example is paragraph S7.11.2.1
which contains requirements for a DRL spaced near a turn signal lamp
(e.g., considerations for the actual separation distance, the luminous
intensity of both the DRL and the turn signal lamp, whether the DRL is
optically combined with a lower beam headlamp, and the activation
properties of both the DRL and turn signal lamp). Requirements such as
these do not fit neatly into a Mounting Location section or an
Activation section, and their essence would not survive dispersion of
the component requirements into these sections because of their
interdependence on several diverse attributes.
Another such situation involves the presentation of the
requirements for conspicuity systems. The content of Table III of the
NPRM was moved to paragraph S8.2 of the regulatory text to provide a
more comprehensible presentation format. An argument could be made that
this content should be split into two portions, one portion describing
how conspicuity material is spaced and arranged and another portion
describing where conspicuity material is to be placed on applicable
vehicles. If this apportionment were made, the first portion could be
considered a device-level requirement and the second portion a vehicle-
level requirement. Dispersing conspicuity system content in this way
may seem correct from an organizational perspective, but would be in
conflict with the goals of the rewrite of Standard No. 108 to present
the requirements in a straight forward and logical manner.
Our guiding principle in organizing the structure of the FMVSS No.
108 final rule was to attempt to locate each requirement in the place
where a user would be most likely to look for it. Accordingly, the
final rule has been organized with the following major sections:
S1 Scope.
S2 Purpose.
S3 Application.
S4 Definitions.
S5 References to SAE publications.
S6 Vehicle requirements.
S7 Signal lamp requirements.
S8 Reflective device requirements.
S9 Associated equipment requirements.
S10 Headlighting system requirements.
S11 Replaceable light source requirements.
S12 Headlamp concealment device requirements.
S13 Replaceable headlamp lens requirements.
S14 Physical and photometry test procedures and performance
requirements.
Tables
Table I Required Lamps and Reflective Devices.
Table II Headlighting Systems.
Table III Marking Requirements Location.
Table IV Effective Projected Luminous Lens Area Requirements.
Table V Visibility Requirements of Installed Lighting Devices.
Table VI Front Turn Signal Lamps Photometry Requirements.
Table VII Rear Turn Signal Lamps Photometry Requirements.
Table VIII Taillamp Photometry Requirements.
Table IX Stop Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table X Side Marker Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table XI Clearance and Identification Lamps Photometry
Requirements.
[[Page 68241]]
Table XII Backup Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table XIII-a Motorcycle Turn Signal Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements.
Table XIII-b Motor Driven Cycle Stop Lamp Alternative Photometry
Requirements.
Table XIV Parking Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table XV High-Mounted Stop Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table XVI Reflex Reflector and Retroreflective Sheeting
Photometry Requirements.
Table XVII School Bus Signal Lamp Photometry Requirements.
Table XVIII Headlamp Upper Beam Photometry Requirements.
Table XIX Headlamp Lower Beam Photometry Requirements.
Table XX Motorcycle Headlamp Photometry Requirements.
Figures
Figure 1 Chromaticity Diagram.
Figure 2 Flasher Performance Chart.
Figure 3 Replaceable Bulb Headlamp Aim Pads.
Figure 4 Headlamp Connector Setup.
Figure 5 Headlamp Abrasion Test Fixture.
Figure 6 Thermal Cycle Test Profile.
Figure 7 Dirt/Ambient Test Setup.
Figure 8 Replaceable Light Source Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 9 Environmental Test Profile.
Figure 10 Headlamp Replaceable Light Source Pressure Test Setup.
Figure 11 Trailer Conspicuity Treatment Examples.
Figure 12-1 Trailer Conspicuity Detail I.
Figure 12-2 Trailer Conspicuity Detail II.
Figure 13 Tractor Conspicuity Examples.
Figure 14 92x150 Headlamp Aim Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 15 Types G and H Headlamp Aim Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 16 Types A and E Headlamp Aim Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 17 Type B Headlamp Aim Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 18 Types C and D Headlamp Aim Deflection Test Setup.
Figure 19 License Plate Lamp Target Locations.
Figure 20 License Plate Lamp Measurement of Incident Light
Angle.
Figure 21 Vibration Test Machine.
Figure 22 Flasher Test Standard Circuit.
4. Suggestions Beyond the Scope of the Rewrite
Units of Measurements
Several comments were received concerning the way quantities in the
NPRM were measured, in terms of units. In some cases, measurements were
only in metric units, others in only English units, and still others
dual-dimensioned with both metric and English units. We note that this
situation currently exists within Standard No. 108 and the SAE
standards and Recommended Practices incorporated by reference. Such
perceived inconsistencies in the final rule are the result of the
agency's decision to make no substantive changes to Standard No. 108
during the rewrite process. This means stating measurements in their
original form consistent with their original source documents, instead
of attempting to convert and standardize the units.
ASSN preferred dual English/metric measurements for every quantity
and requested that both be provided in the final rule. The commenter
also preferred that linear measurements be expressed in both inches and
centimeters. AAM requested dual units with metric units followed by
English units and the use of direct conversions to establish those
measurements that were only stated in one unit in the NPRM. Nissan
argued that in recent rulemakings, the agency has consistently listed
measurements using metric units with English units referenced
parenthetically. Nissan preferred linear measurements that were in
millimeters, except for photometric test distances which should remain
dimensioned in meters. Conversely, Grote recommended that measurements
be expressed in inches followed by centimeters in parentheses,
believing that the vast majority of current users continue to use
English measurements. SEMA also supported dual units of measurements
with a preference for centimeters rather than millimeters. In
supplemental comments, AAM/ASSN requested all quantities in FMVSS No.
108 that are not now metric be converted to metric pursuant to
Executive Order 12770 (Metric Usage in Federal Government Programs).
The FMVSS No. 108 rewrite is considered an administrative action
because existing requirements and obligations are not being increased,
decreased, or substantively modified. The agency has decided that
converting values and providing dual-dimensions is outside the scope of
this final rule. The conversion process, in some cases, would result in
substantive change in the current requirements of the standard. This is
because such conversions rarely result in a whole number equivalent,
but more likely in an unwieldy value with more digits than the value it
was converted from. The converted unit may have a non-exact value
requiring it to be truncated after several digits. Such rounding may
have little effect on some attributes but significant effect on others.
An additional complication is that some currently dual-dimensioned
values in FMVSS No. 108 are not exact equivalents. For instance, the
air pressure required to be applied to the replaceable light source in
the replaceable light source pressure test is expressed as 70 KPa (10
psig). However, the English equivalent of 70 KPa is 10.152641661 psig
and the metric equivalent of 10 psig is 68.9475728 KPa. Thus, a user
may conclude that a replaceable light source may be compliant with the
standard if it withstands a pressure of 68.9475728 KPa and not 70 KPa.
Additionally, the comments received in response to the NPRM show
that users of FMVSS No. 108 do not have a consistent preference for a
particular approach regarding units of measurement. In consideration of
our principle not to change any existing requirements, as well as the
wide range of opinions on the best approach for dual-dimensioning, the
agency decided to present values consistent with the current standard
instead of choosing one of the suggested options.
Photometric Maps
As previously mentioned, the AAM/ASSN supplementary comments, the
ASSN initial comments, and the NAL comments recommend inclusion of a
number of new graphical maps that would show details of the
requirements for the various photometric test patterns. The signal lamp
maps would show the position of each individual test point and how
those points are combined into groups. The headlamp maps would show
individual test points, linear test elements, and zonal test elements.
In reviewing the suggested graphical maps, it was unclear which
test points were part of which zone. Furthermore, such maps are beyond
the scope of the administrative rewrite. In addition, there were no
compelling arguments presented addressing how their inclusion would
advance the goals of the rewrite. Adding such graphical maps would
provide redundant information, significantly increasing the risk of
potentially conflicting requirements, and likely generate numerous
interpretation requests, especially if users were confused by the new
graphs.
That is not to say that these types of illustrations have no value.
They seem particularly well suited for use by design and manufacturing
organizations use in their internal design standards or photometric
test procedures documents. Standard No. 108, like all Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards, strives to present regulatory requirements in
the clearest way possible. It is not intended to serve as an all-
inclusive working guide for designing, testing, or manufacturing lamps,
reflective devices, or associated equipment. NHTSA
[[Page 68242]]
anticipates that user organizations will carefully incorporate the
requirements of FMVSS No. 108 into their internal working documents.
Requests for New or Revised Definitions
Commenters requested inclusion in the final rule of numerous
definitions for specific terms. These include: ``center (of item),''
``fixed body panel,'' ``four lamp type headlamp,'' ``hazard warning
lamps,'' ``obstruction,'' ``rigid part of vehicle,'' ``separately
lighted areas,'' ``two lamp type headlamp,'' ``special tools,'' ``tools
ordinarily available,'' ``supplemental lamp,'' and ``auxiliary lamp.''
There was also a suggestion for a revised definition for the term
``color bleeding,'' alleging it could be mistaken for the term ``light
bleed.'' A suggestion was also submitted for addition of definitions of
all lamp types mentioned in the current version of FMVSS No. 108, with
the specific example of fog lamp.
In its initial submission, AAM suggested the final rule use the
term ``* * * light source optical centers * * *'' in place of the term
``* * * light sources * * *'' and the term ``* * * optical centers * *
*'' in place of the term ``* * * optical axes * * *'' as revisions that
would be technology-neutral in the specific case of a series wired
array of LEDs being considered a single light source per the January 5,
2006 letter of interpretation to AMECA.\9\ There were also suggestions
that the term ``lighted section'' be used exclusively and in place of
``multiple compartment'' and ``multiple lighted area.'' Adopting any of
these suggestions would have been a substantive action which would be
beyond the defined scope of this rewrite. For this reason we have not
adopted any of these suggested modifications in the final rule.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\9\ https://isearch.nhtsa.gov/files/Wolford.2.html.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Suggestions Within the Scope of the Rewrite
SAE Documents
A significant initiative of the FMVSS No. 108 rewrite was the
incorporation of requirements contained in SAE Standards and
Recommended Practices (currently incorporated by reference or sub-
reference) directly into the body of the standard. The current version
of Standard No. 108 relies heavily on the content of numerous SAE
documents. It contains over 100 references to some 35 different SAE
documents, many of which were issued in the 1960s. Some of these
documents are incorporated in their entirety, whereas only portions of
others are cited. The NPRM integrated much of the content of these SAE
document directly into the regulatory language, resulting in only eight
SAE documents continuing to be incorporated by reference.
Generally commenters supported this action. SEMA requested that all
referenced and sub-referenced SAE documents be included in the
regulatory text of the final rule. While total elimination of documents
incorporated by reference proved to be impractical, we did eliminate
references to three additional SAE documents in the final rule as
discussed below. We also restored a reference to SAE J567b, Bulb
Sockets, in S14.2.1.6.2 of the final rule based upon comments by
Calcoast. This reference exists in Footnotes 2 and 3, which follow
Table IV, of the current version of FMVSS No. 108, but was eliminated
in the NPRM. We agree with Calcoast that the exemption permitted in
these footnotes stating that bulbs not listed in SAE J573d, Lamp Bulbs
and Sealed Units, December 1968, are not required to use a socket that
conforms to the requirements of SAE J567b, Bulb Sockets, April 1964, is
needed in the final rule.
SAE J577, Vibration Test Machine, April 1964, has been replicated
as Figure 21, and all references to SAE J577 have been removed from the
final rule. SAE J823b, Flasher Test Equipment, April 1968, describes a
standard test circuit to be used in the performance testing of
vehicular hazard warning signal flashers and turn signal flashers. This
SAE standard also has specifications for power supplies used in these
tests and describes the circuit adjustments necessary to perform valid
tests. We have chosen to incorporate the content of SAE J823b into the
final rule. New Figure 22, Flasher Standard Test Circuit, provides the
test circuit schematic diagram from Figure 1 of SAE J823b. Paragraph
S14.9.3.1 of the final rule states requirements for circuit adjustments
applica